[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2025205940A1 - Resin composition, cured product, laminate, production method for cured product, production method for laminate, production method for semiconductor device, semiconductor device, and resin - Google Patents

Resin composition, cured product, laminate, production method for cured product, production method for laminate, production method for semiconductor device, semiconductor device, and resin

Info

Publication number
WO2025205940A1
WO2025205940A1 PCT/JP2025/012026 JP2025012026W WO2025205940A1 WO 2025205940 A1 WO2025205940 A1 WO 2025205940A1 JP 2025012026 W JP2025012026 W JP 2025012026W WO 2025205940 A1 WO2025205940 A1 WO 2025205940A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
group
formula
resin composition
resin
cured product
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Pending
Application number
PCT/JP2025/012026
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
敦靖 野崎
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Fujifilm Corp
Original Assignee
Fujifilm Corp
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Fujifilm Corp filed Critical Fujifilm Corp
Publication of WO2025205940A1 publication Critical patent/WO2025205940A1/en
Pending legal-status Critical Current
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical

Links

Classifications

    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B15/00Layered products comprising a layer of metal
    • B32B15/04Layered products comprising a layer of metal comprising metal as the main or only constituent of a layer, which is next to another layer of the same or of a different material
    • B32B15/08Layered products comprising a layer of metal comprising metal as the main or only constituent of a layer, which is next to another layer of the same or of a different material of synthetic resin
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08FMACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
    • C08F290/00Macromolecular compounds obtained by polymerising monomers on to polymers modified by introduction of aliphatic unsaturated end or side groups
    • C08F290/02Macromolecular compounds obtained by polymerising monomers on to polymers modified by introduction of aliphatic unsaturated end or side groups on to polymers modified by introduction of unsaturated end groups
    • C08F290/06Polymers provided for in subclass C08G
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08FMACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
    • C08F290/00Macromolecular compounds obtained by polymerising monomers on to polymers modified by introduction of aliphatic unsaturated end or side groups
    • C08F290/08Macromolecular compounds obtained by polymerising monomers on to polymers modified by introduction of aliphatic unsaturated end or side groups on to polymers modified by introduction of unsaturated side groups
    • C08F290/14Polymers provided for in subclass C08G
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08FMACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
    • C08F299/00Macromolecular compounds obtained by interreacting polymers involving only carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bond reactions, in the absence of non-macromolecular monomers
    • C08F299/02Macromolecular compounds obtained by interreacting polymers involving only carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bond reactions, in the absence of non-macromolecular monomers from unsaturated polycondensates
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08FMACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
    • C08F38/00Homopolymers and copolymers of compounds having one or more carbon-to-carbon triple bonds
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08GMACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED OTHERWISE THAN BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING UNSATURATED CARBON-TO-CARBON BONDS
    • C08G73/00Macromolecular compounds obtained by reactions forming a linkage containing nitrogen with or without oxygen or carbon in the main chain of the macromolecule, not provided for in groups C08G12/00 - C08G71/00
    • C08G73/06Polycondensates having nitrogen-containing heterocyclic rings in the main chain of the macromolecule
    • C08G73/10Polyimides; Polyester-imides; Polyamide-imides; Polyamide acids or similar polyimide precursors
    • C08G73/12Unsaturated polyimide precursors
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/025Non-macromolecular photopolymerisable compounds having carbon-to-carbon triple bonds, e.g. acetylenic compounds
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/027Non-macromolecular photopolymerisable compounds having carbon-to-carbon double bonds, e.g. ethylenic compounds
    • G03F7/032Non-macromolecular photopolymerisable compounds having carbon-to-carbon double bonds, e.g. ethylenic compounds with binders
    • G03F7/037Non-macromolecular photopolymerisable compounds having carbon-to-carbon double bonds, e.g. ethylenic compounds with binders the binders being polyamides or polyimides

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a resin composition, a cured product, a laminate, a method for producing a cured product, a method for producing a laminate, a method for producing a semiconductor device, a semiconductor device, and a resin.
  • heterocycle-containing polymers such as polyimides have excellent heat resistance and insulating properties, and are therefore used in a variety of applications.
  • examples of such applications include, but are not limited to, insulating films, sealing materials, or protective films for semiconductor devices used for packaging. They are also used as base films or coverlays for flexible substrates.
  • heterocycle-containing polymers such as polyimides are used in the form of resin compositions containing polyimides or polyimide precursors.
  • a resin composition is applied to a substrate by, for example, coating to form a photosensitive film, and then, if necessary, exposure, development, heating, etc. are carried out to form a cured product on the substrate.
  • the resin composition can be applied by a known coating method, etc., it can be said that the resin composition has excellent adaptability in manufacturing, for example, there is a high degree of freedom in designing the shape, size, application position, etc. of the applied resin composition when it is applied.
  • industrial application development of the above-mentioned resin composition is expected to become increasingly widespread.
  • Patent Document 1 describes a circuit board that includes a conductor that has been pre-formed to have a certain pattern, and a resin substrate that has been formed by transferring the conductor to the surface of a thermosetting resin and then curing the thermosetting resin, characterized in that the surface of the conductor and the surface of the resin substrate are flush with each other, and the thermosetting resin is in powder form.
  • the present invention aims to provide a resin composition that can give a cured product that has excellent adhesion to metals, a cured product obtained by curing the resin composition, a laminate including the cured product, a method for producing the cured product, a method for producing the laminate, a method for producing a semiconductor device that includes the method for producing the cured product, and a semiconductor device that includes the cured product.
  • Another object of the present invention is to provide a novel resin.
  • ⁇ 3> The resin composition according to ⁇ 1> or ⁇ 2>, wherein the resin is selected from the group consisting of polyimide and polybenzoxazole.
  • ⁇ 4> The resin composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 3>, wherein the alkynyl group is present in a side chain or at a terminal of a main chain of the resin.
  • ⁇ 6> The resin composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 5>, wherein the resin has an alkynyl group value of 0.01 to 1.0 mmol/g. ⁇ 7>
  • ⁇ 9> The resin composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 8>, wherein the resin contains a repeating unit represented by the following formula (1-1):
  • X1 represents an organic group having 4 or more carbon atoms
  • Y1 represents an organic group having 4 or more carbon atoms
  • R1 each independently represents a structure represented by formula (R-1) below
  • m represents an integer of 0 to 4
  • n represents an integer of 0 or more
  • n+m is an integer of 1 or more.
  • L 1 represents a linking group having a valence of a1+1
  • a 1 represents a polymerizable group
  • a1 represents an integer of 1 or more
  • * represents a bonding site with X 1 or Y 1 in formula (1-1).
  • X1 and Y1 in formula (1-1) each include a structure in which two or more hydrogen atoms have been removed from a structure represented by any one of the following formulas (V-1) to (V-4):
  • R 1 and X1 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or a halogenated alkyl group.
  • R 1 X2 and R 1 X3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and R 1 X2 and R 1 X3 may be bonded to form a ring structure.
  • ⁇ 16> The resin composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 15>, further comprising an azole compound and a silane coupling agent.
  • ⁇ 17> The resin composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 16>, containing a solvent having a boiling point of 100 to 260°C at 1 atmosphere.
  • ⁇ 18> The resin composition according to ⁇ 17>, wherein the content of the solvent having a boiling point of 100 to 260°C is 40 mass% or more relative to the total mass of the composition.
  • ⁇ 19> The resin composition according to ⁇ 17> or ⁇ 16>, comprising two or more solvents having a boiling point of 100 to 260°C.
  • ⁇ 20> The resin composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 19>, which is used for forming an interlayer insulating film for a rewiring layer.
  • ⁇ 21> A cured product obtained by curing the resin composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 20>.
  • ⁇ 22> A laminate comprising two or more layers made of the cured product according to ⁇ 21>, and a metal layer between any two adjacent layers made of the cured product.
  • ⁇ 23> A method for producing a cured product, comprising a film-forming step of applying the resin composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 20> onto a substrate to form a film.
  • ⁇ 24> The method for producing a cured product according to ⁇ 23>, comprising: an exposure step of selectively exposing the film to light; and a development step of developing the film with a developer to form a pattern.
  • a method for producing a laminate comprising the method for producing a cured product according to any one of ⁇ 23> to ⁇ 25>.
  • ⁇ 27> A method for producing a semiconductor device, comprising the method for producing a cured product according to any one of ⁇ 23> to ⁇ 25>.
  • a semiconductor device comprising the cured product according to ⁇ 21>.
  • X1 represents an organic group having 4 or more carbon atoms
  • Y1 represents an organic group having 4 or more carbon atoms
  • R1 each independently represents a structure represented by formula (R-1) below
  • m represents an integer of 0 to 4
  • n represents an integer of 0 or more
  • n+m is an integer of 1 or more.
  • L 1 represents a linking group having a valence of a1+1
  • a 1 represents a polymerizable group
  • a1 represents an integer of 1 or more
  • * represents a bonding site with X 1 or Y 1 in formula (1-1).
  • R 1 represents a divalent linking group
  • Z 1 represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkylene group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms or a silicon atom, when Z 1 is the alkylene group, n is 1
  • R 2 represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group, when Z 1 is the silicon atom, n is 3, and each R 2 independently represents a monovalent organic group
  • * represents a bonding site to another structure.
  • a resin composition that can give a cured product that has excellent adhesion to metals, a cured product obtained by curing the resin composition, a laminate that includes the cured product, a method for producing the cured product, a method for producing the laminate, a method for producing a semiconductor device that includes the method for producing the cured product, and a semiconductor device that includes the cured product.
  • the present invention also provides a novel resin.
  • a numerical range expressed using the symbol "to” means a range that includes the numerical values before and after "to” as the lower and upper limits, respectively.
  • the term “step” includes not only an independent step but also a step that cannot be clearly distinguished from other steps, so long as the intended effect of the step can be achieved.
  • groups (atomic groups) when a notation does not specify whether they are substituted or unsubstituted, it encompasses both groups (atomic groups) that have no substituents and groups (atomic groups) that have substituents.
  • alkyl group encompasses not only alkyl groups that have no substituents (unsubstituted alkyl groups) but also alkyl groups that have substituents (substituted alkyl groups).
  • exposure includes not only exposure using light but also exposure using particle beams such as electron beams and ion beams. Examples of light used for exposure include the bright line spectrum of a mercury lamp, far ultraviolet light typified by excimer lasers, extreme ultraviolet light (EUV light), X-rays, electron beams, and other actinic rays or radiation.
  • (meth)acrylate means both or either of “acrylate” and “methacrylate”
  • (meth)acrylic means both or either of “acrylic” and “methacrylic”
  • (meth)acryloyl means both or either of “acryloyl” and “methacryloyl”.
  • Me represents a methyl group
  • Et represents an ethyl group
  • Bu represents a butyl group
  • Ph represents a phenyl group.
  • total solids content refers to the total mass of all components of the composition excluding the solvent
  • solids concentration refers to the mass percentage of the components excluding the solvent relative to the total mass of the composition.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and number average molecular weight (Mn) are values measured using gel permeation chromatography (GPC) and are defined as polystyrene equivalent values.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and number average molecular weight (Mn) can be determined, for example, using an HLC-8220GPC (manufactured by Tosoh Corporation) and guard columns HZ-L, TSKgel Super HZM-M, TSKgel Super HZ4000, TSKgel Super HZ3000, and TSKgel Super HZ2000 (all manufactured by Tosoh Corporation) connected in series.
  • these molecular weights are measured using NMP (N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone) as the eluent.
  • NMP N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone
  • THF tetrahydrofuran
  • detection in GPC measurement is performed using a UV (ultraviolet) ray (ultraviolet) detector with a wavelength of 254 nm.
  • a third layer or element may be interposed between the reference layer and the other layer, and the reference layer and the other layer do not need to be in contact.
  • the direction in which layers are stacked on the substrate is referred to as "up,” or, if a resin composition layer is present, the direction from the substrate to the resin composition layer is referred to as “up,” and the opposite direction is referred to as “down.”
  • the "up" direction in this specification may differ from the vertical upward direction.
  • a composition may contain, as each component contained in the composition, two or more compounds corresponding to that component.
  • the content of each component in the composition means the total content of all compounds corresponding to that component.
  • the temperature is 23° C.
  • the atmospheric pressure is 101,325 Pa (1 atmosphere)
  • the relative humidity is 50% RH.
  • combinations of preferred embodiments are more preferred embodiments.
  • a resin selected from the group consisting of polyimide, polyimide precursor, polybenzoxazole, and polybenzoxazole precursor, which has an alkynyl group in which a hydrogen atom may be substituted with a monovalent substituent, and a polymerizable group will also be simply referred to as a "specific resin.”
  • the resin composition of the present invention is preferably used to form a photosensitive film that is subjected to exposure and development, and more preferably used to form a photosensitive film that is subjected to exposure and development using a developer containing an organic solvent.
  • the resin composition of the present invention can be used to form, for example, an insulating film for a semiconductor device, an interlayer insulating film for a rewiring layer, a stress buffer film, etc., and is preferably used to form an interlayer insulating film for a rewiring layer.
  • the resin composition of the present invention is preferably used to form a photosensitive film to be subjected to negative development.
  • negative development refers to development in which the unexposed areas are removed by development
  • positive development refers to development in which the exposed areas are removed by development.
  • the exposure method, the developer, and the development method for example, the exposure method described in the exposure step and the developer and development method described in the development step in the description of the method for producing a cured product described below can be used.
  • the resin composition of the present invention gives a cured product that has excellent adhesion to metals (preferably copper or copper-containing alloys).
  • metals preferably copper or copper-containing alloys.
  • the mechanism by which the above effects are obtained is unknown, but is speculated as follows.
  • the present inventors have found that when a cured product is formed using a resin composition so as to be in contact with metal (substrate, wiring, etc.), if moisture is contained in the cured product, the metal may be oxidized by the action of the moisture, and the adhesion between the cured product and the metal may be reduced.
  • the specific resin has a polymerizable group
  • a crosslinked structure is formed between the specific resins themselves or between the specific resin and a polymerizable compound, etc., described later, which inhibits water penetration, and therefore, due to a synergistic effect with the above-mentioned alkynyl group, it is thought that metal oxidation can be further inhibited.
  • the amount of water in the film can be reduced when the cured product is used, and therefore the dielectric loss tangent of the cured product also decreases. Furthermore, the action of moisture, halogen atoms, etc.
  • the resin in the cured product can accelerate decomposition of the resin main chain and corrosion of copper in the substrate, wiring, etc., resulting in the formation of voids between the metal and the cured product under high-temperature conditions, i.e., reduced insulation reliability.
  • the present inventors have found that when the resin has a polymerizable group and an alkynyl group, the resin has excellent insulation reliability. Although the mechanism by which the above effect is obtained is unknown, it is presumed that the alkynyl groups react with halogen ions or halogen compounds and moisture in the film, reducing these and thereby improving insulation reliability. In addition, it is believed that the occurrence of voids under high humidity conditions is also suppressed by the same mechanism as above.
  • Patent Document 1 does not describe any resin compositions containing resins that fall under the category of specific resins.
  • the resin composition of the present invention contains a resin (specific resin) selected from the group consisting of polyimide, polyimide precursor, polybenzoxazole, and polybenzoxazole precursor, which has an alkynyl group in which a hydrogen atom may be substituted with a monovalent substituent, and a polymerizable group.
  • a resin selected from the group consisting of polyimide, polyimide precursor, polybenzoxazole, and polybenzoxazole precursor, which has an alkynyl group in which a hydrogen atom may be substituted with a monovalent substituent, and a polymerizable group.
  • the resin composition of the present invention preferably contains, as the specific resin, a resin selected from the group consisting of polyimide and polybenzoxazole, and more preferably contains polyimide from the viewpoint of suppressing shrinkage during curing, etc.
  • the specific resin is a polyimide
  • the specific resin preferably has a repeating unit represented by the formula (1-1) described below.
  • polyimide refers to a resin having a repeating unit containing an imide structure in the molecular chain, and is preferably a resin having a repeating unit containing an imide ring structure in the molecular chain.
  • the polyimide is a linear resin, the polyimide is preferably a resin having a repeating unit containing an imide structure in the main chain, and more preferably a resin having a repeating unit containing an imide ring structure in the main chain.
  • the term “main chain” refers to the relatively longest bonded chain in a resin molecule, and the term “side chain” refers to any other bonded chain.
  • the imide ring structure refers to a ring structure containing two carbon atoms and all of the nitrogen atoms in the imide structure as ring members.
  • the imide ring structure is preferably a five-membered ring.
  • the polyimide may be a so-called polyamideimide, which has an amide bond in the molecular chain in addition to the imide structure.
  • * represents a bonding site to another structure, preferably a bonding site to a hydrogen atom or a carbon atom, and more preferably a bonding site to a hydrogen atom.
  • the polyimide precursor refers to a resin that changes its chemical structure in response to an external stimulus to become a polyimide.
  • a resin that changes its chemical structure in response to heat to become a polyimide is preferred, and a resin that changes its chemical structure in response to heat to become a polyimide by forming a ring structure is more preferred.
  • the preferred embodiments of the polyimide to be formed are as described above.
  • polybenzoxazole refers to a resin having a repeating unit containing a benzoxazole structure in the molecular chain.
  • the specific resin preferably has a repeating unit represented by formula (X) described below.
  • the polybenzoxazole is a linear resin, the polybenzoxazole is preferably a resin having a repeating unit containing a benzoxazole structure in the main chain.
  • the benzoxazole structure refers to a structure represented by the following formula (PBO-1). In formula (PBO-1), * represents a bonding site to other structures.
  • the polybenzoxazole precursor refers to a resin that undergoes a change in chemical structure in response to an external stimulus to become polybenzoxazole.
  • a resin that undergoes a change in chemical structure in response to heat to become polybenzoxazole is preferred, and a resin that undergoes a ring-closing reaction in response to heat to form a ring structure to become polybenzoxazole is more preferred.
  • the preferred embodiments of the polybenzoxazole to be formed are as described above.
  • the specific resin contains an alkynyl group in which a hydrogen atom may be substituted with a monovalent substituent.
  • Examples of the substituent on the alkynyl group include a trialkylsilyl group.
  • the alkynyl group preferably has 2 to 20 carbon atoms (excluding carbon atoms contained in the substituent), and more preferably has 2 to 15 carbon atoms.
  • the alkynyl group may be linear, branched, cyclic, or a combination thereof, but is preferably linear.
  • the alkynyl group is preferably a group in which one hydrogen atom has been removed from an internal alkyne.
  • the internal alkyne refers to an alkyne in which both of the two carbon atoms forming the triple bond are bonded to groups other than hydrogen atoms, and is preferably an alkyne in which both of the two carbon atoms forming the triple bond are bonded to carbon atoms, or one of the carbon atoms is bonded to a silicon atom and the other is bonded to a carbon atom.
  • the alkynyl group may be a group containing a structure represented by the following formula (AL-1) or a group containing a structure represented by the following formula (AL-2), but is preferably a group containing a structure represented by the following formula (AL-1):
  • A-1 * represents a bonding site to another structure other than a hydrogen atom
  • # represents a bonding site to a hydrogen atom or another structure.
  • * represents a bonding site to another structure other than a hydrogen atom.
  • the alkynyl group is preferably present on a side chain or at the end of the main chain of the resin, and more preferably at the end of the main chain.
  • the presence of the alkynyl group in the side chain or at the end of the main chain further improves adhesion to metals. Because the side chain or the end of the main chain has higher mobility than the inside of the main chain, it is thought that the reactivity with water and halogen ions, which can cause corrosion of metals, is improved, making it easier to improve adhesion.
  • the specific resin preferably has a group represented by the following formula (B-1) as the alkynyl group-containing group.
  • the specific resin preferably has a group represented by the following formula (B-1) on a side chain or at a main chain terminal, more preferably at a main chain terminal.
  • R 1 represents a divalent linking group
  • Z 1 represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkylene group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms or a silicon atom, when Z 1 is the alkylene group, n is 1
  • R 2 represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group, when Z 1 is the silicon atom, n is 3, and each R 2 independently represents a monovalent organic group
  • * represents a bonding site to another structure.
  • R 1 is preferably a hydrocarbon group, more preferably an aromatic hydrocarbon group or an alkylene group.
  • the aromatic hydrocarbon group is preferably a phenylene group or a naphthylene group, more preferably a p-phenylene group or a 1,4-naphthylene group.
  • the alkylene group is preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • the alkylene group may be linear, branched, cyclic, or may have a structure represented by a combination of these, but is preferably linear.
  • Z1 is preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 25 carbon atoms or a silicon atom, and more preferably an alkylene group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms or a silicon atom.
  • the alkyl group in Z1 may be substituted with a known substituent such as a halogen atom or an aryl group.
  • R 2 is preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkoxy group, an aryl group or an aryloxy group, more preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • R2 is preferably an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryl group, or an aryloxy group, more preferably an alkyl group.
  • the alkyl group is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, more preferably a methyl group.
  • the content of the alkynyl group (alkynyl group value) relative to the total mass of the specific resin is preferably 0.01 to 1.0 mmol/g, more preferably 0.02 to 0.8 mmol/g, and even more preferably 0.05 to 0.6 mmol/g.
  • a (meth)acryloxy group, a (meth)acrylamide group, a vinylphenyl group, or a maleimide group is preferred, and a (meth)acryloyl group is more preferred from the viewpoint of reactivity.
  • a vinylphenyl group or a maleimide group is preferred from the viewpoint of reducing the dielectric loss tangent.
  • a hydrophobic vinylphenyl group is preferred.
  • the content of vinylphenyl groups in the resin in the composition can be calculated by the following method: The calculation method is similar for other polymerizable groups and radically polymerizable groups.
  • 1 g of the composition is added to 50 g of methanol or water to cause crystallization, and the specific resin is precipitated and filtered. The residue is recovered and dissolved in 3.0 g of THF (tetrahydrofuran), and this is added to 50 g of methanol or water to cause crystallization, filtered, and dried at 40°C for 20 hours.
  • 0.1 g of the specific resin dried above is dissolved in 0.9 g of deuterated dimethyl sulfoxide, and then measured by 1 H-NMR to calculate the amount of vinylphenyl groups.
  • R 1 and X1 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or a halogenated alkyl group.
  • R 1 X2 and R 1 X3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and R 1 X2 and R 1 X3 may be bonded to form a ring structure.
  • R 1 and X5 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or a halogenated alkyl group.
  • X 1 is a group containing a structure obtained by removing two or more hydrogen atoms from a structure represented by formula (V-1)
  • X 1 is preferably a group represented by the following formula (V-1-1).
  • * represents the bonding site to which X 1 in formula (1-1) bonds with the four carbonyl groups
  • n1 represents an integer of 0 to 5, and is also preferably an integer of 1 to 5.
  • the hydrogen atom in the following structure may be further substituted by R 1 in formula (1-1) or a known substituent such as a hydrocarbon group.
  • X 1 is a group containing a structure obtained by removing two or more hydrogen atoms from a structure represented by formula (V-3)
  • X 1 is preferably a group represented by formula (V-3-1) or formula (V-3-2) below, and from the viewpoint of reducing the dielectric constant of the cured product, a group represented by formula (V-3-2) is preferred.
  • * represents the bonding site to the four carbonyl groups to which X 1 in formula (1-1) is bonded.
  • R X2 and R X3 are as described above.
  • the hydrogen atoms in these structures may be further substituted with R 1 in formula (1-1) or a known substituent such as a hydrocarbon group.
  • X 1 is a group containing a structure in which two or more hydrogen atoms have been removed from a structure represented by formula (V-4), X 1 is preferably a group represented by the following formula (V-4-1).
  • * represents the bonding site of X1 in formula (1-1) with the four carbonyl groups
  • n1 represents an integer of 0 to 5.
  • the hydrogen atoms in formula (V-4-1) may be further substituted with R1 in formula (1-1) or known substituents such as hydrocarbon groups. Examples of known substituents include alkyl groups, halogenated alkyl groups, and halogen atoms. However, it is also preferable that none of the hydrogen atoms in the structure represented by (V-4-1) are substituted.
  • X 1 is a group containing a structure obtained by removing two or more hydrogen atoms from a structure represented by formula (V-5)
  • X 1 is preferably a group represented by the following formula (V-5-1).
  • * represents the bonding site to which X 1 in formula (1-1) bonds with the four carbonyl groups.
  • the hydrogen atom in formula (V-5-1) may be further substituted with R 1 in formula (1-1) or a known substituent such as a hydrocarbon group. Examples of the known substituent include an alkyl group, a halogenated alkyl group, and a halogen atom. However, it is also preferable that none of the hydrogen atoms in the structure represented by (V-5-1) are substituted.
  • X 1 is a group containing a structure obtained by removing two or more hydrogen atoms from a structure represented by formula (V-6), X 1 is preferably a group represented by the following formula (V-6-1).
  • * represents the bonding site to which X 1 in formula (1-1) bonds with the four carbonyl groups.
  • the hydrogen atoms in the following structure may be further substituted by R 1 in formula (1-1) or a known substituent such as a hydrocarbon group.
  • X 1 is a group containing a structure obtained by removing two or more hydrogen atoms from a structure represented by formula (V-7)
  • X 1 is preferably a group represented by the following formula (V-7-1).
  • * represents the bonding site to which X 1 in formula (1-1) bonds with the four carbonyl groups.
  • the hydrogen atoms in the following structure may be further substituted by R 1 in formula (1-1) or a known substituent such as a hydrocarbon group.
  • X 1 is a group containing a structure obtained by removing two or more hydrogen atoms from a structure represented by formula (V-8), X 1 is preferably a group represented by the following formula (V-8-1).
  • * represents the bonding site to the four carbonyl groups to which X 1 in formula (1-1) is bonded.
  • R X5 The definition and preferred embodiments of R X5 are as described above.
  • the hydrogen atom in the following structure may be further substituted by R 1 in formula (1-1) or a known substituent such as a hydrocarbon group.
  • X 1 is a group containing a structure obtained by removing two or more hydrogen atoms from a structure represented by formula (V-9)
  • X 1 is preferably a group represented by the following formula (V-9-1).
  • * represents the bonding site to which X 1 in formula (1-1) bonds with the four carbonyl groups.
  • the hydrogen atoms in the following structure may be further substituted by R 1 in formula (1-1) or a known substituent such as a hydrocarbon group.
  • X 1 is a group containing a structure obtained by removing two or more hydrogen atoms from a structure represented by formula (V-10)
  • X 1 is preferably a group represented by the following formula (V-10-1).
  • * represents the bonding site to which X 1 in formula (1-1) bonds with the four carbonyl groups.
  • the hydrogen atoms in the following structure may be further substituted with R 1 in formula (1-1), known substituents such as hydrocarbon groups, etc.
  • X1 does not contain an imide structure in its structure. Furthermore, it is preferable that X1 does not contain a urethane bond, a urea bond, or an amide bond in the structure.
  • R N is preferably a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group, more preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, and even more preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • X 1 does not contain an imide structure, a urethane bond, a urea bond, or an amide bond, and it is more preferable that X 1 does not contain an imide structure, a urethane bond, a urea bond, an amide bond, or an ester bond.
  • X1 may be a structure represented by the following formula (X-2), or a structure in which the hydrogen atom of the group represented by X2 or the hydrogen atom of the group represented by L3 in the structure represented by formula (X-2) is substituted with a group represented by R1 in formula (1-1).
  • X2 's each independently represent a trivalent linking group
  • L3 's represents a divalent linking group
  • * represents a bonding site to another structure.
  • X2 is exemplified by a linear or branched aliphatic group, a cyclic aliphatic group, and an aromatic group, or a group in which two or more of these are linked by a single bond or a linking group.
  • a linear aliphatic group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, a branched aliphatic group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, a cyclic aliphatic group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, an aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, or a group in which two or more of these are combined by a single bond or a linking group is preferred, and an aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, or a group in which two or more aromatic groups having 6 to 20 carbon atoms are combined by a single bond or a linking group is more preferred.
  • the alkylene group is preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and even more preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • the halogenated alkylene group is preferably a halogenated alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably a halogenated alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and even more preferably a halogenated alkylene group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • the halogen atom in the halogenated alkylene group include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom, with a fluorine atom being preferred.
  • the halogenated alkylene group may contain hydrogen atoms, or all of the hydrogen atoms may be substituted with halogen atoms, but it is preferred that all of the hydrogen atoms be substituted with halogen atoms.
  • Examples of preferred halogenated alkylene groups include a (ditrifluoromethyl)methylene group.
  • the arylene group is preferably a phenylene group or a naphthylene group, more preferably a phenylene group, and even more preferably a 1,3-phenylene group or a 1,4-phenylene group.
  • X2 is preferably derived from a tricarboxylic acid compound in which at least one carboxy group may be halogenated.
  • the halogenation is preferably chlorination.
  • a compound having three carboxy groups is called a tricarboxylic acid compound. Two of the three carboxy groups of the tricarboxylic acid compound may be converted into acid anhydrides.
  • the tricarboxylic acid compound which may be halogenated include branched aliphatic, cyclic aliphatic, and aromatic tricarboxylic acid compounds. These tricarboxylic acid compounds may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • X2 does not contain an imide structure in its structure. Furthermore, it is preferable that X2 does not contain a urethane bond, a urea bond, or an amide bond in the structure. Furthermore, it is preferable that X2 does not contain an ester bond in the structure. Among these, X2 preferably does not contain an imide structure, a urethane bond, a urea bond, or an amide bond, and more preferably does not contain an imide structure, a urethane bond, a urea bond, an amide bond, or an ester bond.
  • tricarboxylic acid compounds include 1,2,3-propanetricarboxylic acid, 1,3,5-pentanetricarboxylic acid, citric acid, trimellitic acid, 2,3,6-naphthalenetricarboxylic acid, and compounds in which phthalic acid (or phthalic anhydride) and benzoic acid are linked via a single bond, —O—, —CH 2 —, —C(CH 3 ) 2 —, —C(CF 3 ) 2 —, —SO 2 —, or a phenylene group.
  • These compounds may be compounds in which two carboxy groups are anhydrides (e.g., trimellitic anhydride), or may be compounds in which at least one carboxy group is halogenated (e.g., trimellitic anhydride chloride).
  • L3 is exemplified by a linear or branched aliphatic group, a cyclic aliphatic group, an aromatic group, or a group in which two or more of these are linked by a single bond or a linking group, and is preferably a linear aliphatic group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, a branched aliphatic group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, a cyclic aliphatic group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, an aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, or a group in which two or more of these are combined by a single bond or a linking group, and more preferably an aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, or a group in which two or more aromatic groups having 6 to 20 carbon atoms are combined by a single bond or a linking group.
  • the alkylene group is preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and even more preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • the halogenated alkylene group is preferably a halogenated alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably a halogenated alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and even more preferably a halogenated alkylene group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • the halogen atom in the halogenated alkylene group include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom, with a fluorine atom being preferred.
  • the halogenated alkylene group may contain hydrogen atoms, or all of the hydrogen atoms may be substituted with halogen atoms, but it is preferred that all of the hydrogen atoms be substituted with halogen atoms.
  • Examples of preferred halogenated alkylene groups include a (ditrifluoromethyl)methylene group.
  • the arylene group is preferably a phenylene group or a naphthylene group, more preferably a phenylene group, and even more preferably a 1,3-phenylene group or a 1,4-phenylene group.
  • Y 1 has 4 or more carbon atoms, preferably 4 to 50 carbon atoms, and more preferably 4 to 40 carbon atoms.
  • Y 1 may be a group containing a structure in which two or more hydrogen atoms have been removed from a structure represented by any one of formulas (V-1) to (V-10) above.
  • the organic group containing a structure in which two or more hydrogen atoms have been removed from a structure represented by any one of formulas (V-1) to (V-10) improves the chemical resistance and flatness of the cured product.
  • Y 1 is a group containing a structure obtained by removing two or more hydrogen atoms from the structure represented by formula (V-1)
  • Y 1 is preferably a group represented by the following formula (V-1-2):
  • * represents the bonding site to the two nitrogen atoms to which Y 1 in formula (1-1) is bonded
  • n1 represents an integer of 1 to 5.
  • the hydrogen atoms in the following structure may be further substituted by R 1 in formula (1-1) or a known substituent such as a hydrocarbon group.
  • Y 1 is a group containing a structure obtained by removing two or more hydrogen atoms from a structure represented by formula (V-2), Y 1 is preferably a group represented by formula (V-2-3) or formula (V-2-4) below, and from the viewpoint of reducing the dielectric constant of the cured product, a group represented by formula (V-2-4) is preferred.
  • L X1 represents a single bond or —O—
  • * represents the bonding site with the two nitrogen atoms to which Y 1 is bonded in formula (1-1).
  • preferred aspects of R X1 are as described above.
  • the hydrogen atoms in these structures may be further substituted with R 1 in formula (1-1) or a known substituent such as a hydrocarbon group.
  • Y 1 is a group containing a structure obtained by removing two or more hydrogen atoms from a structure represented by formula (V-3), Y 1 is preferably a group represented by formula (V-3-3) or formula (V-3-4) below, and from the viewpoint of reducing the dielectric constant of the cured product, a group represented by formula (V-3-3) is preferred.
  • * represents the bonding site with the two nitrogen atoms to which Y 1 in formula (1-1) is bonded.
  • R X2 and R X3 are as described above.
  • the hydrogen atoms in these structures may be further substituted with R 1 in formula (1-1) or a known substituent such as a hydrocarbon group.
  • Y 1 is a group containing a structure obtained by removing two or more hydrogen atoms from a structure represented by formula (V-4), Y 1 is preferably a group represented by formula (V-4-2) or formula (V-4-3) below.
  • * represents the bonding site with the two nitrogen atoms to which Y 1 in formula (1-1) is bonded
  • n1 represents an integer of 0 to 5.
  • An embodiment in which n1 is 0 is also one of the preferred embodiments of the present invention.
  • the hydrogen atom in the structure below may be further substituted with R 1 in formula (1-1) or a known substituent such as a hydrocarbon group. Examples of known substituents include an alkyl group, a halogenated alkyl group, and a halogen atom.
  • Y 1 is a group containing a structure obtained by removing two or more hydrogen atoms from the structure represented by formula (V-6), Y 1 is preferably a group represented by the following formula (V-6-2).
  • * represents the bonding site with the two nitrogen atoms to which Y 1 is bonded in formula (1-1).
  • the hydrogen atom in the following structure may be further substituted with R 1 in formula (1-1) or a known substituent such as a hydrocarbon group.
  • Y 1 is a group containing a structure obtained by removing two or more hydrogen atoms from a structure represented by formula (V-7)
  • Y 1 is preferably a group represented by the following formula (V-7-2).
  • * represents the bonding site with the two nitrogen atoms to which Y 1 is bonded in formula (1-1).
  • the hydrogen atoms in the following structure may be further substituted with R 1 in formula (1-1) or a known substituent such as a hydrocarbon group.
  • Y 1 is a group containing a structure obtained by removing two or more hydrogen atoms from a structure represented by formula (V-8), Y 1 is preferably a group represented by the following formula (V-8-2).
  • * represents the bonding site with the two nitrogen atoms to which Y 1 is bonded in formula (1-1).
  • the hydrogen atom in the following structure may be further substituted with R 1 in formula (1-1) or a known substituent such as a hydrocarbon group.
  • Y 1 is a group containing a structure obtained by removing two or more hydrogen atoms from a structure represented by formula (V-9)
  • Y 1 is preferably a group represented by the following formula (V-9-2).
  • * represents the bonding site with the two nitrogen atoms to which Y 1 is bonded in formula (1-1).
  • preferred aspects of R X5 are as described above.
  • the hydrogen atom in the following structure may be further substituted with R 1 in formula (1-1) or a known substituent such as a hydrocarbon group.
  • Y 1 is a group containing a structure obtained by removing two or more hydrogen atoms from a structure represented by formula (V-10)
  • Y 1 is preferably a group represented by the following formula (V-10-2).
  • * represents the bonding site with the two nitrogen atoms to which Y 1 is bonded in formula (1-1).
  • the hydrogen atom in the following structure may be further substituted with R 1 in formula (1-1) or a known substituent such as a hydrocarbon group.
  • Y 1 may be a group described in paragraphs 0042 to 0053 of JP-A No. 2023-003421. It is also preferable that Y1 does not contain an imide structure in its structure. It is also preferred that Y1 does not contain a urethane bond, a urea bond or an amide bond in the structure. Furthermore, it is preferable that Y1 does not contain an ester bond in the structure. Among these, Y1 preferably does not contain an imide structure, a urethane bond, a urea bond, or an amide bond, and more preferably does not contain an imide structure, a urethane bond, a urea bond, an amide bond, or an ester bond.
  • X1 and Y1 in formula (1-1) both contain a ring structure, and each is more preferably an organic group containing a structure obtained by removing two or more hydrogen atoms from a structure represented by any one of formulas (V-1) to (V-10) above, and even more preferably an organic group containing a structure obtained by removing two or more hydrogen atoms from a structure represented by any one of formulas (V-1) to (V-4) above.
  • Preferred aspects of these groups are as described above.
  • L1 is preferably a group represented by the following formula (L-2).
  • R N represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group, when a1 is 1, L x represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, when a1 is 2 or more, L x represents an a1+1-valent linking group, a1 represents an integer of 1 or more, * represents a bonding site to another structure in X1 or Y1 in formula (1-1), and # represents a bonding site to A1 in formula (R-1).
  • Z2 is preferably —O— or —C( ⁇ O)O—.
  • R N is preferably a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group, more preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or a phenyl group, and still more preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • Lx is preferably an alkylene group, more preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, still more preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably a methylene group.
  • Lx is preferably a hydrocarbon group, a heterocyclic group, or a group represented by a combination thereof, more preferably a saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, and even more preferably a saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 3 to 15 carbon atoms.
  • a1 has the same meaning as a1 in formula (R-1).
  • a 1 represents a polymerizable group.
  • Preferred embodiments of the polymerizable group are the same as the preferred embodiments of the polymerizable group contained in the specific resin described above.
  • a 1 in formula (R-1) is a vinylphenyl group and L 1 is a group represented by formula (L-2-1).
  • L and X2 represent a hydrocarbon group, and a1 represents an integer of 1 or more.
  • L and X2 are preferably saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon groups.
  • L X2 is preferably an alkylene group, more preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, still more preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably a methylene group.
  • a1 has the same meaning as a1 in formula (R-1).
  • a1 is preferably an integer of 1 to 4, and more preferably an integer of 1 or 2.
  • An embodiment in which a1 is 1 is also a preferred embodiment of the present invention.
  • the number of ester bonds contained in formula (R-1) is preferably 1 or 0.
  • n is preferably 1 or more, more preferably 1 or 2, and even more preferably 2.
  • R 21 is preferably a group represented by the following formula (B-2).
  • Z B1 represents —O—, —NR N —, —C( ⁇ O)O— or —C( ⁇ O)NR N —;
  • R N represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group;
  • R B1 represents a group represented by formula (B-1) above; and * represents a bonding site to the structure of X 21 or Y 21 in formula (1-2).
  • Z B1 is preferably —O—.
  • R N is preferably a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group, more preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or a phenyl group, and still more preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • preferred embodiments of R B1 are the same as the preferred embodiments of the group represented by formula (B-1) above.
  • n is preferably 1 or more, more preferably 1 or 2, and even more preferably 2.
  • the specific resin may contain a repeating unit represented by formula (4).
  • a repeating unit corresponding to the repeating unit represented by formula (1-1) or formula (1-2) does not correspond to the repeating unit represented by formula (4).
  • R 131 represents a divalent organic group
  • R 132 represents a tetravalent organic group.
  • R 131 represents a divalent organic group.
  • R 131 include groups described in paragraphs 0042 to 0053 of JP-A No. 2023-003421. These descriptions are incorporated herein by reference.
  • R 132 represents a tetravalent organic group. Examples of R 132 include groups described in paragraphs 0055 to 0057 of JP-A No. 2023-003421. These descriptions are incorporated herein by reference.
  • the content of the repeating unit represented by formula (1-1) relative to the total mass of the specific resin is preferably 30% by mass or more, more preferably 50% by mass or more, even more preferably 70% by mass or more, and particularly preferably 80% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit of the content is not particularly limited, and may be 100% by mass.
  • the total content of the repeating unit represented by formula (1-1), the repeating unit represented by formula (1-2), and the repeating unit represented by formula (4) relative to the total mass of the specific resin is preferably 50% by mass or more, more preferably 70% by mass or more, even more preferably 80% by mass or more, and particularly preferably 90% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit of this content is not particularly limited, and may be 100% by mass.
  • the specific resin when the specific resin contains a repeating unit represented by formula (1-1), it may contain two or more repeating units represented by formula (1-1) with different structures. In that case, it is preferable that the total amount is within the above range.
  • the specific resin when the specific resin contains a repeating unit represented by formula (1-2), it may contain two or more repeating units represented by formula (1-2) with different structures. In that case, it is preferable that the total amount is within the above range.
  • the specific resin contains a repeating unit represented by formula (4), it may contain two or more repeating units represented by formula (4) having different structures. In that case, it is preferable that the total amount is within the above range.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the specific resin is preferably 3,000 to 100,000.
  • the lower limit of the Mw is preferably 5,000 or more, more preferably 8,000 or more, and even more preferably 10,000 or more.
  • the upper limit of the Mw is preferably 100,000 or less, more preferably 50,000 or less, and even more preferably 30,000 or less.
  • the weight-average molecular weight is particularly preferably 5,000 or more.
  • the number average molecular weight (Mn) of the specific resin is preferably from 1,000 to 40,000, more preferably from 2,000 to 30,000, and even more preferably from 5,000 to 20,000.
  • the molecular weight dispersity of the specific resin is preferably 1.5 or more, more preferably 1.8 or more, and even more preferably 2.0 or more.
  • the upper limit of the molecular weight dispersity of the polyimide is not particularly specified, but is, for example, preferably 7.0 or less, more preferably 6.5 or less, even more preferably 6.0 or less, still more preferably 4.5 or less, and particularly preferably 3.0 or less.
  • the imidization rate (also referred to as "ring closure rate") of the polyimide is preferably 70% or more, more preferably 80% or more, and even more preferably 90% or more, from the viewpoint of the film strength, insulating properties, etc. of the resulting organic film.
  • the upper limit of the imidization rate is not particularly limited, and it is sufficient if it is 100% or less.
  • the content of the imide structure in the specific resin is preferably 3 mmol/g or less, more preferably 2.5 mmol/g or less.
  • the lower limit of the content is not particularly limited, but can be, for example, 0.5 mmol/g or more.
  • the imidization rate is measured, for example, by the following method.
  • the infrared absorption spectrum of the specific resin is measured, and the peak intensity P1 near 1377 cm ⁇ 1 , which is an absorption peak derived from the imide structure, is determined.
  • the specific resin is heat-treated at 350°C for 1 hour, and then the infrared absorption spectrum is measured again, and the peak intensity P2 near 1377 cm ⁇ 1 is determined.
  • the imidization rate of the specific resin can be calculated based on the following formula.
  • Imidization rate (%) (peak intensity P1/peak intensity P2) ⁇ 100
  • R 111 and R 115 are the same as the preferred embodiments of Y 1 and X 1 in formula (1-1) above, respectively, except that R 111 and R 115 may not have a bonding site with R 1 in formula (1-1), or may have a bonding site with the same group as R 21 in formula (1-2).
  • R 113 and R 114 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group.
  • the monovalent organic group preferably contains a linear or branched alkyl group, a cyclic alkyl group, an aromatic group, or a polyalkyleneoxy group. It is also preferable that at least one of R 113 and R 114 contains a polymerizable group, and more preferably that both contain polymerizable groups. It is also preferable that at least one of R 113 and R 114 contains two or more polymerizable groups.
  • the polymerizable group is a group capable of undergoing a crosslinking reaction by the action of heat, radicals, or the like, and is preferably a radically polymerizable group.
  • the polymerizable group examples include a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond, an alkoxymethyl group, a hydroxymethyl group, an acyloxymethyl group, an epoxy group, an oxetanyl group, a benzoxazolyl group, a blocked isocyanate group, and an amino group.
  • the radically polymerizable group contained in the polyimide precursor is preferably a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond.
  • Examples of the group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond include a vinyl group, an allyl group, an isoallyl group, a 2-methylallyl group, a group having an aromatic ring directly bonded to a vinyl group (for example, a vinylphenyl group), a (meth)acrylamide group, a (meth)acryloyloxy group, and a group represented by the following formula (III), and the group represented by the following formula (III) is preferred.
  • R 201 examples include alkylene groups such as ethylene, propylene, trimethylene, tetramethylene, pentamethylene, hexamethylene, octamethylene, and dodecamethylene, 1,2-butanediyl, 1,3-butanediyl, —CH 2 CH(OH)CH 2 —, and polyalkyleneoxy groups, of which alkylene groups such as ethylene and propylene, —CH 2 CH(OH)CH 2 —, cyclohexyl, and polyalkyleneoxy groups are more preferred, and alkylene groups such as ethylene and propylene, or polyalkyleneoxy groups are even more preferred.
  • alkylene groups such as ethylene, propylene, trimethylene, tetramethylene, pentamethylene, hexamethylene, octamethylene, and dodecamethylene, 1,2-butanediyl, 1,3-butanediyl, —CH 2 CH(OH)CH 2 —, and polyalky
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkylene group (including the number of carbon atoms in the substituent when the alkylene group has a substituent) is preferably 2 or more, more preferably 2 to 10, even more preferably 2 to 6, still more preferably 2 to 5, still more preferably 2 to 4, still more preferably 2 or 3, and particularly preferably 2.
  • the alkylene group may have a substituent, and preferred examples of the substituent include an alkyl group, an aryl group, and a halogen atom.
  • the number of alkyleneoxy groups contained in the polyalkyleneoxy group (the number of repeating polyalkyleneoxy groups) is preferably 2 to 20, more preferably 2 to 10, and even more preferably 2 to 6.
  • a polyethyleneoxy group, a polypropyleneoxy group, a polytrimethyleneoxy group, a polytetramethyleneoxy group, or a group in which a plurality of ethyleneoxy groups and a plurality of propyleneoxy groups are bonded is preferred, a polyethyleneoxy group or a polypropyleneoxy group is more preferred, and a polyethyleneoxy group is even more preferred.
  • the ethyleneoxy groups and the propyleneoxy groups may be arranged randomly, may be arranged in blocks, or may be arranged in a pattern such as alternating. The preferred embodiments of the number of repetitions of the ethyleneoxy groups etc. in these groups are as described above.
  • the polyimide precursor when R 113 is a hydrogen atom or when R 114 is a hydrogen atom, the polyimide precursor may form a counter salt with a tertiary amine compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond.
  • a tertiary amine compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond examples include N,N-dimethylaminopropyl methacrylate.
  • the content of the repeating unit represented by formula (2) relative to the total mass of the specific resin is preferably 30% by mass or more, more preferably 50% by mass or more, even more preferably 70% by mass or more, and particularly preferably 80% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit of the content is not particularly limited, and may be 100% by mass.
  • the total content of the repeating unit represented by formula (2) and the repeating unit represented by formula (4) relative to the total mass of the specific resin is preferably 50% by mass or more, more preferably 70% by mass or more, even more preferably 80% by mass or more, and particularly preferably 90% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit of this content is not particularly limited, and may be 100% by mass.
  • the specific resin when the specific resin contains a repeating unit represented by formula (2), it may contain two or more repeating units represented by formula (2) having different structures. In that case, it is preferable that the total amount is within the above range. Furthermore, when the specific resin contains a repeating unit represented by formula (4), it may contain two or more repeating units represented by formula (4) having different structures. In that case, it is preferable that the total amount is within the above range.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the specific resin is preferably 3,000 to 100,000.
  • the lower limit of the Mw is preferably 5,000 or more, more preferably 8,000 or more, and even more preferably 10,000 or more.
  • the upper limit of the Mw is preferably 100,000 or less, more preferably 50,000 or less, and even more preferably 30,000 or less.
  • the weight-average molecular weight is particularly preferably 5,000 or more.
  • the number average molecular weight (Mn) of the specific resin is preferably 1,000 to 40,000, more preferably 2,000 to 30,000, and even more preferably 5,000 to 20,000.
  • the molecular weight dispersity of the specific resin is preferably 1.5 or more, more preferably 1.8 or more, and even more preferably 2.0 or more.
  • the upper limit of the molecular weight dispersity of the polyimide is not particularly specified, but is, for example, preferably 7.0 or less, more preferably 6.5 or less, even more preferably 6.0 or less, still more preferably 4.5 or less, and particularly preferably 3.0 or less.
  • the imidization rate (also referred to as "ring closure rate") of the polyimide precursor is preferably less than 70%, more preferably 50% or less, and even more preferably 30% or less, from the viewpoint of the film strength, insulating properties, etc. of the resulting organic film.
  • the lower limit of the imidization rate is not particularly limited, and may be 0% or more. The imidization rate is measured by the method described above.
  • Formula (X-1) In formula (X-1), at least one of R 135 and R 136 is a polymerizable group, and if it is not a polymerizable group, it is an organic group, and the other groups have the same meanings as in formula (X).
  • Preferred embodiments of the polymerizable group are as described above.
  • R 134 represents a tetravalent organic group. Examples of the tetravalent organic group include an aliphatic group and an aromatic group. Specifically, R 134 may be the same group as R 132 in the following formula (R134-1) or formula (4).
  • X1 represents an organic group having 4 or more carbon atoms, each R1 independently represents a structure represented by formula (R-1) above, m represents an integer of 0 to 4 or more, and * represents a bonding site to another structure.
  • preferred embodiments of X 1 , R 1 and m are the same as the preferred embodiments of X 1 , R 1 and m shown in formula (1-1) above.
  • the weight-average molecular weight (Mw) is preferably 5,000 to 70,000, more preferably 8,000 to 50,000, and even more preferably 10,000 to 30,000. By adjusting the weight-average molecular weight to 5,000 or more, the fold resistance of the cured film can be improved. In order to obtain an organic film with excellent mechanical properties, the weight-average molecular weight is particularly preferably 20,000 or more. When two or more types of polybenzoxazoles are contained, it is preferable that the weight-average molecular weight of at least one type of polybenzoxazole be within the above range.
  • the number average molecular weight (Mn) is preferably from 7,200 to 14,000, more preferably from 8,000 to 12,000, and even more preferably from 9,200 to 11,200.
  • the molecular weight dispersity is preferably 1.4 or more, more preferably 1.5 or more, and even more preferably 1.6 or more.
  • the upper limit of the molecular weight dispersity of polybenzoxazole is not particularly specified, but is, for example, preferably 2.6 or less, more preferably 2.5 or less, even more preferably 2.4 or less, even more preferably 2.3 or less, and even more preferably 2.2 or less.
  • the weight-average molecular weight, number-average molecular weight, and dispersity of at least one polybenzoxazole are within the above-mentioned ranges. It is also preferable that the weight-average molecular weight, number-average molecular weight, and dispersity calculated by treating the multiple polybenzoxazoles as a single resin are within the above-mentioned ranges.
  • the polybenzoxazole preferably has an oxazolization rate of 85% or more, more preferably 90% or more.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, and may be 100%.
  • the oxazolization rate is 85% or more, film shrinkage due to ring closure that occurs when oxazolized by heating is reduced, and warpage can be more effectively suppressed.
  • the oxazole ratio is measured, for example, by the following method. The infrared absorption spectrum of the polybenzoxazole is measured, and the peak intensity Q1 near 1650 cm ⁇ 1 , which is an absorption peak derived from the amide structure of the precursor, is determined.
  • the polybenzoxazole may contain repeating units of the above formula (X) in which the combination of R 133 and R 134 is the same, or may contain repeating units of the above formula (X) containing two or more different combinations of R 133 and R 134. Furthermore, the polybenzoxazole may contain other types of repeating units in addition to the repeating units of the above formula (X).
  • the specific resin is preferably a resin having a repeating unit represented by the following formula (3), and more preferably a resin having a repeating unit represented by the following formula (3) and a polymerizable group. Preferred embodiments of the polymerizable group are as described above.
  • R 121 represents a divalent organic group
  • R 122 represents a tetravalent organic group
  • R 123 and R 124 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group.
  • R 123 and R 124 each have the same definition as R 113 in formula (2), and the preferred range is also the same. That is, it is preferable that at least one of them is a polymerizable group.
  • preferred embodiments of R 121 are the same as preferred embodiments of R 121 in formula (3) described in paragraphs 0074 to 0079 of WO 2022/145355.
  • preferred embodiments of R 122 are the same as preferred embodiments of R 122 in formula (3) described in paragraphs 0080 to 0090 of WO 2022/145355.
  • the weight-average molecular weight (Mw) is preferably 5,000 to 70,000, more preferably 8,000 to 50,000, and even more preferably 10,000 to 30,000. By adjusting the weight-average molecular weight to 5,000 or more, the fold resistance of the cured film can be improved. In order to obtain an organic film with excellent mechanical properties, the weight-average molecular weight is particularly preferably 20,000 or more. When two or more polybenzoxazole precursors are contained, it is preferable that the weight-average molecular weight of at least one polybenzoxazole precursor be within the above range.
  • the number average molecular weight (Mn) is preferably from 7,200 to 14,000, more preferably from 8,000 to 12,000, and even more preferably from 9,200 to 11,200.
  • the molecular weight dispersity is preferably 1.4 or more, more preferably 1.5 or more, and even more preferably 1.6 or more.
  • the upper limit of the molecular weight dispersity of the polybenzoxazole is not particularly specified, but is, for example, preferably 2.6 or less, more preferably 2.5 or less, even more preferably 2.4 or less, even more preferably 2.3 or less, and even more preferably 2.2 or less.
  • the polybenzoxazole precursor preferably has an oxazole ratio of 15% or less, more preferably 10% or less.
  • the lower limit is not particularly limited, and may be 0%.
  • the oxazole conversion rate is measured, for example, by the method described above.
  • the polybenzoxazole precursor may contain repeating units of the above formula (3) in which the combinations of R 121 to R 124 are the same, or may contain repeating units of the above formula (3) in which two or more types of combinations of R 121 to R 124 are different in part or in whole. Furthermore, the polybenzoxazole precursor may contain other types of repeating units in addition to the repeating units of the above formula (3).
  • the specific resin can be synthesized by, for example, the method described in paragraphs 0134 to 0136 of WO 2022/145355 or by reference to this method. The above description is incorporated herein by reference. Alternatively, the specific resin may be synthesized by reference to other known methods.
  • R1 represents a divalent linking group
  • Z1 represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkylene group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms or a silicon atom
  • n is 1
  • R2 represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group
  • Z1 is the silicon atom
  • n is 3
  • each R2 independently represents a monovalent organic group
  • R3 represents a group bonding to a resin terminal.
  • R 1 , Z 1 , n, and R 2 are the same as the preferred embodiments of R 1 , Z 1 , n, and R 2 in formula (B-1) above.
  • R 3 may be an amino group, a hydroxy group, a carboxy group, a carboxylic acid halide group, or the like, and is preferably an amino group.
  • the content of the specific resin in the resin composition of the present invention is preferably 10% by mass or more, more preferably 15% by mass or more, even more preferably 20% by mass or more, and even more preferably 30% by mass or more, based on the total solid content of the resin composition. Also, the content of the resin in the resin composition of the present invention is preferably 90% by mass or less, more preferably 80% by mass or less, even more preferably 70% by mass or less, even more preferably 60% by mass or less, and even more preferably 50% by mass or less, based on the total solid content of the resin composition.
  • the resin composition of the present invention may contain only one specific resin or two or more specific resins. When two or more specific resins are contained, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
  • the resin composition of the present invention may contain other resins (hereinafter simply referred to as "other resins") different from the specific resins described above.
  • other resins are resins different from the specific resin, such as polyimide precursors, polyimides, polybenzoxazole precursors, polybenzoxazoles, polyamideimide precursors, polyamideimides, phenolic resins, polyamides, epoxy resins, polysiloxanes, resins containing a siloxane structure, (meth)acrylic resins, (meth)acrylamide resins, urethane resins, butyral resins, styryl resins, polyether resins, and polyester resins.
  • polyimide precursors examples include the compounds described in paragraphs 0017 to 0138 of WO 2022/145355, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference.
  • the content of the other resins is preferably 0.01% by mass or more, more preferably 0.05% by mass or more, even more preferably 1% by mass or more, still more preferably 2% by mass or more, even more preferably 5% by mass or more, and even more preferably 10% by mass or more, relative to the total solid content of the resin composition.
  • the content of other resins in the resin composition of the present invention is preferably 80% by mass or less, more preferably 75% by mass or less, even more preferably 70% by mass or less, still more preferably 60% by mass or less, and even more preferably 50% by mass or less, based on the total solid content of the resin composition.
  • a preferred embodiment of the resin composition of the present invention may be an embodiment in which the content of the other resin is low.
  • the content of the other resin is preferably 20% by mass or less, more preferably 15% by mass or less, even more preferably 10% by mass or less, even more preferably 5% by mass or less, and even more preferably 1% by mass or less, based on the total solid content of the resin composition.
  • the lower limit of the content is not particularly limited, and may be 0% by mass or more.
  • the resin composition of the present invention may contain only one type of other resin, or may contain two or more types. When two or more types are contained, the total amount is preferably in the above range.
  • the resin composition of the present invention preferably contains a metal or a salt thereof, or a metal complex, and more preferably contains a metal complex.
  • the metal species act as a catalyst, which promotes the reaction between the alkynyl group and moisture, and may improve adhesion.
  • the metal type in these compounds preferably includes titanium or silver.
  • metal or its salt silver or a silver salt is preferred, and a silver salt is more preferred.
  • metal salt an organic metal salt is preferred, and an organic silver salt is more preferred.
  • organic silver salts include silver acetate, silver benzoate, silver lactate, silver pyrophosphate, silver citrate, silver behenate, silver diethylcarbamate, silver stearate, silver tartrate, silver metasulfonate, silver trifluoroate, silver salts of alkyl esters, phenyl esters, or alkylphenyl esters of phosphoric acid or phosphorous acid, silver phosphofluoride, silver phthalocyanine, and silver ethylenediaminetetraacetate.
  • titanium bis(triethanolamine) diisopropoxide titanium di(n-butoxide) bis(2,4-pentanedionate), titanium diisopropoxide bis(2,4-pentanedionate), titanium diisopropoxide bis(tetramethylheptanedionate), and titanium diisopropoxide bis(ethylacetoacetate).
  • Tetraalkoxytitanium compounds for example, titanium tetra(n-butoxide), titanium tetraethoxide, titanium tetra(2-ethylhexoxide), titanium tetraisobutoxide, titanium tetraisopropoxide, titanium tetramethoxide, titanium tetramethoxypropoxide, titanium tetramethylphenoxide, titanium tetra(n-nonyloxide), titanium tetra(n-propoxide), titanium tetrastearyloxide, titanium tetrakis[bis ⁇ 2,2-(allyloxymethyl)butoxide ⁇ ], etc.
  • Titanocene compounds for example, pentamethylcyclopentadienyltitanium trimethoxide, bis( ⁇ 5-2,4-cyclopentadien-1-yl)bis(2,6-difluorophenyl)titanium, bis( ⁇ 5-2,4-cyclopentadien-1-yl)bis(2,6-difluoro-3-(1H-pyrrol-1-yl)phenyl)titanium, and the like.
  • Monoalkoxytitanium compounds For example, titanium tris(dioctylphosphate) isopropoxide, titanium tris(dodecylbenzenesulfonate) isopropoxide, etc.
  • compounds having a boiling point of 100°C or higher under normal pressure are also preferred as the monofunctional radical crosslinking agent.
  • the bifunctional or higher functional radical crosslinking agent include allyl compounds such as diallyl phthalate and triallyl trimellitate.
  • the content of the radical crosslinking agent is preferably more than 0% by mass and not more than 60% by mass, based on the total solids content of the resin composition.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 5% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 50% by mass or less, and even more preferably 30% by mass or less.
  • a single radical crosslinking agent may be used, or two or more may be used in combination. When two or more types are used in combination, it is preferable that the total amount be within the above range.
  • the acid or base is preferably an acid or base generated from a photoacid generator or a photobase generator in the exposure step.
  • Other cross-linking agents include the compounds described in paragraphs 0179 to 0207 of WO 2022/145355, which are incorporated herein by reference.
  • the resin composition of the present invention contains a polymerization initiator.
  • the polymerization initiator may be a thermal polymerization initiator or a photopolymerization initiator, but it is particularly preferable that the resin composition contains a photopolymerization initiator.
  • the photopolymerization initiator is preferably a photoradical polymerization initiator.
  • the photoradical polymerization initiator can be appropriately selected from known photoradical polymerization initiators.
  • a photoradical polymerization initiator that is photosensitive to light in the ultraviolet to visible range is preferred.
  • it may be an activator that reacts with a photoexcited sensitizer to generate active radicals.
  • ⁇ -aminoketone initiators examples include Omnirad 907, Omnirad 369, Omnirad 369E, and Omnirad 379EG (all manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), and IRGACURE 907, IRGACURE 369, and IRGACURE 379 (all manufactured by BASF).
  • acylphosphine oxide initiators for example, compounds described in paragraphs 0161 to 0163 of WO 2021/112189 can also be suitably used.
  • the contents of this specification are incorporated herein by reference.
  • Preferred oxime compounds include, for example, compounds having the following structure: 3-(benzoyloxy(imino))butan-2-one, 3-(acetoxy(imino))butan-2-one, 3-(propionyloxy(imino))butan-2-one, 2-(acetoxy(imino))pentan-3-one, 2-(acetoxy(imino))-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 2-(benzoyloxy(imino))-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 3-((4-toluenesulfonyloxy)imino)butan-2-one, and 2-(ethoxycarbonyloxy(imino))-1-phenylpropan-1-one.
  • the content of the sensitizer is preferably 0.01 to 20 mass%, more preferably 0.1 to 15 mass%, and even more preferably 0.5 to 10 mass%, based on the total solids content of the resin composition.
  • One type of sensitizer may be used alone, or two or more types may be used in combination.
  • the resin composition of the present invention may contain a chain transfer agent.
  • Chain transfer agents are defined, for example, in the Third Edition of the Polymer Dictionary (edited by the Society of Polymer Science, 2005), pages 683-684.
  • Examples of chain transfer agents include compounds having -S-S-, -SO 2 -S-, -N-O-, SH, PH, SiH, and GeH in the molecule, and dithiobenzoates, trithiocarbonates, dithiocarbamates, and xanthate compounds having a thiocarbonylthio group used in RAFT (Reversible Addition Fragmentation Chain Transfer) polymerization. These donate hydrogen to low-activity radicals to generate radicals, or can generate radicals by being oxidized and then deprotonated. Thiol compounds are particularly preferred.
  • chain transfer agent may be the compound described in paragraphs 0152-0153 of WO 2015/199219, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
  • the content of the chain transfer agent is preferably 0.01 to 20 parts by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 10 parts by mass, and even more preferably 0.5 to 5 parts by mass, per 100 parts by mass of the total solids content of the resin composition. Only one type of chain transfer agent may be used, or two or more types may be used. When two or more types of chain transfer agents are used, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
  • the resin composition of the present invention contains two or more types of polymerization initiators.
  • the resin composition of the present invention preferably contains a photopolymerization initiator and a thermal polymerization initiator described below, or contains the above-mentioned photoradical polymerization initiator and a photoacid generator.
  • the content ratio of the photoacid generator relative to the total content of the photopolymerization initiator and the photoacid generator is preferably 20 to 70 mass%, more preferably 30 to 60 mass%.
  • thermal polymerization initiator examples include a thermal radical polymerization initiator.
  • a thermal radical polymerization initiator is a compound that generates radicals by thermal energy and initiates or promotes the polymerization reaction of a polymerizable compound. Addition of the thermal radical polymerization initiator can also promote the polymerization reaction of the resin and the polymerizable compound, thereby further improving solvent resistance.
  • thermal radical polymerization initiators include the compounds described in paragraphs 0074 to 0118 of JP 2008-063554 A, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
  • thermal polymerization initiator its content is preferably 0.1 to 30 mass% of the total solids content of the resin composition, more preferably 0.1 to 20 mass%, and even more preferably 0.5 to 15 mass%. Only one type of thermal polymerization initiator may be included, or two or more types may be included. If two or more types of thermal polymerization initiators are included, it is preferable that the total amount be within the above range.
  • Examples of the base generated from the base generator include secondary amines and tertiary amines.
  • the base generator is not particularly limited, and known base generators can be used, such as carbamoyl oxime compounds, carbamoyl hydroxylamine compounds, carbamic acid compounds, formamide compounds, acetamide compounds, carbamate compounds, benzyl carbamate compounds, nitrobenzyl carbamate compounds, sulfonamide compounds, imidazole derivative compounds, amine imide compounds, pyridine derivative compounds, ⁇ -aminoacetophenone derivative compounds, quaternary ammonium salt derivative compounds, iminium salts, pyridinium salts, ⁇ -lactone ring derivative compounds, amine imide compounds, phthalimide derivative compounds, and acyloxyimino compounds.
  • the resin composition of the present invention preferably contains a solvent. Any known solvent can be used as the solvent.
  • the solvent is preferably an organic solvent. Examples of the organic solvent include compounds such as esters, ethers, ketones, cyclic hydrocarbons, sulfoxides, amides, ureas, and alcohols.
  • Esters for example, ethyl acetate, n-butyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, hexyl acetate, amyl formate, isoamyl acetate, butyl propionate, isopropyl butyrate, ethyl butyrate, butyl butyrate, methyl lactate, ethyl lactate, ⁇ -butyrolactone, ⁇ -caprolactone, ⁇ -valerolactone, ⁇ -valerolactone, alkyl alkyloxyacetates (for example, methyl alkyloxyacetate, ethyl alkyloxyacetate, butyl alkyloxyacetate (for example, methyl methoxyacetate, ethyl methoxyacetate, butyl methoxyacetate, methyl ethoxyacetate, ethyl ethoxyacetate, etc.)), alkyl 3-alkyloxypropionates (for example,
  • 2- Suitable examples include alkyl esters of alkyloxypropionates (e.g., methyl 2-alkyloxypropionate, ethyl 2-alkyloxypropionate, and propyl 2-alkyloxypropionate (e.g., methyl 2-methoxypropionate, ethyl 2-methoxypropionate, propyl 2-methoxypropionate, methyl 2-ethoxypropionate, and ethyl 2-ethoxypropionate)), methyl 2-alkyloxy-2-methylpropionate and ethyl 2-alkyloxy-2-methylpropionate (e.g., methyl 2-methoxy-2-methylpropionate and ethyl 2-ethoxy-2-methylpropionate), methyl pyruvate,
  • Suitable examples of ethers include ethylene glycol dimethyl ether, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, diethylene glycol diethyl ether, diethylene glycol ethyl methyl ether, diethylene glycol butyl methyl ether, triethylene glycol dimethyl ether, tetraethylene glycol dimethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, ethylene glycol monoethyl ether, methyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, diethylene glycol monomethyl ether, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, diethylene glycol monobutyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol dimethyl ether, propylene glycol dimethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, ethylene glycol monobutyl ether, ethylene glycol monobutyl ether acetate, di
  • ketones include methyl ethyl ketone, cyclohexanone, cyclopentanone, 2-heptanone, 3-heptanone, 3-methylcyclohexanone, levoglucosenone, and dihydrolevoglucosenone.
  • Suitable examples of cyclic hydrocarbons include aromatic hydrocarbons such as toluene, xylene, and anisole, and cyclic terpenes such as limonene.
  • a suitable example of a sulfoxide is dimethyl sulfoxide.
  • Preferred amides include N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone, N-ethyl-2-pyrrolidone, N-cyclohexyl-2-pyrrolidone, N,N-dimethylacetamide, N,N-dimethylformamide, N,N-dimethylisobutyramide, 3-methoxy-N,N-dimethylpropionamide, 3-butoxy-N,N-dimethylpropionamide, N-formylmorpholine, and N-acetylmorpholine.
  • Preferred ureas include N,N,N',N'-tetramethylurea and 1,3-dimethyl-2-imidazolidinone.
  • Alcohols include methanol, ethanol, 1-propanol, 2-propanol, 1-butanol, 1-pentanol, 1-hexanol, benzyl alcohol, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, 1-methoxy-2-propanol, 2-ethoxyethanol, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, diethylene glycol monohexyl ether, triethylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monoethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, polyethylene glycol monomethyl ether, polypropylene glycol, tetraethylene glycol, ethylene glycol monobutyl ether, ethylene glycol monobenzyl ether, ethylene glycol monophenyl ether, methylphenyl carbinol, n-amyl alcohol, methyl amyl alcohol, and diacetone alcohol.
  • an embodiment in which ⁇ -valerolactone is contained as a solvent is also one of the preferred embodiments of the present invention.
  • the content of ⁇ -valerolactone relative to the total mass of the solvent is preferably 50% by mass or more, more preferably 60% by mass or more, and even more preferably 70% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit of the content is not particularly limited and may be 100% by mass. The content may be determined taking into consideration the solubility of components such as the specific resin contained in the resin composition, etc.
  • the solvent preferably contains 60 to 90% by mass of ⁇ -valerolactone and 10 to 40% by mass of dimethyl sulfoxide, more preferably 70 to 90% by mass of ⁇ -valerolactone and 10 to 30% by mass of dimethyl sulfoxide, and even more preferably 75 to 85% by mass of ⁇ -valerolactone and 15 to 25% by mass of dimethyl sulfoxide, relative to the total mass of the solvent.
  • the resin composition of the present invention preferably contains a solvent having a boiling point at 1 atmosphere of 50° C. to 300° C., and more preferably contains a solvent having a boiling point at 100° C. to 260° C.
  • the boiling point of the solvent is the boiling point at 1 atmosphere. According to such an embodiment, it is believed that a cured product having excellent solvent removability and resolution can be obtained.
  • the boiling point is preferably 150° C. or higher, more preferably 180° C. or higher, and even more preferably 200° C. or higher.
  • the upper limit of the boiling point is preferably 250° C. or lower, more preferably 240° C. or lower, and even more preferably 230° C. or lower.
  • the solvent content is preferably an amount that results in a total solids concentration of the resin composition of the present invention of 5 to 80 mass%, more preferably an amount that results in a total solids concentration of 5 to 75 mass%, even more preferably an amount that results in a total solids concentration of 10 to 70 mass%, and even more preferably an amount that results in a total solids concentration of 20 to 70 mass%.
  • the solvent content may be adjusted depending on the desired thickness of the coating film and the application method. When two or more solvents are used, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
  • the resin composition of the present invention preferably contains a metal adhesion improver from the viewpoint of improving adhesion to metal materials used in electrodes, wiring, etc.
  • metal adhesion improvers include silane coupling agents having an alkoxysilyl group, aluminum-based adhesion aids, titanium-based adhesion aids, compounds having a sulfonamide structure, compounds having a thiourea structure, phosphoric acid derivative compounds, ⁇ -ketoester compounds, and amino compounds.
  • silane coupling agent examples include the compounds described in paragraph 0316 of WO 2021/112189 and the compounds described in paragraphs 0067 to 0078 of JP 2018-173573 A, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference. It is also preferable to use two or more different silane coupling agents, as described in paragraphs 0050 to 0058 of JP 2011-128358 A. It is also preferable to use the following compounds as the silane coupling agent. In the following formula, Me represents a methyl group, and Et represents an ethyl group. Furthermore, the following R represents a structure derived from a blocking agent in a blocked isocyanate group.
  • the blocking agent may be selected depending on the desorption temperature, and examples include alcohol compounds, phenol compounds, pyrazole compounds, triazole compounds, lactam compounds, and active methylene compounds.
  • examples include alcohol compounds, phenol compounds, pyrazole compounds, triazole compounds, lactam compounds, and active methylene compounds.
  • caprolactam is preferred from the viewpoint of achieving a desorption temperature of 160 to 180°C.
  • Commercially available products of such compounds include X-12-1293 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.).
  • silane coupling agents include, for example, vinyltrimethoxysilane, vinyltriethoxysilane, 2-(3,4-epoxycyclohexyl)ethyltrimethoxysilane, 3-glycidoxypropylmethyldimethoxysilane, 3-glycidoxypropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-glycidoxypropylmethyldiethoxysilane, 3-glycidoxypropyltriethoxysilane, p-styryltrimethoxysilane, 3-methacryloxypropylmethyldimethoxysilane, 3-methacryloxypropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-methacryloxypropylmethyldiethoxysilane, 3-methacryloxypropyltriethoxysilane, 3-acryloxypropyltrimethoxysilane, N-2- (aminoethyl)-3-aminopropylmethyldimethoxysilane, N-2-(aminoethyl
  • an oligomer type compound having a plurality of alkoxysilyl groups can also be used as the silane coupling agent.
  • Such oligomer-type compounds include compounds containing a repeating unit represented by the following formula (S-1).
  • R 1 S1 represents a monovalent organic group
  • R 1 S2 represents a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy group or an alkoxy group
  • n represents an integer of 0 to 2.
  • R S1 preferably has a structure containing a polymerizable group.
  • Examples of the polymerizable group include a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond, an epoxy group, an oxetanyl group, a benzoxazolyl group, a blocked isocyanate group, and an amino group.
  • Examples of the group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond include a vinyl group, an allyl group, an isoallyl group, a 2-methylallyl group, a group having an aromatic ring directly bonded to a vinyl group (for example, a vinylphenyl group), a (meth)acrylamide group, and a (meth)acryloyloxy group.
  • a vinylphenyl group, a (meth)acrylamide group, or a (meth)acryloyloxy group is preferred, a vinylphenyl group or a (meth)acryloyloxy group is more preferred, and a (meth)acryloyloxy group is even more preferred.
  • R S2 is preferably an alkoxy group, more preferably a methoxy group or an ethoxy group.
  • n represents an integer of 0 to 2, and is preferably 1.
  • the structures of the repeating units represented by formula (S-1) contained in the oligomer-type compound may be the same.
  • n is 1 or 2 in at least one, more preferably that n is 1 or 2 in at least two, and even more preferably that n is 1 in at least two.
  • commercially available products can be used, and examples of commercially available products include KR-513 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.).
  • Aluminum-based adhesion promoter examples include aluminum tris(ethylacetoacetate), aluminum tris(acetylacetonate), and ethylacetoacetate aluminum diisopropylate.
  • metal adhesion improvers that can be used include the compounds described in paragraphs 0046 to 0049 of JP 2014-186186 A and the sulfide-based compounds described in paragraphs 0032 to 0043 of JP 2013-072935 A, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
  • the content of the metal adhesion improver is preferably 0.01 to 30 parts by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 10 parts by mass, and even more preferably 0.5 to 5 parts by mass, per 100 parts by mass of the specific resin. By ensuring that the content is above the above lower limit, the adhesion between the pattern and the metal layer will be good, and by ensuring that the content is below the above upper limit, the heat resistance and mechanical properties of the pattern will be good. Only one type of metal adhesion improver may be used, or two or more types may be used. When two or more types are used, it is preferable that the total amount is within the above range.
  • Migration inhibitors are not particularly limited, but include compounds having a heterocycle (pyrrole ring, furan ring, thiophene ring, imidazole ring, oxazole ring, thiazole ring, pyrazole ring, isoxazole ring, isothiazole ring, tetrazole ring, pyridine ring, pyridazine ring, pyrimidine ring, pyrazine ring, piperidine ring, piperazine ring, morpholine ring, 2H-pyran ring, 6H-pyran ring, triazine ring), thioureas and compounds having a sulfanyl group, hindered phenol compounds, salicylic acid derivative compounds, and hydrazide derivative compounds.
  • a heterocycle pyrrole ring, furan ring, thiophene ring, imidazole ring, oxazole ring, thiazole ring,
  • Other migration inhibitors that can be used include the rust inhibitors described in paragraph 0094 of JP 2013-015701 A, the compounds described in paragraphs 0073 to 0076 of JP 2009-283711 A, the compounds described in paragraph 0052 of JP 2011-059656 A, the compounds described in paragraphs 0114, 0116, and 0118 of JP 2012-194520 A, and the compounds described in paragraph 0166 of WO 2015/199219, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
  • the content of the migration inhibitor is preferably 0.01 to 5.0 mass%, more preferably 0.05 to 2.0 mass%, and even more preferably 0.1 to 1.0 mass%, relative to the total solids content of the resin composition.
  • the migration inhibitor may be one type or two or more types. If two or more types of migration inhibitors are used, it is preferable that the total amount is within the above range.
  • the resin composition of the present invention also preferably contains a compound (light absorber) that reduces the absorbance of light at the exposure wavelength upon exposure.
  • a compound light absorber
  • Examples of the light absorber include the compounds described in paragraphs 0159 to 0183 of WO 2022/202647 and the compounds described in paragraphs 0088 to 0108 of JP 2019-206689 A. The contents of these compounds are incorporated herein by reference.
  • the resin composition of the present invention preferably contains a polymerization inhibitor, such as a phenolic compound, a quinone compound, an amino compound, an N-oxyl free radical compound, a nitro compound, a nitroso compound, a heteroaromatic ring compound, or a metal compound.
  • a polymerization inhibitor such as a phenolic compound, a quinone compound, an amino compound, an N-oxyl free radical compound, a nitro compound, a nitroso compound, a heteroaromatic ring compound, or a metal compound.
  • polymerization inhibitor compounds include the compounds described in paragraph 0310 of WO 2021/112189, p-hydroquinone, o-hydroquinone, 4-hydroxy-2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine 1-oxyl free radical, phenoxazine, and 1,4,4-trimethyl-2,3-diazabicyclo[3.2.2]non-2-ene-N,N-dioxide.
  • the contents of this document are incorporated herein by reference.
  • the content of the polymerization inhibitor is preferably 0.01 to 20 mass%, more preferably 0.02 to 15 mass%, and even more preferably 0.05 to 10 mass%, based on the total solids content of the resin composition.
  • the resin composition of the present invention may contain various additives, such as surfactants, higher fatty acid derivatives, thermal polymerization initiators, inorganic particles, UV absorbers, organic titanium compounds, antioxidants, photoacid generators, anti-aggregation agents, phenolic compounds, other polymer compounds, plasticizers, and other auxiliary agents (e.g., antifoaming agents, flame retardants, etc.), as needed, as long as the effects of the present invention are obtained.
  • auxiliary agents e.g., antifoaming agents, flame retardants, etc.
  • the total content is preferably 3% by mass or less of the solid content of the resin composition of the present invention.
  • surfactant various surfactants can be used, such as a fluorine-based surfactant, a silicone-based surfactant, a hydrocarbon-based surfactant, etc.
  • the surfactant may be a nonionic surfactant, a cationic surfactant, or an anionic surfactant.
  • the liquid properties (particularly fluidity) when the coating liquid composition is prepared are further improved, and the uniformity of the coating thickness and liquid saving can be further improved.
  • the interfacial tension between the surface to be coated and the coating liquid is reduced, improving the wettability of the surface to be coated and the coatability of the surface to be coated. This makes it possible to more effectively form a uniform film with minimal thickness unevenness.
  • fluorosurfactants examples include compounds described in paragraph 0328 of WO 2021/112189, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
  • a fluorine-based surfactant a fluorine-containing polymer compound containing a repeating unit derived from a (meth)acrylate compound having a fluorine atom and a repeating unit derived from a (meth)acrylate compound having two or more (preferably five or more) alkyleneoxy groups (preferably ethyleneoxy groups or propyleneoxy groups) can also be preferably used, and examples thereof include the following compounds.
  • the fluorine content in the fluorosurfactant is preferably 3 to 40% by mass, more preferably 5 to 30% by mass, and particularly preferably 7 to 25% by mass. Fluorosurfactants with a fluorine content within this range are effective in terms of uniformity of the coating film thickness and liquid saving, and also have good solubility in the composition.
  • silicone surfactants examples include the compounds described in paragraphs 0329 to 0334 of WO 2021/112189, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
  • the surfactant may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the surfactant is preferably from 0.001 to 2.0% by mass, more preferably from 0.005 to 1.0% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition.
  • inorganic particles include calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate, silica, kaolin, talc, titanium dioxide, alumina, barium sulfate, calcium fluoride, lithium fluoride, zeolite, molybdenum sulfide, and glass.
  • the average particle size of the inorganic particles is preferably from 0.01 to 2.0 ⁇ m, more preferably from 0.02 to 1.5 ⁇ m, even more preferably from 0.03 to 1.0 ⁇ m, and particularly preferably from 0.04 to 0.5 ⁇ m.
  • the above-mentioned average particle size of the inorganic particles is the primary particle size and also the volume average particle size, which can be measured by a dynamic light scattering method using, for example, a Nanotrac WAVE II EX-150 (manufactured by Nikkiso Co., Ltd.). When the above measurement is difficult, the measurement can also be performed by a centrifugal sedimentation light transmission method, an X-ray transmission method, or a laser diffraction/scattering method.
  • the viscosity of the resin composition of the present invention can be adjusted by the solids concentration of the resin composition. From the viewpoint of coating film thickness, it is preferably 1,000 mm 2 /s to 12,000 mm 2 /s, more preferably 2,000 mm 2 /s to 10,000 mm 2 /s, and even more preferably 2,500 mm 2 /s to 8,000 mm 2 /s. Within the above range, it is easy to obtain a highly uniform coating film.
  • the transmittance of the cured product at a wavelength of 365 nm is preferably 15% or more, more preferably 20% or more, and even more preferably 25% or more.
  • the upper limit of the transmittance is not particularly limited and may be 100%.
  • the cured product can be obtained, for example, by applying the resin composition of the present invention to a silicon wafer, drying it at 100°C for 5 minutes, exposing the entire surface to i-rays at an exposure energy of 500 mJ/ cm2 , and then heating it at a temperature increase rate of 10°C/min in a nitrogen atmosphere and at 230°C for 180 minutes.
  • the water content of the resin composition of the present invention is preferably less than 2.0% by mass, more preferably less than 1.5% by mass, and even more preferably less than 1.0% by mass. If the water content is less than 2.0%, the storage stability of the resin composition is improved. Methods for maintaining the moisture content include adjusting the humidity during storage and reducing the porosity of the container during storage.
  • the metal content of the resin composition of the present invention is preferably less than 5 ppm by mass (parts per million), more preferably less than 1 ppm by mass, and even more preferably less than 0.5 ppm by mass.
  • metals include sodium, potassium, magnesium, calcium, iron, copper, chromium, and nickel, but this does not include metals contained as complexes of organic compounds with metals. When multiple metals are contained, it is preferable that the total amount of these metals is within the above range.
  • methods for reducing metal impurities unintentionally contained in the resin composition of the present invention include selecting raw materials with low metal content as the raw materials for constituting the resin composition of the present invention, filtering the raw materials for constituting the resin composition of the present invention, and lining the inside of the apparatus with polytetrafluoroethylene or the like to perform distillation under conditions that minimize contamination as much as possible.
  • the content of halogen atoms is preferably less than 500 ppm by mass, more preferably less than 300 ppm by mass, and even more preferably less than 200 ppm by mass from the viewpoint of wiring corrosion.
  • those present in the form of halogen ions are preferably less than 5 ppm by mass, more preferably less than 1 ppm by mass, and even more preferably less than 0.5 ppm by mass.
  • Examples of halogen atoms include chlorine atoms and bromine atoms. It is preferable that the total of chlorine atoms and bromine atoms, or chlorine ions and bromine ions, is within the above range.
  • a preferred method for adjusting the content of halogen atoms is ion exchange treatment.
  • any conventional container known in the art can be used as a container for storing the resin composition of the present invention.
  • a container for storing the resin composition of the present invention For the purpose of preventing impurities from being mixed into the raw materials or the resin composition of the present invention, it is also preferable to use a multi-layer bottle whose inner wall is made up of six layers of six types of resin, or a bottle with a seven-layer structure made up of six types of resin. Examples of such containers include the container described in JP 2015-123351 A.
  • a cured product of the resin composition By curing the resin composition of the present invention, a cured product of the resin composition can be obtained.
  • the cured product of the present invention is a cured product obtained by curing a resin composition.
  • the resin composition is preferably cured by heating, with the heating temperature being more preferably 120°C to 400°C, even more preferably 140°C to 380°C, and particularly preferably 170°C to 350°C.
  • the form of the cured product of the resin composition is not particularly limited, and can be selected according to the application, such as film, rod, sphere, or pellet.
  • the cured product is preferably in the form of a film.
  • the shape of the cured product can be selected according to the application, such as forming a protective film on the wall surface, forming via holes for electrical conduction, adjusting impedance, capacitance, or internal stress, or imparting heat dissipation functionality.
  • the film thickness of the cured product (film made of the cured product) is preferably 0.5 ⁇ m or more and 150 ⁇ m or less.
  • the shrinkage percentage of the resin composition of the present invention when cured is preferably 50% or less, more preferably 45% or less, and even more preferably 40% or less.
  • the imidization reaction rate of the cured product of the resin composition of the present invention is preferably 70% or more, more preferably 80% or more, and even more preferably 90% or more. If it is 70% or more, the cured product may have excellent mechanical properties.
  • the elongation at break of the cured product of the resin composition of the present invention is preferably 30% or more, more preferably 40% or more, and even more preferably 50% or more.
  • the glass transition temperature (Tg) of the cured product of the resin composition of the present invention is preferably 180°C or higher, more preferably 210°C or higher, and even more preferably 230°C or higher.
  • the resin composition of the present invention can be prepared by mixing the above-mentioned components.
  • the mixing method is not particularly limited, and can be carried out by a conventionally known method. Examples of the mixing method include mixing with a stirring blade, mixing with a ball mill, and mixing by rotating a tank.
  • the temperature during mixing is preferably 10 to 30°C, more preferably 15 to 25°C.
  • Filtration using a filter is preferably performed to remove foreign matter such as dust and fine particles from the resin composition of the present invention.
  • the filter pore size is, for example, preferably 5 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 1 ⁇ m or less, even more preferably 0.5 ⁇ m or less, and even more preferably 0.1 ⁇ m or less.
  • the filter material is preferably polytetrafluoroethylene, polyethylene, or nylon. When the filter material is polyethylene, HDPE (high-density polyethylene) is more preferable.
  • the filter may be pre-washed with an organic solvent. In the filter filtration process, multiple types of filters may be connected in series or parallel. When multiple types of filters are used, filters with different pore sizes or materials may be combined.
  • connection mode is a mode in which an HDPE filter with a pore size of 1 ⁇ m is connected in series as the first stage and an HDPE filter with a pore size of 0.2 ⁇ m is connected in series as the second stage.
  • Various materials may also be filtered multiple times. When filtration is performed multiple times, circulating filtration may be used. Filtration may also be performed under pressure. When filtration is performed under pressure, the pressure to be applied is, for example, preferably 0.01 MPa or more and 1.0 MPa or less, more preferably 0.03 MPa or more and 0.9 MPa or less, even more preferably 0.05 MPa or more and 0.7 MPa or less, and even more preferably 0.05 MPa or more and 0.5 MPa or less.
  • impurities may be removed using an adsorbent.
  • Filter filtration and impurity removal using an adsorbent may be combined.
  • Known adsorbents can be used as the adsorbent.
  • the adsorbent include inorganic adsorbents such as silica gel and zeolite, and organic adsorbents such as activated carbon.
  • the method for producing a cured product of the present invention preferably includes a film-forming step of applying the resin composition onto a substrate to form a film.
  • the method for producing a cured product more preferably includes the above-mentioned film formation step, an exposure step of selectively exposing the film formed in the film formation step, and a development step of developing the film exposed in the exposure step with a developer to form a pattern.
  • the method for producing a cured product includes the above-mentioned film-forming step, the above-mentioned exposure step, the above-mentioned development step, and at least one of a heating step of heating the pattern obtained in the development step and a post-development exposure step of exposing the pattern obtained in the development step.
  • the method for producing a cured product preferably includes the film-forming step and the step of heating the film. Each step will be described in detail below.
  • the resin composition of the present invention can be used in a film-forming process in which the resin composition is applied to a substrate to form a film.
  • the method for producing a cured product of the present invention preferably includes a film-forming step of applying the resin composition onto a substrate to form a film.
  • the type of substrate can be appropriately determined depending on the application and is not particularly limited.
  • substrates include semiconductor production substrates such as silicon, silicon nitride, polysilicon, silicon oxide, and amorphous silicon, quartz, glass, optical films, ceramic materials, vapor deposition films, magnetic films, reflective films, metal substrates such as Ni, Cu, Cr, and Fe (for example, substrates formed from metals, and substrates on which a metal layer is formed by plating, vapor deposition, etc.), paper, SOG (Spin On Glass), TFT (thin film transistor) array substrates, mold substrates, and electrode plates for plasma display panels (PDPs).
  • semiconductor production substrates such as silicon, silicon nitride, polysilicon, silicon oxide, and amorphous silicon, quartz, glass, optical films, ceramic materials, vapor deposition films, magnetic films, reflective films, metal substrates such as Ni, Cu, Cr, and Fe (for example, substrates formed from metals, and substrates on which a metal layer is formed by plating, vapor de
  • the substrate is particularly preferably a semiconductor production substrate, and more preferably a silicon substrate, a Cu substrate, or a mold substrate. These substrates may have a layer such as an adhesion layer made of hexamethyldisilazane (HMDS) or an oxide layer provided on the surface.
  • HMDS hexamethyldisilazane
  • the shape of the substrate is not particularly limited, and may be circular or rectangular.
  • the size of the substrate is preferably, for example, a diameter of 100 to 450 mm, more preferably 200 to 450 mm, if it is circular, and preferably, a short side length of 100 to 1000 mm, more preferably 200 to 700 mm, if it is rectangular.
  • a plate-shaped substrate preferably a panel-shaped substrate (substrate) is used as the substrate.
  • a resin composition When a film is formed by applying a resin composition to the surface of a resin layer (e.g., a layer made of a cured product) or the surface of a metal layer, the resin layer or metal layer serves as the substrate.
  • a resin layer e.g., a layer made of a cured product
  • the resin layer or metal layer serves as the substrate.
  • the resin composition is preferably applied to a substrate by coating.
  • Specific examples of the application method include dip coating, air knife coating, curtain coating, wire bar coating, gravure coating, extrusion coating, spray coating, spin coating, slit coating, and inkjet coating. From the viewpoint of uniformity of film thickness, spin coating, slit coating, spray coating, or inkjet coating is preferred, and from the viewpoint of uniformity of film thickness and productivity, spin coating and slit coating are more preferred.
  • the application method can be appropriately selected depending on the shape of the substrate. For circular substrates such as wafers, spin coating, spray coating, inkjet coating, etc.
  • slit coating for example, it can be applied at a rotation speed of 500 to 3,500 rpm for about 10 seconds to 3 minutes.
  • a coating film formed by applying the coating to a temporary support in advance using the above-mentioned application method may be transferred onto the substrate.
  • the transfer method the production methods described in paragraphs 0023 and 0036 to 0051 of JP-A No. 2006-023696 and paragraphs 0096 to 0108 of JP-A No. 2006-047592 can be suitably used.
  • a process for removing excess film from the edge of the substrate may be performed, such as edge bead rinsing (EBR) or back rinsing.
  • EBR edge bead rinsing
  • a pre-wetting step may be employed in which the substrate is coated with various solvents to improve the wettability of the substrate, and then the resin composition is applied.
  • the film may be subjected to a step (drying step) of drying the formed film (layer) to remove the solvent.
  • the method for producing a cured product of the present invention may include a drying step of drying the film formed in the film forming step.
  • the drying step is preferably carried out after the film-forming step and before the exposure step.
  • the drying temperature of the film in the drying step is preferably 50 to 150°C, more preferably 70 to 130°C, and even more preferably 90 to 110°C. Drying may also be performed under reduced pressure.
  • the drying time is, for example, 30 seconds to 20 minutes, preferably 1 to 10 minutes, and more preferably 2 to 7 minutes.
  • the film may be subjected to an exposure step to selectively expose the film to light.
  • the method for producing a cured product may include an exposure step of selectively exposing the film formed in the film formation step to light. Selective exposure means that only a portion of the film is exposed, and selective exposure results in exposed and unexposed areas of the film.
  • the exposure dose is not particularly limited as long as it can cure the resin composition of the present invention, but is preferably 50 to 10,000 mJ/cm 2 and more preferably 200 to 8,000 mJ/cm 2 in terms of exposure energy at a wavelength of 365 nm.
  • the exposure wavelength can be appropriately set in the range of 190 to 1,000 nm, with 240 to 550 nm being preferred.
  • the exposure wavelength in relation to the light source, (1) semiconductor laser (wavelengths 830 nm, 532 nm, 488 nm, 405 nm, 375 nm, 355 nm, etc.), (2) metal halide lamp, (3) high-pressure mercury lamp, g-line (wavelength 436 nm), h-line (wavelength 405 nm), i-line (wavelength 365 nm), broad (three wavelengths of g, h, i-line), (4) excimer laser, KrF excimer laser (wavelength 248 nm), ArF excimer laser (wavelength 193 nm), F2 excimer laser (wavelength 157 nm), (5) extreme ultraviolet light; EUV (wavelength 13.6 nm), (6) electron beam, (7) YAG laser second harmonic 532 nm, third harmonic 355 nm, etc.
  • semiconductor laser wavelengths 830 nm, 532 nm, 488 nm, 405 nm
  • exposure with a high-pressure mercury lamp is particularly preferred, and exposure with i-line is more preferred from the viewpoint of exposure sensitivity.
  • the exposure method is not particularly limited as long as it is a method that exposes at least a part of the film made of the resin composition of the present invention, and examples thereof include exposure using a photomask and exposure by laser direct imaging.
  • the film may be subjected to a step of heating after exposure (post-exposure baking step). That is, the method for producing a cured product of the present invention may include a post-exposure baking step in which the film exposed in the exposure step is heated.
  • the post-exposure baking step can be carried out after the exposure step and before the development step.
  • the heating temperature in the post-exposure baking step is preferably 50°C to 140°C, more preferably 60°C to 120°C.
  • the heating time in the post-exposure baking step is preferably from 30 seconds to 300 minutes, more preferably from 1 minute to 10 minutes.
  • the temperature rise rate in the post-exposure heating step from the starting temperature to the maximum heating temperature is preferably 1 to 12° C./min, more preferably 2 to 10° C./min, and even more preferably 3 to 10° C./min.
  • the temperature rise rate may be changed during heating as needed.
  • the heating means in the post-exposure baking step is not particularly limited, and known means such as a hot plate, an oven, and an infrared heater can be used. It is also preferable that the heating be carried out in an atmosphere of low oxygen concentration by flowing an inert gas such as nitrogen, helium, or argon.
  • the film After exposure, the film may be subjected to a development step in which it is developed with a developer to form a pattern. That is, the method for producing a cured product of the present invention may include a development step in which the film exposed in the exposure step is developed with a developer to form a pattern. Development removes either the exposed or unexposed portions of the film, forming a pattern.
  • development in which the non-exposed portions of the film are removed by the development process is called negative development
  • development in which the exposed portions of the film are removed by the development process is called positive development.
  • the developer used in the development step may be an aqueous alkaline solution or a developer containing an organic solvent.
  • basic compounds that the alkaline aqueous solution may contain include inorganic alkalis, primary amines, secondary amines, tertiary amines, and quaternary ammonium salts, of which TMAH (tetramethylammonium hydroxide), potassium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, sodium hydroxide, sodium silicate, sodium metasilicate, ammonia, ethylamine, n-propylamine, diethylamine, di-n-butylamine, triethylamine, methyldiethylamine, dimethylethanolamine, triethanolamine, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, tetrapropylammonium hydroxide, tetrabutylammonium hydroxide, tetrapentylammonium hydroxide, tetrahexylammonium hydroxide, tetraoctylammonium hydroxide, e
  • TMAH tetramethylammonium
  • Suitable alcohols include methanol, ethanol, propanol, isopropanol, butanol, pentanol, octanol, diethylene glycol, propylene glycol, methyl isobutylcarbinol, and triethylene glycol
  • suitable amides include N-methylpyrrolidone, N-ethylpyrrolidone, and dimethylformamide.
  • the organic solvent can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • a developer containing at least one selected from the group consisting of cyclopentanone, ⁇ -butyrolactone, dimethyl sulfoxide, N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone, and cyclohexanone is particularly preferred, a developer containing at least one selected from the group consisting of cyclopentanone, ⁇ -butyrolactone, and dimethyl sulfoxide is more preferred, and a developer containing cyclopentanone is particularly preferred.
  • the content of the organic solvent relative to the total weight of the developer is preferably 50% by weight or more, more preferably 70% by weight or more, even more preferably 80% by weight or more, and particularly preferably 90% by weight or more.
  • the above content may also be 100% by weight.
  • the developer may further contain at least one of a basic compound and a base generator.
  • the performance of the pattern such as breaking elongation, may be improved.
  • the basic compound is preferably a basic compound having an amino group, and is preferably a primary amine, a secondary amine, a tertiary amine, an ammonium salt, or a tertiary amide.
  • a primary amine, a secondary amine, a tertiary amine, or an ammonium salt is preferred, a secondary amine, a tertiary amine, or an ammonium salt is more preferred, a secondary amine or a tertiary amine is even more preferred, and a tertiary amine is particularly preferred.
  • the basic compound is one that is unlikely to remain in the cured film (the obtained cured product), and from the viewpoint of promoting cyclization, it is preferable that the amount of the basic compound that remains is unlikely to decrease due to vaporization or the like before heating.
  • the boiling point of the basic compound is preferably 30°C to 350°C, more preferably 80°C to 270°C, and even more preferably 100°C to 230°C at normal pressure (101,325 Pa).
  • the boiling point of the basic compound is preferably higher than the temperature obtained by subtracting 20° C. from the boiling point of the organic solvent contained in the developer, and more preferably higher than the boiling point of the organic solvent contained in the developer.
  • the basic compound used preferably has a boiling point of 80°C or higher, more preferably 100°C or higher.
  • the developer may contain only one kind of basic compound or two or more kinds of basic compounds.
  • basic compounds include ethanolamine, diethanolamine, triethanolamine, ethylamine, diethylamine, triethylamine, hexylamine, dodecylamine, cyclohexylamine, cyclohexylmethylamine, cyclohexyldimethylamine, aniline, N-methylaniline, N,N-dimethylaniline, diphenylamine, pyridine, butylamine, isobutylamine, dibutylamine, tributylamine, dicyclohexylamine, DBU (diazabicycloundecene), DABCO (1,4-diazabicyclo[2.2.2]octane), N,N-diisopropylethylamine, tetramethylammonium hydroxide, tetrabutylammonium hydroxide, ethylenediamine, butanediamine, 1,5-diamino Examples include pentane, N-methylhexy
  • the base generator are the same as those of the base generator contained in the composition described above.
  • the base generator be a thermal base generator.
  • the content of the basic compound or the base generator is preferably 10% by mass or less, more preferably 5% by mass or less, based on the total mass of the developer.
  • the lower limit of the content is not particularly limited, but is preferably, for example, 0.1% by mass or more.
  • the content of the basic compound or base generator is preferably 70 to 100 mass % based on the total solid content of the developer.
  • the developer may contain only one kind of at least one of a basic compound and a base generator, or may contain two or more kinds. When two or more kinds of at least one of a basic compound and a base generator are used, the total amount thereof is preferably within the above range.
  • the developer may further contain other components.
  • other components include known surfactants and known defoaming agents.
  • the method of supplying the developer is not particularly limited as long as it can form a desired pattern, and includes a method of immersing a substrate on which a film has been formed in the developer, puddle development in which the developer is supplied to a film formed on a substrate using a nozzle, and a method of continuously supplying the developer.
  • the type of nozzle is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a straight nozzle, a shower nozzle, and a spray nozzle.
  • a method of supplying the developer through a straight nozzle or a method of continuously supplying the developer through a spray nozzle is preferred, and from the viewpoint of the permeability of the developer into the image areas, a method of supplying the developer through a spray nozzle is more preferred.
  • a process may be employed in which the developer is continuously supplied through a straight nozzle, the substrate is spun to remove the developer from the substrate, and after spin drying, the developer is continuously supplied again through a straight nozzle, and the substrate is spun to remove the developer from the substrate, and this process may be repeated multiple times.
  • Methods for supplying the developer in the development step include a step in which the developer is continuously supplied to the substrate, a step in which the developer is kept substantially stationary on the substrate, a step in which the developer is vibrated on the substrate by ultrasonic waves or the like, and a step in which these are combined.
  • the development time is preferably 10 seconds to 10 minutes, and more preferably 20 seconds to 5 minutes.
  • the temperature of the developer during development is not particularly specified, but is preferably 10 to 45°C, and more preferably 18 to 30°C.
  • the pattern may be further washed (rinsed) with a rinse solution.
  • a rinse solution may be supplied before the developer in contact with the pattern has completely dried.
  • Rinse solution When the developer is an alkaline aqueous solution, for example, water can be used as the rinse liquid.
  • the developer is a developer containing an organic solvent, for example, a solvent different from the solvent contained in the developer (for example, water, an organic solvent different from the organic solvent contained in the developer) can be used as the rinse liquid.
  • the organic solvent include the same organic solvents as those exemplified when the developer contains an organic solvent.
  • the organic solvent contained in the rinse liquid is preferably different from the organic solvent contained in the developer, and more preferably an organic solvent that has a lower solubility for the pattern than the organic solvent contained in the developer.
  • the organic solvent can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • Preferred organic solvents are cyclopentanone, gamma-butyrolactone, dimethyl sulfoxide, N-methylpyrrolidone, cyclohexanone, PGMEA, and PGME, with cyclopentanone, gamma-butyrolactone, dimethyl sulfoxide, PGMEA, and PGME being more preferred, and cyclohexanone and PGMEA being even more preferred.
  • the organic solvent preferably accounts for 50% by mass or more, more preferably 70% by mass or more, and even more preferably 90% by mass or more, of the total mass of the rinse solution.
  • the organic solvent may account for 100% by mass of the total mass of the rinse solution.
  • the rinse liquid may contain at least one of a basic compound and a base generator.
  • a basic compound and a base generator when the developer contains an organic solvent, one preferred embodiment of the present invention is one in which the rinse liquid contains an organic solvent and at least one of a basic compound and a base generator.
  • the basic compound and base generator contained in the rinse solution include the compounds exemplified as the basic compound and base generator that may be contained in the above-mentioned developer containing an organic solvent, and preferred embodiments are also the same.
  • the basic compound and base generator contained in the rinse solution may be selected in consideration of the solubility in the solvent in the rinse solution.
  • the content of the basic compound or the base generator is preferably 10% by mass or less, and more preferably 5% by mass or less, based on the total mass of the rinse solution.
  • the lower limit of the content is not particularly limited, but is preferably, for example, 0.1% by mass or more.
  • the content of the basic compound or base generator is also preferably 70 to 100 mass % based on the total solid content of the rinse solution.
  • the rinse solution may contain only one kind of at least one of a basic compound and a base generator, or may contain two or more kinds.
  • the total amount thereof is preferably within the above range.
  • the rinse solution may further contain other ingredients.
  • other components include known surfactants and known defoaming agents.
  • the method of supplying the rinse liquid is not particularly limited as long as it can form a desired pattern, and examples thereof include a method of immersing the substrate in the rinse liquid, a method of supplying the rinse liquid to the substrate by puddling, a method of supplying the rinse liquid to the substrate by showering, and a method of continuously supplying the rinse liquid onto the substrate by means of a straight nozzle or the like.
  • the rinse liquid can be supplied using a shower nozzle, a straight nozzle, a spray nozzle, etc., and the method of continuously supplying the rinse liquid using a spray nozzle is preferred, and from the viewpoint of the permeability of the rinse liquid into the image areas, the method of supplying the rinse liquid using a spray nozzle is more preferred.
  • the type of nozzle is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a straight nozzle, a shower nozzle, a spray nozzle, etc.
  • the rinsing step is preferably a step of supplying a rinsing liquid to the exposed film through a straight nozzle or continuously supplying the rinsing liquid to the exposed film, and more preferably a step of supplying the rinsing liquid through a spray nozzle.
  • the method of supplying the rinse liquid in the rinsing step may include a step of continuously supplying the rinse liquid to the substrate, a step of keeping the rinse liquid substantially stationary on the substrate, a step of vibrating the rinse liquid on the substrate by ultrasonic waves or the like, and a combination of these steps.
  • the rinsing time is preferably 10 seconds to 10 minutes, and more preferably 20 seconds to 5 minutes.
  • the temperature of the rinse solution during rinsing is not particularly specified, but is preferably 10 to 45°C, and more preferably 18 to 30°C.
  • the development process may include a step of contacting the pattern with a processing liquid after treatment with a developer or after washing the pattern with a rinse liquid. It may also be possible to employ a method in which the processing liquid is supplied before the developer or rinse liquid in contact with the pattern has completely dried.
  • the treatment liquid may include a treatment liquid containing at least one of water and an organic solvent, and at least one of a basic compound and a base generator.
  • Preferred aspects of the organic solvent, and at least one of the basic compound and the base generator are the same as the preferred aspects of the organic solvent, and at least one of the basic compound and the base generator used in the rinse liquid described above.
  • the method of supplying the processing liquid to the pattern can be the same as the method of supplying the rinse liquid described above, and the preferred embodiments are also the same.
  • the content of the basic compound or base generator in the treatment liquid is preferably 10% by mass or less, and more preferably 5% by mass or less, based on the total mass of the treatment liquid.
  • the lower limit of the content is not particularly limited, but is preferably, for example, 0.1% by mass or more.
  • the content of the basic compound or base generator is preferably 70 to 100 mass % relative to the total solid content of the treatment liquid.
  • the treatment liquid may contain only one kind of at least one of a basic compound and a base generator, or may contain two or more kinds. When there are two or more kinds of at least one of a basic compound and a base generator, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is in the above range.
  • the pattern obtained by the development step (if a rinsing step is performed, the pattern after rinsing) may be subjected to a heating step in which the pattern obtained by the development step is heated. That is, the method for producing a cured product of the present invention may include a heating step of heating the pattern obtained in the development step. The method for producing a cured product of the present invention may also include a heating step of heating a pattern obtained by another method without performing a development step, or a film obtained in the film-forming step. In the heating step, the resin such as the polyimide precursor is cyclized to form a resin such as a polyimide.
  • the heating temperature (maximum heating temperature) in the heating step is preferably 50 to 450°C, more preferably 150 to 350°C, even more preferably 150 to 250°C, still more preferably 160 to 250°C, and particularly preferably 160 to 230°C.
  • the heating step is preferably a step in which the cyclization reaction of the polyimide precursor is promoted within the pattern by the action of the base generated from the base generator due to heating.
  • the heating step is preferably carried out at a temperature increase rate of 1 to 12°C/min from the temperature at the start of heating to the maximum heating temperature.
  • the temperature increase rate is more preferably 2 to 10°C/min, and even more preferably 3 to 10°C/min.
  • the heating rate from the initial temperature to the maximum heating temperature is preferably 1 to 8°C/sec, more preferably 2 to 7°C/sec, and even more preferably 3 to 6°C/sec.
  • the temperature at the start of heating is preferably 20°C to 150°C, more preferably 20°C to 130°C, and even more preferably 25°C to 120°C.
  • the temperature at the start of heating refers to the temperature at which the process of heating up to the maximum heating temperature begins.
  • this is the temperature of the film (layer) after drying.
  • it is preferable to raise the temperature from a temperature 30 to 200°C lower than the boiling point of the solvent contained in the resin composition.
  • the heating time (heating time at the maximum heating temperature) is preferably 5 to 360 minutes, more preferably 10 to 300 minutes, and even more preferably 15 to 240 minutes.
  • the heating temperature is preferably 30°C or higher, more preferably 80°C or higher, even more preferably 100°C or higher, and particularly preferably 120°C or higher.
  • the upper limit of the heating temperature is preferably 350°C or less, more preferably 250°C or less, and even more preferably 240°C or less.
  • Heating may be performed in stages. For example, the temperature may be increased from 25°C to 120°C at a rate of 3°C/min, held at 120°C for 60 minutes, increased from 120°C to 180°C at a rate of 2°C/min, and held at 180°C for 120 minutes. It is also preferable to treat the film while irradiating it with ultraviolet light, as described in U.S. Pat. No. 9,159,547. Such a pretreatment step can improve the film properties.
  • the pretreatment step may be performed for a short period of time, preferably from 10 seconds to 2 hours, more preferably from 15 seconds to 30 minutes.
  • the pretreatment may be performed in two or more steps.
  • a first pretreatment step may be performed in the range of 100 to 150°C, followed by a second pretreatment step in the range of 150 to 200°C.
  • the material may be cooled, and in this case, the cooling rate is preferably 1 to 5° C./min.
  • the heating step is preferably performed in an atmosphere with a low oxygen concentration by flowing an inert gas such as nitrogen, helium, or argon, or by performing the heating step under reduced pressure, etc.
  • the oxygen concentration is preferably 50 ppm (volume ratio) or less, more preferably 20 ppm (volume ratio) or less.
  • the heating means in the heating step is not particularly limited, but examples thereof include a hot plate, an infrared oven, an electric heating oven, a hot air oven, and an infrared oven.
  • the pattern obtained by the development step (if a rinsing step is performed, the pattern after rinsing) may be subjected to a post-development exposure step in which the pattern after the development step is exposed to light, instead of or in addition to the heating step. That is, the method for producing a cured product of the present invention may include a post-development exposure step of exposing the pattern obtained by the development step.
  • the method for producing a cured product of the present invention may include both a heating step and a post-development exposure step, or may include only one of the heating step and the post-development exposure step.
  • the post-development exposure step for example, a reaction in which cyclization of a polyimide precursor or the like progresses due to exposure of a photobase generator to light, or a reaction in which elimination of an acid-decomposable group progresses due to exposure of a photoacid generator to light, can be promoted.
  • the exposure dose in the post-development exposure step is preferably 50 to 20,000 mJ/cm 2 , more preferably 100 to 15,000 mJ/cm 2 , in terms of exposure energy at a wavelength to which the photosensitive compound has sensitivity.
  • the post-development exposure step can be carried out using, for example, the light source used in the exposure step described above, and it is preferable to use broadband light.
  • the pattern obtained by the development step (which is preferably subjected to at least one of the heating step and the post-development exposure step) may be subjected to a metal layer forming step in which a metal layer is formed on the pattern. That is, the method for producing a cured product of the present invention preferably includes a metal layer forming step of forming a metal layer on the pattern obtained by the development step (preferably the pattern has been subjected to at least one of a heating step and a post-development exposure step).
  • the metal layer is not particularly limited and any existing metal species can be used, including copper, aluminum, nickel, vanadium, titanium, chromium, cobalt, gold, tungsten, tin, silver, and alloys containing these metals. Copper and aluminum are more preferred, and copper is even more preferred.
  • the method for forming the metal layer is not particularly limited, and existing methods can be applied.
  • the methods described in JP 2007-157879 A, JP 2001-521288 A, JP 2004-214501 A, JP 2004-101850 A, U.S. Pat. No. 7,888,181, and U.S. Pat. No. 9,177,926 can be used.
  • suitable methods include photolithography, PVD (physical vapor deposition), CVD (chemical vapor deposition), lift-off, electroplating, electroless plating, etching, printing, and combinations of these. More specific examples include patterning methods that combine sputtering, photolithography, and etching, and patterning methods that combine photolithography and electroplating.
  • Preferred plating methods include electroplating using copper sulfate or copper cyanide plating solutions.
  • Examples of fields to which the cured product manufacturing method of the present invention or the cured product can be applied include insulating films for electronic devices, interlayer insulating films for rewiring layers, stress buffer films, etc. Other examples include etching patterns for sealing films, substrate materials (base films, coverlays, and interlayer insulating films for flexible printed circuit boards), and insulating films for packaging applications such as those described above.
  • the method for producing the cured product of the present invention, or the cured product of the present invention can also be used to produce printing plates such as offset printing plates or screen printing plates, to etch molded parts, and to produce protective lacquers and dielectric layers in electronics, particularly microelectronics.
  • the laminate of the present invention refers to a structure having a plurality of layers each made of the cured product of the present invention.
  • the laminate is a laminate including two or more layers made of a cured product, and may be a laminate including three or more layers.
  • at least one is a layer made of the cured product of the present invention, and from the viewpoint of suppressing shrinkage of the cured product or deformation of the cured product associated with the shrinkage, it is also preferable that all of the layers made of the cured product contained in the laminate are layers made of the cured product of the present invention.
  • the method for producing a laminate of the present invention preferably includes the method for producing a cured product of the present invention, and more preferably includes repeating the method for producing a cured product of the present invention multiple times.
  • the laminate of the present invention preferably includes two or more layers made of a cured product, and a metal layer between any two of the layers made of the cured product.
  • the metal layer is preferably formed by the metal layer-forming step. That is, the method for producing a laminate of the present invention preferably further includes a metal layer-forming step of forming a metal layer on the layer made of the cured product, between the steps for producing a cured product that are performed multiple times. Preferred aspects of the metal layer-forming step are as described above.
  • the laminate for example, a laminate including at least a layer structure in which three layers, a layer made of a first cured product, a metal layer, and a layer made of a second cured product, are laminated in this order, can be mentioned as a preferred example. It is preferable that the layer made of the first cured product and the layer made of the second cured product are both layers made of the cured product of the present invention.
  • the resin composition of the present invention used to form the layer made of the first cured product and the resin composition of the present invention used to form the layer made of the second cured product may have the same composition or different compositions.
  • the metal layer in the laminate of the present invention is preferably used as metal wiring such as a rewiring layer.
  • the method for producing the laminate of the present invention preferably includes a lamination step.
  • the lamination process is a series of processes including (a) a film formation process (layer formation process), (b) an exposure process, (c) a development process, and (d) at least one of a heating process and a post-development exposure process, which are carried out again on the surface of the pattern (resin layer) or metal layer in this order.
  • at least one of the (a) film formation process and the (d) heating process and the post-development exposure process may be repeated.
  • the (e) metal layer formation process may be included. It goes without saying that the lamination process may further include the above-mentioned drying process, etc. as appropriate.
  • a surface activation treatment step may be performed after the exposure step, the heating step, or the metal layer formation step.
  • An example of a surface activation treatment is plasma treatment. Details of the surface activation treatment will be described later.
  • the lamination step is preferably carried out 2 to 20 times, more preferably 2 to 9 times.
  • a structure of 2 to 20 resin layers such as resin layer/metal layer/resin layer/metal layer/resin layer/metal layer, is preferred, and a structure of 2 to 9 resin layers is more preferred.
  • the above layers may be the same or different in composition, shape, film thickness, etc.
  • a cured product (resin layer) of the resin composition of the present invention is further formed to cover the metal layer.
  • a cured product (resin layer) of the resin composition of the present invention is further formed to cover the metal layer.
  • Specific examples include an embodiment in which the following steps are repeated in this order: (a) film formation step, (b) exposure step, (c) development step, (d) at least one of a heating step and a post-development exposure step, and (e) metal layer formation step; or an embodiment in which the following steps are repeated in this order: (a) film formation step, (d) at least one of a heating step and a post-development exposure step, and (e) metal layer formation step.
  • the method for producing a laminate of the present invention preferably includes a surface activation treatment step of subjecting at least a portion of the metal layer and the resin composition layer to a surface activation treatment.
  • the surface activation treatment step is usually performed after the metal layer formation step, but the resin composition layer may be subjected to the surface activation treatment step after the above-mentioned development step (preferably after at least one of the heating step and the post-development exposure step) and then the metal layer formation step may be performed.
  • the surface activation treatment may be performed on at least a portion of the metal layer, or on at least a portion of the resin composition layer after exposure, or on at least a portion of both the metal layer and the resin composition layer after exposure.
  • the surface activation treatment is preferably performed on at least a portion of the metal layer, and it is preferable to perform the surface activation treatment on part or all of the region of the metal layer on which the resin composition layer is formed on the surface. In this way, by performing the surface activation treatment on the surface of the metal layer, it is possible to improve the adhesion with the resin composition layer (film) provided on the surface.
  • the surface activation treatment is preferably performed on a part or all of the resin composition layer (resin layer) after exposure. By performing the surface activation treatment on the surface of the resin composition layer in this way, it is possible to improve the adhesion with a metal layer or a resin layer provided on the surface that has been surface-activated.
  • the resin composition layer when negative development is performed, for example, if the resin composition layer is cured, it is less susceptible to damage due to the surface treatment, and adhesion is likely to be improved.
  • the surface activation treatment can be carried out, for example, by the method described in paragraph 0415 of WO 2021/112189, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
  • the present invention also discloses a semiconductor device comprising the cured product or laminate of the present invention.
  • the present invention also discloses a method for producing a semiconductor device, which includes the method for producing the cured product of the present invention or the method for producing the laminate.
  • semiconductor devices using the resin composition of the present invention for forming an interlayer insulating film for a rewiring layer the descriptions in paragraphs 0213 to 0218 and FIG. 1 of JP-A-2016-027357 can be referred to, and the contents of these can be incorporated into this specification.
  • the resin of the present invention has a repeating unit represented by formula (1-1) and a group represented by formula (B-1).
  • X1 represents an organic group having 4 or more carbon atoms
  • Y1 represents an organic group having 4 or more carbon atoms
  • R1 each independently represents a structure represented by formula (R-1) below
  • m represents an integer of 0 to 4
  • n represents an integer of 0 or more
  • n+m is an integer of 1 or more.
  • L 1 represents a linking group having a valence of a1+1
  • a 1 represents a polymerizable group
  • a1 represents an integer of 1 or more
  • * represents a bonding site with X 1 or Y 1 in formula (1-1).
  • R 1 represents a divalent linking group
  • Z 1 represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkylene group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms or a silicon atom, when Z 1 is the alkylene group, n is 1
  • R 2 represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group, when Z 1 is the silicon atom, n is 3, and each R 2 independently represents a monovalent organic group
  • * represents a bonding site to another structure.
  • Preferred embodiments of formula (1-1) and formula (B-1) in the resin of the present invention are the same as the preferred embodiments of these formulas in the specific resin in the resin composition of the present invention described above.
  • Other preferred aspects of the resin of the present invention are the same as the preferred aspects of the specific resin described above.
  • reaction solution was transferred to a 2 L separatory funnel and diluted with 1 L of ethyl acetate. After that, the reaction solution was washed twice with 500 mL of water, twice with 300 mL of 0.5 N (mol/L) aqueous hydrochloric acid, twice with 500 mL of saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate, and 500 mL of saturated saline, and then dried over magnesium sulfate. After that, 0.02 g of p-methoxyphenol was added, and the solvent was removed using an evaporator to obtain 40 g of 3-chloropropyl methacrylate.
  • AA-2a was synthesized in the same manner as AA-1a, except that 3,3'-dihydroxybenzidine was replaced with 2,2-bis(3-amino-4-hydroxyphenyl)propane.
  • AA-3a was synthesized in the same manner as AA-1a, except that chloromethylstyrene was changed to 10-chloro-3-decyne.
  • AA-4a was synthesized in the same manner as AA-1a, except that chloromethylstyrene was replaced with the 3-chloropropyl methacrylate synthesized above.
  • the structures of AA-2a to AA-4a are shown below: The structures were confirmed to be as shown below by 1 H-NMR spectrum.
  • the mixture was cooled to 25°C and diluted with 200 g of tetrahydrofuran. Subsequently, the reaction solution was added dropwise to a mixture of 2.0 L of methanol and 0.5 L of water, stirred for 15 minutes, and then the polyimide resin was filtered. Next, the resin was reslurried in 1 L of water, filtered, and then reslurried again in 1 L of methanol, filtered, and dried under reduced pressure at 40°C for 10 hours. Subsequently, the dried resin was dissolved in 250 g of tetrahydrofuran, 40 g of ion exchange resin (MB-1: manufactured by Organo Corporation) was added, and the mixture was stirred for 4 hours.
  • MB-1 ion exchange resin
  • polyimide resin (SP-1) was a resin having a repeating unit represented by the following formula (SP-1). The structure of the repeating unit was determined from 1 H-NMR spectrum. In the following structure, the subscripts of the repeating units represent the molar ratio of each repeating unit.
  • SP-2 to SP-5, SP-9 to SP-11 Synthesis of Polyimides (SP-2 to SP-5, SP-9 to SP-11)] SP-2 to SP-5 and SP-9 to SP-11 were synthesized in the same manner as SP-1, except that the raw material diamine, amine, and acid anhydride were changed. The weight average molecular weight and number average molecular weight are shown in the table below.
  • Each polyimide is a resin having a repeating unit represented by the following formula. The structure of the repeating unit was determined from 1 H-NMR spectrum. In the following structures, the subscripts of the repeating units indicate the molar ratio of each repeating unit.
  • the mixture was stirred at a temperature ranging from 20 to 50°C for 30 minutes, after which 10 g of toluene was added.
  • the mixture was reacted at 200°C for 4 hours under a nitrogen flow and then cooled to 25°C. Subsequently, 2.36 g (16.34 mmol) of 1-chloro-2-octane, 19.92 g (144 mmol) of potassium carbonate, and 2.39 g (14 mmol) of potassium iodide were added, and the mixture was reacted at 110 ° C. for 15 hours.
  • the resin was reslurried in 1 L of water and filtered, and then reslurried again in 1 L of methanol and filtered, and dried under reduced pressure at 40 ° C. for 8 hours.
  • the dried resin was dissolved in 300 g of tetrahydrofuran, and 40 g of ion exchange resin (MB-1: manufactured by Organo Corporation) was added. The mixture was stirred for 4 hours. The ion exchange resin was removed by filtration, and then the polyimide resin was precipitated in 2 L of methanol and stirred for 15 minutes. The polyimide resin was collected by filtration and dried at 45°C under reduced pressure for 1 day to obtain polyimide resin (SP-6).
  • polyimide resin SP-6 had a weight average molecular weight of 18,900 and a number average molecular weight of 7,800.
  • Polyimide (SP-6) is a resin having a repeating unit represented by the following formula (SP-6). The structure of the repeating unit was determined from 1 H-NMR spectrum. In the following structure, the subscripts of the repeating units indicate the molar ratio of each repeating unit.
  • SP-7 Synthesis of Polyimide (SP-7)
  • SP-7 was synthesized in the same manner as SP-6, except that the diamine raw material and 4-(chloromethyl)styrene were changed to 1-chlorododecane and 3-chloropropyl methacrylate.
  • the polyimide resin SP-7 had a weight average molecular weight of 25,100 and a number average molecular weight of 9,200.
  • Polyimide (SP-7) is a resin having a repeating unit represented by the following formula (SP-7). The structure of the repeating unit was determined from 1 H-NMR spectrum. In the following structure, the subscripts of the repeating units represent the molar ratio of each repeating unit.
  • the mixture was stirred at a temperature ranging from 20 to 50°C for 30 minutes, after which 10 g of toluene was added.
  • the mixture was reacted at 200°C for 4 hours under a nitrogen flow and then cooled to 25°C.
  • the above-synthesized 6-maleimidohexanoic acid chloride THF solution (37.5 mmol), 6.13 g of pyridine (77.5 mmol), and 0.10 g of 2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine 1-oxyl free radical were added, and the mixture was reacted at 25°C for 2 hours, then heated to 45°C, and stirred for an additional 10 hours.
  • the reaction solution was then cooled to 25°C, diluted with 200 g of tetrahydrofuran, and added dropwise to a mixture of 2.0 L of methanol and 0.5 L of water. The mixture was stirred for 15 minutes, and the polyimide resin was filtered. Next, the above resin was reslurried in 1 L of water and filtered, and then reslurried again in 1 L of methanol and filtered, and dried under reduced pressure at 40°C for 10 hours. Next, the above resin was diluted with 200 g of tetrahydrofuran, and added dropwise to a mixture of 2.0 L of methanol and 0.5 L of water. The mixture was stirred for 15 minutes, and the polyimide resin was filtered.
  • the above resin was reslurried in 1 L of water, filtered, and then reslurried again in 1 L of methanol, filtered, and dried under reduced pressure at 40°C for 10 hours.
  • the dried resin was dissolved in 250 g of tetrahydrofuran, and 40 g of an ion exchange resin (MB-1, manufactured by Organo Corporation) was added. The mixture was stirred for 4 hours.
  • the ion exchange resin was removed by filtration, and then the polyimide resin was precipitated in 2 L of methanol and stirred for 15 minutes.
  • the polyimide resin was collected by filtration and dried under reduced pressure at 45°C for 1 day to obtain polyimide resin (SP-8).
  • the weight average molecular weight of the resulting polyimide resin SP-8 was 21,000, and the number average molecular weight was 8,500.
  • the ethylenically unsaturated bond value was calculated by the following method. 0.1 g of the resin was dissolved in 0.9 g of deuterated dimethyl sulfoxide, and then the solution was measured by 1 H-NMR to calculate the amount of ethylenically unsaturated bonds. The number of 1 H-NMR measurements was 640. Tetramethylsilane was used as a standard substance, and the molar amount of ethylenically unsaturated bonds in the resin was calculated from the ratio of the integrated intensity of the peak attributable to the ethylenically unsaturated bond in the 1 H-NMR chart to the integrated intensity of the peak attributable to the standard substance, the amount of the standard substance, and the amount of the resin.
  • the alkynyl value was calculated by the following method: 0.1 g of resin was dissolved in 0.9 g of deuterated dimethyl sulfoxide or 1.9 g of deuterated chloroform, and then measured by 1 H-NMR to calculate the amount of ethylenically unsaturated bonds. The number of 1 H-NMR measurements was 640. Tetramethylsilane was used as a reference substance, and the molar amount of ethylenically unsaturated bonds in the resin was calculated from the ratio of the integrated intensity of the peak attributable to the ethylenically unsaturated bond in the 1 H-NMR chart to the integrated intensity of the peak attributable to the reference substance, the amount of the reference substance, and the amount of the resin.
  • Synthesis Example SA-1 Synthesis of Polyimide Precursor (SA-1) 7.42 g (34.0 mmol) of pyromellitic anhydride, 17.7 g (34.0 mmol) of 4,4'-(4,4'-isopropylidenediphenoxy)bis(phthalic anhydride), 17.8 g (137 mmol) of 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate, 0.05 g of hydroquinone, 22.8 g (289 mmol) of pyridine, and 75 g of diglyme were mixed and stirred at 60°C for 5 hours to produce pyromellitic anhydride and the diester of 4,4'-(4,4''-isopropylidenediphenoxy)bis(phthalic anhydride) and 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate.
  • polyimide precursor (SA-1) was then precipitated in 4 L of water, and the water-polyimide precursor mixture was stirred at 500 rpm for 15 minutes. The polyimide precursor was collected by filtration, stirred again in 4 L of water for 30 minutes, and filtered again. The resulting polyimide precursor was then dried under reduced pressure at 45°C for 2 days to obtain polyimide precursor (SA-1).
  • SA-1 had a weight-average molecular weight of 30,600 and a number-average molecular weight of 12,800.
  • Polyimide precursor (SA-1) is a resin having two repeating units represented by the following formula (SA-1). The structure of the repeating units was determined from 1 H-NMR spectrum. In the following structure, the subscripts of the repeating units represent the molar ratio of each repeating unit.
  • SA-2 Synthesis of Polyimide Precursor (SA-2)] SA-2 was synthesized in the same manner as SA-1.
  • the weight-average molecular weight of SA-2 was 25,800 and the number-average molecular weight was 11,000.
  • Polyimide precursor (SA-2) is a resin having two repeating units represented by the following formula (SA-2).
  • the structure of the repeating units was determined from 1 H-NMR spectrum. In the following structure, the subscripts of the repeating units represent the molar ratio of each repeating unit.
  • polyimide precursor (SA-3) was a resin having two repeating units represented by the following formula (SA-3). The structure of the repeating units was determined from 1 H-NMR spectrum. In the following structure, the subscripts of the repeating units represent the molar ratio of each repeating unit.
  • the ethylenically unsaturated bond valence and alkynyl group value are measured by the same methods as those used in SP-1 to SP-11. From the structure of each resin, it is considered that the ethylenically unsaturated bond value in each resin is the same as the polymerizable group value and the radically polymerizable group value.
  • the resulting white solid was collected and vacuum-dried at 40°C to obtain 85.8 g of A-1.
  • the weight-average molecular weight (Mw) of A-1 was 32,200, and the number-average molecular weight (Mn) was 12,800.
  • 1 H-NMR spectroscopy confirmed that the structure represented by the following formula (A-1) was the main component of A-1: The 1 H-NMR measurement results showed that the introduction rate of crosslinking groups was 50%.
  • each example the components shown in the table below were mixed to obtain a resin composition.
  • the components shown in the table below were mixed to obtain a comparative composition.
  • the content of each component shown in the table is the amount (parts by mass) shown in the "Amount Added" column of each column in the table.
  • the resulting resin composition and comparative composition were filtered under pressure using a polytetrafluoroethylene filter with a pore width of 0.5 ⁇ m.
  • "-" indicates that the composition does not contain the corresponding component.
  • B-1 1,12-dodecanediol dimethacrylate (melting point: 25°C or less)
  • B-2 1,9-nonanediol dimethacrylate (melting point: 25°C or less)
  • B-3 1,10-decanediol dimethacrylate (melting point: 25°C or less)
  • B-4 SR-209: SR-209 (manufactured by Sartomer, melting point: 25°C or less)
  • B-5 ADPH: Dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd., melting point: 25°C or less)
  • OXE-01 IRGACURE OXE 01 (manufactured by BASF)
  • OXE-02 IRGACURE OXE 02 (manufactured by BASF)
  • OXE-03 IRGACURE OXE 03 (manufactured by BASF)
  • Irgcue 784 manufactured by BASF
  • ⁇ CPI-310B manufactured by San-Apro Co., Ltd.
  • F-1 to F-3 Compounds having the following structure
  • F-4 X-12-1293 (Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.)
  • F-5 KBM-51073 (Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.)
  • F-6 X-12-1214A (Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.)
  • G-1 1,4-benzoquinone
  • G-2 4-methoxyphenol
  • G-3 1,4-dihydroxybenzene
  • G-4 Compound of the following structure
  • J-1 Nonion E-212 (manufactured by NOF Corporation)
  • J-2 MEGAFACE EFS-801 (manufactured by Dainippon Ink Co., Ltd.)
  • J-3 Shin-Etsu Silicone KF6028 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.)
  • the transmittance of light having a wavelength of 365 nm was 30% or more.
  • the film-like cured product was obtained by applying the resin composition to a silicon wafer, drying it at 100°C for 5 minutes, exposing the entire surface to i-rays with an exposure energy of 500 mJ/ cm2 , and then heating it at a heating rate of 10°C/min in a nitrogen atmosphere and at 230°C for 180 minutes.
  • the transmittance was measured using an ultraviolet-visible spectrophotometer (Cary-5 spectrophotometer manufactured by Varian).
  • the resin composition layer on the copper substrate was exposed to light using a stepper (Nikon NSR 2005 i9C) with an exposure energy of 500 mJ/ cm2 using a 100 ⁇ m square photomask, and then developed for 60 seconds with the developer listed in the "Development Method (Developer)" column in the table, followed by rinsing with propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA) for 15 seconds to obtain a 100 ⁇ m square resin layer. Furthermore, the temperature was increased at a rate of 10°C/min under a nitrogen atmosphere until the temperature described in the "Temperature” column of the “Curing Conditions” in the table was reached.
  • PGMEA propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate
  • Each resin composition or comparative composition prepared in each Example and Comparative Example was applied to a 12-inch silicon wafer by spin coating to form a resin composition layer.
  • the silicon wafer to which the resulting resin composition layer was applied was dried on a hot plate at 100°C for 5 minutes, forming a resin composition layer with a uniform thickness of 15 ⁇ m on the silicon wafer.
  • the resin composition layer on the silicon wafer was exposed to light using a stepper (Nikon NSR 2005 i9C) at an exposure energy of 500 mJ/ cm2 .
  • the exposed resin composition layer (resin layer) was heated at a heating rate of 10°C/min under a nitrogen atmosphere and heated at the temperature specified in the "Temperature” column under “Curing Conditions” in the table for the time specified in the "Curing Time” column under “Curing Conditions” in the table to obtain a cured layer (resin layer) of the resin composition layer.
  • the cured layer (resin film) after curing was immersed in a 4.9% by mass aqueous solution of hydrofluoric acid, and the cured film was peeled off from the silicon wafer.
  • the relative permittivity (Dk) and dielectric loss tangent (Df) of the film sample at 28 GHz were measured by a resonator perturbation method.
  • the dielectric loss tangent was evaluated according to the following evaluation criteria, and the evaluation results are shown in the "Dielectric loss tangent (Df)" column in the table.
  • C The dielectric loss tangent (Df) was 0.08 or more.
  • the resin composition or comparative composition prepared in each Example and Comparative Example was applied to a copper substrate by spin coating to form a layer of the resin composition or comparative composition.
  • the copper substrate on which the resulting resin composition layer or comparative composition layer was formed was dried on a hot plate at 100°C for 5 minutes to form a 5 ⁇ m thick, uniform resin composition layer or comparative composition layer on the copper substrate.
  • the resin composition layer or comparative composition layer on the copper substrate was exposed to i-rays using a stepper (Nikon NSR 2005 i9C) with an exposure energy of 500 mJ/ cm2 and a photomask with a 100 ⁇ m square unmasked area.
  • the resin composition layer or comparative composition layer on the copper substrate was then developed for 60 seconds with the developer listed in the "Development Method (Developer)" column in the table, and rinsed with propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA) to obtain a 100 ⁇ m square resin layer. Furthermore, the coating was heated in a heating oven under a nitrogen atmosphere at the temperature and for the curing time described in the "Curing Conditions” column of the table to form a resin layer (pattern). After the resin layer and copper substrate were left in a thermostatic chamber at 175°C for 1000 hours, cross-sectional SEM (scanning electron microscope) measurement was carried out to evaluate the void area ratio between the copper substrate and the resin layer. The void area ratio was calculated using the following formula.
  • the obtained void area ratio was evaluated according to the following evaluation criteria. The evaluation results are shown in the "Insulation reliability" column in the table. The smaller the void area ratio, the better the reliability of the cured film after HTS (High Temperature Storage Test). It can be said that voids are less likely to occur between the metal layer and the cured product even after a long period of time has passed, and the better the insulation reliability.
  • -Evaluation criteria A: The void area ratio was 0.1% or less.
  • B The void area ratio was more than 0.1% and 0.3% or less.
  • C The void area ratio exceeded 0.3%.
  • the resin composition or comparative composition prepared in each Example and Comparative Example was applied to a copper substrate by spin coating to form a layer of the resin composition or comparative composition.
  • the copper substrate on which the resulting resin composition layer or comparative composition layer was formed was dried on a hot plate at 100°C for 5 minutes to form a 5 ⁇ m thick, uniform resin composition layer or comparative composition layer on the copper substrate.
  • the resin composition layer or comparative composition layer on the copper substrate was exposed to i-rays using a stepper (Nikon NSR 2005 i9C) with an exposure energy of 500 mJ/ cm2 and a photomask with a 100 ⁇ m square unmasked area.
  • the resin composition layer or comparative composition layer on the copper substrate was then developed for 60 seconds with the developer listed in the "Development Method (Developer)" column in the table, and rinsed with propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA) to obtain a 100 ⁇ m square resin layer. Furthermore, the composition was heated in a nitrogen atmosphere at the temperature described in the "Temperature” column of the “Curing Conditions” in the table for the time described in the “Curing Time” column of the “Curing Conditions” in the table using a heating oven to form a resin layer (pattern). The resin composition layer and copper substrate were left in a chamber at 100°C and 100% RH for 100 hours.
  • the obtained void area ratio value was evaluated according to the following evaluation criteria. The smaller the void area ratio, the better the PCT (wet heat) resistance of the cured film, and the less likely voids are to occur between the metal layer and the cured product even after a long period of time has passed.
  • B The void area ratio was more than 0.2% and 0.5% or less.
  • C The void area ratio was more than 0.5% and 1% or less.
  • D The void area ratio exceeded 1%.
  • Example 101 The resin composition used in Example 1 was applied in the form of a layer by spin coating to the surface of the thin copper layer of a resin substrate having a thin copper layer formed on its surface, and dried at 100°C for 4 minutes to form a resin composition layer with a thickness of 20 ⁇ m. This was then exposed using a stepper (Nikon Corporation, NSR1505 i6). The exposure was carried out at a wavelength of 365 nm through a mask (a binary mask with a 1:1 line-and-space pattern and a line width of 10 ⁇ m). After exposure, the substrate was heated at 100°C for 4 minutes.
  • the substrate was developed with cyclohexanone for 2 minutes and rinsed with PGMEA for 30 seconds to obtain a layer pattern.
  • the temperature was increased at a rate of 10° C./min in a nitrogen atmosphere, and after reaching 230° C., the temperature was maintained at 230° C. for 3 hours to form an interlayer insulating film for a rewiring layer.
  • This interlayer insulating film for a rewiring layer had excellent insulating properties. Furthermore, when semiconductor devices were manufactured using these interlayer insulating films for rewiring layers, it was confirmed that they operated without any problems.
  • Example 101 evaluation was carried out in the same manner as in Example 101, except that the resin composition used in Example 1 was changed to the compositions used in Examples 2 to 18, respectively.
  • the interlayer insulating film for the redistribution layer had excellent insulating properties, and the semiconductor device operated without any problems.

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Polymers & Plastics (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Spectroscopy & Molecular Physics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Macromonomer-Based Addition Polymer (AREA)

Abstract

Provided are: a resin composition for use in the formation of an insulating film, said resin composition containing a polymerization initiator and a resin that is selected from the group consisting of polyimides, polyimide precursors, polybenzoxazoles, and polybenzoxazole precursors and contains a polymerizable group and an alkenyl group in which a hydrogen atom is optionally substituted with a monovalent substituent group; a cured product obtained by curing the resin composition and a production method therefor; a laminate including the cured product and a production method therefor; a semiconductor device and a production method therefor; and a novel resin.

Description

樹脂組成物、硬化物、積層体、硬化物の製造方法、積層体の製造方法、半導体デバイスの製造方法、半導体デバイス、及び、樹脂Resin composition, cured product, laminate, method for manufacturing cured product, method for manufacturing laminate, method for manufacturing semiconductor device, semiconductor device, and resin

 本発明は、樹脂組成物、硬化物、積層体、硬化物の製造方法、積層体の製造方法、半導体デバイスの製造方法、半導体デバイス、及び、樹脂に関する。 The present invention relates to a resin composition, a cured product, a laminate, a method for producing a cured product, a method for producing a laminate, a method for producing a semiconductor device, a semiconductor device, and a resin.

 現代では様々な分野において、樹脂を含む樹脂組成物から製造された樹脂材料を活用することが行われている。
 例えば、ポリイミド等の複素環含有ポリマーは、耐熱性及び絶縁性等に優れるため、様々な用途に適用されている。上記用途としては、特に限定されないが、実装用の半導体デバイスを例に挙げると、絶縁膜や封止材の材料、又は、保護膜としての利用が挙げられる。また、フレキシブル基板のベースフィルムやカバーレイなどとしても用いられている。
BACKGROUND ART Nowadays, resin materials produced from resin compositions containing resins are being utilized in various fields.
For example, heterocycle-containing polymers such as polyimides have excellent heat resistance and insulating properties, and are therefore used in a variety of applications. Examples of such applications include, but are not limited to, insulating films, sealing materials, or protective films for semiconductor devices used for packaging. They are also used as base films or coverlays for flexible substrates.

 例えば上述した用途において、ポリイミド等の複素環含有ポリマーは、ポリイミド又はポリイミドの前駆体を含む樹脂組成物の形態で用いられる。
 このような樹脂組成物を、例えば塗布等により基材に適用して感光膜を形成し、その後、必要に応じて露光、現像、加熱等を行うことにより、硬化物を基材上に形成することができる。
 樹脂組成物は、公知の塗布方法等により適用可能であるため、例えば、適用される樹脂組成物の適用時の形状、大きさ、適用位置等の設計の自由度が高いなど、製造上の適応性に優れるといえる。ポリイミド等の複素環含有ポリマーが有する高い性能に加え、このような製造上の適応性に優れる観点から、上述の樹脂組成物の産業上の応用展開がますます期待されている。
For example, in the above-mentioned applications, heterocycle-containing polymers such as polyimides are used in the form of resin compositions containing polyimides or polyimide precursors.
Such a resin composition is applied to a substrate by, for example, coating to form a photosensitive film, and then, if necessary, exposure, development, heating, etc. are carried out to form a cured product on the substrate.
Since the resin composition can be applied by a known coating method, etc., it can be said that the resin composition has excellent adaptability in manufacturing, for example, there is a high degree of freedom in designing the shape, size, application position, etc. of the applied resin composition when it is applied. In addition to the high performance of heterocycle-containing polymers such as polyimides, from the viewpoint of such excellent adaptability in manufacturing, industrial application development of the above-mentioned resin composition is expected to become increasingly widespread.

 例えば、特許文献1には一定のパターンを有するように予め形成された導体と、上記導体が熱硬化性樹脂の表層に移され、上記熱硬化性樹脂を硬化させることによって形成された樹脂基板 とを含む回路基板であって、上記導体の表面と上記樹脂基板の表面とが面一であり 、かつ上記熱硬化性樹脂が粉末状であることを特徴とする、回路基板が記載されている。 For example, Patent Document 1 describes a circuit board that includes a conductor that has been pre-formed to have a certain pattern, and a resin substrate that has been formed by transferring the conductor to the surface of a thermosetting resin and then curing the thermosetting resin, characterized in that the surface of the conductor and the surface of the resin substrate are flush with each other, and the thermosetting resin is in powder form.

国際公開第2008/044382号International Publication No. 2008/044382

 ポリイミドを含む硬化物において、配線パターンの微細化に伴い、樹脂を含む部材として膨張しにくい部材を用いることにより、不具合の発生を抑制したいという要求がある。 In cured products containing polyimide, as wiring patterns become finer, there is a demand to prevent defects by using resin-containing components that are less likely to expand.

 本発明は金属との密着性に優れた硬化物が得られる樹脂組成物、上記樹脂組成物を硬化してなる硬化物、上記硬化物を含む積層体、上記硬化物の製造方法、上記積層体の製造方法、上記硬化物の製造方法を含む半導体デバイスの製造方法、及び、上記硬化物を含む半導体デバイスを提供することを目的とする。
 また、本発明は新規な樹脂を提供することを目的とする。
The present invention aims to provide a resin composition that can give a cured product that has excellent adhesion to metals, a cured product obtained by curing the resin composition, a laminate including the cured product, a method for producing the cured product, a method for producing the laminate, a method for producing a semiconductor device that includes the method for producing the cured product, and a semiconductor device that includes the cured product.
Another object of the present invention is to provide a novel resin.

 本発明の代表的な実施態様の例を以下に示す。
<1> ポリイミド、ポリイミド前駆体、ポリベンゾオキサゾール、及び、ポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体からなる群より選ばれた樹脂であって、水素原子が1価の置換基で置換されていてもよいアルキニル基、及び、重合性基を有する樹脂と、
 重合開始剤と、を含み、
 絶縁膜の形成に用いられる
 樹脂組成物。
<2> 上記アルキニル基が、内部アルキンから水素原子を1つ除いた基である、<1>に記載の樹脂組成物。
<3> 上記樹脂が、ポリイミド、及び、ポリベンゾオキサゾールからなる群より選ばれた樹脂である、<1>又は<2>に記載の樹脂組成物。
<4> 上記アルキニル基が、上記樹脂の側鎖又は主鎖末端に存在する、<1>~<3>のいずれか1つに記載の樹脂組成物。
<5> 上記樹脂が、上記アルキニル基を含む基として、下記式(B-1)で表される基を有する、<1>~<4>のいずれか1つに記載の樹脂組成物。
 式(B-1)中、Rは2価の連結基を表し、Zは置換若しくは無置換の炭素数1~30のアルキレン基、又は、ケイ素原子を表し、Zが上記アルキレン基である場合にはnは1であり、且つ、Rは水素原子又は1価の有機基を表し、Zが上記ケイ素原子である場合にはnは3であり、且つ、Rはそれぞれ独立に、1価の有機基を表し、*は他の構造との結合部位を表す。
<6> 上記樹脂のアルキニル基価が、0.01~1.0mmol/gである、<1>~<5>のいずれか1つに記載の樹脂組成物。
<7> 上記樹脂の重合性基価が0.2~4.0mmol/gである、<1>~<6>のいずれか1つに記載の樹脂組成物。
<8> 上記樹脂組成物を用いて、膜厚10μmの膜状の硬化物を形成した場合、上記硬化物の波長365nmの光の透過率が15%以上である、<1>~<7>のいずれか1つに記載の樹脂組成物。
<9> 上記樹脂が、下記式(1-1)で表される繰返し単位を含む、<1>~<8>のいずれか1つに記載の樹脂組成物。
 式(1-1)中、Xは炭素数4以上の有機基を表し、Yは炭素数4以上の有機基を表し、Rはそれぞれ独立に、下記式(R-1)で表される構造を表し、mは0~4の整数を表し、nは0以上の整数を表し、n+mは1以上の整数である。
 式(R-1)中、Lはa1+1価の連結基を表し、Aは重合性基を表し、a1は1以上の整数を表し、*は式(1-1)中のX又はYとの結合部位を表す。
<10> 式(1-1)における式(R-1)におけるAの少なくとも1つが、ビニルフェニル基である、<9>に記載の樹脂組成物。
<11> 式(1-1)におけるX及びYが、それぞれ、下記式(V-1)~式(V-4)のいずれかで表される構造から2以上の水素原子を除いた構造を含む、<9>又は<10>に記載の樹脂組成物。
 式(V-2)中、RX1はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基又はハロゲン化アルキル基である。
 式(V-3)中、RX2及びRX3はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又は置換基を表し、RX2とRX3は結合して環構造を形成してもよい。
<12> 上記樹脂のラジカル重合性基価が、0.2~3.0mmol/gである、<1>~<11>のいずれか1つに記載の樹脂組成物。
<13> 金属若しくはその塩、又は、金属錯体を含む、<1>~<12>のいずれか1つに記載の樹脂組成物。
<14> 金属錯体を含む、<1>~<13>のいずれか1つに記載の樹脂組成物。
<15> 融点が60℃以下である重合性化合物を更に含む、<1>~<14>のいずれか1つに記載の樹脂組成物。
<16> アゾール化合物及びシランカップリング剤を更に含む、<1>~<15>のいずれか1つに記載の樹脂組成物。
<17> 1気圧における沸点が100~260℃である溶剤を含む、<1>~<16>のいずれか1つに記載の樹脂組成物。
<18> 上記沸点が100~260℃である溶剤の含有量が、組成物の全質量に対して40質量%以上である、<17>に記載の樹脂組成物。
<19> 上記沸点が100~260℃である溶剤を2種以上含む、<17>又は<16>に記載の樹脂組成物。
<20> 再配線層用層間絶縁膜の形成に用いられる、<1>~<19>のいずれか1つに記載の樹脂組成物。
<21> <1>~<20>のいずれか1つに記載の樹脂組成物を硬化してなる硬化物。
<22> <21>に記載の硬化物からなる層を2層以上含み、上記硬化物からなる層同士のいずれかの間に金属層を含む積層体。
<23> <1>~<20>のいずれか1つに記載の樹脂組成物を基材上に適用して膜を形成する膜形成工程を含む、硬化物の製造方法。
<24> 上記膜を選択的に露光する露光工程及び上記膜を現像液を用いて現像してパターンを形成する現像工程を含む、<23>に記載の硬化物の製造方法。
<25> 上記膜を50~450℃で加熱する加熱工程を含む、<23>又は<24>に記載の硬化物の製造方法。
<26> <23>~<25>のいずれか1つに記載の硬化物の製造方法を含む、積層体の製造方法。
<27> <23>~<25>のいずれか1つに記載の硬化物の製造方法を含む、半導体デバイスの製造方法。
<28> <21>に記載の硬化物を含む、半導体デバイス。
<29> 式(1-1)で表される繰返し単位、及び、式(B-1)で表される基を有する、
 樹脂。
 式(1-1)中、Xは炭素数4以上の有機基を表し、Yは炭素数4以上の有機基を表し、Rはそれぞれ独立に、下記式(R-1)で表される構造を表し、mは0~4の整数を表し、nは0以上の整数を表し、n+mは1以上の整数である。
 式(R-1)中、Lはa1+1価の連結基を表し、Aは重合性基を表し、a1は1以上の整数を表し、*は式(1-1)中のX又はYとの結合部位を表す。
 式(B-1)中、Rは2価の連結基を表し、Zは置換若しくは無置換の炭素数1~30のアルキレン基、又は、ケイ素原子を表し、Zが上記アルキレン基である場合にはnは1であり、且つ、Rは水素原子又は1価の有機基を表し、Zが上記ケイ素原子である場合にはnは3であり、且つ、Rはそれぞれ独立に、1価の有機基を表し、*は他の構造との結合部位を表す。
Examples of typical embodiments of the present invention are given below.
<1> A resin selected from the group consisting of polyimide, polyimide precursor, polybenzoxazole, and polybenzoxazole precursor, the resin having an alkynyl group in which a hydrogen atom may be substituted with a monovalent substituent, and a polymerizable group;
a polymerization initiator,
A resin composition used to form an insulating film.
<2> The resin composition according to <1>, wherein the alkynyl group is a group in which one hydrogen atom has been removed from an internal alkyne.
<3> The resin composition according to <1> or <2>, wherein the resin is selected from the group consisting of polyimide and polybenzoxazole.
<4> The resin composition according to any one of <1> to <3>, wherein the alkynyl group is present in a side chain or at a terminal of a main chain of the resin.
<5> The resin composition according to any one of <1> to <4>, wherein the resin has a group represented by the following formula (B-1) as the alkynyl group-containing group:
In formula (B-1), R 1 represents a divalent linking group, Z 1 represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkylene group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms or a silicon atom, when Z 1 is the alkylene group, n is 1, and R 2 represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group, when Z 1 is the silicon atom, n is 3, and each R 2 independently represents a monovalent organic group, and * represents a bonding site to another structure.
<6> The resin composition according to any one of <1> to <5>, wherein the resin has an alkynyl group value of 0.01 to 1.0 mmol/g.
<7> The resin composition according to any one of <1> to <6>, wherein the resin has a polymerizable group value of 0.2 to 4.0 mmol/g.
<8> The resin composition according to any one of <1> to <7>, wherein when the resin composition is used to form a film-like cured product having a film thickness of 10 μm, the cured product has a transmittance of 15% or more at a wavelength of 365 nm.
<9> The resin composition according to any one of <1> to <8>, wherein the resin contains a repeating unit represented by the following formula (1-1):
In formula (1-1), X1 represents an organic group having 4 or more carbon atoms, Y1 represents an organic group having 4 or more carbon atoms, R1 each independently represents a structure represented by formula (R-1) below, m represents an integer of 0 to 4, n represents an integer of 0 or more, and n+m is an integer of 1 or more.
In formula (R-1), L 1 represents a linking group having a valence of a1+1, A 1 represents a polymerizable group, a1 represents an integer of 1 or more, and * represents a bonding site with X 1 or Y 1 in formula (1-1).
<10> The resin composition according to <9>, wherein at least one of A 1 in formula (R-1) in formula (1-1) is a vinylphenyl group.
<11> The resin composition according to <9> or <10>, wherein X1 and Y1 in formula (1-1) each include a structure in which two or more hydrogen atoms have been removed from a structure represented by any one of the following formulas (V-1) to (V-4):
In formula (V-2), R 1 and X1 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or a halogenated alkyl group.
In formula (V-3), R 1 X2 and R 1 X3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and R 1 X2 and R 1 X3 may be bonded to form a ring structure.
<12> The resin composition according to any one of <1> to <11>, wherein the resin has a radical polymerizable group value of 0.2 to 3.0 mmol/g.
<13> The resin composition according to any one of <1> to <12>, containing a metal or a salt thereof, or a metal complex.
<14> The resin composition according to any one of <1> to <13>, which contains a metal complex.
<15> The resin composition according to any one of <1> to <14>, further comprising a polymerizable compound having a melting point of 60°C or lower.
<16> The resin composition according to any one of <1> to <15>, further comprising an azole compound and a silane coupling agent.
<17> The resin composition according to any one of <1> to <16>, containing a solvent having a boiling point of 100 to 260°C at 1 atmosphere.
<18> The resin composition according to <17>, wherein the content of the solvent having a boiling point of 100 to 260°C is 40 mass% or more relative to the total mass of the composition.
<19> The resin composition according to <17> or <16>, comprising two or more solvents having a boiling point of 100 to 260°C.
<20> The resin composition according to any one of <1> to <19>, which is used for forming an interlayer insulating film for a rewiring layer.
<21> A cured product obtained by curing the resin composition according to any one of <1> to <20>.
<22> A laminate comprising two or more layers made of the cured product according to <21>, and a metal layer between any two adjacent layers made of the cured product.
<23> A method for producing a cured product, comprising a film-forming step of applying the resin composition according to any one of <1> to <20> onto a substrate to form a film.
<24> The method for producing a cured product according to <23>, comprising: an exposure step of selectively exposing the film to light; and a development step of developing the film with a developer to form a pattern.
<25> A method for producing a cured product according to <23> or <24>, comprising a heating step of heating the film at 50 to 450°C.
<26> A method for producing a laminate, comprising the method for producing a cured product according to any one of <23> to <25>.
<27> A method for producing a semiconductor device, comprising the method for producing a cured product according to any one of <23> to <25>.
<28> A semiconductor device comprising the cured product according to <21>.
<29> A copolymer having a repeating unit represented by formula (1-1) and a group represented by formula (B-1):
resin.
In formula (1-1), X1 represents an organic group having 4 or more carbon atoms, Y1 represents an organic group having 4 or more carbon atoms, R1 each independently represents a structure represented by formula (R-1) below, m represents an integer of 0 to 4, n represents an integer of 0 or more, and n+m is an integer of 1 or more.
In formula (R-1), L 1 represents a linking group having a valence of a1+1, A 1 represents a polymerizable group, a1 represents an integer of 1 or more, and * represents a bonding site with X 1 or Y 1 in formula (1-1).
In formula (B-1), R 1 represents a divalent linking group, Z 1 represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkylene group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms or a silicon atom, when Z 1 is the alkylene group, n is 1, and R 2 represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group, when Z 1 is the silicon atom, n is 3, and each R 2 independently represents a monovalent organic group, and * represents a bonding site to another structure.

 本発明によれば、金属との密着性に優れた硬化物が得られる樹脂組成物、上記樹脂組成物を硬化してなる硬化物、上記硬化物を含む積層体、上記硬化物の製造方法、上記積層体の製造方法、上記硬化物の製造方法を含む半導体デバイスの製造方法、及び、上記硬化物を含む半導体デバイスが提供される。
 また、本発明によれば、新規な樹脂が提供される。
According to the present invention, there are provided a resin composition that can give a cured product that has excellent adhesion to metals, a cured product obtained by curing the resin composition, a laminate that includes the cured product, a method for producing the cured product, a method for producing the laminate, a method for producing a semiconductor device that includes the method for producing the cured product, and a semiconductor device that includes the cured product.
The present invention also provides a novel resin.

 以下、本発明の主要な実施形態について説明する。しかしながら、本発明は、明示した実施形態に限られるものではない。
 本明細書において「~」という記号を用いて表される数値範囲は、「~」の前後に記載される数値をそれぞれ下限値及び上限値として含む範囲を意味する。
 本明細書において「工程」との語は、独立した工程だけではなく、その工程の所期の作用が達成できる限りにおいて、他の工程と明確に区別できない工程も含む意味である。
 本明細書における基(原子団)の表記において、置換及び無置換を記していない表記は、置換基を有しない基(原子団)と共に置換基を有する基(原子団)をも包含する。例えば、「アルキル基」とは、置換基を有しないアルキル基(無置換アルキル基)のみならず、置換基を有するアルキル基(置換アルキル基)をも包含する。
 本明細書において「露光」とは、特に断らない限り、光を用いた露光のみならず、電子線、イオンビーム等の粒子線を用いた露光も含む。また、露光に用いられる光としては、水銀灯の輝線スペクトル、エキシマレーザーに代表される遠紫外線、極紫外線(EUV光)、X線、電子線等の活性光線又は放射線が挙げられる。
 本明細書において、「(メタ)アクリレート」は、「アクリレート」及び「メタクリレート」の両方、又は、いずれかを意味し、「(メタ)アクリル」は、「アクリル」及び「メタクリル」の両方、又は、いずれかを意味し、「(メタ)アクリロイル」は、「アクリロイル」及び「メタクリロイル」の両方、又は、いずれかを意味する。
 本明細書において、構造式中のMeはメチル基を表し、Etはエチル基を表し、Buはブチル基を表し、Phはフェニル基を表す。
 本明細書において、全固形分とは、組成物の全成分から溶剤を除いた成分の総質量をいう。また本明細書において、固形分濃度とは、組成物の総質量に対する、溶剤を除く他の成分の質量百分率である。
 本明細書において、重量平均分子量(Mw)及び数平均分子量(Mn)は、特に述べない限り、ゲル浸透クロマトグラフィ(GPC)法を用いて測定した値であり、ポリスチレン換算値として定義される。本明細書において、重量平均分子量(Mw)及び数平均分子量(Mn)は、例えば、HLC-8220GPC(東ソー(株)製)を用い、カラムとしてガードカラムHZ-L、TSKgel Super HZM-M、TSKgel Super HZ4000、TSKgel Super HZ3000、及び、TSKgel Super HZ2000(以上、東ソー(株)製)を直列に連結して用いることによって求めることができる。それらの分子量は特に述べない限り、溶離液としてNMP(N-メチル-2-ピロリドン)を用いて測定したものとする。ただし、溶解性が低い場合など、溶離液としてNMPが適していない場合にはTHF(テトラヒドロフラン)を用いることもできる。また、GPC測定における検出は特に述べない限り、UV線(紫外線)の波長254nm検出器を使用したものとする。
 本明細書において、積層体を構成する各層の位置関係について、「上」又は「下」と記載したときには、注目している複数の層のうち基準となる層の上側又は下側に他の層があればよい。すなわち、基準となる層と上記他の層の間に、更に第3の層や要素が介在していてもよく、基準となる層と上記他の層は接している必要はない。特に断らない限り、基材に対し層が積み重なっていく方向を「上」と称し、又は、樹脂組成物層がある場合には、基材から樹脂組成物層へ向かう方向を「上」と称し、その反対方向を「下」と称する。なお、このような上下方向の設定は、本明細書中における便宜のためであり、実際の態様においては、本明細書における「上」方向は、鉛直上向きと異なることもありうる。
 本明細書において、特段の記載がない限り、組成物は、組成物に含まれる各成分として、その成分に該当する2種以上の化合物を含んでもよい。また、特段の記載がない限り、組成物における各成分の含有量とは、その成分に該当する全ての化合物の合計含有量を意味する。
 本明細書において、特に述べない限り、温度は23℃、気圧は101,325Pa(1気圧)、相対湿度は50%RHである。
 本明細書において、好ましい態様の組み合わせは、より好ましい態様である。
The main embodiments of the present invention will be described below, but the present invention is not limited to the embodiments explicitly described.
In this specification, a numerical range expressed using the symbol "to" means a range that includes the numerical values before and after "to" as the lower and upper limits, respectively.
In this specification, the term "step" includes not only an independent step but also a step that cannot be clearly distinguished from other steps, so long as the intended effect of the step can be achieved.
In the description of groups (atomic groups) in this specification, when a notation does not specify whether they are substituted or unsubstituted, it encompasses both groups (atomic groups) that have no substituents and groups (atomic groups) that have substituents. For example, the term "alkyl group" encompasses not only alkyl groups that have no substituents (unsubstituted alkyl groups) but also alkyl groups that have substituents (substituted alkyl groups).
In this specification, unless otherwise specified, the term "exposure" includes not only exposure using light but also exposure using particle beams such as electron beams and ion beams. Examples of light used for exposure include the bright line spectrum of a mercury lamp, far ultraviolet light typified by excimer lasers, extreme ultraviolet light (EUV light), X-rays, electron beams, and other actinic rays or radiation.
In this specification, "(meth)acrylate" means both or either of "acrylate" and "methacrylate", "(meth)acrylic" means both or either of "acrylic" and "methacrylic", and "(meth)acryloyl" means both or either of "acryloyl" and "methacryloyl".
In this specification, in the structural formulae, Me represents a methyl group, Et represents an ethyl group, Bu represents a butyl group, and Ph represents a phenyl group.
In this specification, the term "total solids content" refers to the total mass of all components of the composition excluding the solvent, and the term "solids concentration" refers to the mass percentage of the components excluding the solvent relative to the total mass of the composition.
In this specification, unless otherwise specified, the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and number average molecular weight (Mn) are values measured using gel permeation chromatography (GPC) and are defined as polystyrene equivalent values. In this specification, the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and number average molecular weight (Mn) can be determined, for example, using an HLC-8220GPC (manufactured by Tosoh Corporation) and guard columns HZ-L, TSKgel Super HZM-M, TSKgel Super HZ4000, TSKgel Super HZ3000, and TSKgel Super HZ2000 (all manufactured by Tosoh Corporation) connected in series. Unless otherwise specified, these molecular weights are measured using NMP (N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone) as the eluent. However, if NMP is not suitable as an eluent, such as when the solubility is low, THF (tetrahydrofuran) can also be used. Furthermore, unless otherwise specified, detection in GPC measurement is performed using a UV (ultraviolet) ray (ultraviolet) detector with a wavelength of 254 nm.
In this specification, when the positional relationship of each layer constituting a laminate is described as "up" or "down," it is sufficient that there is another layer above or below the reference layer among the multiple layers being considered. In other words, a third layer or element may be interposed between the reference layer and the other layer, and the reference layer and the other layer do not need to be in contact. Unless otherwise specified, the direction in which layers are stacked on the substrate is referred to as "up," or, if a resin composition layer is present, the direction from the substrate to the resin composition layer is referred to as "up," and the opposite direction is referred to as "down." Note that such vertical directions are defined for convenience in this specification, and in actual embodiments, the "up" direction in this specification may differ from the vertical upward direction.
In this specification, unless otherwise specified, a composition may contain, as each component contained in the composition, two or more compounds corresponding to that component. Furthermore, unless otherwise specified, the content of each component in the composition means the total content of all compounds corresponding to that component.
In this specification, unless otherwise specified, the temperature is 23° C., the atmospheric pressure is 101,325 Pa (1 atmosphere), and the relative humidity is 50% RH.
As used herein, combinations of preferred embodiments are more preferred embodiments.

(樹脂組成物)
 本発明の樹脂組成物(以下、単に「樹脂組成物」ともいう)は、ポリイミド、ポリイミド前駆体、ポリベンゾオキサゾール、及び、ポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体からなる群より選ばれた樹脂であって、水素原子が1価の置換基で置換されていてもよいアルキニル基、及び、重合性基を有する樹脂と、重合開始剤と、を含み、絶縁膜の形成に用いられる樹脂組成物である。
 以下、ポリイミド、ポリイミド前駆体、ポリベンゾオキサゾール、及び、ポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体からなる群より選ばれた樹脂であって、水素原子が1価の置換基で置換されていてもよいアルキニル基、及び、重合性基を有する樹脂を、単に「特定樹脂」ともいう。
(Resin composition)
The resin composition of the present invention (hereinafter also simply referred to as "resin composition") is a resin composition used for forming an insulating film, which contains a resin selected from the group consisting of polyimide, polyimide precursor, polybenzoxazole, and polybenzoxazole precursor, and which has an alkynyl group in which a hydrogen atom may be substituted with a monovalent substituent and a polymerizable group, and a polymerization initiator.
Hereinafter, a resin selected from the group consisting of polyimide, polyimide precursor, polybenzoxazole, and polybenzoxazole precursor, which has an alkynyl group in which a hydrogen atom may be substituted with a monovalent substituent, and a polymerizable group, will also be simply referred to as a "specific resin."

 本発明の樹脂組成物は、露光及び現像に供される感光膜の形成に用いられることが好ましく、露光及び有機溶剤を含む現像液を用いた現像に供される感光膜の形成に用いられることがより好ましい。
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、例えば、半導体デバイスの絶縁膜、再配線層用層間絶縁膜、ストレスバッファ膜等の形成に用いることができ、再配線層用層間絶縁膜の形成に用いられることが好ましい。
 また、本発明の樹脂組成物は、ネガ型現像に供される感光膜の形成に用いられることが好ましい。
 本発明において、ネガ型現像とは、露光及び現像において、現像により非露光部が除去される現像をいい、ポジ型現像とは、現像により露光部が除去される現像をいう。
 上記露光の方法、上記現像液、及び、上記現像の方法としては、例えば、後述する硬化物の製造方法の説明における露光工程において説明された露光方法、現像工程において説明された現像液及び現像方法が使用される。
The resin composition of the present invention is preferably used to form a photosensitive film that is subjected to exposure and development, and more preferably used to form a photosensitive film that is subjected to exposure and development using a developer containing an organic solvent.
The resin composition of the present invention can be used to form, for example, an insulating film for a semiconductor device, an interlayer insulating film for a rewiring layer, a stress buffer film, etc., and is preferably used to form an interlayer insulating film for a rewiring layer.
The resin composition of the present invention is preferably used to form a photosensitive film to be subjected to negative development.
In the present invention, negative development refers to development in which the unexposed areas are removed by development, and positive development refers to development in which the exposed areas are removed by development.
As the exposure method, the developer, and the development method, for example, the exposure method described in the exposure step and the developer and development method described in the development step in the description of the method for producing a cured product described below can be used.

 本発明の樹脂組成物によれば、金属(好ましくは銅又は銅を含む合金)との密着性に優れた硬化物が得られる。
 上記効果が得られるメカニズムは不明であるが、下記のように推測される。
 本発明者らは、樹脂組成物を用いて金属(基板、配線等)と接するように硬化物を形成した場合、硬化物中に水分が含まれると、上記水分の作用により金属が酸化してしまい、硬化物と金属との密着性が低下する場合があることを見出した。
 そこで本発明者らは、鋭意検討した結果、樹脂として、重合性基及び水素原子が1価の置換基で置換されていてもよいアルキニル基を有する上述の特定樹脂を用いることで、上記密着性が増大することを見出した。
 上記効果が得られるメカニズムは不明であるが、上記水素原子が1価の置換基で置換されていてもよいアルキニル基と、膜中の水分とが反応し、膜中から水分が減少することで、金属の酸化が抑制され、密着性が増大すると推定される。
 また、特定樹脂が重合性基を有することで、膜Tgが向上し、耐熱性が向上するため、密着性が増大すると考えられる。
 さらに、特定樹脂が重合性基を有することにより、特定樹脂同士、又は、特定樹脂と後述する重合性化合物等との間に架橋構造が形成され、水の侵入が抑制されるため、上述のアルキニル基との相乗効果により、更に金属の酸化を抑制する事ができると考えられる。 さらに、上記同様のメカニズムにより、硬化物の使用時において膜中の水分量を減少させられるため、硬化物の誘電正接も低下することが分かった。
 また、硬化物中の水分、ハロゲン原子等の作用により、樹脂の主鎖の分解、基板、配線等の銅の腐食が促進され、高温条件下において金属と硬化物の間に空隙が生じる、すなわち、絶縁信頼性が低下する場合があった。
 本発明者らは、樹脂が重合性基及びアルキニル基を有することで、絶縁信頼性に優れることを見出した。
 上記効果が得られるメカニズムは不明であるが、上記アルキニル基と、膜中のハロゲンイオンまたはハロゲン化合物、水分とが反応し、これらが減少することで、絶縁信頼性が向上すると推定される。
 加えて、上記と同様のメカニズムにより、高湿条件下における空隙の発生も抑制されると考えられる。
The resin composition of the present invention gives a cured product that has excellent adhesion to metals (preferably copper or copper-containing alloys).
The mechanism by which the above effects are obtained is unknown, but is speculated as follows.
The present inventors have found that when a cured product is formed using a resin composition so as to be in contact with metal (substrate, wiring, etc.), if moisture is contained in the cured product, the metal may be oxidized by the action of the moisture, and the adhesion between the cured product and the metal may be reduced.
Therefore, the present inventors conducted extensive research and found that the adhesion can be increased by using the above-mentioned specific resin having a polymerizable group and an alkynyl group whose hydrogen atom may be substituted with a monovalent substituent.
Although the mechanism by which the above-mentioned effect is obtained is unclear, it is presumed that the alkynyl group in which the hydrogen atom may be substituted with a monovalent substituent reacts with the moisture in the film, resulting in a decrease in moisture in the film, which in turn inhibits oxidation of the metal and increases adhesion.
Furthermore, it is believed that the specific resin having a polymerizable group improves the film Tg and heat resistance, thereby increasing adhesion.
Furthermore, since the specific resin has a polymerizable group, a crosslinked structure is formed between the specific resins themselves or between the specific resin and a polymerizable compound, etc., described later, which inhibits water penetration, and therefore, due to a synergistic effect with the above-mentioned alkynyl group, it is thought that metal oxidation can be further inhibited. Furthermore, it has been found that, due to the same mechanism as above, the amount of water in the film can be reduced when the cured product is used, and therefore the dielectric loss tangent of the cured product also decreases.
Furthermore, the action of moisture, halogen atoms, etc. in the cured product can accelerate decomposition of the resin main chain and corrosion of copper in the substrate, wiring, etc., resulting in the formation of voids between the metal and the cured product under high-temperature conditions, i.e., reduced insulation reliability.
The present inventors have found that when the resin has a polymerizable group and an alkynyl group, the resin has excellent insulation reliability.
Although the mechanism by which the above effect is obtained is unknown, it is presumed that the alkynyl groups react with halogen ions or halogen compounds and moisture in the film, reducing these and thereby improving insulation reliability.
In addition, it is believed that the occurrence of voids under high humidity conditions is also suppressed by the same mechanism as above.

 ここで、特許文献1には、特定樹脂に該当する樹脂を含有する樹脂組成物については記載されていない。 Patent Document 1 does not describe any resin compositions containing resins that fall under the category of specific resins.

 以下、本発明の樹脂組成物に含まれる成分について詳細に説明する。 The components contained in the resin composition of the present invention are described in detail below.

<特定樹脂>
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、ポリイミド、ポリイミド前駆体、ポリベンゾオキサゾール、及び、ポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体からなる群より選ばれた樹脂であって、水素原子が1価の置換基で置換されていてもよいアルキニル基、及び、重合性基を有する樹脂(特定樹脂)を含む。
<Specific resin>
The resin composition of the present invention contains a resin (specific resin) selected from the group consisting of polyimide, polyimide precursor, polybenzoxazole, and polybenzoxazole precursor, which has an alkynyl group in which a hydrogen atom may be substituted with a monovalent substituent, and a polymerizable group.

 本発明の樹脂組成物は、特定樹脂として、ポリイミド、及び、ポリベンゾオキサゾールからなる群より選ばれた樹脂を含むことが好ましく、硬化時の収縮が抑制される等の観点からはポリイミドを含むことがより好ましい。
 特定樹脂がポリイミドである場合、特定樹脂は、後述の式(1-1)で表される繰返し単位を有することが好ましい。
The resin composition of the present invention preferably contains, as the specific resin, a resin selected from the group consisting of polyimide and polybenzoxazole, and more preferably contains polyimide from the viewpoint of suppressing shrinkage during curing, etc.
When the specific resin is a polyimide, the specific resin preferably has a repeating unit represented by the formula (1-1) described below.

 本明細書において、ポリイミドとは分子鎖内にイミド構造を含む繰返し単位を有する樹脂をいい、分子鎖内にイミド環構造を含む繰返し単位を有する樹脂であることが好ましい。
 また、ポリイミドが直鎖状の樹脂である場合、ポリイミドは主鎖内にイミド構造を含む繰返し単位を有する樹脂であることが好ましく、主鎖内にイミド環構造を含む繰返し単位を有する樹脂であることがより好ましい。
 本明細書において、「主鎖」とは、樹脂分子中で相対的に最も長い結合鎖を表し、「側鎖」とはそれ以外の結合鎖をいう。
 本明細書において、イミド構造とは、*-C(=O)N(-*)C(=O)-*で表される構造をいい、*は他の構造との結合部位を表し、炭素原子との結合部位であることが好ましく、第四級炭素原子との結合部位であることがより好ましい。
 本明細書において、イミド環構造とは、上記イミド構造における炭素原子2つと窒素原子の全てを環員として含む環構造をいう。イミド環構造は、5員環であることが好ましい。
 ポリイミドは、イミド構造に加えて、分子鎖内にアミド結合を有する、いわゆるポリアミドイミドであってもよい。本明細書において、アミド結合とは*-C(=O)N(-#)-*で表される構造をいい、*は他の構造との結合部位を表し、炭素原子との結合部位であることが好ましく、第四級炭素原子との結合部位であることがより好ましい。また#は他の構造との結合部位を表し、水素原子又は炭素原子との結合部位であることが好ましく、水素原子との結合部位であることがより好ましい。
In this specification, polyimide refers to a resin having a repeating unit containing an imide structure in the molecular chain, and is preferably a resin having a repeating unit containing an imide ring structure in the molecular chain.
Furthermore, when the polyimide is a linear resin, the polyimide is preferably a resin having a repeating unit containing an imide structure in the main chain, and more preferably a resin having a repeating unit containing an imide ring structure in the main chain.
In this specification, the term "main chain" refers to the relatively longest bonded chain in a resin molecule, and the term "side chain" refers to any other bonded chain.
In this specification, the imide structure refers to a structure represented by *-C(=O)N(-*)C(=O)-*, where * represents a bonding site to another structure, preferably a bonding site to a carbon atom, and more preferably a bonding site to a quaternary carbon atom.
In this specification, the imide ring structure refers to a ring structure containing two carbon atoms and all of the nitrogen atoms in the imide structure as ring members. The imide ring structure is preferably a five-membered ring.
The polyimide may be a so-called polyamideimide, which has an amide bond in the molecular chain in addition to the imide structure. In this specification, the amide bond refers to a structure represented by *-C(=O)N(-#)-*, where * represents a bonding site to another structure, preferably a bonding site to a carbon atom, and more preferably a bonding site to a quaternary carbon atom. Furthermore, # represents a bonding site to another structure, preferably a bonding site to a hydrogen atom or a carbon atom, and more preferably a bonding site to a hydrogen atom.

 本発明において、ポリイミド前駆体とは、外部刺激により化学構造の変化を生じてポリイミドとなる樹脂をいい、熱により化学構造の変化を生じてポリイミドとなる樹脂が好ましく、熱により閉環反応を生じて環構造が形成されることによりポリイミドとなる樹脂がより好ましい。
 形成されるポリイミドの好ましい態様は上述の通りである。
In the present invention, the polyimide precursor refers to a resin that changes its chemical structure in response to an external stimulus to become a polyimide. A resin that changes its chemical structure in response to heat to become a polyimide is preferred, and a resin that changes its chemical structure in response to heat to become a polyimide by forming a ring structure is more preferred.
The preferred embodiments of the polyimide to be formed are as described above.

 本発明において、ポリベンゾオキサゾールとは分子鎖内にベンゾオキサゾール構造を含む繰返し単位を有する樹脂をいう。
 特定樹脂がポリベンゾオキサゾールである場合、特定樹脂は、後述の式(X)で表される繰返し単位を有することが好ましい。
 また、ポリベンゾオキサゾールが直鎖状の樹脂である場合、ポリベンゾオキサゾールは主鎖内にベンゾオキサゾール構造を含む繰返し単位を有する樹脂であることが好ましい。
 本発明において、ベンゾオキサゾール構造とは、下記式(PBO-1)で表される構造をいう。
 式(PBO-1)中、*は他の構造との結合部位を表す。
In the present invention, polybenzoxazole refers to a resin having a repeating unit containing a benzoxazole structure in the molecular chain.
When the specific resin is polybenzoxazole, the specific resin preferably has a repeating unit represented by formula (X) described below.
When the polybenzoxazole is a linear resin, the polybenzoxazole is preferably a resin having a repeating unit containing a benzoxazole structure in the main chain.
In the present invention, the benzoxazole structure refers to a structure represented by the following formula (PBO-1).
In formula (PBO-1), * represents a bonding site to other structures.

 本発明において、ポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体とは、外部刺激により化学構造の変化を生じてポリベンゾオキサゾールとなる樹脂をいい、熱により化学構造の変化を生じてポリベンゾオキサゾールとなる樹脂が好ましく、熱により閉環反応を生じて環構造が形成されることによりポリベンゾオキサゾールとなる樹脂がより好ましい。
 形成されるポリベンゾオキサゾールの好ましい態様は上述の通りである。
In the present invention, the polybenzoxazole precursor refers to a resin that undergoes a change in chemical structure in response to an external stimulus to become polybenzoxazole. A resin that undergoes a change in chemical structure in response to heat to become polybenzoxazole is preferred, and a resin that undergoes a ring-closing reaction in response to heat to form a ring structure to become polybenzoxazole is more preferred.
The preferred embodiments of the polybenzoxazole to be formed are as described above.

〔水素原子が1価の置換基で置換されていてもよいアルキニル基〕
 特定樹脂は、水素原子が1価の置換基で置換されていてもよいアルキニル基を含む。
 アルキニル基における上記置換基としては、トリアルキルシリル基等が挙げられる。
 アルキニル基の炭素数(置換基に含まれる炭素は除く)は、2~20であることが好ましく、2~15であることがより好ましい。
 アルキニル基は、直鎖状、分岐鎖状、環状又はこれらの組み合わせにより表される構造のいずれであってもよいが、直鎖状であることが好ましい。
[Alkynyl group in which a hydrogen atom may be substituted with a monovalent substituent]
The specific resin contains an alkynyl group in which a hydrogen atom may be substituted with a monovalent substituent.
Examples of the substituent on the alkynyl group include a trialkylsilyl group.
The alkynyl group preferably has 2 to 20 carbon atoms (excluding carbon atoms contained in the substituent), and more preferably has 2 to 15 carbon atoms.
The alkynyl group may be linear, branched, cyclic, or a combination thereof, but is preferably linear.

 上記アルキニル基は、内部アルキンから水素原子を1つ除いた基であることが好ましい。
 内部アルキンとは、三重結合を形成する2つの炭素原子がいずれも水素原子以外の基と結合するアルキンをいい、三重結合を形成する2つの炭素原子がいずれも炭素原子と結合するか、又は、一方がケイ素原子と結合し、他方が炭素原子と結合するアルキンであることが好ましい。
 具体的には、アルキニル基は下記式(AL-1)で表される構造を含む基であってもよいし、下記式(AL-2)で表される構造を含む基であってもよいが、下記式(AL-1)で表される構造を含む基であることが好ましい。
 式(AL-1)中、*は水素原子以外の他の構造との結合部位を表し、#は水素原子を又は他の構造との結合部位を表す。
 式(AL-2)中、*は水素原子以外の他の構造との結合部位を表す。
The alkynyl group is preferably a group in which one hydrogen atom has been removed from an internal alkyne.
The internal alkyne refers to an alkyne in which both of the two carbon atoms forming the triple bond are bonded to groups other than hydrogen atoms, and is preferably an alkyne in which both of the two carbon atoms forming the triple bond are bonded to carbon atoms, or one of the carbon atoms is bonded to a silicon atom and the other is bonded to a carbon atom.
Specifically, the alkynyl group may be a group containing a structure represented by the following formula (AL-1) or a group containing a structure represented by the following formula (AL-2), but is preferably a group containing a structure represented by the following formula (AL-1):
In formula (AL-1), * represents a bonding site to another structure other than a hydrogen atom, and # represents a bonding site to a hydrogen atom or another structure.
In formula (AL-2), * represents a bonding site to another structure other than a hydrogen atom.

 上記アルキニル基は、樹脂の側鎖又は主鎖末端に存在することが好ましく、主鎖末端に存在することがより好ましい。
 上記アルキニル基が側鎖または主鎖末端に存在することにより、金属との密着性がより向上する。主鎖内部に対し、側鎖または主鎖末端は運動性が高い為、金属を腐食させる原因となり得る水やハロゲンイオンとの反応性が向上し、密着性が向上しやすいものと考えられる。
The alkynyl group is preferably present on a side chain or at the end of the main chain of the resin, and more preferably at the end of the main chain.
The presence of the alkynyl group in the side chain or at the end of the main chain further improves adhesion to metals. Because the side chain or the end of the main chain has higher mobility than the inside of the main chain, it is thought that the reactivity with water and halogen ions, which can cause corrosion of metals, is improved, making it easier to improve adhesion.

 特定樹脂は、上記アルキニル基を含む基として、下記式(B-1)で表される基を有することが好ましい。
 特定樹脂は、下記式(B-1)で表される基を側鎖又は主鎖末端に有することが好ましく、主鎖末端に有することがより好ましい。
 式(B-1)中、Rは2価の連結基を表し、Zは置換若しくは無置換の炭素数1~30のアルキレン基、又は、ケイ素原子を表し、Zが上記アルキレン基である場合にはnは1であり、且つ、Rは水素原子又は1価の有機基を表し、Zが上記ケイ素原子である場合にはnは3であり、且つ、Rはそれぞれ独立に、1価の有機基を表し、*は他の構造との結合部位を表す。
The specific resin preferably has a group represented by the following formula (B-1) as the alkynyl group-containing group.
The specific resin preferably has a group represented by the following formula (B-1) on a side chain or at a main chain terminal, more preferably at a main chain terminal.
In formula (B-1), R 1 represents a divalent linking group, Z 1 represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkylene group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms or a silicon atom, when Z 1 is the alkylene group, n is 1, and R 2 represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group, when Z 1 is the silicon atom, n is 3, and each R 2 independently represents a monovalent organic group, and * represents a bonding site to another structure.

 式(B-1)中、Rは炭化水素基であることが好ましく、芳香族炭化水素基又はアルキレン基であることがより好ましい。
 上記芳香族炭化水素基としては、フェニレン基又はナフチレン基が好ましく、p-フェニレン基又は1,4-ナフチレン基がより好ましい。
 上記アルキレン基としては、炭素数1~10のアルキレン基が好ましく、炭素数1~6のアルキレン基がより好ましい。また、上記アルキレン基は直鎖状、分岐鎖状、環状又はこれらの組み合わせにより表される構造のいずれであってもよいが、直鎖状であることが好ましい。
In formula (B-1), R 1 is preferably a hydrocarbon group, more preferably an aromatic hydrocarbon group or an alkylene group.
The aromatic hydrocarbon group is preferably a phenylene group or a naphthylene group, more preferably a p-phenylene group or a 1,4-naphthylene group.
The alkylene group is preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms. The alkylene group may be linear, branched, cyclic, or may have a structure represented by a combination of these, but is preferably linear.

 式(B-1)中、Zは炭素数1~25のアルキレン基又はケイ素原子が好ましく、2~20のアルキレン基又はケイ素原子がより好ましい。Zにおけるアルキル基は、ハロゲン原子、アリール基等の公知の置換基により置換されていてもよい。 In formula (B-1), Z1 is preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 25 carbon atoms or a silicon atom, and more preferably an alkylene group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms or a silicon atom. The alkyl group in Z1 may be substituted with a known substituent such as a halogen atom or an aryl group.

 式(B-1)中、Zが置換又は無置換の炭素数1~30のアルキレン基である場合、Rは水素原子、アルコキシ基、アリール基又はアリーロキシ基が好ましく、水素原子がより好ましい。
 式(B-1)中、Zがケイ素原子である場合、Rはアルキル基、アルコキシ基、アリール基又はアリーロキシ基が好ましく、アルキル基がより好ましい。上記アルキル基としては、炭素数1~4のアルキル基が好ましく、メチル基がより好ましい。
In formula (B-1), when Z 1 is a substituted or unsubstituted alkylene group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, R 2 is preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkoxy group, an aryl group or an aryloxy group, more preferably a hydrogen atom.
In formula (B-1), when Z1 is a silicon atom, R2 is preferably an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryl group, or an aryloxy group, more preferably an alkyl group. The alkyl group is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, more preferably a methyl group.

 式(B-1)中、*は酸素原子又は窒素原子との結合部位であることが好ましい。 In formula (B-1), * preferably represents a bonding site with an oxygen atom or a nitrogen atom.

 式(B-1)で表される基の具体例を以下に示すが、本発明はこれらに限定されるものではない。
Specific examples of the group represented by formula (B-1) are shown below, but the present invention is not limited to these.

 特定樹脂の全質量に対する上記アルキニル基の含有量(アルキニル基価)は、0.01~1.0mmol/gであることが好ましく、0.02~0.8mmol/gであることがより好ましく、0.05~0.6mmol/gであることが更に好ましい。
 アルキニル基価は、例えば、基準物質としてテトラメチルシランを使用し、H-NMRチャートにおけるアルキニル基に由来する0.1ppm付近または、1.7~3.3ppm付近のピークの積分強度と基準物質に由来するピークの積分強度の比及び基準物質の量及び上記特定樹脂の量から、特定樹脂におけるアルキニル基のモル量を算出することができる。
 その他の構造のモル量についても、それぞれの構造に対応するピークの積分強度を算出することにより測定可能である。
The content of the alkynyl group (alkynyl group value) relative to the total mass of the specific resin is preferably 0.01 to 1.0 mmol/g, more preferably 0.02 to 0.8 mmol/g, and even more preferably 0.05 to 0.6 mmol/g.
The alkynyl group value can be calculated by, for example, using tetramethylsilane as a standard substance, from the ratio of the integrated intensity of the peak at around 0.1 ppm or around 1.7 to 3.3 ppm attributable to the alkynyl group in a 1 H-NMR chart to the integrated intensity of the peak attributable to the standard substance, the amount of the standard substance, and the amount of the specific resin, and from the molar amount of the alkynyl group in the specific resin.
The molar amounts of other structures can also be determined by calculating the integrated intensity of the peaks corresponding to each structure.

〔重合性基〕
 特定樹脂は重合性基を有することが好ましい。
 重合性基としては、エチレン性不飽和結合を有する基、エポキシ基、オキセタニル基、ベンゾオキサゾリル基等が挙げられ、エチレン性不飽和結合を有する基が好ましい。
 上記エチレン性不飽和結合を有する基としては、ビニル基、アリル基、ビニルフェニル基、(メタ)アクリロイル基、マレイミド基、(メタ)アクリルアミド基などが挙げられる。
 これらの中でも、(メタ)アクリロキシ基、(メタ)アクリルアミド基、ビニルフェニル基又はマレイミド基が好ましく、反応性の観点からは、(メタ)アクリロイル基がより好ましい。また、誘電正接を低下させる等の観点からは、ビニルフェニル基又はマレイミド基が好ましい。
 また、密着性の観点からは、疎水的であるビニルフェニル基が好ましい。
[Polymerizable group]
The specific resin preferably has a polymerizable group.
Examples of the polymerizable group include a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond, an epoxy group, an oxetanyl group, and a benzoxazolyl group, with a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond being preferred.
Examples of the group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond include a vinyl group, an allyl group, a vinylphenyl group, a (meth)acryloyl group, a maleimide group, and a (meth)acrylamide group.
Among these, a (meth)acryloxy group, a (meth)acrylamide group, a vinylphenyl group, or a maleimide group is preferred, and a (meth)acryloyl group is more preferred from the viewpoint of reactivity. Furthermore, a vinylphenyl group or a maleimide group is preferred from the viewpoint of reducing the dielectric loss tangent.
From the viewpoint of adhesiveness, a hydrophobic vinylphenyl group is preferred.

 特定樹脂の全質量に対する重合性基の含有量(重合性基価)は、0.2~4.0mmol/gが好ましく、0.3~3.5mmol/gがより好ましく、0.4~3.0mmol/gが更に好ましい。
 中でも、特定樹脂の全質量に対するラジカル重合性基の含有量(ラジカル重合性基価)は、0.2~3.0mmol/gが好ましく、0.3~2.8mmol/gがより好ましく、0.4~2.6mmol/gが更に好ましい。
 例えば、組成物中の樹脂におけるビニルフェニル基の含有量は、以下の方法により算出することができる。他の重合性基、ラジカル重合性基についても、算出方法は同様である。
 組成物1gをメタノールまたは水50gに添加して晶析させ、特定樹脂を析出させ、ろ過する。ろ物を回収し、THF(テトラヒドロフラン)3.0gに溶解し、これをメタノールまたは水50gに添加して晶析させ、ろ過し、40℃で20時間乾燥させる。
 上記で乾燥した特定樹脂 0.1gを重ジメチルスルホキシド0.9gに溶解した後、H-NMRで測定し、ビニルフェニル基の量を算出する。H-NMRの積算回数は640回とする。
 例えば、基準物質としてテトラメチルシランを使用し、H-NMRチャートにおけるビニルフェニル基に由来する5.0~7.0ppm付近のピークの積分強度と基準物質に由来するピークの積分強度の比及び基準物質の量及び上記特定樹脂の量から、特定樹脂におけるビニルフェニル基のモル量を算出することができる。
 その他の構造のモル量についても、それぞれの構造に対応するピークの積分強度を算出することにより測定可能である。
The content of the polymerizable group relative to the total mass of the specific resin (polymerizable group value) is preferably from 0.2 to 4.0 mmol/g, more preferably from 0.3 to 3.5 mmol/g, and even more preferably from 0.4 to 3.0 mmol/g.
In particular, the content of the radically polymerizable group relative to the total mass of the specific resin (radical polymerizable group value) is preferably 0.2 to 3.0 mmol/g, more preferably 0.3 to 2.8 mmol/g, and even more preferably 0.4 to 2.6 mmol/g.
For example, the content of vinylphenyl groups in the resin in the composition can be calculated by the following method: The calculation method is similar for other polymerizable groups and radically polymerizable groups.
1 g of the composition is added to 50 g of methanol or water to cause crystallization, and the specific resin is precipitated and filtered. The residue is recovered and dissolved in 3.0 g of THF (tetrahydrofuran), and this is added to 50 g of methanol or water to cause crystallization, filtered, and dried at 40°C for 20 hours.
0.1 g of the specific resin dried above is dissolved in 0.9 g of deuterated dimethyl sulfoxide, and then measured by 1 H-NMR to calculate the amount of vinylphenyl groups. The number of 1 H-NMR measurements is set to 640.
For example, using tetramethylsilane as a reference substance, the molar amount of vinylphenyl groups in the specific resin can be calculated from the ratio of the integrated intensity of the peak at around 5.0 to 7.0 ppm derived from the vinylphenyl group in the 1H -NMR chart to the integrated intensity of the peak derived from the reference substance, the amount of the reference substance, and the amount of the specific resin.
The molar amounts of other structures can also be determined by calculating the integrated intensity of the peaks corresponding to each structure.

〔式(1-1)で表される繰返し単位〕
 特定樹脂は、式(1-1)で表される繰返し単位を有することが好ましい。
 式(1-1)中、Xは炭素数4以上の有機基を表し、Yは炭素数4以上の有機基を表し、Rはそれぞれ独立に、下記式(R-1)で表される構造を表し、mは0~4の整数を表し、nは0以上の整数を表し、n+mは1以上の整数である。
 式(R-1)中、Lはa1+1価の連結基を表し、Aは重合性基を表し、a1は1以上の整数を表し、*は式(1-1)中のX又はYとの結合部位を表す。
[Repeating unit represented by formula (1-1)]
The specific resin preferably has a repeating unit represented by formula (1-1).
In formula (1-1), X1 represents an organic group having 4 or more carbon atoms, Y1 represents an organic group having 4 or more carbon atoms, R1 each independently represents a structure represented by formula (R-1) below, m represents an integer of 0 to 4, n represents an integer of 0 or more, and n+m is an integer of 1 or more.
In formula (R-1), L 1 represents a linking group having a valence of a1+1, A 1 represents a polymerizable group, a1 represents an integer of 1 or more, and * represents a bonding site with X 1 or Y 1 in formula (1-1).

-X
 Xの炭素数は、4以上であり、4~50であることが好ましく、4~40であることがより好ましい。
 式(1-1)中、Xは下記式(V-1)~式(V-10)のいずれかで表される構造から2以上の水素原子を除いた構造を含む有機基を表すことが好ましい。
 Xが式(V-1)~式(V-10)のいずれかで表される構造から2以上の水素原子を除いた構造を含む有機基であることにより、硬化物の耐薬品性及び平坦性が向上する。
 また、Xが式(V-1)~式(V-5)のいずれかで表される構造から2以上の水素原子を除いた構造を含む有機基であることにより、現像残渣の発生の抑制、硬化物の低誘電率化、熱膨張係数の低減等の効果も得られる。
 式(V-6)~式(V-10)のいずれかで表される構造から2以上の水素原子を除いた構造を含む有機基であることにより、紫外光の透過性の向上により硬化物のパターンがテーパー状になりにくい、露光量に対する許容度が広い等の効果も得られる。
 式(V-2)中、RX1はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基又はハロゲン化アルキル基である。
 式(V-3)中、RX2及びRX3はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又は置換基を表し、RX2とRX3は結合して環構造を形成してもよい。
 式(V-8)中、RX5はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基又はハロゲン化アルキル基である。
-X 1 -
X1 has 4 or more carbon atoms, preferably 4 to 50 carbon atoms, and more preferably 4 to 40 carbon atoms.
In formula (1-1), X1 preferably represents an organic group containing a structure in which two or more hydrogen atoms have been removed from a structure represented by any one of formulas (V-1) to (V-10) below.
When X 1 is an organic group containing a structure in which two or more hydrogen atoms have been removed from a structure represented by any one of formulas (V-1) to (V-10), the chemical resistance and flatness of the cured product are improved.
Furthermore, when X1 is an organic group containing a structure in which two or more hydrogen atoms have been removed from a structure represented by any one of formulas (V-1) to (V-5), effects such as suppression of development residues, lowering of the dielectric constant of the cured product, and reduction of the thermal expansion coefficient can be obtained.
The organic group containing a structure in which two or more hydrogen atoms have been removed from a structure represented by any one of formulas (V-6) to (V-10) provides the following effects: the pattern of the cured product is less likely to become tapered due to improved ultraviolet light transmittance; and the tolerance for the exposure dose is wide.
In formula (V-2), R 1 and X1 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or a halogenated alkyl group.
In formula (V-3), R 1 X2 and R 1 X3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and R 1 X2 and R 1 X3 may be bonded to form a ring structure.
In formula (V-8), R 1 and X5 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or a halogenated alkyl group.

 式(V-2)中、RX1はそれぞれ独立に、アルキル基又はハロゲン化アルキル基であることが好ましく、炭素数1~4のアルキル基又は炭素数1~4のハロゲン化アルキル基であることがより好ましく、メチル基又はトリフルオロメチル基が更に好ましい。ハロゲン化アルキル基とは、アルキル基の水素原子の少なくとも1つがハロゲン原子により置換された基をいう。ハロゲン原子としては、F又はClが好ましく、Fがより好ましい。
 式(V-3)中、RX2及びRX3はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子であることが好ましい。RX2とRX3が結合して環構造を形成する場合、RX2とRX3が結合して形成される構造は、単結合、-O-又は-C(R)-であることが好ましく、-O-又は-C(R)-であることがより好ましく、-O-であることが更に好ましい。Rは水素原子又は1価の有機基を表し、水素原子、アルキル基又はアリール基が好ましく、水素原子が更に好ましい。
 式(V-8)中、RX5はそれぞれ独立に、アルキル基又はハロゲン化アルキル基であることが好ましく、炭素数1~4のアルキル基又は炭素数1~4のハロゲン化アルキル基であることがより好ましく、メチル基又はトリフルオロメチル基が更に好ましい。ハロゲン化アルキル基とは、アルキル基の水素原子の少なくとも1つがハロゲン原子により置換された基をいう。ハロゲン原子としては、F又はClが好ましく、Fがより好ましい。
In formula (V-2), R and X1 are each independently preferably an alkyl group or a halogenated alkyl group, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms or a halogenated alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and even more preferably a methyl group or a trifluoromethyl group. A halogenated alkyl group refers to an alkyl group in which at least one hydrogen atom has been substituted with a halogen atom. The halogen atom is preferably F or Cl, and more preferably F.
In formula (V-3), it is preferable that R X2 and R X3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom. When R X2 and R X3 combine to form a ring structure, the structure formed by combining R X2 and R X3 is preferably a single bond, -O-, or -C(R) 2 -, more preferably -O- or -C(R) 2 -, and even more preferably -O-. R represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group, preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group, and more preferably a hydrogen atom.
In formula (V-8), R and X5 are each independently preferably an alkyl group or a halogenated alkyl group, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms or a halogenated alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and even more preferably a methyl group or a trifluoromethyl group. A halogenated alkyl group refers to an alkyl group in which at least one hydrogen atom has been substituted with a halogen atom. The halogen atom is preferably F or Cl, and more preferably F.

 Xが、式(V-1)で表される構造から2以上の水素原子を除いた構造を含む基である場合、Xは下記式(V-1-1)で表される基であることが好ましい。下記式中、*は式(1-1)中のXが結合する4つのカルボニル基との結合部位を表し、n1は0~5の整数を表し、1~5の整数であることも好ましい。また、下記構造における水素原子は、式(1-1)中のR、又は、炭化水素基等の公知の置換基により更に置換されていてもよい。
When X 1 is a group containing a structure obtained by removing two or more hydrogen atoms from a structure represented by formula (V-1), X 1 is preferably a group represented by the following formula (V-1-1). In the following formula, * represents the bonding site to which X 1 in formula (1-1) bonds with the four carbonyl groups, and n1 represents an integer of 0 to 5, and is also preferably an integer of 1 to 5. Furthermore, the hydrogen atom in the following structure may be further substituted by R 1 in formula (1-1) or a known substituent such as a hydrocarbon group.

 Xが、式(V-2)で表される構造から2以上の水素原子を除いた構造を含む基である場合、Xは下記式(V-2-1)又は式(V-2-2)で表される基であることが好ましく、樹脂におけるアミン価を下げる等の観点からは、式(V-2-2)で表される基であることが好ましい。本明細書において、環構造の辺と交差する結合は、その環構造における水素原子のいずれかを置換することを意味している。下記式中、LX1は単結合又は-O-を表し、*は式(1-1)中のXが結合する4つのカルボニル基との結合部位を表す。また、RX1の定義及び好ましい態様は上述の通りである。また、これらの構造における水素原子は、式(1-1)中のR、又は、炭化水素基等の公知の置換基により更に置換されていてもよい。
When X1 is a group containing a structure obtained by removing two or more hydrogen atoms from a structure represented by formula (V-2), X1 is preferably a group represented by formula (V-2-1) or formula (V-2-2) below, and from the viewpoint of lowering the amine value in the resin, a group represented by formula (V-2-2) is preferred. In this specification, a bond crossing a side of a ring structure means substituting one of the hydrogen atoms in the ring structure. In the following formulas, L X1 represents a single bond or —O—, and * represents the bonding site with the four carbonyl groups to which X1 in formula (1-1) is bonded. The definition and preferred embodiments of R X1 are as described above. The hydrogen atoms in these structures may be further substituted with R 1 in formula (1-1) or a known substituent such as a hydrocarbon group.

 Xが、式(V-3)で表される構造から2以上の水素原子を除いた構造を含む基である場合、Xは下記式(V-3-1)又は式(V-3-2)で表される基であることが好ましく、硬化物の誘電率を低下させる等の観点からは、式(V-3-2)で表される基であることが好ましい。下記式中、*は式(1-1)中のXが結合する4つのカルボニル基との結合部位を表す。また、RX2及びRX3の定義及び好ましい態様は上述の通りである。また、これらの構造における水素原子は、式(1-1)中のR、又は、炭化水素基等の公知の置換基により更に置換されていてもよい。
When X 1 is a group containing a structure obtained by removing two or more hydrogen atoms from a structure represented by formula (V-3), X 1 is preferably a group represented by formula (V-3-1) or formula (V-3-2) below, and from the viewpoint of reducing the dielectric constant of the cured product, a group represented by formula (V-3-2) is preferred. In the following formulas, * represents the bonding site to the four carbonyl groups to which X 1 in formula (1-1) is bonded. The definitions and preferred embodiments of R X2 and R X3 are as described above. The hydrogen atoms in these structures may be further substituted with R 1 in formula (1-1) or a known substituent such as a hydrocarbon group.

 Xが、式(V-4)で表される構造から2以上の水素原子を除いた構造を含む基である場合、Xは下記式(V-4-1)で表される基であることが好ましい。
 下記式(V-4-1)中、*は式(1-1)中のXが結合する4つのカルボニル基との結合部位を表し、n1は0~5の整数を表す。また、式(V-4-1)における水素原子は、式(1-1)中のR、又は、炭化水素基等の公知の置換基により更に置換されていてもよい。公知の置換基としては、アルキル基、ハロゲン化アルキル基、ハロゲン原子等が挙げられる。ただし、(V-4-1)で表される構造における水素原子がいずれも置換されていないことも好ましい。
When X 1 is a group containing a structure in which two or more hydrogen atoms have been removed from a structure represented by formula (V-4), X 1 is preferably a group represented by the following formula (V-4-1).
In the following formula (V-4-1), * represents the bonding site of X1 in formula (1-1) with the four carbonyl groups, and n1 represents an integer of 0 to 5. Furthermore, the hydrogen atoms in formula (V-4-1) may be further substituted with R1 in formula (1-1) or known substituents such as hydrocarbon groups. Examples of known substituents include alkyl groups, halogenated alkyl groups, and halogen atoms. However, it is also preferable that none of the hydrogen atoms in the structure represented by (V-4-1) are substituted.

 Xが、式(V-5)で表される構造から2以上の水素原子を除いた構造を含む基である場合、Xは下記式(V-5-1)で表される基であることが好ましい。下記式中、*は式(1-1)中のXが結合する4つのカルボニル基との結合部位を表す。また、式(V-5-1)における水素原子は、式(1-1)中のR、又は、炭化水素基等の公知の置換基により更に置換されていてもよい。公知の置換基としては、アルキル基、ハロゲン化アルキル基、ハロゲン原子等が挙げられる。ただし、(V-5-1)で表される構造における水素原子がいずれも置換されていないことも好ましい。
When X 1 is a group containing a structure obtained by removing two or more hydrogen atoms from a structure represented by formula (V-5), X 1 is preferably a group represented by the following formula (V-5-1). In the following formula, * represents the bonding site to which X 1 in formula (1-1) bonds with the four carbonyl groups. In addition, the hydrogen atom in formula (V-5-1) may be further substituted with R 1 in formula (1-1) or a known substituent such as a hydrocarbon group. Examples of the known substituent include an alkyl group, a halogenated alkyl group, and a halogen atom. However, it is also preferable that none of the hydrogen atoms in the structure represented by (V-5-1) are substituted.

 Xが、式(V-6)で表される構造から2以上の水素原子を除いた構造を含む基である場合、Xは下記式(V-6-1)で表される基であることが好ましい。下記式中、*は式(1-1)中のXが結合する4つのカルボニル基との結合部位を表す。また、下記構造における水素原子は、式(1-1)中のR、又は、炭化水素基等の公知の置換基により更に置換されていてもよい。
When X 1 is a group containing a structure obtained by removing two or more hydrogen atoms from a structure represented by formula (V-6), X 1 is preferably a group represented by the following formula (V-6-1). In the following formula, * represents the bonding site to which X 1 in formula (1-1) bonds with the four carbonyl groups. In addition, the hydrogen atoms in the following structure may be further substituted by R 1 in formula (1-1) or a known substituent such as a hydrocarbon group.

 Xが、式(V-7)で表される構造から2以上の水素原子を除いた構造を含む基である場合、Xは下記式(V-7-1)で表される基であることが好ましい。下記式中、*は式(1-1)中のXが結合する4つのカルボニル基との結合部位を表す。また、下記構造における水素原子は、式(1-1)中のR、又は、炭化水素基等の公知の置換基により更に置換されていてもよい。
When X 1 is a group containing a structure obtained by removing two or more hydrogen atoms from a structure represented by formula (V-7), X 1 is preferably a group represented by the following formula (V-7-1). In the following formula, * represents the bonding site to which X 1 in formula (1-1) bonds with the four carbonyl groups. In addition, the hydrogen atoms in the following structure may be further substituted by R 1 in formula (1-1) or a known substituent such as a hydrocarbon group.

 Xが、式(V-8)で表される構造から2以上の水素原子を除いた構造を含む基である場合、Xは下記式(V-8-1)で表される基であることが好ましい。下記式中、*は式(1-1)中のXが結合する4つのカルボニル基との結合部位を表す。RX5の定義及び好ましい態様は上述の通りである。また、下記構造における水素原子は、式(1-1)中のR、又は、炭化水素基等の公知の置換基により更に置換されていてもよい。
When X 1 is a group containing a structure obtained by removing two or more hydrogen atoms from a structure represented by formula (V-8), X 1 is preferably a group represented by the following formula (V-8-1). In the following formula, * represents the bonding site to the four carbonyl groups to which X 1 in formula (1-1) is bonded. The definition and preferred embodiments of R X5 are as described above. In addition, the hydrogen atom in the following structure may be further substituted by R 1 in formula (1-1) or a known substituent such as a hydrocarbon group.

 Xが、式(V-9)で表される構造から2以上の水素原子を除いた構造を含む基である場合、Xは下記式(V-9-1)で表される基であることが好ましい。下記式中、*は式(1-1)中のXが結合する4つのカルボニル基との結合部位を表す。また、下記構造における水素原子は、式(1-1)中のR、又は、炭化水素基等の公知の置換基により更に置換されていてもよい。
When X 1 is a group containing a structure obtained by removing two or more hydrogen atoms from a structure represented by formula (V-9), X 1 is preferably a group represented by the following formula (V-9-1). In the following formula, * represents the bonding site to which X 1 in formula (1-1) bonds with the four carbonyl groups. In addition, the hydrogen atoms in the following structure may be further substituted by R 1 in formula (1-1) or a known substituent such as a hydrocarbon group.

 Xが、式(V-10)で表される構造から2以上の水素原子を除いた構造を含む基である場合、Xは下記式(V-10-1)で表される基であることが好ましい。下記式中、*は式(1-1)中のXが結合する4つのカルボニル基との結合部位を表す。また、下記構造における水素原子は、式(1-1)中のR、炭化水素基等の公知の置換基により更に置換されていてもよい。
When X 1 is a group containing a structure obtained by removing two or more hydrogen atoms from a structure represented by formula (V-10), X 1 is preferably a group represented by the following formula (V-10-1). In the following formula, * represents the bonding site to which X 1 in formula (1-1) bonds with the four carbonyl groups. In addition, the hydrogen atoms in the following structure may be further substituted with R 1 in formula (1-1), known substituents such as hydrocarbon groups, etc.

 その他、Xは特開2023-003421号公報の段落0055~0057に記載のテトラカルボン酸二無水物から無水物基の除去後に残存するテトラカルボン酸残基であってもよい。 Alternatively, X 1 may be a tetracarboxylic acid residue remaining after removal of the anhydride groups from the tetracarboxylic acid dianhydride described in paragraphs 0055 to 0057 of JP-A No. 2023-003421.

 また、Xは構造中にイミド構造を含まないことが好ましい。
 また、Xは構造中にウレタン結合、ウレア結合及びアミド結合を含まないことが好ましい。
 本発明において、ウレタン結合とは*-O-C(=O)-NR-*で表される結合であり、Rは水素原子又は1価の有機基を表し、*はそれぞれ、炭素原子との結合部位を表す。Rは水素原子又は炭化水素基が好ましく、水素原子又はアルキル基がより好ましく、水素原子が更に好ましい。
 本発明において、ウレア結合とは、*-NR-C(=O)-NR-*で表される結合であり、Rはそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又は1価の有機基を表し、*はそれぞれ、炭素原子との結合部位を表す。Rの好ましい態様は上述の通りである。
 更に、Xは構造中にエステル結合を含まないことが好ましい。
 本発明において、エステル結合とは、*-O-C(=O)-*で表される結合である。
 これらの中でも、Xはイミド構造、ウレタン結合、ウレア結合及びアミド結合を含まないことが好ましく、イミド構造、ウレタン結合、ウレア結合、アミド結合及びエステル結合を含まないことがより好ましい。
Furthermore, it is preferable that X1 does not contain an imide structure in its structure.
Furthermore, it is preferable that X1 does not contain a urethane bond, a urea bond, or an amide bond in the structure.
In the present invention, the urethane bond is a bond represented by *-O-C(=O)-NR N -*, where R N represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group, and * represents a bonding site with a carbon atom. R N is preferably a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group, more preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, and even more preferably a hydrogen atom.
In the present invention, the urea bond is a bond represented by *-NR N -C(=O)-NR N -*, where each R N independently represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group, and each * represents a bonding site with a carbon atom. Preferred aspects of R N are as described above.
Furthermore, it is preferable that X1 does not contain an ester bond in the structure.
In the present invention, the ester bond is a bond represented by *--O--C(.dbd.O)--*.
Among these, it is preferable that X 1 does not contain an imide structure, a urethane bond, a urea bond, or an amide bond, and it is more preferable that X 1 does not contain an imide structure, a urethane bond, a urea bond, an amide bond, or an ester bond.

 また、Xは下記式(X-2)で表される構造、又は、式(X-2)で表される構造におけるXで表される基の水素原子若しくはLで表される基の水素原子が式(1-1)中のRで表される基により置換された構造であってもよい。
 式(X-2)中、Xはそれぞれ独立に、3価の連結基を表し、Lは2価の連結基を表し、*は他の構造との結合部位を表す。
Furthermore, X1 may be a structure represented by the following formula (X-2), or a structure in which the hydrogen atom of the group represented by X2 or the hydrogen atom of the group represented by L3 in the structure represented by formula (X-2) is substituted with a group represented by R1 in formula (1-1).
In formula (X-2), X2 's each independently represent a trivalent linking group, L3 's represents a divalent linking group, and * represents a bonding site to another structure.

 式(X-2)中、Xは直鎖状又は分岐鎖状の脂肪族基、環状の脂肪族基、及び芳香族基、又は単結合若しくは連結基によりこれらを2以上連結した基が例示され、炭素数2~20の直鎖状の脂肪族基、炭素数3~20の分岐鎖状の脂肪族基、炭素数3~20の環状の脂肪族基、炭素数6~20の芳香族基、又は、単結合若しくは連結基によりこれらを2以上組み合わせた基が好ましく、炭素数6~20の芳香族基、又は、単結合若しくは連結基により炭素数6~20の芳香族基を2以上組み合わせた基がより好ましい。
 上記連結基としては、-O-、-S-、-C(=O)-、-S(=O)-、アルキレン基、ハロゲン化アルキレン基、アリーレン基、又はこれらを2以上結合した連結基が好ましく、-O-、-S-、アルキレン基、ハロゲン化アルキレン基、アリーレン基、又はこれらを2以上結合した連結基がより好ましい。
 上記アルキレン基としては、炭素数1~20のアルキレン基が好ましく、炭素数1~10のアルキレン基がより好ましく、炭素数1~4のアルキレン基が更に好ましい。
 上記ハロゲン化アルキレン基としては、炭素数1~20のハロゲン化アルキレン基が好ましく、炭素数1~10のハロゲン化アルキレン基がより好ましく、炭素数1~4のハロゲン化アルキレン基が更に好ましい。また、上記ハロゲン化アルキレン基におけるハロゲン原子としては、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、ヨウ素原子等が挙げられ、フッ素原子が好ましい。上記ハロゲン化アルキレン基は、水素原子を有していても、水素原子の全てがハロゲン原子で置換されていてもよいが、水素原子の全てがハロゲン原子で置換されていることが好ましい。好ましいハロゲン化アルキレン基の例としては、(ジトリフルオロメチル)メチレン基等が挙げられる。
 上記アリーレン基としては、フェニレン基又はナフチレン基が好ましく、フェニレン基がより好ましく、1,3-フェニレン基又は1,4-フェニレン基が更に好ましい。
In formula (X-2), X2 is exemplified by a linear or branched aliphatic group, a cyclic aliphatic group, and an aromatic group, or a group in which two or more of these are linked by a single bond or a linking group. A linear aliphatic group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, a branched aliphatic group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, a cyclic aliphatic group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, an aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, or a group in which two or more of these are combined by a single bond or a linking group is preferred, and an aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, or a group in which two or more aromatic groups having 6 to 20 carbon atoms are combined by a single bond or a linking group is more preferred.
The linking group is preferably -O-, -S-, -C(=O)-, -S(=O) 2 -, an alkylene group, a halogenated alkylene group, an arylene group, or a linking group formed by bonding two or more of these, and more preferably -O-, -S-, an alkylene group, a halogenated alkylene group, an arylene group, or a linking group formed by bonding two or more of these.
The alkylene group is preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and even more preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
The halogenated alkylene group is preferably a halogenated alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably a halogenated alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and even more preferably a halogenated alkylene group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms. Examples of the halogen atom in the halogenated alkylene group include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom, with a fluorine atom being preferred. The halogenated alkylene group may contain hydrogen atoms, or all of the hydrogen atoms may be substituted with halogen atoms, but it is preferred that all of the hydrogen atoms be substituted with halogen atoms. Examples of preferred halogenated alkylene groups include a (ditrifluoromethyl)methylene group.
The arylene group is preferably a phenylene group or a naphthylene group, more preferably a phenylene group, and even more preferably a 1,3-phenylene group or a 1,4-phenylene group.

 また、Xは少なくとも1つのカルボキシ基がハロゲン化されていてもよいトリカルボン酸化合物から誘導されることが好ましい。上記ハロゲン化としては、塩素化が好ましい。
 本発明において、カルボキシ基を3つ有する化合物をトリカルボン酸化合物という。
 上記トリカルボン酸化合物の3つのカルボキシ基のうち2つのカルボキシ基は酸無水物化されていてもよい。
 ハロゲン化されていてもよいトリカルボン酸化合物としては、分岐鎖状の脂肪族、環状の脂肪族又は芳香族のトリカルボン酸化合物などが挙げられる。
 これらのトリカルボン酸化合物は、1種のみ用いてもよいし、2種以上用いてもよい。
X2 is preferably derived from a tricarboxylic acid compound in which at least one carboxy group may be halogenated. The halogenation is preferably chlorination.
In the present invention, a compound having three carboxy groups is called a tricarboxylic acid compound.
Two of the three carboxy groups of the tricarboxylic acid compound may be converted into acid anhydrides.
Examples of the tricarboxylic acid compound which may be halogenated include branched aliphatic, cyclic aliphatic, and aromatic tricarboxylic acid compounds.
These tricarboxylic acid compounds may be used alone or in combination of two or more.

 Xは構造中にイミド構造を含まないことが好ましい。
 また、Xは構造中にウレタン結合、ウレア結合及びアミド結合を含まないことが好ましい。
 更に、Xは構造中にエステル結合を含まないことが好ましい。
 これらの中でも、Xはイミド構造、ウレタン結合、ウレア結合及びアミド結合を含まないことが好ましく、イミド構造、ウレタン結合、ウレア結合、アミド結合及びエステル結合を含まないことがより好ましい。
It is preferable that X2 does not contain an imide structure in its structure.
Furthermore, it is preferable that X2 does not contain a urethane bond, a urea bond, or an amide bond in the structure.
Furthermore, it is preferable that X2 does not contain an ester bond in the structure.
Among these, X2 preferably does not contain an imide structure, a urethane bond, a urea bond, or an amide bond, and more preferably does not contain an imide structure, a urethane bond, a urea bond, an amide bond, or an ester bond.

 具体的には、トリカルボン酸化合物としては、炭素数2~20の直鎖状の脂肪族基、炭素数3~20の分岐鎖状の脂肪族基、炭素数3~20の環状の脂肪族基、炭素数6~20の芳香族基、又は、単結合若しくは連結基によりこれらを2以上組み合わせた基を含むトリカルボン酸化合物が好ましく、炭素数6~20の芳香族基、又は、単結合若しくは連結基により炭素数6~20の芳香族基を2以上組み合わせた基を含むトリカルボン酸化合物がより好ましい。 Specifically, tricarboxylic acid compounds containing a linear aliphatic group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, a branched aliphatic group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, a cyclic aliphatic group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, an aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, or a group combining two or more of these groups via a single bond or a linking group are preferred, and tricarboxylic acid compounds containing an aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, or a group combining two or more aromatic groups having 6 to 20 carbon atoms via a single bond or a linking group are more preferred.

 また、トリカルボン酸化合物の具体例としては、1,2,3-プロパントリカルボン酸、1,3,5-ペンタントリカルボン酸、クエン酸、トリメリット酸、2,3,6-ナフタレントリカルボン酸、フタル酸(又は、無水フタル酸)と安息香酸とが単結合、-O-、-CH-、-C(CH-、-C(CF-、-SO-又はフェニレン基で連結された化合物等が挙げられる。
 これらの化合物は、2つのカルボキシ基が無水物化した化合物(例えば、トリメリット酸無水物)であってもよいし、少なくとも1つのカルボキシ基がハロゲン化した化合物(例えば、無水トリメリット酸クロリド)であってもよい。
Specific examples of tricarboxylic acid compounds include 1,2,3-propanetricarboxylic acid, 1,3,5-pentanetricarboxylic acid, citric acid, trimellitic acid, 2,3,6-naphthalenetricarboxylic acid, and compounds in which phthalic acid (or phthalic anhydride) and benzoic acid are linked via a single bond, —O—, —CH 2 —, —C(CH 3 ) 2 —, —C(CF 3 ) 2 —, —SO 2 —, or a phenylene group.
These compounds may be compounds in which two carboxy groups are anhydrides (e.g., trimellitic anhydride), or may be compounds in which at least one carboxy group is halogenated (e.g., trimellitic anhydride chloride).

 式(X-2)中、Lは直鎖状又は分岐鎖状の脂肪族基、環状の脂肪族基、芳香族基、又は単結合若しくは連結基によりこれらを2以上連結した基が例示され、炭素数2~20の直鎖状の脂肪族基、炭素数3~20の分岐鎖状の脂肪族基、炭素数3~20の環状の脂肪族基、炭素数6~20の芳香族基、又は、単結合若しくは連結基によりこれらを2以上組み合わせた基が好ましく、炭素数6~20の芳香族基、又は、単結合若しくは連結基により炭素数6~20の芳香族基を2以上組み合わせた基がより好ましい。
 上記連結基としては、-O-、-S-、-C(=O)-、-S(=O)-、アルキレン基、ハロゲン化アルキレン基、アリーレン基、又はこれらを2以上結合した連結基が好ましく、-O-、-S-、アルキレン基、ハロゲン化アルキレン基、アリーレン基、又はこれらを2以上結合した連結基がより好ましい。
 上記アルキレン基としては、炭素数1~20のアルキレン基が好ましく、炭素数1~10のアルキレン基がより好ましく、炭素数1~4のアルキレン基が更に好ましい。
 上記ハロゲン化アルキレン基としては、炭素数1~20のハロゲン化アルキレン基が好ましく、炭素数1~10のハロゲン化アルキレン基がより好ましく、炭素数1~4のハロゲン化アルキレン基が更に好ましい。また、上記ハロゲン化アルキレン基におけるハロゲン原子としては、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、ヨウ素原子等が挙げられ、フッ素原子が好ましい。上記ハロゲン化アルキレン基は、水素原子を有していても、水素原子の全てがハロゲン原子で置換されていてもよいが、水素原子の全てがハロゲン原子で置換されていることが好ましい。好ましいハロゲン化アルキレン基の例としては、(ジトリフルオロメチル)メチレン基等が挙げられる。
 上記アリーレン基としては、フェニレン基又はナフチレン基が好ましく、フェニレン基がより好ましく、1,3-フェニレン基又は1,4-フェニレン基が更に好ましい。
In formula (X-2), L3 is exemplified by a linear or branched aliphatic group, a cyclic aliphatic group, an aromatic group, or a group in which two or more of these are linked by a single bond or a linking group, and is preferably a linear aliphatic group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, a branched aliphatic group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, a cyclic aliphatic group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, an aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, or a group in which two or more of these are combined by a single bond or a linking group, and more preferably an aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, or a group in which two or more aromatic groups having 6 to 20 carbon atoms are combined by a single bond or a linking group.
The linking group is preferably -O-, -S-, -C(=O)-, -S(=O) 2 -, an alkylene group, a halogenated alkylene group, an arylene group, or a linking group formed by bonding two or more of these, and more preferably -O-, -S-, an alkylene group, a halogenated alkylene group, an arylene group, or a linking group formed by bonding two or more of these.
The alkylene group is preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and even more preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
The halogenated alkylene group is preferably a halogenated alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably a halogenated alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and even more preferably a halogenated alkylene group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms. Examples of the halogen atom in the halogenated alkylene group include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom, with a fluorine atom being preferred. The halogenated alkylene group may contain hydrogen atoms, or all of the hydrogen atoms may be substituted with halogen atoms, but it is preferred that all of the hydrogen atoms be substituted with halogen atoms. Examples of preferred halogenated alkylene groups include a (ditrifluoromethyl)methylene group.
The arylene group is preferably a phenylene group or a naphthylene group, more preferably a phenylene group, and even more preferably a 1,3-phenylene group or a 1,4-phenylene group.

 また、Xは下記式(X-3)で表される構造、又は、式(X-3)で表される構造におけるXで表される基の水素原子若しくはLで表される基の水素原子が式(1-1)中のRで表される基により置換された構造であってもよい。
 式(X-3)中、Xはそれぞれ独立に、3価の連結基を表し、Lは2価の連結基を表し、*は他の構造との結合部位を表す。
 式(X-3)中、X及びLの好ましい態様は、式(X-2)中のX及びLの好ましい態様と同様である。
Furthermore, X1 may be a structure represented by the following formula (X-3), or a structure in which the hydrogen atom of the group represented by X2 or the hydrogen atom of the group represented by L3 in the structure represented by formula (X-3) is substituted with a group represented by R1 in formula (1-1).
In formula (X-3), X2 's each independently represent a trivalent linking group, L3 represents a divalent linking group, and * represents a bonding site to another structure.
In formula (X-3), the preferred embodiments of X2 and L3 are the same as the preferred embodiments of X2 and L3 in formula (X-2).

-Y
 Yの炭素数は、4以上であり、4~50であることが好ましく、4~40であることがより好ましい。
 式(1-1)中、Yは上述の式(V-1)~式(V-10)のいずれかで表される構造から2以上の水素原子を除いた構造を含む基であってもよい。
 式(V-1)~式(V-10)のいずれかで表される構造から2以上の水素原子を除いた構造を含む有機基であることにより、硬化物の耐薬品性及び平坦性が向上する。
-Y1-
Y 1 has 4 or more carbon atoms, preferably 4 to 50 carbon atoms, and more preferably 4 to 40 carbon atoms.
In formula (1-1), Y 1 may be a group containing a structure in which two or more hydrogen atoms have been removed from a structure represented by any one of formulas (V-1) to (V-10) above.
The organic group containing a structure in which two or more hydrogen atoms have been removed from a structure represented by any one of formulas (V-1) to (V-10) improves the chemical resistance and flatness of the cured product.

 Yが、式(V-1)で表される構造から2以上の水素原子を除いた構造を含む基である場合、Yは下記式(V-1-2)で表される基であることが好ましい。下記式中、*は式(1-1)中のYが結合する2つの窒素原子との結合部位を表し、n1は1~5の整数を表す。また、下記構造における水素原子は、式(1-1)中のR、又は、炭化水素基等の公知の置換基により更に置換されていてもよい。
When Y 1 is a group containing a structure obtained by removing two or more hydrogen atoms from the structure represented by formula (V-1), Y 1 is preferably a group represented by the following formula (V-1-2): In the following formula, * represents the bonding site to the two nitrogen atoms to which Y 1 in formula (1-1) is bonded, and n1 represents an integer of 1 to 5. Furthermore, the hydrogen atoms in the following structure may be further substituted by R 1 in formula (1-1) or a known substituent such as a hydrocarbon group.

 Yが、式(V-2)で表される構造から2以上の水素原子を除いた構造を含む基である場合、Yは下記式(V-2-3)又は式(V-2-4)で表される基であることが好ましく、硬化物の誘電率を低下させる等の観点からは、式(V-2-4)で表される基であることが好ましい。下記式中、LX1は単結合又は-O-を表し、*は式(1-1)中のYが結合する2つの窒素原子との結合部位を表す。また、RX1の好ましい態様は上述の通りである。また、これらの構造における水素原子は、式(1-1)中のR1、又は、炭化水素基等の公知の置換基により更に置換されていてもよい。
When Y 1 is a group containing a structure obtained by removing two or more hydrogen atoms from a structure represented by formula (V-2), Y 1 is preferably a group represented by formula (V-2-3) or formula (V-2-4) below, and from the viewpoint of reducing the dielectric constant of the cured product, a group represented by formula (V-2-4) is preferred. In the following formulas, L X1 represents a single bond or —O—, and * represents the bonding site with the two nitrogen atoms to which Y 1 is bonded in formula (1-1). In addition, preferred aspects of R X1 are as described above. In addition, the hydrogen atoms in these structures may be further substituted with R 1 in formula (1-1) or a known substituent such as a hydrocarbon group.

 Yが、式(V-3)で表される構造から2以上の水素原子を除いた構造を含む基である場合、Yは下記式(V-3-3)又は式(V-3-4)で表される基であることが好ましく、硬化物の誘電率を低下させる等の観点からは、式(V-3-3)で表される基であることが好ましい。下記式中、*は式(1-1)中のYが結合する2つの窒素原子との結合部位を表す。また、RX2及びRX3の好ましい態様は上述の通りである。また、これらの構造における水素原子は、式(1-1)中のR、又は、炭化水素基等の公知の置換基により更に置換されていてもよい。
When Y 1 is a group containing a structure obtained by removing two or more hydrogen atoms from a structure represented by formula (V-3), Y 1 is preferably a group represented by formula (V-3-3) or formula (V-3-4) below, and from the viewpoint of reducing the dielectric constant of the cured product, a group represented by formula (V-3-3) is preferred. In the following formulas, * represents the bonding site with the two nitrogen atoms to which Y 1 in formula (1-1) is bonded. In addition, preferred aspects of R X2 and R X3 are as described above. In addition, the hydrogen atoms in these structures may be further substituted with R 1 in formula (1-1) or a known substituent such as a hydrocarbon group.

 Yが、式(V-4)で表される構造から2以上の水素原子を除いた構造を含む基である場合、Yは下記式(V-4-2)又は式(V-4-3)で表される基であることが好ましい。下記式中、*は式(1-1)中のYが結合する2つの窒素原子との結合部位を表し、n1は0~5の整数を表す。またn1が0である態様も、本発明の好ましい態様の一つである。また、下記構造における水素原子は、式(1-1)中のR、又は、炭化水素基等の公知の置換基により更に置換されていてもよい。公知の置換基としては、アルキル基、ハロゲン化アルキル基、ハロゲン原子等が挙げられる。
When Y 1 is a group containing a structure obtained by removing two or more hydrogen atoms from a structure represented by formula (V-4), Y 1 is preferably a group represented by formula (V-4-2) or formula (V-4-3) below. In the formulas below, * represents the bonding site with the two nitrogen atoms to which Y 1 in formula (1-1) is bonded, and n1 represents an integer of 0 to 5. An embodiment in which n1 is 0 is also one of the preferred embodiments of the present invention. Furthermore, the hydrogen atom in the structure below may be further substituted with R 1 in formula (1-1) or a known substituent such as a hydrocarbon group. Examples of known substituents include an alkyl group, a halogenated alkyl group, and a halogen atom.

 Yが、式(V-5)で表される構造から2以上の水素原子を除いた構造を含む基である場合、Yは下記式(V-5-2)で表される基であることが好ましい。下記式中、*は式(1-1)中のYが結合する2つの窒素原子との結合部位を表す。また、式(V-5-2)における水素原子は、式(1-1)中のR、又は、炭化水素基等の公知の置換基により更に置換されていてもよい。公知の置換基としては、アルキル基、ハロゲン化アルキル基、ハロゲン原子等が挙げられる。ただし、(V-5-2)で表される構造における水素原子がいずれも置換されていないことも好ましい。
When Y 1 is a group containing a structure obtained by removing two or more hydrogen atoms from a structure represented by formula (V-5), Y 1 is preferably a group represented by formula (V-5-2) below. In the following formula, * represents the bonding site with the two nitrogen atoms to which Y 1 in formula (1-1) is bonded. Furthermore, the hydrogen atom in formula (V-5-2) may be further substituted with R 1 in formula (1-1) or a known substituent such as a hydrocarbon group. Examples of the known substituent include an alkyl group, a halogenated alkyl group, and a halogen atom. However, it is also preferable that none of the hydrogen atoms in the structure represented by (V-5-2) is substituted.

 Yが、式(V-6)で表される構造から2以上の水素原子を除いた構造を含む基である場合、Yは下記式(V-6-2)で表される基であることが好ましい。下記式中、*は式(1-1)中のYが結合する2つの窒素原子との結合部位を表す。また、下記構造における水素原子は、式(1-1)中のR、又は、炭化水素基等の公知の置換基により更に置換されていてもよい。
When Y 1 is a group containing a structure obtained by removing two or more hydrogen atoms from the structure represented by formula (V-6), Y 1 is preferably a group represented by the following formula (V-6-2). In the following formula, * represents the bonding site with the two nitrogen atoms to which Y 1 is bonded in formula (1-1). In addition, the hydrogen atom in the following structure may be further substituted with R 1 in formula (1-1) or a known substituent such as a hydrocarbon group.

 Yが、式(V-7)で表される構造から2以上の水素原子を除いた構造を含む基である場合、Yは下記式(V-7-2)で表される基であることが好ましい。下記式中、*は式(1-1)中のYが結合する2つの窒素原子との結合部位を表す。また、下記構造における水素原子は、式(1-1)中のR、又は、炭化水素基等の公知の置換基により更に置換されていてもよい。
When Y 1 is a group containing a structure obtained by removing two or more hydrogen atoms from a structure represented by formula (V-7), Y 1 is preferably a group represented by the following formula (V-7-2). In the following formula, * represents the bonding site with the two nitrogen atoms to which Y 1 is bonded in formula (1-1). In addition, the hydrogen atoms in the following structure may be further substituted with R 1 in formula (1-1) or a known substituent such as a hydrocarbon group.

 Yが、式(V-8)で表される構造から2以上の水素原子を除いた構造を含む基である場合、Yは下記式(V-8-2)で表される基であることが好ましい。下記式中、*は式(1-1)中のYが結合する2つの窒素原子との結合部位を表す。また、下記構造における水素原子は、式(1-1)中のR、又は、炭化水素基等の公知の置換基により更に置換されていてもよい。
When Y 1 is a group containing a structure obtained by removing two or more hydrogen atoms from a structure represented by formula (V-8), Y 1 is preferably a group represented by the following formula (V-8-2). In the following formula, * represents the bonding site with the two nitrogen atoms to which Y 1 is bonded in formula (1-1). In addition, the hydrogen atom in the following structure may be further substituted with R 1 in formula (1-1) or a known substituent such as a hydrocarbon group.

 Yが、式(V-9)で表される構造から2以上の水素原子を除いた構造を含む基である場合、Yは下記式(V-9-2)で表される基であることが好ましい。下記式中、*は式(1-1)中のYが結合する2つの窒素原子との結合部位を表す。また、RX5の好ましい態様は上述の通りである。また、下記構造における水素原子は、式(1-1)中のR、又は、炭化水素基等の公知の置換基により更に置換されていてもよい。
When Y 1 is a group containing a structure obtained by removing two or more hydrogen atoms from a structure represented by formula (V-9), Y 1 is preferably a group represented by the following formula (V-9-2). In the following formula, * represents the bonding site with the two nitrogen atoms to which Y 1 is bonded in formula (1-1). In addition, preferred aspects of R X5 are as described above. In addition, the hydrogen atom in the following structure may be further substituted with R 1 in formula (1-1) or a known substituent such as a hydrocarbon group.

 Yが、式(V-10)で表される構造から2以上の水素原子を除いた構造を含む基である場合、Yは下記式(V-10-2)で表される基であることが好ましい。下記式中、*は式(1-1)中のYが結合する2つの窒素原子との結合部位を表す。また、下記構造における水素原子は、式(1-1)中のR、又は、炭化水素基等の公知の置換基により更に置換されていてもよい。
When Y 1 is a group containing a structure obtained by removing two or more hydrogen atoms from a structure represented by formula (V-10), Y 1 is preferably a group represented by the following formula (V-10-2). In the following formula, * represents the bonding site with the two nitrogen atoms to which Y 1 is bonded in formula (1-1). In addition, the hydrogen atom in the following structure may be further substituted with R 1 in formula (1-1) or a known substituent such as a hydrocarbon group.

 その他、Yは特開2023-003421号公報の段落0042~0053に記載の基であってもよい。
 また、Yは構造中にイミド構造を含まないことが好ましい。
 また、Yは構造中にウレタン結合、ウレア結合及びアミド結合を含まないことが好ましい。
 更に、Yは構造中にエステル結合を含まないことが好ましい。
 これらの中でも、Yはイミド構造、ウレタン結合、ウレア結合及びアミド結合を含まないことが好ましく、イミド構造、ウレタン結合、ウレア結合、アミド結合及びエステル結合を含まないことがより好ましい。
Additionally, Y 1 may be a group described in paragraphs 0042 to 0053 of JP-A No. 2023-003421.
It is also preferable that Y1 does not contain an imide structure in its structure.
It is also preferred that Y1 does not contain a urethane bond, a urea bond or an amide bond in the structure.
Furthermore, it is preferable that Y1 does not contain an ester bond in the structure.
Among these, Y1 preferably does not contain an imide structure, a urethane bond, a urea bond, or an amide bond, and more preferably does not contain an imide structure, a urethane bond, a urea bond, an amide bond, or an ester bond.

 これらの中でも、式(1-1)におけるX及びYが、いずれも環構造を含むことが好ましく、それぞれ、上記式(V-1)~式(V-10)のいずれかで表される構造から2以上の水素原子を除いた構造を含む有機基であることがより好ましく、上記式(V-1)~式(V-4)のいずれかで表される構造から2以上の水素原子を除いた構造を含む有機基であることが更に好ましい。これらの基の好ましい態様は上述の通りである。 Among these, it is preferable that X1 and Y1 in formula (1-1) both contain a ring structure, and each is more preferably an organic group containing a structure obtained by removing two or more hydrogen atoms from a structure represented by any one of formulas (V-1) to (V-10) above, and even more preferably an organic group containing a structure obtained by removing two or more hydrogen atoms from a structure represented by any one of formulas (V-1) to (V-4) above. Preferred aspects of these groups are as described above.

-R
 式(1-1)のRは式(R-1)で表される基である。
 式(R-1)中、Lは下記式(L-2)で表される基であることが好ましい。
 式(L-2)中、Zは-O-、-NR-、-C(=O)O-又は-C(=O)NR-を表し、Rは水素原子又は1価の有機基を表し、a1が1である場合、Lは単結合又は2価の連結基を表し、a1が2以上である場合、Lはa1+1価の連結基を表し、a1は1以上の整数を表し、*は式(1-1)中のX又はY中の他の構造との結合部位を表し、#は式(R-1)中のAとの結合部位を表す。
-R 1 -
R 1 in formula (1-1) is a group represented by formula (R-1).
In formula (R-1), L1 is preferably a group represented by the following formula (L-2).
In formula (L-2), Z2 represents -O-, -NR N -, -C(=O)O- or -C(=O)NR N -, R N represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group, when a1 is 1, L x represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, when a1 is 2 or more, L x represents an a1+1-valent linking group, a1 represents an integer of 1 or more, * represents a bonding site to another structure in X1 or Y1 in formula (1-1), and # represents a bonding site to A1 in formula (R-1).

 式(L-2)中、Zは-O-又は-C(=O)O-であることが好ましい。また、Zが-NR-又は-C(=O)NR-である場合、Rは水素原子又は炭化水素基が好ましく、水素原子、アルキル基又はフェニル基がより好ましく、水素原子が更に好ましい。
 式(L-2)中、a1が1である場合、Lはアルキレン基であることが好ましく、炭素数1~10のアルキレン基であることがより好ましく、炭素数1~4のアルキレン基であることが更に好ましく、メチレン基であることが特に好ましい。
 式(L-2)中、a1が2以上である場合、Lは炭化水素基、ヘテロ環基、又は、これらの組み合わせにより表される基であることが好ましく、炭素数2~20の飽和脂肪族炭化水素基であることがより好ましく、炭素数3~15の飽和脂肪族炭化水素基であることが更に好ましい。
 式(L-2)中、a1は式(R-1)中のa1と同義である。
In formula (L-2), Z2 is preferably —O— or —C(═O)O—. When Z2 is —NR N — or —C(═O)NR N —, R N is preferably a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group, more preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or a phenyl group, and still more preferably a hydrogen atom.
In formula (L-2), when a1 is 1, Lx is preferably an alkylene group, more preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, still more preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably a methylene group.
In formula (L-2), when a1 is 2 or more, Lx is preferably a hydrocarbon group, a heterocyclic group, or a group represented by a combination thereof, more preferably a saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, and even more preferably a saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 3 to 15 carbon atoms.
In formula (L-2), a1 has the same meaning as a1 in formula (R-1).

 式(R-1)中、Aは重合性基を表す。重合性基の好ましい態様は、上述の特定樹脂が有する重合性基の好ましい態様の通りである。 In formula (R-1), A 1 represents a polymerizable group. Preferred embodiments of the polymerizable group are the same as the preferred embodiments of the polymerizable group contained in the specific resin described above.

 これらの中でも、Aはビニルフェニル基、(メタ)アクリロキシ基、ビニルエーテル基、マレイミド基、アリル基又はこれらを含む基であることが好ましく、マレイミド基、(メタ)アクリロキシ基、(メタ)アクリルアミド基又はビニルフェニル基であることがより好ましい。特に、反応性の観点からは(メタ)アクリロキシ基が好ましい。また、硬化物の誘電正接を低下させる観点からは、マレイミド基又はビニルフェニル基が好ましい。
 特に、式(1-1)に含まれる式(R-1)におけるAの少なくとも1つが、ビニルフェニル基、(メタ)アクリロキシ基、ビニルエーテル基、マレイミド基、アリル基、エポキシ基又はこれらを含む基であることが好ましく、マレイミド基、(メタ)アクリロキシ基、(メタ)アクリルアミド基又はビニルフェニル基であることがより好ましく、ビニルフェニル基であることが更に好ましい。
Among these, A1 is preferably a vinylphenyl group, a (meth)acryloxy group, a vinyl ether group, a maleimide group, an allyl group, or a group containing these, and more preferably a maleimide group, a (meth)acryloxy group, a (meth)acrylamide group, or a vinylphenyl group. In particular, a (meth)acryloxy group is preferred from the viewpoint of reactivity. Furthermore, a maleimide group or a vinylphenyl group is preferred from the viewpoint of reducing the dielectric loss tangent of the cured product.
In particular, at least one of A 1 in formula (R-1) included in formula (1-1) is preferably a vinylphenyl group, a (meth)acryloxy group, a vinyl ether group, a maleimide group, an allyl group, an epoxy group, or a group containing any of these, more preferably a maleimide group, a (meth)acryloxy group, a (meth)acrylamide group, or a vinylphenyl group, and even more preferably a vinylphenyl group.

 これらの中でも、式(R-1)におけるAがビニルフェニル基であり、Lが式(L-2-1)で表される基であることが好ましい。
 式(L-2-1)中、LX2は炭化水素基を表し、a1は1以上の整数を表す。
 式(L-2-1)中、LX2は脂肪族飽和炭化水素基が好ましい。
 a1が1の場合、LX2はアルキレン基が好ましく、炭素数1~10のアルキレン基がより好ましく、炭素数1~4のアルキレン基が更に好ましく、メチレン基が特に好ましい。
 式(L-2-1)中、a1は式(R-1)中のa1と同義である。
Among these, it is preferable that A 1 in formula (R-1) is a vinylphenyl group and L 1 is a group represented by formula (L-2-1).
In formula (L-2-1), L and X2 represent a hydrocarbon group, and a1 represents an integer of 1 or more.
In formula (L-2-1), L and X2 are preferably saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon groups.
When a1 is 1, L X2 is preferably an alkylene group, more preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, still more preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably a methylene group.
In formula (L-2-1), a1 has the same meaning as a1 in formula (R-1).

 また、式(R-1)におけるAがマレイミド基であり、Lが式(L-2)で表される基であって、式(L-2)におけるLが芳香族基、又は、炭素数4以上の脂肪族飽和炭化水素基であることが好ましい。
 上記芳香族基としては、芳香族炭化水素基、芳香族ヘテロ環基のいずれであってもよいが、芳香族炭化水素基が好ましい。
 芳香族炭化水素基としては、炭素数6~10の芳香族炭化水素基が好ましく、炭素数6の芳香族炭化水素基がより好ましい。
 芳香族ヘテロ環基におけるヘテロ原子としては、酸素原子、窒素原子、硫黄原子等が挙げられる。芳香族ヘテロ環基におけるヘテロ原子の数は、1又は2が好ましい。また、芳香族ヘテロ環基としては、上記ヘテロ原子を含む5員環又は6員環が好ましい。更に、芳香族ヘテロ環基には、他の芳香族ヘテロ環基又は他の芳香族炭化水素環基が縮合していてもよい。
 炭素数4以上の脂肪族飽和炭化水素基としては、直鎖状、分岐鎖状、環状、又はこれらの組み合わせにより表される構造のいずれであってもよい。
 炭素数4以上の脂肪族飽和炭化水素基の炭素数は、4~20であることが好ましく、5~10であることがより好ましい。
It is also preferred that A 1 in formula (R-1) is a maleimide group, L 1 is a group represented by formula (L-2), and L X in formula (L-2) is an aromatic group or an aliphatic saturated hydrocarbon group having 4 or more carbon atoms.
The aromatic group may be either an aromatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic heterocyclic group, with an aromatic hydrocarbon group being preferred.
The aromatic hydrocarbon group is preferably an aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably an aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 carbon atoms.
Examples of heteroatoms in the aromatic heterocyclic group include oxygen atoms, nitrogen atoms, and sulfur atoms. The number of heteroatoms in the aromatic heterocyclic group is preferably 1 or 2. The aromatic heterocyclic group is preferably a 5- or 6-membered ring containing the heteroatom. Furthermore, the aromatic heterocyclic group may be condensed with another aromatic heterocyclic group or another aromatic hydrocarbon ring group.
The aliphatic saturated hydrocarbon group having 4 or more carbon atoms may have any of a linear, branched, or cyclic structure, or a structure represented by a combination thereof.
The aliphatic saturated hydrocarbon group having 4 or more carbon atoms preferably has 4 to 20 carbon atoms, and more preferably has 5 to 10 carbon atoms.

 式(R-1)中、a1は1~4の整数であることが好ましく、1~2の整数であることがより好ましい。また、a1が1である態様も、本発明の好ましい態様の一つである。 In formula (R-1), a1 is preferably an integer of 1 to 4, and more preferably an integer of 1 or 2. An embodiment in which a1 is 1 is also a preferred embodiment of the present invention.

 また、式(R-1)中に含まれるエステル結合の数は1又は0であることが好ましい。 Furthermore, the number of ester bonds contained in formula (R-1) is preferably 1 or 0.

-n及びm-
 式(1-1)中、mは0~2の整数であることが好ましく、0又は1であることがより好ましい。また、mが0である態様も、本発明の好ましい態様の一つである。
 式(1-1)中、nは1以上であることが好ましく、1又は2であることがより好ましく、2であることが更に好ましい。
-n and m-
In formula (1-1), m is preferably an integer of 0 to 2, and more preferably 0 or 1. An embodiment in which m is 0 is also one of the preferred embodiments of the present invention.
In formula (1-1), n is preferably 1 or more, more preferably 1 or 2, and even more preferably 2.

〔式(1-2)で表される繰返し単位〕
 特定樹脂は、式(1-2)で表される繰返し単位を有してもよい。
 式(1-2)中、X21は炭素数4以上の有機基を表し、Y21は炭素数4以上の有機基を表し、R21はそれぞれ独立に、上述の式(B-1)で表される基を含む基を表し、mは0~4の整数を表し、nは0以上の整数を表し、n+mは1以上の整数である。
[Repeating unit represented by formula (1-2)]
The specific resin may have a repeating unit represented by formula (1-2).
In formula (1-2), X 21 represents an organic group having 4 or more carbon atoms, Y 21 represents an organic group having 4 or more carbon atoms, R 21 each independently represents a group containing a group represented by formula (B-1) above, m represents an integer of 0 to 4, n represents an integer of 0 or more, and n+m is an integer of 1 or more.

 式(1-2)中、X21の好ましい態様は、上述の式(1-1)におけるXの好ましい態様と同様である。ただし、Xの説明における「Rとの結合部位」についての記載は、「R21との結合部位」についての記載であると読み替えるものとする。
 式(1-2)中、Y21の好ましい態様は、上述の式(1-1)におけるYの好ましい態様と同様である。ただし、Xの説明における「Rとの結合部位」についての記載は、「R21との結合部位」についての記載であると読み替えるものとする。
In formula (1-2), preferred embodiments of X21 are the same as preferred embodiments of X1 in formula (1-1) above, except that the description of "the bonding site to R1 " in the description of X1 should be read as "the bonding site to R21 ".
In formula (1-2), preferred embodiments of Y 21 are the same as preferred embodiments of Y 1 in formula (1-1) above, except that the description of "the bonding site to R 1 " in the description of X 1 should be read as "the bonding site to R 21 ".

 R21は、下記式(B-2)で表される基であることが好ましい。
 式(B-2)中、ZB1は-O-、-NR-、-C(=O)O-又は-C(=O)NR-を表し、Rは水素原子又は1価の有機基を表し、RB1は上述の式(B-1)で表される基を表し、*は式(1-2)中のX21又はY21中の構造との結合部位を表す。
R 21 is preferably a group represented by the following formula (B-2).
In formula (B-2), Z B1 represents —O—, —NR N —, —C(═O)O— or —C(═O)NR N —; R N represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group; R B1 represents a group represented by formula (B-1) above; and * represents a bonding site to the structure of X 21 or Y 21 in formula (1-2).

 式(B-2)中、ZB1は-O-であることが好ましい。また、ZB1が-NR-又は-C(=O)NR-である場合、Rは水素原子又は炭化水素基が好ましく、水素原子、アルキル基又はフェニル基がより好ましく、水素原子が更に好ましい。
 式(B-2)中、RB1の好ましい態様は、上述の式(B-1)で表される基の好ましい態様と同様である。
In formula (B-2), Z B1 is preferably —O—. When Z B1 is —NR N — or —C(═O)NR N —, R N is preferably a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group, more preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or a phenyl group, and still more preferably a hydrogen atom.
In formula (B-2), preferred embodiments of R B1 are the same as the preferred embodiments of the group represented by formula (B-1) above.

 式(1-2)中、mは0~2の整数であることが好ましく、0又は1であることがより好ましい。また、mが0である態様も、本発明の好ましい態様の一つである。
 式(1-2)中、nは1以上であることが好ましく、1又は2であることがより好ましく、2であることが更に好ましい。
In formula (1-2), m is preferably an integer of 0 to 2, and more preferably 0 or 1. An embodiment in which m is 0 is also one of the preferred embodiments of the present invention.
In formula (1-2), n is preferably 1 or more, more preferably 1 or 2, and even more preferably 2.

〔式(4)で表される繰返し単位〕
 特定樹脂は、式(4)で表される繰返し単位を含んでもよい。
 式(1-1)又は式(1-2)で表される繰返し単位に該当する繰返し単位は、式(4)で表される繰返し単位には該当しないものとする。
 式(4)中、R131は、2価の有機基を表し、R132は、4価の有機基を表す。
[Repeating unit represented by formula (4)]
The specific resin may contain a repeating unit represented by formula (4).
A repeating unit corresponding to the repeating unit represented by formula (1-1) or formula (1-2) does not correspond to the repeating unit represented by formula (4).
In formula (4), R 131 represents a divalent organic group, and R 132 represents a tetravalent organic group.

 R131は、2価の有機基を表す。R131としては、特開2023-003421号公報の段落0042~0053に記載の基が挙げられる。これらの記載は本明細書に組み込まれる。 R 131 represents a divalent organic group. Examples of R 131 include groups described in paragraphs 0042 to 0053 of JP-A No. 2023-003421. These descriptions are incorporated herein by reference.

 R132は、4価の有機基を表す。R132としては、特開2023-003421号公報の段落0055~0057に記載の基が挙げられる。これらの記載は本明細書に組み込まれる。 R 132 represents a tetravalent organic group. Examples of R 132 include groups described in paragraphs 0055 to 0057 of JP-A No. 2023-003421. These descriptions are incorporated herein by reference.

 特定樹脂がポリイミドである場合、特定樹脂の全質量に対する、式(1-1)で表される繰返し単位の含有量は、30質量%以上であることが好ましく、50質量%以上であることがより好ましく、70質量%以上であることが更に好ましく、80質量%以上であることが特に好ましい。上記含有量の上限は特に限定されず、100質量%であってもよい。
 また、特定樹脂がポリイミドである場合、特定樹脂の全質量に対する、式(1-1)で表される繰返し単位と式(1-2)で表される繰返し単位と式(4)で表される繰返し単位の合計含有量は、50質量%以上であることが好ましく、70質量%以上であることがより好ましく、80質量%以上であることが更に好ましく、90質量%以上であることが特に好ましい。上記含有量の上限は特に限定されず、100質量%であってもよい。
 また、特定樹脂が式(1-1)で表される繰返し単位を含む場合、構造の異なる式(1-1)で表される繰返し単位を2種以上含有してもよい。その場合、合計量が上記範囲内であることが好ましい。
 特定樹脂が式(1-2)で表される繰返し単位を含む場合、構造の異なる式(1-2)で表される繰返し単位を2種以上含有してもよい。その場合、合計量が上記範囲内であることが好ましい。
 特定樹脂が式(4)で表される繰返し単位を含む場合、構造の異なる式(4)で表される繰返し単位を2種以上含有してもよい。その場合、合計量が上記範囲内であることが好ましい。
When the specific resin is a polyimide, the content of the repeating unit represented by formula (1-1) relative to the total mass of the specific resin is preferably 30% by mass or more, more preferably 50% by mass or more, even more preferably 70% by mass or more, and particularly preferably 80% by mass or more. The upper limit of the content is not particularly limited, and may be 100% by mass.
Furthermore, when the specific resin is a polyimide, the total content of the repeating unit represented by formula (1-1), the repeating unit represented by formula (1-2), and the repeating unit represented by formula (4) relative to the total mass of the specific resin is preferably 50% by mass or more, more preferably 70% by mass or more, even more preferably 80% by mass or more, and particularly preferably 90% by mass or more. The upper limit of this content is not particularly limited, and may be 100% by mass.
Furthermore, when the specific resin contains a repeating unit represented by formula (1-1), it may contain two or more repeating units represented by formula (1-1) with different structures. In that case, it is preferable that the total amount is within the above range.
When the specific resin contains a repeating unit represented by formula (1-2), it may contain two or more repeating units represented by formula (1-2) with different structures. In that case, it is preferable that the total amount is within the above range.
When the specific resin contains a repeating unit represented by formula (4), it may contain two or more repeating units represented by formula (4) having different structures. In that case, it is preferable that the total amount is within the above range.

 特定樹脂がポリイミドである場合、特定樹脂の重量平均分子量(Mw)は、3,000~100,000が好ましい。
 上記Mwの下限は、5,000以上であることが好ましく、8,000以上であることがより好ましく、10,000以上であることが更に好ましい。
 上記Mwの上限は、100,000以下であることが好ましく、50,000以下であることがより好ましく、30,000以下であることが更に好ましい。
 重量平均分子量を3,000以上とすることにより、硬化後の膜の耐折れ性を向上させることができる。機械特性(例えば、破断伸び)に優れた有機膜を得るため、重量平均分子量は、5,000以上が特に好ましい。
 特定樹脂がポリイミドである場合、特定樹脂の数平均分子量(Mn)は、1,000~40,000が好ましく、2,000~30,000がより好ましく、5,000~20,000が更に好ましい。
 特定樹脂がポリイミドである場合、特定樹脂の分子量の分散度は、1.5以上が好ましく、1.8以上がより好ましく、2.0以上が更に好ましい。ポリイミドの分子量の分散度の上限値は特に定めるものではないが、例えば、7.0以下が好ましく、6.5以下がより好ましく、6.0以下が更に好ましく、4.5以下が一層好ましく、3.0以下が特に好ましい。
 本明細書において、分子量の分散度とは、重量平均分子量/数平均分子量により算出される値である。
 樹脂組成物が特定樹脂として複数種のポリイミドを含む場合、少なくとも1種の樹脂の重量平均分子量、数平均分子量、及び、分散度が上記範囲であることが好ましい。上記複数種の樹脂を1つの樹脂として算出した重量平均分子量、数平均分子量、及び、分散度が、それぞれ、上記範囲内であることも好ましい。
When the specific resin is a polyimide, the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the specific resin is preferably 3,000 to 100,000.
The lower limit of the Mw is preferably 5,000 or more, more preferably 8,000 or more, and even more preferably 10,000 or more.
The upper limit of the Mw is preferably 100,000 or less, more preferably 50,000 or less, and even more preferably 30,000 or less.
By setting the weight-average molecular weight to 3,000 or more, the break resistance of the cured film can be improved. In order to obtain an organic film with excellent mechanical properties (e.g., breaking elongation), the weight-average molecular weight is particularly preferably 5,000 or more.
When the specific resin is a polyimide, the number average molecular weight (Mn) of the specific resin is preferably from 1,000 to 40,000, more preferably from 2,000 to 30,000, and even more preferably from 5,000 to 20,000.
When the specific resin is a polyimide, the molecular weight dispersity of the specific resin is preferably 1.5 or more, more preferably 1.8 or more, and even more preferably 2.0 or more. The upper limit of the molecular weight dispersity of the polyimide is not particularly specified, but is, for example, preferably 7.0 or less, more preferably 6.5 or less, even more preferably 6.0 or less, still more preferably 4.5 or less, and particularly preferably 3.0 or less.
In this specification, the molecular weight dispersity is a value calculated by dividing the weight average molecular weight by the number average molecular weight.
When the resin composition contains multiple polyimides as specific resins, it is preferable that the weight-average molecular weight, number-average molecular weight, and dispersity of at least one of the resins are within the above-mentioned ranges. It is also preferable that the weight-average molecular weight, number-average molecular weight, and dispersity calculated by treating the multiple resins as one resin are each within the above-mentioned ranges.

 特定樹脂がポリイミドである場合、ポリイミドのイミド化率(「閉環率」ともいう)は、得られる有機膜の膜強度、絶縁性等の観点からは、70%以上であることが好ましく、80%以上であることがより好ましく、90%以上であることが更に好ましい。上記イミド化率の上限は特に限定されず、100%以下であればよい。
 また、特定樹脂がポリイミドである場合、特定樹脂におけるイミド構造の含有量は、3mmol/g以下が好ましく、2.5mmol/g以下が更に好ましい。上記含有量の下限は特に限定されないが、例えば、0.5mmol/g以上とすることができる。
 上記イミド化率は、例えば下記方法により測定される。
 特定樹脂の赤外吸収スペクトルを測定し、イミド構造由来の吸収ピークである1377cm-1付近のピーク強度P1を求める。次に、その特定樹脂を350℃で1時間熱処理した後、再度、赤外吸収スペクトルを測定し、1377cm-1付近のピーク強度P2を求める。得られたピーク強度P1、P2を用い、下記式に基づいて、特定樹脂のイミド化率を求めることができる。
 イミド化率(%)=(ピーク強度P1/ピーク強度P2)×100
When the specific resin is a polyimide, the imidization rate (also referred to as "ring closure rate") of the polyimide is preferably 70% or more, more preferably 80% or more, and even more preferably 90% or more, from the viewpoint of the film strength, insulating properties, etc. of the resulting organic film. The upper limit of the imidization rate is not particularly limited, and it is sufficient if it is 100% or less.
When the specific resin is a polyimide, the content of the imide structure in the specific resin is preferably 3 mmol/g or less, more preferably 2.5 mmol/g or less. The lower limit of the content is not particularly limited, but can be, for example, 0.5 mmol/g or more.
The imidization rate is measured, for example, by the following method.
The infrared absorption spectrum of the specific resin is measured, and the peak intensity P1 near 1377 cm −1 , which is an absorption peak derived from the imide structure, is determined. Next, the specific resin is heat-treated at 350°C for 1 hour, and then the infrared absorption spectrum is measured again, and the peak intensity P2 near 1377 cm −1 is determined. Using the obtained peak intensities P1 and P2, the imidization rate of the specific resin can be calculated based on the following formula.
Imidization rate (%) = (peak intensity P1/peak intensity P2) × 100

〔式(2)で表される繰返し単位〕
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、特定樹脂として、式(2)で表される繰返し単位を有する樹脂を含むことが好ましい。
 式(2)中、A及びAは、それぞれ独立に、酸素原子又は-NR-を表し、R111は、2価の有機基を表し、R115は、4価の有機基を表し、R113及びR114は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又は1価の有機基を表し、Rは水素原子又は1価の有機基を表す。
[Repeating unit represented by formula (2)]
The resin composition of the present invention preferably contains a resin having a repeating unit represented by formula (2) as the specific resin.
In formula (2), A1 and A2 each independently represent an oxygen atom or -NRz- , R111 represents a divalent organic group, R115 represents a tetravalent organic group, R113 and R114 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group, and Rz represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group.

 式(2)におけるA及びAは、それぞれ独立に、酸素原子又は-NR-を表し、酸素原子が好ましい。
 Rは水素原子又は1価の有機基を表し、水素原子が好ましい。
In formula (2), A 1 and A 2 each independently represent an oxygen atom or —NR z —, and preferably an oxygen atom.
Rz represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group, and is preferably a hydrogen atom.

 式(2)中、R111及びR115の好ましい態様は、それぞれ、上述の式(1-1)におけるY及びXの好ましい態様と同様である。ただし、R111及びR115はいずれも式(1-1)におけるRとの結合部位を有していなくともよいし、式(1-2)におけるR21と同様の基の結合部位を有していてもよい。 In formula (2), preferred embodiments of R 111 and R 115 are the same as the preferred embodiments of Y 1 and X 1 in formula (1-1) above, respectively, except that R 111 and R 115 may not have a bonding site with R 1 in formula (1-1), or may have a bonding site with the same group as R 21 in formula (1-2).

 式(2)におけるR113及びR114は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又は1価の有機基を表す。1価の有機基としては、直鎖又は分岐のアルキル基、環状アルキル基、芳香族基、又はポリアルキレンオキシ基を含むことが好ましい。また、R113及びR114の少なくとも一方が重合性基を含むことが好ましく、両方が重合性基を含むことがより好ましい。R113及びR114の少なくとも一方が2以上の重合性基を含むことも好ましい。重合性基としては、熱、ラジカル等の作用により、架橋反応することが可能な基であって、ラジカル重合性基が好ましい。重合性基の具体例としては、エチレン性不飽和結合を有する基、アルコキシメチル基、ヒドロキシメチル基、アシルオキシメチル基、エポキシ基、オキセタニル基、ベンゾオキサゾリル基、ブロックイソシアネート基、アミノ基が挙げられる。ポリイミド前駆体が有するラジカル重合性基としては、エチレン性不飽和結合を有する基が好ましい。
 エチレン性不飽和結合を有する基としては、ビニル基、アリル基、イソアリル基、2-メチルアリル基、ビニル基と直接結合した芳香環を有する基(例えば、ビニルフェニル基など)、(メタ)アクリルアミド基、(メタ)アクリロイルオキシ基、下記式(III)で表される基などが挙げられ、下記式(III)で表される基が好ましい。
In formula (2), R 113 and R 114 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group. The monovalent organic group preferably contains a linear or branched alkyl group, a cyclic alkyl group, an aromatic group, or a polyalkyleneoxy group. It is also preferable that at least one of R 113 and R 114 contains a polymerizable group, and more preferably that both contain polymerizable groups. It is also preferable that at least one of R 113 and R 114 contains two or more polymerizable groups. The polymerizable group is a group capable of undergoing a crosslinking reaction by the action of heat, radicals, or the like, and is preferably a radically polymerizable group. Specific examples of the polymerizable group include a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond, an alkoxymethyl group, a hydroxymethyl group, an acyloxymethyl group, an epoxy group, an oxetanyl group, a benzoxazolyl group, a blocked isocyanate group, and an amino group. The radically polymerizable group contained in the polyimide precursor is preferably a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond.
Examples of the group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond include a vinyl group, an allyl group, an isoallyl group, a 2-methylallyl group, a group having an aromatic ring directly bonded to a vinyl group (for example, a vinylphenyl group), a (meth)acrylamide group, a (meth)acryloyloxy group, and a group represented by the following formula (III), and the group represented by the following formula (III) is preferred.

 式(III)において、R200は、水素原子、メチル基、エチル基又はメチロール基を表し、水素原子又はメチル基が好ましい。
 式(III)において、*は他の構造との結合部位を表す。
 式(III)において、R201は、炭素数2~12のアルキレン基、-CHCH(OH)CH-、シクロアルキレン基又はポリアルキレンオキシ基を表す。
 好適なR201の例は、エチレン基、プロピレン基、トリメチレン基、テトラメチレン基、ペンタメチレン基、ヘキサメチレン基、オクタメチレン基、ドデカメチレン基等のアルキレン基、1,2-ブタンジイル基、1,3-ブタンジイル基、-CHCH(OH)CH-、ポリアルキレンオキシ基が挙げられ、エチレン基、プロピレン基等のアルキレン基、-CHCH(OH)CH-、シクロヘキシル基、ポリアルキレンオキシ基がより好ましく、エチレン基、プロピレン基等のアルキレン基、又はポリアルキレンオキシ基が更に好ましい。
 本発明において、ポリアルキレンオキシ基とは、アルキレンオキシ基が2以上直接結合した基をいう。ポリアルキレンオキシ基に含まれる複数のアルキレンオキシ基におけるアルキレン基は、それぞれ同一であっても異なっていてもよい。
 ポリアルキレンオキシ基が、アルキレン基が異なる複数種のアルキレンオキシ基を含む場合、ポリアルキレンオキシ基におけるアルキレンオキシ基の配列は、ランダムな配列であってもよいし、ブロックを有する配列であってもよいし、交互等のパターンを有する配列であってもよい。
 上記アルキレン基の炭素数(アルキレン基が置換基を有する場合、置換基の炭素数を含む)は、2以上であることが好ましく、2~10であることがより好ましく、2~6であることがより一層好ましく、2~5であることが更に好ましく、2~4であることが一層好ましく、2又は3であることがより更に好ましく、2であることが特に好ましい。
 また、上記アルキレン基は、置換基を有していてもよい。好ましい置換基としては、アルキル基、アリール基、ハロゲン原子等が挙げられる。
 また、ポリアルキレンオキシ基に含まれるアルキレンオキシ基の数(ポリアルキレンオキシ基の繰返し数)は、2~20が好ましく、2~10がより好ましく、2~6が更に好ましい。
 ポリアルキレンオキシ基としては、溶剤溶解性及び耐溶剤性の観点からは、ポリエチレンオキシ基、ポリプロピレンオキシ基、ポリトリメチレンオキシ基、ポリテトラメチレンオキシ基、又は、複数のエチレンオキシ基と複数のプロピレンオキシ基とが結合した基が好ましく、ポリエチレンオキシ基又はポリプロピレンオキシ基がより好ましく、ポリエチレンオキシ基が更に好ましい。上記複数のエチレンオキシ基と複数のプロピレンオキシ基とが結合した基において、エチレンオキシ基とプロピレンオキシ基とはランダムに配列していてもよいし、ブロックを形成して配列していてもよいし、交互等のパターン状に配列していてもよい。これらの基におけるエチレンオキシ基等の繰返し数の好ましい態様は上述の通りである。
In formula (III), R 200 represents a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, an ethyl group or a methylol group, and is preferably a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
In formula (III), * represents a bonding site to another structure.
In formula (III), R 201 represents an alkylene group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms, —CH 2 CH(OH)CH 2 —, a cycloalkylene group, or a polyalkyleneoxy group.
Suitable examples of R 201 include alkylene groups such as ethylene, propylene, trimethylene, tetramethylene, pentamethylene, hexamethylene, octamethylene, and dodecamethylene, 1,2-butanediyl, 1,3-butanediyl, —CH 2 CH(OH)CH 2 —, and polyalkyleneoxy groups, of which alkylene groups such as ethylene and propylene, —CH 2 CH(OH)CH 2 —, cyclohexyl, and polyalkyleneoxy groups are more preferred, and alkylene groups such as ethylene and propylene, or polyalkyleneoxy groups are even more preferred.
In the present invention, the polyalkyleneoxy group refers to a group in which two or more alkyleneoxy groups are directly bonded. The alkylene groups in the multiple alkyleneoxy groups contained in the polyalkyleneoxy group may be the same or different.
When the polyalkyleneoxy group contains multiple types of alkyleneoxy groups having different alkylene groups, the arrangement of the alkyleneoxy groups in the polyalkyleneoxy group may be a random arrangement, an arrangement having blocks, or an arrangement having a pattern such as alternating.
The number of carbon atoms in the alkylene group (including the number of carbon atoms in the substituent when the alkylene group has a substituent) is preferably 2 or more, more preferably 2 to 10, even more preferably 2 to 6, still more preferably 2 to 5, still more preferably 2 to 4, still more preferably 2 or 3, and particularly preferably 2.
The alkylene group may have a substituent, and preferred examples of the substituent include an alkyl group, an aryl group, and a halogen atom.
The number of alkyleneoxy groups contained in the polyalkyleneoxy group (the number of repeating polyalkyleneoxy groups) is preferably 2 to 20, more preferably 2 to 10, and even more preferably 2 to 6.
As the polyalkyleneoxy group, from the viewpoint of solvent solubility and solvent resistance, a polyethyleneoxy group, a polypropyleneoxy group, a polytrimethyleneoxy group, a polytetramethyleneoxy group, or a group in which a plurality of ethyleneoxy groups and a plurality of propyleneoxy groups are bonded is preferred, a polyethyleneoxy group or a polypropyleneoxy group is more preferred, and a polyethyleneoxy group is even more preferred. In the group in which a plurality of ethyleneoxy groups and a plurality of propyleneoxy groups are bonded, the ethyleneoxy groups and the propyleneoxy groups may be arranged randomly, may be arranged in blocks, or may be arranged in a pattern such as alternating. The preferred embodiments of the number of repetitions of the ethyleneoxy groups etc. in these groups are as described above.

 また、R113及びR114の少なくとも一方が上述の式(B-1)で表される基であってもよい。式(B-1)で表される基の好ましい態様は上述の通りである。 At least one of R 113 and R 114 may be a group represented by the above formula (B-1). Preferred embodiments of the group represented by formula (B-1) are as described above.

 式(2)において、R113が水素原子である場合、又は、R114が水素原子である場合、ポリイミド前駆体はエチレン性不飽和結合を有する3級アミン化合物と対塩を形成していてもよい。このようなエチレン性不飽和結合を有する3級アミン化合物の例としては、N,N-ジメチルアミノプロピルメタクリレートが挙げられる。 In formula (2), when R 113 is a hydrogen atom or when R 114 is a hydrogen atom, the polyimide precursor may form a counter salt with a tertiary amine compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond. Examples of such a tertiary amine compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond include N,N-dimethylaminopropyl methacrylate.

 特定樹脂がポリイミド前駆体である場合、特定樹脂の全質量に対する、式(2)で表される繰返し単位の含有量は、30質量%以上であることが好ましく、50質量%以上であることがより好ましく、70質量%以上であることが更に好ましく、80質量%以上であることが特に好ましい。上記含有量の上限は特に限定されず、100質量%であってもよい。
 また特定樹脂がポリイミド前駆体である場合、特定樹脂の全質量に対する、式(2)で表される繰返し単位と式(4)で表される繰返し単位の合計含有量は、50質量%以上であることが好ましく、70質量%以上であることがより好ましく、80質量%以上であることが更に好ましく、90質量%以上であることが特に好ましい。上記含有量の上限は特に限定されず、100質量%であってもよい。
 また、特定樹脂が式(2)で表される繰返し単位を含む場合、構造の異なる式(2)で表される繰返し単位を2種以上含有してもよい。その場合、合計量が上記範囲内であることが好ましい。
 また、特定樹脂が式(4)で表される繰返し単位を含む場合、構造の異なる式(4)で表される繰返し単位を2種以上含有してもよい。その場合、合計量が上記範囲内であることが好ましい。
When the specific resin is a polyimide precursor, the content of the repeating unit represented by formula (2) relative to the total mass of the specific resin is preferably 30% by mass or more, more preferably 50% by mass or more, even more preferably 70% by mass or more, and particularly preferably 80% by mass or more. The upper limit of the content is not particularly limited, and may be 100% by mass.
Furthermore, when the specific resin is a polyimide precursor, the total content of the repeating unit represented by formula (2) and the repeating unit represented by formula (4) relative to the total mass of the specific resin is preferably 50% by mass or more, more preferably 70% by mass or more, even more preferably 80% by mass or more, and particularly preferably 90% by mass or more. The upper limit of this content is not particularly limited, and may be 100% by mass.
Furthermore, when the specific resin contains a repeating unit represented by formula (2), it may contain two or more repeating units represented by formula (2) having different structures. In that case, it is preferable that the total amount is within the above range.
Furthermore, when the specific resin contains a repeating unit represented by formula (4), it may contain two or more repeating units represented by formula (4) having different structures. In that case, it is preferable that the total amount is within the above range.

 特定樹脂がポリイミド前駆体である場合、特定樹脂の重量平均分子量(Mw)は、3,000~100,000が好ましい。
 上記Mwの下限は、5,000以上であることが好ましく、8,000以上であることがより好ましく、10,000以上であることが更に好ましい。
 上記Mwの上限は、100,000以下であることが好ましく、50,000以下であることがより好ましく、30,000以下であることが更に好ましい。
 重量平均分子量を3,000以上とすることにより、硬化後の膜の耐折れ性を向上させることができる。機械特性(例えば、破断伸び)に優れた有機膜を得るため、重量平均分子量は、5,000以上が特に好ましい。
 特定樹脂がポリイミド前駆体である場合、特定樹脂の数平均分子量(Mn)は、1,000~40,000が好ましく、2,000~30,000がより好ましく、5,000~20,000が更に好ましい。
 特定樹脂がポリイミド前駆体である場合、特定樹脂の分子量の分散度は、1.5以上が好ましく、1.8以上がより好ましく、2.0以上が更に好ましい。ポリイミドの分子量の分散度の上限値は特に定めるものではないが、例えば、7.0以下が好ましく、6.5以下がより好ましく、6.0以下が更に好ましく、4.5以下が一層好ましく、3.0以下が特に好ましい。
 樹脂組成物が特定樹脂として複数種のポリイミド前駆体を含む場合、少なくとも1種の樹脂の重量平均分子量、数平均分子量、及び、分散度が上記範囲であることが好ましい。上記複数種の樹脂を1つの樹脂として算出した重量平均分子量、数平均分子量、及び、分散度が、それぞれ、上記範囲内であることも好ましい。
When the specific resin is a polyimide precursor, the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the specific resin is preferably 3,000 to 100,000.
The lower limit of the Mw is preferably 5,000 or more, more preferably 8,000 or more, and even more preferably 10,000 or more.
The upper limit of the Mw is preferably 100,000 or less, more preferably 50,000 or less, and even more preferably 30,000 or less.
By setting the weight-average molecular weight to 3,000 or more, the break resistance of the cured film can be improved. In order to obtain an organic film with excellent mechanical properties (e.g., breaking elongation), the weight-average molecular weight is particularly preferably 5,000 or more.
When the specific resin is a polyimide precursor, the number average molecular weight (Mn) of the specific resin is preferably 1,000 to 40,000, more preferably 2,000 to 30,000, and even more preferably 5,000 to 20,000.
When the specific resin is a polyimide precursor, the molecular weight dispersity of the specific resin is preferably 1.5 or more, more preferably 1.8 or more, and even more preferably 2.0 or more. The upper limit of the molecular weight dispersity of the polyimide is not particularly specified, but is, for example, preferably 7.0 or less, more preferably 6.5 or less, even more preferably 6.0 or less, still more preferably 4.5 or less, and particularly preferably 3.0 or less.
When the resin composition contains multiple polyimide precursors as specific resins, it is preferable that the weight-average molecular weight, number-average molecular weight, and dispersity of at least one of the resins are within the above-mentioned ranges. It is also preferable that the weight-average molecular weight, number-average molecular weight, and dispersity calculated by treating the multiple resins as one resin are each within the above-mentioned ranges.

 特定樹脂がポリイミド前駆体である場合、ポリイミド前駆体のイミド化率(「閉環率」ともいう)は、得られる有機膜の膜強度、絶縁性等の観点からは、70%未満であることが好ましく、50%以下であることがより好ましく、30%以下であることが更に好ましい。上記イミド化率の下限は特に限定されず、0%以上であればよい。
 上記イミド化率は上述の方法により測定される。
When the specific resin is a polyimide precursor, the imidization rate (also referred to as "ring closure rate") of the polyimide precursor is preferably less than 70%, more preferably 50% or less, and even more preferably 30% or less, from the viewpoint of the film strength, insulating properties, etc. of the resulting organic film. The lower limit of the imidization rate is not particularly limited, and may be 0% or more.
The imidization rate is measured by the method described above.

〔式(X)で表される繰返し単位〕
 特定樹脂は、下記式(X)で表される繰返し単位を有する樹脂であることも好ましく、下記式(X)で表される繰返し単位を有し、かつ、重合性基を有する樹脂であることがより好ましい。重合性基の好ましい態様は上述の通りである。
 式(X)中、R133は、2価の有機基を表し、R134は、4価の有機基を表す。
 重合性基を有する場合、重合性基は、R133及びR134の少なくとも一方に位置していてもよいし、下記式(X-1)又は式(X-2)に示すようにポリベンゾオキサゾールの末端に位置していてもよい。
式(X-1)
 式(X-1)中、R135及びR136の少なくとも一方は、重合性基であり、重合性基でない場合は有機基であり、他の基は式(X)と同義である。
式(X-2)
 式(X-2)中、R137は重合性基であり、他の基は式(X)と同義である。
[Repeating unit represented by formula (X)]
The specific resin is preferably a resin having a repeating unit represented by the following formula (X), and more preferably a resin having a repeating unit represented by the following formula (X) and a polymerizable group. Preferred embodiments of the polymerizable group are as described above.
In formula (X), R 133 represents a divalent organic group, and R 134 represents a tetravalent organic group.
When the compound has a polymerizable group, the polymerizable group may be located at at least one of R 133 and R 134 , or may be located at the end of the polybenzoxazole as shown in the following formula (X-1) or formula (X-2).
Formula (X-1)
In formula (X-1), at least one of R 135 and R 136 is a polymerizable group, and if it is not a polymerizable group, it is an organic group, and the other groups have the same meanings as in formula (X).
Formula (X-2)
In formula (X-2), R 137 is a polymerizable group, and the other groups have the same meanings as in formula (X).

 重合性基の好ましい態様は、それぞれ上述の通りである。 Preferred embodiments of the polymerizable group are as described above.

 R133は、2価の有機基を表す。2価の有機基としては、脂肪族基又は芳香族基が挙げられる。具体的には、R133は、下記式(R133-1)又は式(4)中のR131と同様の基が挙げられる。
 式(R133-1)中、Yは炭素数4以上の有機基を表し、Rはそれぞれ独立に、上述の式(R-1)で表される構造を表し、nは1以上の整数を表し、*は他の構造との結合部位を表す。
 式(R133-1)中、Y、R、及びnの好ましい態様は、上述の式(1-1)において示したY、R、及びnの好ましい態様と同様である。
R 133 represents a divalent organic group. Examples of the divalent organic group include an aliphatic group and an aromatic group. Specifically, R 133 may be the same group as R 131 in the following formula (R133-1) or formula (4).
In formula (R133-1), Y 1 represents an organic group having 4 or more carbon atoms, each R 1 independently represents a structure represented by formula (R-1) above, n represents an integer of 1 or more, and * represents a bonding site to another structure.
In formula (R133-1), preferred embodiments of Y 1 , R 1 and n are the same as the preferred embodiments of Y 1 , R 1 and n shown in formula (1-1) above.

 R134は、4価の有機基を表す。4価の有機基としては、脂肪族基又は芳香族基が挙げられる。具体的には、R134は、下記式(R134-1)又は式(4)中のR132と同様の基が挙げられる。
 式(R134-1)中、Xは炭素数4以上の有機基を表し、Rはそれぞれ独立に、上述の式(R-1)で表される構造を表し、mは0~4以上の整数を表し、*は他の構造との結合部位を表す。
 式(R134-1)中、X、R、及びmの好ましい態様は、上述の式(1-1)において示したX、R、及びmの好ましい態様と同様である。
R 134 represents a tetravalent organic group. Examples of the tetravalent organic group include an aliphatic group and an aromatic group. Specifically, R 134 may be the same group as R 132 in the following formula (R134-1) or formula (4).
In formula (R134-1), X1 represents an organic group having 4 or more carbon atoms, each R1 independently represents a structure represented by formula (R-1) above, m represents an integer of 0 to 4 or more, and * represents a bonding site to another structure.
In formula (R134-1), preferred embodiments of X 1 , R 1 and m are the same as the preferred embodiments of X 1 , R 1 and m shown in formula (1-1) above.

 特定樹脂がポリベンゾオキサゾールである場合、重量平均分子量(Mw)は、5,000~70,000が好ましく、8,000~50,000がより好ましく、10,000~30,000が更に好ましい。重量平均分子量を5,000以上とすることにより、硬化後の膜の耐折れ性を向上させることができる。機械特性に優れた有機膜を得るため、重量平均分子量は、20,000以上が特に好ましい。ポリベンゾオキサゾールを2種以上含有する場合、少なくとも1種のポリベンゾオキサゾールの重量平均分子量が上記範囲であることが好ましい。
 特定樹脂がポリベンゾオキサゾールである場合、数平均分子量(Mn)は、7,200~14,000が好ましく、8,000~12,000がより好ましく、9,200~11,200が更に好ましい。
 特定樹脂がポリベンゾオキサゾールである場合、分子量の分散度は、1.4以上であることが好ましく、1.5以上がより好ましく、1.6以上であることが更に好ましい。ポリベンゾオキサゾールの分子量の分散度の上限値は特に定めるものではないが、例えば、2.6以下が好ましく、2.5以下がより好ましく、2.4以下が更に好ましく、2.3以下が一層好ましく、2.2以下がより一層好ましい。
 樹脂組成物が特定樹脂として複数種のポリベンゾオキサゾールを含む場合、少なくとも1種のポリベンゾオキサゾールの重量平均分子量、数平均分子量、及び、分散度が上記範囲であることが好ましい。また、上記複数種のポリベンゾオキサゾールを1つの樹脂として算出した重量平均分子量、数平均分子量、及び、分散度が、それぞれ、上記範囲内であることも好ましい。
When the specific resin is polybenzoxazole, the weight-average molecular weight (Mw) is preferably 5,000 to 70,000, more preferably 8,000 to 50,000, and even more preferably 10,000 to 30,000. By adjusting the weight-average molecular weight to 5,000 or more, the fold resistance of the cured film can be improved. In order to obtain an organic film with excellent mechanical properties, the weight-average molecular weight is particularly preferably 20,000 or more. When two or more types of polybenzoxazoles are contained, it is preferable that the weight-average molecular weight of at least one type of polybenzoxazole be within the above range.
When the specific resin is polybenzoxazole, the number average molecular weight (Mn) is preferably from 7,200 to 14,000, more preferably from 8,000 to 12,000, and even more preferably from 9,200 to 11,200.
When the specific resin is polybenzoxazole, the molecular weight dispersity is preferably 1.4 or more, more preferably 1.5 or more, and even more preferably 1.6 or more. The upper limit of the molecular weight dispersity of polybenzoxazole is not particularly specified, but is, for example, preferably 2.6 or less, more preferably 2.5 or less, even more preferably 2.4 or less, even more preferably 2.3 or less, and even more preferably 2.2 or less.
When the resin composition contains multiple polybenzoxazoles as specific resins, it is preferable that the weight-average molecular weight, number-average molecular weight, and dispersity of at least one polybenzoxazole are within the above-mentioned ranges. It is also preferable that the weight-average molecular weight, number-average molecular weight, and dispersity calculated by treating the multiple polybenzoxazoles as a single resin are within the above-mentioned ranges.

 特定樹脂がポリベンゾオキサゾールである場合、ポリベンゾオキサゾールはオキサゾール化率が85%以上であることが好ましく、90%以上であることがより好ましい。上限は特に限定されず、100%であってもよい。オキサゾール化率が85%以上であることにより、加熱によりオキサゾール化される時に起こる閉環に基づく膜収縮が小さくなり、反りの発生をより効果的に抑えることができる。
 上記オキサゾール化率は、例えば下記方法により測定される。
 ポリベンゾオキサゾールの赤外吸収スペクトルを測定し、前駆体のアミド構造に由来する吸収ピークである1650cm-1付近のピーク強度Q1を求める。次に、1490cm-1付近に見られる芳香環の吸収強度で規格化する。そのポリベンゾオキサゾールを350℃で1時間熱処理した後、再度、赤外吸収スペクトルを測定し、1650cm-1付近のピーク強度Q2を求め、1490cm-1付近に見られる芳香環の吸収強度で規格化する。得られたピーク強度Q1、Q2の規格値を用い、下記式に基づいて、ポリベンゾオキサゾールのオキサゾール化率を求めることができる。
 オキサゾール化率(%)=(ピーク強度Q1の規格値/ピーク強度Q2の規格値)×100
When the specific resin is polybenzoxazole, the polybenzoxazole preferably has an oxazolization rate of 85% or more, more preferably 90% or more. The upper limit is not particularly limited, and may be 100%. When the oxazolization rate is 85% or more, film shrinkage due to ring closure that occurs when oxazolized by heating is reduced, and warpage can be more effectively suppressed.
The oxazole ratio is measured, for example, by the following method.
The infrared absorption spectrum of the polybenzoxazole is measured, and the peak intensity Q1 near 1650 cm −1 , which is an absorption peak derived from the amide structure of the precursor, is determined. This is then normalized by the absorption intensity of the aromatic ring observed near 1490 cm −1 . After heat treating the polybenzoxazole at 350°C for 1 hour, the infrared absorption spectrum is measured again, and the peak intensity Q2 near 1650 cm −1 is determined and normalized by the absorption intensity of the aromatic ring observed near 1490 cm −1 . The normalized values of the peak intensities Q1 and Q2 obtained can be used to calculate the oxazolization rate of the polybenzoxazole based on the following formula:
Oxazolization rate (%) = (normalized value of peak intensity Q1/normalized value of peak intensity Q2) × 100

 ポリベンゾオキサゾールは、R133及びR134の組み合わせが同じである上記式(X)の繰返し単位を含んでいてもよく、R133及びR134の組み合わせが異なる2種以上を含む上記式(X)の繰返し単位を含んでいてもよい。また、ポリベンゾオキサゾールは、上記式(X)の繰返し単位のほかに、他の種類の繰返し単位も含んでいてもよい。 The polybenzoxazole may contain repeating units of the above formula (X) in which the combination of R 133 and R 134 is the same, or may contain repeating units of the above formula (X) containing two or more different combinations of R 133 and R 134. Furthermore, the polybenzoxazole may contain other types of repeating units in addition to the repeating units of the above formula (X).

〔式(3)で表される繰返し単位〕
 特定樹脂は、下記式(3)で表される繰返し単位を有する樹脂であることも好ましく、下記式(3)で表される繰返し単位を有し、かつ、重合性基を有する樹脂であることがより好ましい。重合性基の好ましい態様は上述の通りである。
 式(3)中、R121は、2価の有機基を表し、R122は、4価の有機基を表し、R123及びR124は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又は1価の有機基を表す。
[Repeating unit represented by formula (3)]
The specific resin is preferably a resin having a repeating unit represented by the following formula (3), and more preferably a resin having a repeating unit represented by the following formula (3) and a polymerizable group. Preferred embodiments of the polymerizable group are as described above.
In formula (3), R 121 represents a divalent organic group, R 122 represents a tetravalent organic group, and R 123 and R 124 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group.

 式(3)において、R123及びR124は、それぞれ、式(2)におけるR113と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。すなわち、少なくとも一方は、重合性基であることが好ましい。
 式(3)において、R121の好ましい態様は、国際公開第2022/145355号の段落0074~0079に記載の式(3)におけるR121の好ましい態様と同様である。
 式(3)において、R122の好ましい態様は、国際公開第2022/145355号の段落0080~0090に記載の式(3)におけるR122の好ましい態様と同様である。
In formula (3), R 123 and R 124 each have the same definition as R 113 in formula (2), and the preferred range is also the same. That is, it is preferable that at least one of them is a polymerizable group.
In formula (3), preferred embodiments of R 121 are the same as preferred embodiments of R 121 in formula (3) described in paragraphs 0074 to 0079 of WO 2022/145355.
In formula (3), preferred embodiments of R 122 are the same as preferred embodiments of R 122 in formula (3) described in paragraphs 0080 to 0090 of WO 2022/145355.

 特定樹脂がポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体である場合、重量平均分子量(Mw)は、5,000~70,000が好ましく、8,000~50,000がより好ましく、10,000~30,000が更に好ましい。重量平均分子量を5,000以上とすることにより、硬化後の膜の耐折れ性を向上させることができる。機械特性に優れた有機膜を得るため、重量平均分子量は、20,000以上が特に好ましい。ポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体を2種以上含有する場合、少なくとも1種のポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体の重量平均分子量が上記範囲であることが好ましい。
 特定樹脂がポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体である場合、数平均分子量(Mn)は、7,200~14,000が好ましく、8,000~12,000がより好ましく、9,200~11,200が更に好ましい。
 特定樹脂がポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体である場合、分子量の分散度は、1.4以上であることが好ましく、1.5以上がより好ましく、1.6以上であることが更に好ましい。ポリベンゾオキサゾールの分子量の分散度の上限値は特に定めるものではないが、例えば、2.6以下が好ましく、2.5以下がより好ましく、2.4以下が更に好ましく、2.3以下が一層好ましく、2.2以下がより一層好ましい。
 樹脂組成物が特定樹脂として複数種のポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体を含む場合、少なくとも1種のポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体の重量平均分子量、数平均分子量、及び、分散度が上記範囲であることが好ましい。また、上記複数種のポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体を1つの樹脂として算出した重量平均分子量、数平均分子量、及び、分散度が、それぞれ、上記範囲内であることも好ましい。
When the specific resin is a polybenzoxazole precursor, the weight-average molecular weight (Mw) is preferably 5,000 to 70,000, more preferably 8,000 to 50,000, and even more preferably 10,000 to 30,000. By adjusting the weight-average molecular weight to 5,000 or more, the fold resistance of the cured film can be improved. In order to obtain an organic film with excellent mechanical properties, the weight-average molecular weight is particularly preferably 20,000 or more. When two or more polybenzoxazole precursors are contained, it is preferable that the weight-average molecular weight of at least one polybenzoxazole precursor be within the above range.
When the specific resin is a polybenzoxazole precursor, the number average molecular weight (Mn) is preferably from 7,200 to 14,000, more preferably from 8,000 to 12,000, and even more preferably from 9,200 to 11,200.
When the specific resin is a polybenzoxazole precursor, the molecular weight dispersity is preferably 1.4 or more, more preferably 1.5 or more, and even more preferably 1.6 or more. The upper limit of the molecular weight dispersity of the polybenzoxazole is not particularly specified, but is, for example, preferably 2.6 or less, more preferably 2.5 or less, even more preferably 2.4 or less, even more preferably 2.3 or less, and even more preferably 2.2 or less.
When the resin composition contains multiple polybenzoxazole precursors as specific resins, it is preferable that the weight-average molecular weight, number-average molecular weight, and dispersity of at least one polybenzoxazole precursor be within the above-mentioned ranges. It is also preferable that the weight-average molecular weight, number-average molecular weight, and dispersity calculated by treating the multiple polybenzoxazole precursors as a single resin be within the above-mentioned ranges.

 特定樹脂がポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体である場合、ポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体はオキサゾール化率が15%以下であることが好ましく、10%以下であることがより好ましい。下限は特に限定されず、0%であってもよい。
 上記オキサゾール化率は、例えば上述の方法により測定される。
When the specific resin is a polybenzoxazole precursor, the polybenzoxazole precursor preferably has an oxazole ratio of 15% or less, more preferably 10% or less. The lower limit is not particularly limited, and may be 0%.
The oxazole conversion rate is measured, for example, by the method described above.

 ポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体は、R121~R124の組み合わせが同じである上記式(3)の繰返し単位を含んでいてもよく、R121~R124の組み合わせが一部又は全部において異なる2種以上を含む上記式(3)の繰返し単位を含んでいてもよい。また、ポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体は、上記式(3)の繰返し単位のほかに、他の種類の繰返し単位も含んでいてもよい。 The polybenzoxazole precursor may contain repeating units of the above formula (3) in which the combinations of R 121 to R 124 are the same, or may contain repeating units of the above formula (3) in which two or more types of combinations of R 121 to R 124 are different in part or in whole. Furthermore, the polybenzoxazole precursor may contain other types of repeating units in addition to the repeating units of the above formula (3).

〔特定樹脂の製造方法〕
 特定樹脂は、例えば、国際公開第2022/145355号の段落0134~0136に記載の方法又はこの方法を参考にして合成することができる。上記記載は本明細書に組み込まれる。また、その他公知の方法を参考に合成してもよい。
[Method for producing specific resin]
The specific resin can be synthesized by, for example, the method described in paragraphs 0134 to 0136 of WO 2022/145355 or by reference to this method. The above description is incorporated herein by reference. Alternatively, the specific resin may be synthesized by reference to other known methods.

 特定樹脂に置換又は無置換の炭素数1~30のアルキレン基を導入する方法としては、例えば、末端封止剤として上記アルキレン基を有する化合物を用いる方法、樹脂の原料であるカルボン酸二無水物若しくはその誘導体(例えば、ジエステル)又はジアミンとして上記アルキレン基を有する化合物を用いる方法等が挙げられる。
 これらの合成方法の詳細としては、後述の実施例における樹脂の合成方法の記載を参照することができる。
 上記末端封止剤としては、下記式(TM-1)で表される化合物等が挙げられる。
 式(TM-1)中、Rは2価の連結基を表し、Zは置換若しくは無置換の炭素数1~30のアルキレン基、又は、ケイ素原子を表し、Zが上記アルキレン基である場合にはnは1であり、且つ、Rは水素原子又は1価の有機基を表し、Zが上記ケイ素原子である場合にはnは3であり、且つ、Rはそれぞれ独立に、1価の有機基を表し、Rは樹脂末端と結合する基を表す。
Examples of a method for introducing a substituted or unsubstituted alkylene group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms into a specific resin include a method using a compound having the alkylene group as an end-capping agent, and a method using a compound having the alkylene group as a raw material for the resin, such as a carboxylic acid dianhydride or a derivative thereof (e.g., a diester) or a diamine.
For details of these synthesis methods, please refer to the description of the resin synthesis methods in the Examples below.
Examples of the end-capping agent include compounds represented by the following formula (TM-1).
In formula (TM-1), R1 represents a divalent linking group, Z1 represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkylene group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms or a silicon atom, and when Z1 is the alkylene group, n is 1, and R2 represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group, and when Z1 is the silicon atom, n is 3, and each R2 independently represents a monovalent organic group, and R3 represents a group bonding to a resin terminal.

 式(TM-1)中、R、Z、n及びRの好ましい態様は、上述の式(B-1)におけるR、Z、n及びRの好ましい態様と同様である。
 式(TM-1)中、Rはアミノ基、ヒドロキシ基、カルボキシ基、カルボン酸ハライド基などが挙げられ、アミノ基であることが好ましい。
In formula (TM-1), preferred embodiments of R 1 , Z 1 , n, and R 2 are the same as the preferred embodiments of R 1 , Z 1 , n, and R 2 in formula (B-1) above.
In formula (TM-1), R 3 may be an amino group, a hydroxy group, a carboxy group, a carboxylic acid halide group, or the like, and is preferably an amino group.

〔含有量〕
 本発明の樹脂組成物における特定樹脂の含有量は、樹脂組成物の全固形分に対し10質量%以上であることが好ましく、15質量%以上であることがより好ましく、20質量%以上であることが更に好ましく、30質量%以上であることが一層好ましい。また、本発明の樹脂組成物における樹脂の含有量は、樹脂組成物の全固形分に対し、90質量%以下であることが好ましく、80質量%以下であることがより好ましく、70質量%以下であることが更に好ましく、60質量%以下であることが一層好ましく、50質量%以下であることがより一層好ましい。
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、特定樹脂を1種のみ含んでいてもよいし、2種以上含んでいてもよい。2種以上含む場合、合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
[Content]
The content of the specific resin in the resin composition of the present invention is preferably 10% by mass or more, more preferably 15% by mass or more, even more preferably 20% by mass or more, and even more preferably 30% by mass or more, based on the total solid content of the resin composition. Also, the content of the resin in the resin composition of the present invention is preferably 90% by mass or less, more preferably 80% by mass or less, even more preferably 70% by mass or less, even more preferably 60% by mass or less, and even more preferably 50% by mass or less, based on the total solid content of the resin composition.
The resin composition of the present invention may contain only one specific resin or two or more specific resins. When two or more specific resins are contained, the total amount is preferably within the above range.

<他の樹脂>
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、上述した特定樹脂とは異なる他の樹脂(以下、単に「他の樹脂」ともいう)とを含んでもよい。
 他の樹脂としては、特定樹脂とは異なる樹脂であって、ポリイミド前駆体、ポリイミド、ポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体、ポリベンゾオキサゾール、ポリアミドイミド前駆体、ポリアミドイミド、フェノール樹脂、ポリアミド、エポキシ樹脂、ポリシロキサン、シロキサン構造を含む樹脂、(メタ)アクリル樹脂、(メタ)アクリルアミド樹脂、ウレタン樹脂、ブチラール樹脂、スチリル樹脂、ポリエーテル樹脂、ポリエステル樹脂に該当する樹脂等が挙げられる。
 他のポリイミド前駆体、他のポリイミド、ポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体、ポリベンゾオキサゾール、ポリアミドイミド前駆体、ポリアミドイミドとしては、国際公開第2022/145355号の段落0017~0138に記載の化合物が挙げられる。上記記載は本明細書に組み込まれる。
<Other resins>
The resin composition of the present invention may contain other resins (hereinafter simply referred to as "other resins") different from the specific resins described above.
Examples of other resins are resins different from the specific resin, such as polyimide precursors, polyimides, polybenzoxazole precursors, polybenzoxazoles, polyamideimide precursors, polyamideimides, phenolic resins, polyamides, epoxy resins, polysiloxanes, resins containing a siloxane structure, (meth)acrylic resins, (meth)acrylamide resins, urethane resins, butyral resins, styryl resins, polyether resins, and polyester resins.
Examples of other polyimide precursors, other polyimides, polybenzoxazole precursors, polybenzoxazoles, polyamideimide precursors, and polyamideimides include the compounds described in paragraphs 0017 to 0138 of WO 2022/145355, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference.

 本発明の樹脂組成物が他の樹脂を含む場合、他の樹脂の含有量は、樹脂組成物の全固形分に対し、0.01質量%以上であることが好ましく、0.05質量%以上であることがより好ましく、1質量%以上であることが更に好ましく、2質量%以上であることが一層好ましく、5質量%以上であることがより一層好ましく、10質量%以上であることが更に一層好ましい。
 本発明の樹脂組成物における、他の樹脂の含有量は、樹脂組成物の全固形分に対し、80質量%以下であることが好ましく、75質量%以下であることがより好ましく、70質量%以下であることが更に好ましく、60質量%以下であることが一層好ましく、50質量%以下であることがより一層好ましい。
 本発明の樹脂組成物の好ましい一態様として、他の樹脂の含有量が低含有量である態様とすることもできる。上記態様において、他の樹脂の含有量は、樹脂組成物の全固形分に対し、20質量%以下であることが好ましく、15質量%以下であることがより好ましく、10質量%以下であることが更に好ましく、5質量%以下であることが一層好ましく、1質量%以下であることがより一層好ましい。上記含有量の下限は特に限定されず、0質量%以上であればよい。
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、他の樹脂を1種のみ含んでいてもよいし、2種以上含んでいてもよい。2種以上含む場合、合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
When the resin composition of the present invention contains other resins, the content of the other resins is preferably 0.01% by mass or more, more preferably 0.05% by mass or more, even more preferably 1% by mass or more, still more preferably 2% by mass or more, even more preferably 5% by mass or more, and even more preferably 10% by mass or more, relative to the total solid content of the resin composition.
The content of other resins in the resin composition of the present invention is preferably 80% by mass or less, more preferably 75% by mass or less, even more preferably 70% by mass or less, still more preferably 60% by mass or less, and even more preferably 50% by mass or less, based on the total solid content of the resin composition.
A preferred embodiment of the resin composition of the present invention may be an embodiment in which the content of the other resin is low. In this embodiment, the content of the other resin is preferably 20% by mass or less, more preferably 15% by mass or less, even more preferably 10% by mass or less, even more preferably 5% by mass or less, and even more preferably 1% by mass or less, based on the total solid content of the resin composition. The lower limit of the content is not particularly limited, and may be 0% by mass or more.
The resin composition of the present invention may contain only one type of other resin, or may contain two or more types. When two or more types are contained, the total amount is preferably in the above range.

<金属若しくはその塩、又は、金属錯体>
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、金属若しくはその塩、又は、金属錯体を含むことが好ましく、金属錯体を含むことが好ましい。
 これらの化合物を含むことで、金属種が触媒として作用することにより、上述のアルキニル基と水分との反応が促進され、密着性が向上する場合がある。
 これらの化合物における金属の種類としては、チタン又は銀を含むことが好ましい。
<Metals or their salts, or metal complexes>
The resin composition of the present invention preferably contains a metal or a salt thereof, or a metal complex, and more preferably contains a metal complex.
When these compounds are contained, the metal species act as a catalyst, which promotes the reaction between the alkynyl group and moisture, and may improve adhesion.
The metal type in these compounds preferably includes titanium or silver.

 金属若しくはその塩としては、銀又は銀塩が好ましく、銀塩がより好ましい。
 また、金属塩としては、有機金属塩が好ましく、有機銀塩がより好ましい。
 有機銀塩としては、酢酸銀、安息香酸銀、乳酸銀、ピロリン酸銀、クエン酸銀、ベヘン酸銀、ジエチルカルバミン酸銀、ステアリン酸銀、酒石酸銀、メタスルホン酸銀、トリフルオロ酸銀、リン酸若しくは亜リン酸のアルキルエステル、フェニルエステル若しくはアルキルフェニルエステルの銀塩、リンフッ化銀、フタロシアニン銀、エチレンジアミンテトラ酢酸銀等が挙げられる。
As the metal or its salt, silver or a silver salt is preferred, and a silver salt is more preferred.
As the metal salt, an organic metal salt is preferred, and an organic silver salt is more preferred.
Examples of organic silver salts include silver acetate, silver benzoate, silver lactate, silver pyrophosphate, silver citrate, silver behenate, silver diethylcarbamate, silver stearate, silver tartrate, silver metasulfonate, silver trifluoroate, silver salts of alkyl esters, phenyl esters, or alkylphenyl esters of phosphoric acid or phosphorous acid, silver phosphofluoride, silver phthalocyanine, and silver ethylenediaminetetraacetate.

 金属錯体としては、チタン錯体、ジルコニウム錯体又はハフニウム錯体が好ましく、チタン錯体がより好ましい。
 チタン錯体の具体例を、以下のI)~VII)に示す:
 I)チタンキレート化合物:樹脂組成物の保存安定性がよく、良好な硬化パターンが得られることから、アルコキシ基を2個以上有するチタンキレート化合物がより好ましい。具体的な例は、チタニウムビス(トリエタノールアミン)ジイソプロポキサイド、チタニウムジ(n-ブトキサイド)ビス(2,4-ペンタンジオネート)、チタニウムジイソプロポキサイドビス(2,4-ペンタンジオネート)、チタニウムジイソプロポキサイドビス(テトラメチルヘプタンジオネート)、チタニウムジイソプロポキサイドビス(エチルアセトアセテート)等である。
 II)テトラアルコキシチタン化合物:例えば、チタニウムテトラ(n-ブトキサイド)、チタニウムテトラエトキサイド、チタニウムテトラ(2-エチルヘキソキサイド)、チタニウムテトライソブトキサイド、チタニウムテトライソプロポキサイド、チタニウムテトラメトキサイド、チタニウムテトラメトキシプロポキサイド、チタニウムテトラメチルフェノキサイド、チタニウムテトラ(n-ノニロキサイド)、チタニウムテトラ(n-プロポキサイド)、チタニウムテトラステアリロキサイド、チタニウムテトラキス[ビス{2,2-(アリロキシメチル)ブトキサイド}]等である。
 III)チタノセン化合物:例えば、ペンタメチルシクロペンタジエニルチタニウムトリメトキサイド、ビス(η5-2,4-シクロペンタジエン-1-イル)ビス(2,6-ジフルオロフェニル)チタニウム、ビス(η5-2,4-シクロペンタジエン-1-イル)ビス(2,6-ジフルオロ-3-(1H-ピロール-1-イル)フェニル)チタニウム等である。
 IV)モノアルコキシチタン化合物:例えば、チタニウムトリス(ジオクチルホスフェート)イソプロポキサイド、チタニウムトリス(ドデシルベンゼンスルホネート)イソプロポキサイド等である。
 V)チタニウムオキサイド化合物:例えば、チタニウムオキサイドビス(ペンタンジオネート)、チタニウムオキサイドビス(テトラメチルヘプタンジオネート)、フタロシアニンチタニウムオキサイド等である。
 VI)チタニウムテトラアセチルアセトネート化合物:例えば、チタニウムテトラアセチルアセトネート等である。
VII)チタネートカップリング剤:例えば、イソプロピルトリドデシルベンゼンスルホニルチタネート等である。
The metal complex is preferably a titanium complex, a zirconium complex or a hafnium complex, and more preferably a titanium complex.
Specific examples of titanium complexes are shown below in I) to VII):
I) Titanium chelate compounds: Titanium chelate compounds having two or more alkoxy groups are more preferred because they provide good storage stability to the resin composition and a good curing pattern. Specific examples include titanium bis(triethanolamine) diisopropoxide, titanium di(n-butoxide) bis(2,4-pentanedionate), titanium diisopropoxide bis(2,4-pentanedionate), titanium diisopropoxide bis(tetramethylheptanedionate), and titanium diisopropoxide bis(ethylacetoacetate).
II) Tetraalkoxytitanium compounds: for example, titanium tetra(n-butoxide), titanium tetraethoxide, titanium tetra(2-ethylhexoxide), titanium tetraisobutoxide, titanium tetraisopropoxide, titanium tetramethoxide, titanium tetramethoxypropoxide, titanium tetramethylphenoxide, titanium tetra(n-nonyloxide), titanium tetra(n-propoxide), titanium tetrastearyloxide, titanium tetrakis[bis{2,2-(allyloxymethyl)butoxide}], etc.
III) Titanocene compounds: for example, pentamethylcyclopentadienyltitanium trimethoxide, bis(η5-2,4-cyclopentadien-1-yl)bis(2,6-difluorophenyl)titanium, bis(η5-2,4-cyclopentadien-1-yl)bis(2,6-difluoro-3-(1H-pyrrol-1-yl)phenyl)titanium, and the like.
IV) Monoalkoxytitanium compounds: For example, titanium tris(dioctylphosphate) isopropoxide, titanium tris(dodecylbenzenesulfonate) isopropoxide, etc.
V) Titanium oxide compounds: For example, titanium oxide bis(pentanedionate), titanium oxide bis(tetramethylheptanedionate), phthalocyanine titanium oxide, etc.
VI) Titanium tetraacetylacetonate compounds: For example, titanium tetraacetylacetonate.
VII) Titanate coupling agents: for example, isopropyl tridodecylbenzenesulfonyl titanate.

 また、金属錯体として、下記式(T-1)で表される化合物を含むことも好ましい。
 式(T-1)中、Mは、チタン、ジルコニウム又はハフニウムであり、l1は、0~2の整数であり、l2は0又は1であり、l1+l2×2は0~2の整数であり、mは0~4の整数、nは0~2の整数であり、l1+l2+m+n×2=4であり、R11は各々独立に置換もしくは無置換のシクロペンタジエニル基、置換もしくは無置換のアルコキシ基、又は、置換もしくは無置換のフェノキシ基であり、R12は置換若しくは無置換の炭化水素基であり、Rは各々独立に、下記式(T-2)で表される構造を含む基であり、Rは各々独立に、下記式(T-2)で表される構造を含む基であり、Xはそれぞれ独立に、酸素原子又は硫黄原子である。
 式(T-2)中、X~Xはそれぞれ独立に、-C(-*)=又は-N=を表し、*はそれぞれ他の構造との結合部位を表し、#は金属原子との結合部位を表す。
It is also preferable that the metal complex contains a compound represented by the following formula (T-1).
In formula (T-1), M represents titanium, zirconium, or hafnium, l1 represents an integer of 0 to 2, l2 represents 0 or 1, l1 + l2 × 2 represents an integer of 0 to 2, m represents an integer of 0 to 4, n represents an integer of 0 to 2, and l1 + l2 + m + n × 2 = 4, each R 11 represents independently a substituted or unsubstituted cyclopentadienyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy group, or a substituted or unsubstituted phenoxy group, R 12 represents a substituted or unsubstituted hydrocarbon group, each R 2 represents independently a group containing a structure represented by formula (T-2) below, each R 3 represents independently a group containing a structure represented by formula (T-2) below, and each X 1A represents independently an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom.
In formula (T-2), X 1 to X 3 each independently represent -C(-*)= or -N=, * represents a bonding site to another structure, and # represents a bonding site to a metal atom.

 式(T-1)中、組成物の保存安定性の観点からは、Mはチタンであることが好ましい。
 式(T-1)中、l1及びl2が0である態様も、本発明の好ましい態様の一つである。
 式(T-1)中、mは2又は4であることが好ましく、2であることがより好ましい。
 式(T-1)中、nは1又は2であることが好ましく、1であることがより好ましい。
 ここで、式(T-1)中、l1及びl2が0であり、mが0、2又は4であることも好ましい。
In formula (T-1), M is preferably titanium from the viewpoint of storage stability of the composition.
In formula (T-1), an embodiment in which l1 and l2 are 0 is also one of the preferred embodiments of the present invention.
In formula (T-1), m is preferably 2 or 4, and more preferably 2.
In formula (T-1), n is preferably 1 or 2, and more preferably 1.
Here, it is also preferred that l1 and l2 are 0 and m is 0, 2 or 4 in formula (T-1).

 式(T-1)中、金属錯体の安定性の観点からは、R11は置換又は無置換のシクロペンタジエニル配位子が好ましい。
また、R11におけるシクロペンタジエニル基、アルコキシ基及びフェノキシ基は置換されていてもよいが、無置換である態様も本発明の好ましい態様の一つである。
In formula (T-1), from the viewpoint of the stability of the metal complex, R 11 is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted cyclopentadienyl ligand.
The cyclopentadienyl group, alkoxy group and phenoxy group in R 11 may be substituted, but an unsubstituted embodiment is also one of the preferred embodiments of the present invention.

 式(T-1)中、R12は炭素数1~20の炭化水素基であることが好ましく、炭素数2~10の炭化水素基であることがより好ましい。
 R12における炭化水素基としては、脂肪族炭化水素基、芳香族炭化水素基のいずれであってもよいが、芳香族炭化水素基が好ましい。
 脂肪族炭化水素基としては、飽和脂肪族炭化水素基であっても不飽和脂肪族炭化水素基であってもよいが、飽和脂肪族炭化水素基が好ましい。
 芳香族炭化水素基としては、炭素数6~20の芳香族炭化水素基が好ましく、炭素数6~10の芳香族炭化水素基がより好ましく、フェニレン基が更に好ましい。
 R12における置換基としては、1価の置換基が好ましく、ハロゲン原子等が挙げられる。また、R12が芳香族炭化水素基である場合、置換基としてアルキル基を有してもよい。
 これらの中でも、式(T-1)中、R12は無置換のフェニレン基であることが好ましい。また、R12におけるフェニレン基は1,2-フェニレン基であることが好ましい。
In formula (T-1), R 12 is preferably a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and more preferably a hydrocarbon group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms.
The hydrocarbon group for R 12 may be either an aliphatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic hydrocarbon group, with aromatic hydrocarbon groups being preferred.
The aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be a saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group or an unsaturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group, but a saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group is preferred.
The aromatic hydrocarbon group is preferably an aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably an aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms, and even more preferably a phenylene group.
The substituent in R 12 is preferably a monovalent substituent, such as a halogen atom, etc. When R 12 is an aromatic hydrocarbon group, it may have an alkyl group as a substituent.
Among these, in formula (T-1), R 12 is preferably an unsubstituted phenylene group, and the phenylene group in R 12 is preferably a 1,2-phenylene group.

 式(T-1)中、mが2以上であり、Rが2以上含まれる場合、その2以上のRの構造はそれぞれ同一であってもよいし、異なっていてもよい。
 式(T-1)中、nが2以上であり、Rが2以上含まれる場合、その2以上のRの構造はそれぞれ同一であってもよいし、異なっていてもよい。
In formula (T-1), when m is 2 or more and two or more R 2s are contained, the structures of the two or more R 2s may be the same or different.
In formula (T-1), when n is 2 or more and two or more R 3s are contained, the structures of the two or more R 3s may be the same or different.

 式(T-2)中、X~Xはそれぞれ独立に、-C(-*)=又は-N=を表し、少なくとも1つが-C(-*)=を表すことが好ましく、少なくとも2つが-C(-*)=を表すことがより好ましい。 In formula (T-2), X 1 to X 3 each independently represent -C(-*)= or -N=, and it is preferable that at least one represents -C(-*)=, and it is more preferable that at least two represent -C(-*)=.

 式(T-1)で表される化合物の具体例としては、実施例におけるI-5~I-8に該当する化合物が挙げられるが、これらに限定されるものではない。 Specific examples of compounds represented by formula (T-1) include, but are not limited to, compounds I-5 to I-8 in the examples.

 金属若しくはその塩、又は、金属錯体を含む場合、その含有量は、特定樹脂100質量部に対し、0.05~10質量部であることが好ましく、0.1~5質量部であることがより好ましい。含有量が0.05質量部以上である場合、得られる硬化パターンの耐熱性及び耐薬品性がより良好となり、10質量部以下である場合、組成物の保存安定性により優れる。
 樹脂組成物は、金属若しくはその塩、又は、金属錯体のいずれかに該当する化合物を2種以上含有してもよい。2種以上含有する場合、その合計含有量が上記範囲内となることが好ましい。
When a metal or a salt thereof, or a metal complex is contained, the content thereof is preferably 0.05 to 10 parts by mass, and more preferably 0.1 to 5 parts by mass, relative to 100 parts by mass of the specific resin. When the content is 0.05 part by mass or more, the heat resistance and chemical resistance of the obtained cured pattern are improved, and when the content is 10 parts by mass or less, the storage stability of the composition is superior.
The resin composition may contain two or more compounds corresponding to either a metal or a salt thereof, or a metal complex. When two or more compounds are contained, it is preferable that the total content thereof is within the above range.

<重合性化合物>
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、重合性化合物を含むことが好ましい。
<Polymerizable compound>
The resin composition of the present invention preferably contains a polymerizable compound.

 重合性化合物の融点は、60℃以下であることが好ましい。上記融点は、1気圧における融点であり、40℃以下であることがより好ましく、25℃以下であることがさらに好ましい。
 上記融点を60℃以下とすることにより、塗布膜が乾燥時、加熱時において流動しやすくなり、硬化物の平坦性を向上させることができる。
The melting point of the polymerizable compound is preferably 60° C. or lower. The melting point is the melting point at 1 atmosphere, and is more preferably 40° C. or lower, and even more preferably 25° C. or lower.
By setting the melting point to 60° C. or less, the coating film becomes more fluid when dried and heated, and the flatness of the cured product can be improved.

 重合性化合物としては、ラジカル重合性基を有する重合性化合物(ラジカル架橋剤)、又は、他の架橋剤が挙げられる。 Examples of polymerizable compounds include polymerizable compounds having radical polymerizable groups (radical crosslinking agents) and other crosslinking agents.

〔ラジカル架橋剤〕
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、ラジカル架橋剤を含むことが好ましい。
 ラジカル架橋剤は、ラジカル重合性基を有する化合物である。ラジカル重合性基としては、エチレン性不飽和結合を含む基が好ましい。上記エチレン性不飽和結合を含む基としては、ビニル基、アリル基、ビニルフェニル基、(メタ)アクリロイル基、マレイミド基、(メタ)アクリルアミド基などが挙げられる。
 これらの中でも、(メタ)アクリロイル基、(メタ)アクリルアミド基、ビニルフェニル基が好ましく、反応性の観点からは、(メタ)アクリロイル基がより好ましい。
[Radical crosslinking agent]
The resin composition of the present invention preferably contains a radical crosslinking agent.
The radical crosslinking agent is a compound having a radical polymerizable group. The radical polymerizable group is preferably a group containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond. Examples of the group containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond include a vinyl group, an allyl group, a vinylphenyl group, a (meth)acryloyl group, a maleimide group, and a (meth)acrylamide group.
Among these, a (meth)acryloyl group, a (meth)acrylamide group, and a vinylphenyl group are preferred, and from the viewpoint of reactivity, a (meth)acryloyl group is more preferred.

 ラジカル架橋剤は、エチレン性不飽和結合を1個以上有する化合物であることが好ましいが、2個以上有する化合物であることがより好ましい。ラジカル架橋剤は、エチレン性不飽和結合を3個以上有していてもよい。
 上記エチレン性不飽和結合を2個以上有する化合物としては、エチレン性不飽和結合を2~15個有する化合物が好ましく、エチレン性不飽和結合を2~10個有する化合物がより好ましく、2~6個有する化合物が更に好ましい。
 得られるパターン(硬化物)の膜強度の観点からは、本発明の樹脂組成物は、エチレン性不飽和結合を2個有する化合物と、上記エチレン性不飽和結合を3個以上有する化合物とを含むことも好ましい。
The radical crosslinking agent is preferably a compound having one or more ethylenically unsaturated bonds, more preferably a compound having two or more ethylenically unsaturated bonds, and may also have three or more ethylenically unsaturated bonds.
The compound having two or more ethylenically unsaturated bonds is preferably a compound having 2 to 15 ethylenically unsaturated bonds, more preferably a compound having 2 to 10 ethylenically unsaturated bonds, and even more preferably a compound having 2 to 6 ethylenically unsaturated bonds.
From the viewpoint of the film strength of the resulting pattern (cured product), it is also preferable that the resin composition of the present invention contains a compound having two ethylenically unsaturated bonds and the compound having three or more ethylenically unsaturated bonds.

 ラジカル架橋剤の分子量は、2,000以下が好ましく、1,500以下がより好ましく、900以下が更に好ましい。ラジカル架橋剤の分子量の下限は、100以上が好ましい。 The molecular weight of the radical crosslinking agent is preferably 2,000 or less, more preferably 1,500 or less, and even more preferably 900 or less. The lower limit of the molecular weight of the radical crosslinking agent is preferably 100 or more.

 ラジカル架橋剤の具体例としては、不飽和カルボン酸(例えば、アクリル酸、メタクリル酸、イタコン酸、クロトン酸、イソクロトン酸、マレイン酸など)やそのエステル類、アミド類が挙げられ、好ましくは、不飽和カルボン酸と多価アルコール化合物とのエステル、及び不飽和カルボン酸と多価アミン化合物とのアミド類である。また、ヒドロキシ基やアミノ基、スルファニル基等の求核性置換基を有する不飽和カルボン酸エステル又はアミド類と、単官能若しくは多官能イソシアネート類又はエポキシ類との付加反応物や、単官能若しくは多官能のカルボン酸との脱水縮合反応物等も好適に使用される。また、イソシアネート基やエポキシ基等の親電子性置換基を有する不飽和カルボン酸エステル又はアミド類と、単官能若しくは多官能のアルコール類、アミン類、チオール類との付加反応物、更に、ハロゲノ基やトシルオキシ基等の脱離性置換基を有する不飽和カルボン酸エステル又はアミド類と、単官能若しくは多官能のアルコール類、アミン類、チオール類との置換反応物も好適である。また、別の例として、上記の不飽和カルボン酸の代わりに、不飽和ホスホン酸、スチレン等のビニルベンゼン誘導体、ビニルエーテル、アリルエーテル等に置き換えた化合物群を使用することも可能である。具体例としては、特開2016-027357号公報の段落0113~0122の記載を参酌でき、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Specific examples of radical crosslinking agents include unsaturated carboxylic acids (e.g., acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, isocrotonic acid, maleic acid, etc.), their esters, and amides. Preferred are esters of unsaturated carboxylic acids and polyhydric alcohol compounds, and amides of unsaturated carboxylic acids and polyamine compounds. Also suitable are addition reaction products of unsaturated carboxylic acid esters or amides having nucleophilic substituents such as hydroxyl groups, amino groups, or sulfanyl groups with monofunctional or polyfunctional isocyanates or epoxy groups, and dehydration condensation reaction products of monofunctional or polyfunctional carboxylic acids. Also suitable are addition reaction products of unsaturated carboxylic acid esters or amides having electrophilic substituents such as isocyanate groups or epoxy groups with monofunctional or polyfunctional alcohols, amines, or thiols, and substitution reaction products of unsaturated carboxylic acid esters or amides having eliminable substituents such as halogeno groups or tosyloxy groups with monofunctional or polyfunctional alcohols, amines, or thiols. As another example, compounds in which the above unsaturated carboxylic acids are replaced with unsaturated phosphonic acids, vinylbenzene derivatives such as styrene, vinyl ethers, allyl ethers, etc. can also be used. Specific examples can be found in paragraphs 0113 to 0122 of JP 2016-027357 A, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.

 ラジカル架橋剤は、常圧下で100℃以上の沸点を持つ化合物も好ましい。常圧下で100℃以上の沸点を持つ化合物としては、国際公開第2021/112189号の段落0203に記載の化合物等が挙げられる。この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 The radical crosslinking agent is preferably a compound having a boiling point of 100°C or higher under normal pressure. Examples of compounds having a boiling point of 100°C or higher under normal pressure include the compounds described in paragraph 0203 of WO 2021/112189, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.

 上述以外の好ましいラジカル架橋剤としては、国際公開第2021/112189号の段落0204~0208に記載のラジカル重合性化合物等が挙げられる。この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Preferable radical crosslinking agents other than those mentioned above include the radical polymerizable compounds described in paragraphs 0204 to 0208 of WO 2021/112189, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.

 ラジカル架橋剤としては、ジペンタエリスリトールトリアクリレート(市販品としては KAYARAD D-330(日本化薬(株)製))、ジペンタエリスリトールテトラアクリレート(市販品としては KAYARAD D-320(日本化薬(株)製)、A-TMMT(新中村化学工業(株)製))、ジペンタエリスリトールペンタ(メタ)アクリレート(市販品としては KAYARAD D-310(日本化薬(株)製))、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサ(メタ)アクリレート(市販品としては KAYARAD DPHA(日本化薬(株)製)、A-DPH(新中村化学工業社製))、及びこれらの(メタ)アクリロイル基がエチレングリコール残基又はプロピレングリコール残基を介して結合している構造が好ましい。これらのオリゴマータイプも使用できる。 Preferred radical crosslinking agents include dipentaerythritol triacrylate (commercially available products include KAYARAD D-330 (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.)), dipentaerythritol tetraacrylate (commercially available products include KAYARAD D-320 (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) and A-TMMT (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.)), dipentaerythritol penta(meth)acrylate (commercially available products include KAYARAD D-310 (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.)), dipentaerythritol hexa(meth)acrylate (commercially available products include KAYARAD DPHA (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) and A-DPH (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.)), and structures in which the (meth)acryloyl group is bonded via an ethylene glycol residue or a propylene glycol residue. Oligomeric types of these may also be used.

 ラジカル架橋剤の市販品としては、例えばエチレンオキシ鎖を4個有する4官能アクリレートであるSR-494、エチレンオキシ鎖を4個有する2官能メタクリレートであるSR-209、231、239(以上、サートマー社製)、ペンチレンオキシ鎖を6個有する6官能アクリレートであるDPCA-60、イソブチレンオキシ鎖を3個有する3官能アクリレートであるTPA-330(以上、日本化薬(株)製)、ウレタンオリゴマーであるUAS-10、UAB-140(以上、日本製紙社製)、NKエステルM-40G、NKエステル4G、NKエステルM-9300、NKエステルA-9300、UA-7200(以上、新中村化学工業社製)、DPHA-40H(日本化薬(株)製)、UA-306H、UA-306T、UA-306I、AH-600、T-600、AI-600(以上、共栄社化学社製)、ブレンマーPME400(日油(株)製)などが挙げられる。 Commercially available radical crosslinking agents include, for example, SR-494, a tetrafunctional acrylate with four ethyleneoxy chains, SR-209, 231, and 239, difunctional methacrylates with four ethyleneoxy chains (all manufactured by Sartomer Corporation), DPCA-60, a hexafunctional acrylate with six pentyleneoxy chains, and TPA-330, a trifunctional acrylate with three isobutyleneoxy chains (all manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), and urethane oligomers. Examples of such esters include UAS-10 and UAB-140 (manufactured by Nippon Paper Industries Co., Ltd.), NK Ester M-40G, NK Ester 4G, NK Ester M-9300, NK Ester A-9300, and UA-7200 (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), DPHA-40H (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), UA-306H, UA-306T, UA-306I, AH-600, T-600, and AI-600 (manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.), and Blenmar PME400 (manufactured by NOF Corporation).

 ラジカル架橋剤としては、特公昭48-041708号公報、特開昭51-037193号公報、特公平02-032293号公報、特公平02-016765号公報に記載されているようなウレタンアクリレート類や、特公昭58-049860号公報、特公昭56-017654号公報、特公昭62-039417号公報、特公昭62-039418号公報に記載のエチレンオキサイド系骨格を有するウレタン化合物類も好適である。ラジカル架橋剤として、特開昭63-277653号公報、特開昭63-260909号公報、特開平01-105238号公報に記載される、分子内にアミノ構造やスルフィド構造を有する化合物を用いることもできる。 Suitable radical crosslinking agents include urethane acrylates such as those described in JP-B No. 48-041708, JP-A No. 51-037193, JP-B No. 02-032293, and JP-B No. 02-016765, as well as urethane compounds with an ethylene oxide skeleton such as those described in JP-B No. 58-049860, JP-B No. 56-017654, JP-B No. 62-039417, and JP-B No. 62-039418. Compounds with an amino structure or sulfide structure in the molecule, such as those described in JP-A Nos. 63-277653, 63-260909, and JP-A No. 01-105238, can also be used as radical crosslinking agents.

 ラジカル架橋剤は、カルボキシ基、リン酸基等の酸基を有するラジカル架橋剤であってもよい。酸基を有するラジカル架橋剤は、脂肪族ポリヒドロキシ化合物と不飽和カルボン酸とのエステルが好ましく、脂肪族ポリヒドロキシ化合物の未反応のヒドロキシ基に非芳香族カルボン酸無水物を反応させて酸基を持たせたラジカル架橋剤がより好ましい。特に好ましくは、脂肪族ポリヒドロキシ化合物の未反応のヒドロキシ基に非芳香族カルボン酸無水物を反応させて酸基を持たせたラジカル架橋剤において、脂肪族ポリヒドロキシ化合物がペンタエリスリトール又はジペンタエリスリトールである化合物である。市販品としては、例えば、東亞合成(株)製の多塩基酸変性アクリルオリゴマーとして、M-510、M-520などが挙げられる。 The radical crosslinking agent may be a radical crosslinking agent having an acid group such as a carboxy group or a phosphate group. The radical crosslinking agent having an acid group is preferably an ester of an aliphatic polyhydroxy compound and an unsaturated carboxylic acid, and more preferably a radical crosslinking agent in which an acid group is imparted by reacting a non-aromatic carboxylic anhydride with the unreacted hydroxy groups of an aliphatic polyhydroxy compound. Particularly preferred is a radical crosslinking agent in which an acid group is imparted by reacting a non-aromatic carboxylic anhydride with the unreacted hydroxy groups of an aliphatic polyhydroxy compound, in which the aliphatic polyhydroxy compound is pentaerythritol or dipentaerythritol. Examples of commercially available products include polybasic acid-modified acrylic oligomers M-510 and M-520 manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.

 酸基を有するラジカル架橋剤の酸価は、0.1~300mgKOH/gが好ましく、1~100mgKOH/gがより好ましい。ラジカル架橋剤の酸価が上記範囲であれば、製造上の取扱性に優れ、現像性に優れる。また、重合性が良好である。上記酸価は、JIS K 0070:1992の記載に準拠して測定される。 The acid value of the radical crosslinking agent having an acid group is preferably 0.1 to 300 mgKOH/g, and more preferably 1 to 100 mgKOH/g. When the acid value of the radical crosslinking agent is within the above range, it provides excellent handling during manufacturing and developability. It also provides good polymerizability. The acid value is measured in accordance with the description of JIS K 0070:1992.

 樹脂組成物は、パターンの解像性と膜の伸縮性の観点から、2官能のメタアクリレート又はアクリレートを用いることが好ましい。
 具体的な化合物としては、トリエチレングリコールジアクリレート、トリエチレングリコールジメタクリレート、テトラエチレングリコールジメタクリレート、テトラエチレングリコールジアクリレート、PEG(ポリエチレングリコール)200ジアクリレート、PEG200ジメタクリレート、PEG600ジアクリレート、PEG600ジメタクリレート、ポリテトラエチレングリコールジアクリレート、ポリテトラエチレングリコールジメタクリレート、ジプロピレングリコールジアクリレート、トリプロピレングリコールジアクリレート、ネオペンチルグリコールジアクリレート、ネオペンチルグリコールジメタクリレート、3-メチル-1,5-ペンタンジオールジアクリレート、1,6-ヘキサンジオールジアクリレート、1,6-ヘキサンジオールジメタクリレート、ジメチロール-トリシクロデカンジアクリレート、ジメチロール-トリシクロデカンジメタクリレート、ビスフェノールAのEO(エチレンオキシド)付加物ジアクリレート、ビスフェノールAのEO付加物ジメタクリレート、ビスフェノールAのPO(プロピレンオキシド)付加物ジアクリレート、ビスフェノールAのPO付加物ジメタクリレート、2-ヒドロキシ-3-アクリロイロキシプロピルメタクリレート、イソシアヌル酸EO変性ジアクリレート、イソシアヌル酸EO変性ジメタクリレート、その他ウレタン結合を有する2官能アクリレート、ウレタン結合を有する2官能メタクリレートを使用することができる。これらは必要に応じ、2種以上を混合し使用することができる。
 なお、例えばPEG200ジアクリレートとは、ポリエチレングリコールジアクリレートであって、ポリエチレングリコール鎖の式量が200程度のものをいう。
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、パターン(硬化物)の反り抑制の観点から、ラジカル架橋剤として、単官能ラジカル架橋剤を好ましく用いることができる。単官能ラジカル架橋剤としては、n-ブチル(メタ)アクリレート、2-エチルヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、2-ヒドロキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート、ブトキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート、カルビトール(メタ)アクリレート、シクロヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、ベンジル(メタ)アクリレート、フェノキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート、N-メチロール(メタ)アクリルアミド、グリシジル(メタ)アクリレート、ポリエチレングリコールモノ(メタ)アクリレート、ポリプロピレングリコールモノ(メタ)アクリレート等の(メタ)アクリル酸誘導体、N-ビニルピロリドン、N-ビニルカプロラクタム等のN-ビニル化合物類、アリルグリシジルエーテル等が好ましく用いられる。単官能ラジカル架橋剤としては、露光前の揮発を抑制するため、常圧下で100℃以上の沸点を持つ化合物も好ましい。
 その他、2官能以上のラジカル架橋剤としては、ジアリルフタレート、トリアリルトリメリテート等のアリル化合物類が挙げられる。
From the viewpoint of pattern resolution and film stretchability, it is preferable to use a bifunctional methacrylate or acrylate for the resin composition.
Specific compounds include triethylene glycol diacrylate, triethylene glycol dimethacrylate, tetraethylene glycol dimethacrylate, tetraethylene glycol diacrylate, PEG (polyethylene glycol) 200 diacrylate, PEG 200 dimethacrylate, PEG 600 diacrylate, PEG 600 dimethacrylate, polytetraethylene glycol diacrylate, polytetraethylene glycol dimethacrylate, dipropylene glycol diacrylate, tripropylene glycol diacrylate, neopentyl glycol diacrylate, neopentyl glycol dimethacrylate, 3-methyl-1,5-pentanediol diacrylate, 1,6-hexyl methyl ... Examples of usable surfactants include xanediol diacrylate, 1,6-hexanediol dimethacrylate, dimethylol-tricyclodecane diacrylate, dimethylol-tricyclodecane dimethacrylate, ethylene oxide (EO) adduct diacrylate of bisphenol A, propylene oxide (PO) adduct dimethacrylate of bisphenol A, propylene oxide (PO) adduct dimethacrylate of bisphenol A, 2-hydroxy-3-acryloyloxypropyl methacrylate, EO-modified isocyanuric acid diacrylate, EO-modified isocyanuric acid dimethacrylate, and other bifunctional acrylates and bifunctional methacrylates having a urethane bond. These may be used in combination of two or more types, if necessary.
For example, PEG200 diacrylate refers to polyethylene glycol diacrylate with a formula weight of about 200 for the polyethylene glycol chain.
In the resin composition of the present invention, from the viewpoint of suppressing warpage of the pattern (cured product), a monofunctional radical crosslinking agent can be preferably used as the radical crosslinking agent. Examples of the monofunctional radical crosslinking agent include (meth)acrylic acid derivatives such as n-butyl(meth)acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl(meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl(meth)acrylate, butoxyethyl(meth)acrylate, carbitol(meth)acrylate, cyclohexyl(meth)acrylate, benzyl(meth)acrylate, phenoxyethyl(meth)acrylate, N-methylol(meth)acrylamide, glycidyl(meth)acrylate, polyethylene glycol mono(meth)acrylate, and polypropylene glycol mono(meth)acrylate; N-vinyl compounds such as N-vinylpyrrolidone and N-vinylcaprolactam; and allyl glycidyl ether. In order to suppress volatilization before exposure, compounds having a boiling point of 100°C or higher under normal pressure are also preferred as the monofunctional radical crosslinking agent.
Other examples of the bifunctional or higher functional radical crosslinking agent include allyl compounds such as diallyl phthalate and triallyl trimellitate.

 ラジカル架橋剤を含有する場合、ラジカル架橋剤の含有量は、樹脂組成物の全固形分に対して、0質量%超60質量%以下であることが好ましい。下限は5質量%以上がより好ましい。上限は、50質量%以下であることがより好ましく、30質量%以下であることが更に好ましい。 If a radical crosslinking agent is contained, the content of the radical crosslinking agent is preferably more than 0% by mass and not more than 60% by mass, based on the total solids content of the resin composition. The lower limit is more preferably 5% by mass or more. The upper limit is more preferably 50% by mass or less, and even more preferably 30% by mass or less.

 ラジカル架橋剤は1種を単独で用いてもよいが、2種以上を混合して用いてもよい。2種以上を併用する場合にはその合計量が上記の範囲となることが好ましい。 A single radical crosslinking agent may be used, or two or more may be used in combination. When two or more types are used in combination, it is preferable that the total amount be within the above range.

〔他の架橋剤〕
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、上述したラジカル架橋剤とは異なる、他の架橋剤を含むことも好ましい。
 他の架橋剤とは、上述したラジカル架橋剤以外の架橋剤をいい、光酸発生剤、又は、光塩基発生剤の感光により、組成物中の他の化合物又はその反応生成物との間で共有結合を形成する反応が促進される基を分子内に複数個有する化合物であることが好ましく、組成物中の他の化合物又はその反応生成物との間で共有結合を形成する反応が酸又は塩基の作用によって促進される基を分子内に複数個有する化合物が好ましい。
 上記酸又は塩基は、露光工程において、光酸発生剤又は光塩基発生剤から発生する酸又は塩基であることが好ましい。
 他の架橋剤としては、国際公開第2022/145355号の段落0179~0207に記載の化合物が挙げられる。上記記載は本明細書に組み込まれる。
[Other crosslinking agents]
The resin composition of the present invention preferably contains a crosslinking agent other than the above-mentioned radical crosslinking agent.
The other crosslinking agent refers to a crosslinking agent other than the above-mentioned radical crosslinking agent, and is preferably a compound having, in its molecule, a plurality of groups that promote a reaction to form a covalent bond with another compound in the composition or a reaction product thereof upon exposure to light by a photoacid generator or a photobase generator, and is preferably a compound having, in its molecule, a plurality of groups that promote, by the action of an acid or a base, a reaction to form a covalent bond with another compound in the composition or a reaction product thereof.
The acid or base is preferably an acid or base generated from a photoacid generator or a photobase generator in the exposure step.
Other cross-linking agents include the compounds described in paragraphs 0179 to 0207 of WO 2022/145355, which are incorporated herein by reference.

〔重合開始剤〕
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、重合開始剤を含む。重合開始剤は熱重合開始剤であっても光重合開始剤であってもよいが、特に光重合開始剤を含むことが好ましい。
 光重合開始剤は、光ラジカル重合開始剤であることが好ましい。光ラジカル重合開始剤としては、特に制限はなく、公知の光ラジカル重合開始剤の中から適宜選択することができる。例えば、紫外線領域から可視領域の光線に対して感光性を有する光ラジカル重合開始剤が好ましい。また、光励起された増感剤と作用し、活性ラジカルを生成する活性剤であってもよい。
[Polymerization initiator]
The resin composition of the present invention contains a polymerization initiator. The polymerization initiator may be a thermal polymerization initiator or a photopolymerization initiator, but it is particularly preferable that the resin composition contains a photopolymerization initiator.
The photopolymerization initiator is preferably a photoradical polymerization initiator. There are no particular limitations on the photoradical polymerization initiator, and it can be appropriately selected from known photoradical polymerization initiators. For example, a photoradical polymerization initiator that is photosensitive to light in the ultraviolet to visible range is preferred. Alternatively, it may be an activator that reacts with a photoexcited sensitizer to generate active radicals.

 光ラジカル重合開始剤は、波長約240~800nm(好ましくは330~500nm)の範囲内で少なくとも約50L・mol-1・cm-1のモル吸光係数を有する化合物を、少なくとも1種含有していることが好ましい。化合物のモル吸光係数は、公知の方法を用いて測定することができる。例えば、紫外可視分光光度計(Varian社製Cary-5 spectrophotometer)にて、酢酸エチル溶剤を用い、0.01g/Lの濃度で測定することが好ましい。 The photoradical polymerization initiator preferably contains at least one compound having a molar absorption coefficient of at least about 50 L mol cm in a wavelength range of about 240 to 800 nm (preferably 330 to 500 nm ) . The molar absorption coefficient of the compound can be measured using a known method. For example, it is preferably measured using an ultraviolet-visible spectrophotometer (Varian Cary-5 spectrophotometer) at a concentration of 0.01 g/L using ethyl acetate as a solvent.

 光ラジカル重合開始剤としては、公知の化合物を任意に使用できる。例えば、ハロゲン化炭化水素誘導体(例えば、トリアジン骨格を有する化合物、オキサジアゾール骨格を有する化合物、トリハロメチル基を有する化合物など)、アシルホスフィンオキサイド等のアシルホスフィン化合物、ヘキサアリールビイミダゾール、オキシム誘導体等のオキシム化合物、有機過酸化物、チオ化合物、ケトン化合物、芳香族オニウム塩、ケトオキシムエーテル、アミノアセトフェノンなどのα-アミノケトン化合物、ヒドロキシアセトフェノンなどのα-ヒドロキシケトン化合物、アゾ系化合物、アジド化合物、メタロセン化合物、有機ホウ素化合物、鉄アレーン錯体などが挙げられる。これらの詳細については、特開2016-027357号公報の段落0165~0182、国際公開第2015/199219号の段落0138~0151の記載を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。また、特開2014-130173号公報の段落0065~0111、特許第6301489号公報に記載された化合物、MATERIAL STAGE 37~60p,vol.19,No.3,2019に記載されたパーオキサイド系光重合開始剤、国際公開第2018/221177号に記載の光重合開始剤、国際公開第2018/110179号に記載の光重合開始剤、特開2019-043864号公報に記載の光重合開始剤、特開2019-044030号公報に記載の光重合開始剤、特開2019-167313号公報に記載の過酸化物系開始剤が挙げられ、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Any known compound can be used as the photoradical polymerization initiator. Examples include halogenated hydrocarbon derivatives (e.g., compounds having a triazine skeleton, compounds having an oxadiazole skeleton, compounds having a trihalomethyl group, etc.), acylphosphine compounds such as acylphosphine oxide, hexaarylbiimidazole, oxime compounds such as oxime derivatives, organic peroxides, thio compounds, ketone compounds, aromatic onium salts, ketoxime ethers, α-aminoketone compounds such as aminoacetophenone, α-hydroxyketone compounds such as hydroxyacetophenone, azo compounds, azide compounds, metallocene compounds, organic boron compounds, and iron arene complexes. For details, please refer to paragraphs [0165] to [0182] of JP 2016-027357 A and paragraphs [0138] to [0151] of WO 2015/199219 A, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference. Other examples include the compounds described in paragraphs 0065 to 0111 of JP 2014-130173 A and Japanese Patent No. 6,301,489 A, the peroxide-based photopolymerization initiators described in MATERIAL STAGE, pp. 37 to 60, Vol. 19, No. 3, 2019, the photopolymerization initiators described in WO 2018/221177 A, the photopolymerization initiators described in WO 2018/110179 A, the photopolymerization initiators described in JP 2019-043864 A, the photopolymerization initiators described in JP 2019-044030 A, and the peroxide-based initiators described in JP 2019-167313 A, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.

 ケトン化合物としては、例えば、特開2015-087611号公報の段落0087に記載の化合物が例示され、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。市販品では、カヤキュア-DETX-S(日本化薬(株)製)も好適に用いられる。 Examples of ketone compounds include the compounds described in paragraph 0087 of JP 2015-087611 A, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference. Among commercially available products, Kayacure-DETX-S (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) is also suitable.

 本発明の一実施態様において、光ラジカル重合開始剤としては、ヒドロキシアセトフェノン化合物、アミノアセトフェノン化合物、及び、アシルホスフィン化合物を好適に用いることができる。より具体的には、例えば、特開平10-291969号公報に記載のアミノアセトフェノン系開始剤、特許第4225898号に記載のアシルホスフィンオキシド系開始剤を用いることができ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 In one embodiment of the present invention, hydroxyacetophenone compounds, aminoacetophenone compounds, and acylphosphine compounds can be suitably used as photoradical polymerization initiators. More specifically, for example, the aminoacetophenone initiators described in JP-A-10-291969 and the acylphosphine oxide initiators described in Japanese Patent No. 4225898 can be used, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.

 α-ヒドロキシケトン系開始剤としては、Omnirad 184、Omnirad 1173、Omnirad 2959、Omnirad 127(以上、IGM Resins B.V.社製)、IRGACURE 184(IRGACUREは登録商標)、DAROCUR 1173、IRGACURE 500、IRGACURE-2959、IRGACURE 127(以上、BASF社製)を用いることができる。 Examples of α-hydroxyketone initiators that can be used include Omnirad 184, Omnirad 1173, Omnirad 2959, and Omnirad 127 (all manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), IRGACURE 184 (IRGACURE is a registered trademark), DAROCUR 1173, IRGACURE 500, IRGACURE-2959, and IRGACURE 127 (all manufactured by BASF).

 α-アミノケトン系開始剤としては、Omnirad 907、Omnirad 369、Omnirad 369E、Omnirad 379EG(以上、IGM Resins B.V.社製)、IRGACURE 907、IRGACURE 369、及び、IRGACURE 379(以上、BASF社製)を用いることができる。 Examples of α-aminoketone initiators that can be used include Omnirad 907, Omnirad 369, Omnirad 369E, and Omnirad 379EG (all manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), and IRGACURE 907, IRGACURE 369, and IRGACURE 379 (all manufactured by BASF).

 アミノアセトフェノン系開始剤、アシルホスフィンオキシド系開始剤、メタロセン化合物としては、例えば、国際公開第2021/112189号の段落0161~0163に記載の化合物も好適に使用することができる。この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 As aminoacetophenone initiators, acylphosphine oxide initiators, and metallocene compounds, for example, compounds described in paragraphs 0161 to 0163 of WO 2021/112189 can also be suitably used. The contents of this specification are incorporated herein by reference.

 光ラジカル重合開始剤として、より好ましくはオキシム化合物が挙げられる。オキシム化合物を用いることにより、露光ラチチュードをより効果的に向上させることが可能になる。オキシム化合物は、露光ラチチュード(露光マージン)が広く、かつ、光硬化促進剤としても働くため、特に好ましい。 A more preferred example of a photoradical polymerization initiator is an oxime compound. By using an oxime compound, it is possible to more effectively improve the exposure latitude. Oxime compounds are particularly preferred because they have a wide exposure latitude (exposure margin) and also function as a photocuring accelerator.

 オキシム化合物の具体例としては、特開2001-233842号公報に記載の化合物、特開2000-080068号公報に記載の化合物、特開2006-342166号公報に記載の化合物、J.C.S.Perkin II(1979年、pp.1653-1660)に記載の化合物、J.C.S.Perkin II(1979年、pp.156-162)に記載の化合物、Journal of Photopolymer Science and Technology(1995年、pp.202-232)に記載の化合物、特開2000-066385号公報に記載の化合物、特表2004-534797号公報に記載の化合物、特開2017-019766号公報に記載の化合物、特許第6065596号公報に記載の化合物、国際公開第2015/152153号に記載の化合物、国際公開第2017/051680号に記載の化合物、特開2017-198865号公報に記載の化合物、国際公開第2017/164127号の段落0025~0038に記載の化合物、国際公開第2013/167515号に記載の化合物などが挙げられ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Specific examples of oxime compounds include compounds described in JP 2001-233842 A, compounds described in JP 2000-080068 A, compounds described in JP 2006-342166 A, compounds described in J. C. S. Perkin II (1979, pp. 1653-1660), compounds described in J. C. S. Perkin II (1979, pp. 1653-1660), and compounds described in J. C. S. Compounds described in Perkin II (1979, pp. 156-162), compounds described in Journal of Photopolymer Science and Technology (1995, pp. 202-232), compounds described in JP-A-2000-066385, compounds described in JP-A-2004-534797, compounds described in JP-A-2017-01976 ... Examples include compounds described in Patent Publication No. 6065596, compounds described in International Publication No. 2015/152153, compounds described in International Publication No. 2017/051680, compounds described in JP-A-2017-198865, compounds described in paragraphs 0025 to 0038 of International Publication No. 2017/164127, and compounds described in International Publication No. 2013/167515, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.

 好ましいオキシム化合物としては、例えば、下記の構造の化合物や、3-(ベンゾイルオキシ(イミノ))ブタン-2-オン、3-(アセトキシ(イミノ))ブタン-2-オン、3-(プロピオニルオキシ(イミノ))ブタン-2-オン、2-(アセトキシ(イミノ))ペンタン-3-オン、2-(アセトキシ(イミノ))-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オン、2-(ベンゾイルオキシ(イミノ))-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オン、3-((4-トルエンスルホニルオキシ)イミノ)ブタン-2-オン、及び2-(エトキシカルボニルオキシ(イミノ))-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オンなどが挙げられる。樹脂組成物においては、特に光ラジカル重合開始剤としてオキシム化合物を用いることが好ましい。光ラジカル重合開始剤としてのオキシム化合物は、分子内に>C=N-O-C(=O)-の連結基を有する。 Preferred oxime compounds include, for example, compounds having the following structure: 3-(benzoyloxy(imino))butan-2-one, 3-(acetoxy(imino))butan-2-one, 3-(propionyloxy(imino))butan-2-one, 2-(acetoxy(imino))pentan-3-one, 2-(acetoxy(imino))-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 2-(benzoyloxy(imino))-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 3-((4-toluenesulfonyloxy)imino)butan-2-one, and 2-(ethoxycarbonyloxy(imino))-1-phenylpropan-1-one. In resin compositions, it is particularly preferable to use an oxime compound as a photoradical polymerization initiator. Oxime compounds used as photoradical polymerization initiators have a linking group of >C=N-O-C(=O)- within the molecule.

 オキシム化合物の市販品としては、IRGACURE OXE 01、IRGACURE OXE 02、IRGACURE OXE 03、IRGACURE OXE 04、IRGACURE OXE 05(以上、BASF社製)、アデカオプトマーN-1919((株)ADEKA製、特開2012-014052号公報に記載の光ラジカル重合開始剤2)、TR-PBG-304、TR-PBG-305(常州強力電子新材料有限公司製)、アデカアークルズNCI-730、NCI-831及びアデカアークルズNCI-930((株)ADEKA製)、DFI-091(ダイトーケミックス(株)製)、SpeedCure PDO(SARTOMER ARKEMA製)が挙げられる。また、下記の構造のオキシム化合物を用いることもできる。
Commercially available oxime compounds include IRGACURE OXE 01, IRGACURE OXE 02, IRGACURE OXE 03, IRGACURE OXE 04, and IRGACURE OXE 05 (manufactured by BASF), ADEKA OPTOMER N-1919 (manufactured by ADEKA Corporation, photoradical polymerization initiator 2 described in JP 2012-014052 A), TR-PBG-304 and TR-PBG-305 (manufactured by Changzhou Strong Electronic New Materials Co., Ltd.), ADEKA ARCLES NCI-730, NCI-831, and ADEKA ARCLES NCI-930 (manufactured by ADEKA Corporation), DFI-091 (manufactured by Daito ChemiX Co., Ltd.), and SpeedCure PDO (manufactured by SARTOMER ARKEMA) can also be used. In addition, an oxime compound having the following structure can also be used.

 光ラジカル重合開始剤としては、例えば、国際公開第2021/112189号の段落0169~0171に記載のフルオレン環を有するオキシム化合物、カルバゾール環の少なくとも1つのベンゼン環がナフタレン環となった骨格を有するオキシム化合物、フッ素原子を有するオキシム化合物を用いることもできる。
 また、国際公開第2021/020359号の段落0208~0210に記載のニトロ基を有するオキシム化合物、ベンゾフラン骨格を有するオキシム化合物、カルバゾール骨格にヒドロキシ基を有する置換基が結合したオキシム化合物を用いることもできる。これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
As the photoradical polymerization initiator, for example, an oxime compound having a fluorene ring described in paragraphs 0169 to 0171 of WO 2021/112189, an oxime compound having a skeleton in which at least one benzene ring of a carbazole ring is replaced with a naphthalene ring, or an oxime compound having a fluorine atom can be used.
In addition, oxime compounds having a nitro group, oxime compounds having a benzofuran skeleton, and oxime compounds having a carbazole skeleton to which a substituent having a hydroxy group is bonded, as described in paragraphs 0208 to 0210 of WO 2021/020359, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.

 その他、光重合開始剤としては、特開2023-058585号公報の段落0113~0117に記載の化合物を用いることもできる。この記載は本願明細書に組み込まれる。 In addition, the compounds described in paragraphs 0113 to 0117 of JP 2023-058585 A can also be used as photopolymerization initiators. This description is incorporated herein by reference.

 樹脂組成物が光重合開始剤を含む場合、その含有量は、樹脂組成物の全固形分に対し0.1~30質量%が好ましく、0.1~20質量%がより好ましく、0.5~15質量%が更に好ましく、1.0~10質量%が更により好ましい。光重合開始剤は1種のみ含有していてもよいし、2種以上含有していてもよい。光重合開始剤を2種以上含有する場合は、合計量が上記範囲であることが好ましい。
 なお、光重合開始剤は熱重合開始剤としても機能する場合があるため、オーブンやホットプレート等の加熱によって光重合開始剤による架橋を更に進行させられる場合がある。
When the resin composition contains a photopolymerization initiator, the content thereof is preferably 0.1 to 30 mass% relative to the total solid content of the resin composition, more preferably 0.1 to 20 mass%, even more preferably 0.5 to 15 mass%, and even more preferably 1.0 to 10 mass%. Only one type of photopolymerization initiator may be contained, or two or more types may be contained. When two or more types of photopolymerization initiators are contained, it is preferable that the total amount is in the above range.
In addition, since the photopolymerization initiator may also function as a thermal polymerization initiator, the crosslinking by the photopolymerization initiator may be further promoted by heating in an oven, a hot plate, or the like.

〔増感剤〕
 樹脂組成物は、増感剤を含んでいてもよい。増感剤は、特定の活性放射線を吸収して電子励起状態となる。電子励起状態となった増感剤は、熱ラジカル重合開始剤、光ラジカル重合開始剤などと接触して、電子移動、エネルギー移動、発熱などの作用が生じる。これにより、熱ラジカル重合開始剤、光ラジカル重合開始剤は化学変化を起こして分解し、ラジカル、酸又は塩基を生成する。
 使用可能な増感剤として、ベンゾフェノン系、ミヒラーズケトン系、クマリン系、ピラゾールアゾ系、アニリノアゾ系、トリフェニルメタン系、アントラキノン系、アントラセン系、アントラピリドン系、ベンジリデン系、オキソノール系、ピラゾロトリアゾールアゾ系、ピリドンアゾ系、シアニン系、フェノチアジン系、ピロロピラゾールアゾメチン系、キサンテン系、フタロシアニン系、ベンゾピラン系、インジゴ系等の化合物を使用することができる。
 増感剤としては、例えば、ミヒラーズケトン、4,4’-ビス(ジエチルアミノ)ベンゾフェノン、2,5-ビス(4’-ジエチルアミノベンザル)シクロペンタン、2,6-ビス(4’-ジエチルアミノベンザル)シクロヘキサノン、2,6-ビス(4’-ジエチルアミノベンザル)-4-メチルシクロヘキサノン、4,4’-ビス(ジメチルアミノ)カルコン、4,4’-ビス(ジエチルアミノ)カルコン、p-ジメチルアミノシンナミリデンインダノン、p-ジメチルアミノベンジリデンインダノン、2-(p-ジメチルアミノフェニルビフェニレン)-ベンゾチアゾール、2-(p-ジメチルアミノフェニルビニレン)ベンゾチアゾール、2-(p-ジメチルアミノフェニルビニレン)イソナフトチアゾール、1,3-ビス(4’-ジメチルアミノベンザル)アセトン、1,3-ビス(4’-ジエチルアミノベンザル)アセトン、3,3’-カルボニル-ビス(7-ジエチルアミノクマリン)、3-アセチル-7-ジメチルアミノクマリン、3-エトキシカルボニル-7-ジメチルアミノクマリン、3-ベンジロキシカルボニル-7-ジメチルアミノクマリン、3-メトキシカルボニル-7-ジエチルアミノクマリン、3-エトキシカルボニル-7-ジエチルアミノクマリン(7-(ジエチルアミノ)クマリン-3-カルボン酸エチル)、N-フェニル-N’-エチルエタノールアミン、N-フェニルジエタノールアミン、N-p-トリルジエタノールアミン、N-フェニルエタノールアミン、4-モルホリノベンゾフェノン、ジメチルアミノ安息香酸イソアミル、ジエチルアミノ安息香酸イソアミル、2-メルカプトベンズイミダゾール、1-フェニル-5-メルカプトテトラゾール、2-メルカプトベンゾチアゾール、2-(p-ジメチルアミノスチリル)ベンズオキサゾール、2-(p-ジメチルアミノスチリル)ベンゾチアゾール、2-(p-ジメチルアミノスチリル)ナフト(1,2-d)チアゾール、2-(p-ジメチルアミノベンゾイル)スチレン、ジフェニルアセトアミド、ベンズアニリド、N-メチルアセトアニリド、3’,4’-ジメチルアセトアニリド等が挙げられる。
 また、他の増感色素を用いてもよい。
 増感色素の詳細については、特開2016-027357号公報の段落0161~0163の記載を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
[Sensitizer]
The resin composition may contain a sensitizer. The sensitizer absorbs specific actinic radiation and becomes electronically excited. The electronically excited sensitizer comes into contact with a thermal radical polymerization initiator, a photoradical polymerization initiator, or the like, and effects such as electron transfer, energy transfer, and heat generation occur. As a result, the thermal radical polymerization initiator or the photoradical polymerization initiator undergoes a chemical change and decomposes, generating a radical, an acid, or a base.
Usable sensitizers include benzophenone-based, Michler's ketone-based, coumarin-based, pyrazole azo-based, anilino azo-based, triphenylmethane-based, anthraquinone-based, anthracene-based, anthrapyridone-based, benzylidene-based, oxonol-based, pyrazolotriazole azo-based, pyridone azo-based, cyanine-based, phenothiazine-based, pyrrolopyrazole azomethine-based, xanthene-based, phthalocyanine-based, benzopyran-based, and indigo-based compounds.
Examples of the sensitizer include Michler's ketone, 4,4'-bis(diethylamino)benzophenone, 2,5-bis(4'-diethylaminobenzal)cyclopentane, 2,6-bis(4'-diethylaminobenzal)cyclohexanone, 2,6-bis(4'-diethylaminobenzal)-4-methylcyclohexanone, 4,4'-bis(dimethylamino)chalcone, 4,4'-bis(diethylamino)chalcone, p-dimethylaminocinnamylideneindanone, p-dimethylaminobenzylideneindanone, and Non, 2-(p-dimethylaminophenylbiphenylene)benzothiazole, 2-(p-dimethylaminophenylvinylene)benzothiazole, 2-(p-dimethylaminophenylvinylene)isonaphthothiazole, 1,3-bis(4'-dimethylaminobenzal)acetone, 1,3-bis(4'-diethylaminobenzal)acetone, 3,3'-carbonyl-bis(7-diethylaminocoumarin), 3-acetyl-7-dimethylaminocoumarin, 3-ethoxycarbonyl-7-dimethylaminocoumarin Phosphorus, 3-benzyloxycarbonyl-7-dimethylaminocoumarin, 3-methoxycarbonyl-7-diethylaminocoumarin, 3-ethoxycarbonyl-7-diethylaminocoumarin (ethyl 7-(diethylamino)coumarin-3-carboxylate), N-phenyl-N'-ethylethanolamine, N-phenyldiethanolamine, N-p-tolyldiethanolamine, N-phenylethanolamine, 4-morpholinobenzophenone, isoamyl dimethylaminobenzoate, isoamyl diethylaminobenzoate Examples of such an alkyl acrylate copolymer include soamyl, 2-mercaptobenzimidazole, 1-phenyl-5-mercaptotetrazole, 2-mercaptobenzothiazole, 2-(p-dimethylaminostyryl)benzoxazole, 2-(p-dimethylaminostyryl)benzothiazole, 2-(p-dimethylaminostyryl)naphtho(1,2-d)thiazole, 2-(p-dimethylaminobenzoyl)styrene, diphenylacetamide, benzanilide, N-methylacetanilide, and 3',4'-dimethylacetanilide.
Other sensitizing dyes may also be used.
For details about the sensitizing dye, please refer to the descriptions in paragraphs 0161 to 0163 of JP-A-2016-027357, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.

 樹脂組成物が増感剤を含む場合、増感剤の含有量は、樹脂組成物の全固形分に対し、0.01~20質量%が好ましく、0.1~15質量%がより好ましく、0.5~10質量%が更に好ましい。増感剤は、1種単独で用いてもよいし、2種以上を併用してもよい。 When the resin composition contains a sensitizer, the content of the sensitizer is preferably 0.01 to 20 mass%, more preferably 0.1 to 15 mass%, and even more preferably 0.5 to 10 mass%, based on the total solids content of the resin composition. One type of sensitizer may be used alone, or two or more types may be used in combination.

〔連鎖移動剤〕
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、連鎖移動剤を含有してもよい。連鎖移動剤は、例えば高分子辞典第三版(高分子学会編、2005年)683-684頁に定義されている。連鎖移動剤としては、例えば、分子内に-S-S-、-SO-S-、-N-O-、SH、PH、SiH、及びGeHを有する化合物群、RAFT(Reversible Addition Fragmentation chain Transfer)重合に用いられるチオカルボニルチオ基を有するジチオベンゾアート、トリチオカルボナート、ジチオカルバマート、キサンタート化合物等が用いられる。これらは、低活性のラジカルに水素を供与して、ラジカルを生成するか、若しくは、酸化された後、脱プロトンすることによりラジカルを生成しうる。特に、チオール化合物を好ましく用いることができる。
[Chain transfer agent]
The resin composition of the present invention may contain a chain transfer agent. Chain transfer agents are defined, for example, in the Third Edition of the Polymer Dictionary (edited by the Society of Polymer Science, 2005), pages 683-684. Examples of chain transfer agents include compounds having -S-S-, -SO 2 -S-, -N-O-, SH, PH, SiH, and GeH in the molecule, and dithiobenzoates, trithiocarbonates, dithiocarbamates, and xanthate compounds having a thiocarbonylthio group used in RAFT (Reversible Addition Fragmentation Chain Transfer) polymerization. These donate hydrogen to low-activity radicals to generate radicals, or can generate radicals by being oxidized and then deprotonated. Thiol compounds are particularly preferred.

 また、連鎖移動剤は、国際公開第2015/199219号の段落0152~0153に記載の化合物を用いることもでき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Furthermore, the chain transfer agent may be the compound described in paragraphs 0152-0153 of WO 2015/199219, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.

 樹脂組成物が連鎖移動剤を有する場合、連鎖移動剤の含有量は、樹脂組成物の全固形分100質量部に対し、0.01~20質量部が好ましく、0.1~10質量部がより好ましく、0.5~5質量部が更に好ましい。連鎖移動剤は1種のみでもよいし、2種以上であってもよい。連鎖移動剤が2種以上の場合は、その合計が上記範囲であることが好ましい。 When the resin composition contains a chain transfer agent, the content of the chain transfer agent is preferably 0.01 to 20 parts by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 10 parts by mass, and even more preferably 0.5 to 5 parts by mass, per 100 parts by mass of the total solids content of the resin composition. Only one type of chain transfer agent may be used, or two or more types may be used. When two or more types of chain transfer agents are used, the total amount is preferably within the above range.

 また、本発明の樹脂組成物が、重合開始剤として、2種以上の重合開始剤を含むことも本発明の好ましい態様の一つである。
 具体的には、本発明の樹脂組成物は、光重合開始剤及び後述の熱重合開始剤を含むか、又は、上述の光ラジカル重合開始剤及び光酸発生剤を含むことが好ましい。
In addition, it is one of the preferred embodiments of the present invention that the resin composition of the present invention contains two or more types of polymerization initiators.
Specifically, the resin composition of the present invention preferably contains a photopolymerization initiator and a thermal polymerization initiator described below, or contains the above-mentioned photoradical polymerization initiator and a photoacid generator.

 光重合開始剤及び後述の熱重合開始剤を含むことにより、露光によるパターン形成が可能となり、かつ、後述の加熱工程による硬化時にラジカル重合も進行しやすくなり、耐薬品性等の性能が向上する場合が有る。
 光重合開始剤及び後述の熱重合開始剤を含む場合の含有比率としては、光重合開始剤及び熱重合開始剤の合計含有量に対し、熱重合開始剤の含有量が20~70質量%であることが好ましく、30~60質量%であることがより好ましい。
By including a photopolymerization initiator and a thermal polymerization initiator described below, pattern formation by exposure becomes possible, and radical polymerization also becomes more likely to proceed during curing by a heating step described below, which may improve performance such as chemical resistance.
When a photopolymerization initiator and a thermal polymerization initiator described later are contained, the content of the thermal polymerization initiator is preferably 20 to 70 mass %, more preferably 30 to 60 mass %, relative to the total content of the photopolymerization initiator and the thermal polymerization initiator.

 光ラジカル重合開始剤及び光酸発生剤を含むことにより解像性等の性能が向上する場合が有る。
 光重合開始剤及び光酸発生剤を含む場合の含有比率としては、光重合開始剤及び光酸発生剤の合計含有量に対し、光酸発生剤の含有量が20~70質量%であることが好ましく、30~60質量%であることがより好ましい。
By including a photoradical polymerization initiator and a photoacid generator, performance such as resolution may be improved in some cases.
When a photopolymerization initiator and a photoacid generator are contained, the content ratio of the photoacid generator relative to the total content of the photopolymerization initiator and the photoacid generator is preferably 20 to 70 mass%, more preferably 30 to 60 mass%.

〔熱重合開始剤〕
 熱重合開始剤としては、例えば、熱ラジカル重合開始剤が挙げられる。熱ラジカル重合開始剤は、熱のエネルギーによってラジカルを発生し、重合性を有する化合物の重合反応を開始又は促進させる化合物である。熱ラジカル重合開始剤を添加することによって樹脂及び重合性化合物の重合反応を進行させることもできるので、より耐溶剤性を向上できる。
[Thermal polymerization initiator]
Examples of the thermal polymerization initiator include a thermal radical polymerization initiator. A thermal radical polymerization initiator is a compound that generates radicals by thermal energy and initiates or promotes the polymerization reaction of a polymerizable compound. Addition of the thermal radical polymerization initiator can also promote the polymerization reaction of the resin and the polymerizable compound, thereby further improving solvent resistance.

 熱ラジカル重合開始剤として、具体的には、特開2008-063554号公報の段落0074~0118に記載されている化合物が挙げられ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Specific examples of thermal radical polymerization initiators include the compounds described in paragraphs 0074 to 0118 of JP 2008-063554 A, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.

 熱重合開始剤を含む場合、その含有量は、樹脂組成物の全固形分に対し0.1~30質量%であることが好ましく、0.1~20質量%であることがより好ましく、0.5~15質量%であることが更に好ましい。熱重合開始剤は1種のみ含有していてもよいし、2種以上含有していてもよい。熱重合開始剤を2種以上含有する場合は、合計量が上記範囲であることが好ましい。 If a thermal polymerization initiator is included, its content is preferably 0.1 to 30 mass% of the total solids content of the resin composition, more preferably 0.1 to 20 mass%, and even more preferably 0.5 to 15 mass%. Only one type of thermal polymerization initiator may be included, or two or more types may be included. If two or more types of thermal polymerization initiators are included, it is preferable that the total amount be within the above range.

<塩基発生剤>
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、塩基発生剤を含んでもよい。ここで、塩基発生剤とは、物理的または化学的な作用によって塩基を発生することができる化合物である。好ましい塩基発生剤としては、熱塩基発生剤および光塩基発生剤が挙げられる。
 特に、樹脂組成物が環化樹脂の前駆体を含む場合、樹脂組成物は塩基発生剤を含むことが好ましい。樹脂組成物が熱塩基発生剤を含有することによって、例えば加熱により前駆体の環化反応を促進でき、硬化物の機械特性や耐薬品性が良好なものとなり、例えば半導体パッケージ中に含まれる再配線層用層間絶縁膜としての性能が良好となる。
 塩基発生剤としては、イオン型塩基発生剤でもよく、非イオン型塩基発生剤でもよい。塩基発生剤から発生する塩基としては、例えば、2級アミン、3級アミンが挙げられる。
 塩基発生剤は特に限定されず、公知の塩基発生剤を用いることができる。公知の塩基発生剤としては、例えば、カルバモイルオキシム化合物、カルバモイルヒドロキシルアミン化合物、カルバミン酸化合物、ホルムアミド化合物、アセトアミド化合物、カルバメート化合物、ベンジルカルバメート化合物、ニトロベンジルカルバメート化合物、スルホンアミド化合物、イミダゾール誘導体化合物、アミンイミド化合物、ピリジン誘導体化合物、α-アミノアセトフェノン誘導体化合物、4級アンモニウム塩誘導体化合物、イミニウム塩、ピリジニウム塩、α-ラクトン環誘導体化合物、アミンイミド化合物、フタルイミド誘導体化合物、アシルオキシイミノ化合物等が挙げられる。
<Base Generator>
The resin composition of the present invention may contain a base generator. Here, the base generator is a compound that can generate a base by physical or chemical action. Preferred base generators include thermal base generators and photobase generators.
In particular, when the resin composition contains a precursor of a cyclized resin, the resin composition preferably contains a base generator. By containing the thermal base generator in the resin composition, for example, the cyclization reaction of the precursor can be promoted by heating, and the mechanical properties and chemical resistance of the cured product can be improved, resulting in good performance as an interlayer insulating film for a rewiring layer included in, for example, a semiconductor package.
The base generator may be an ionic base generator or a nonionic base generator. Examples of the base generated from the base generator include secondary amines and tertiary amines.
The base generator is not particularly limited, and known base generators can be used, such as carbamoyl oxime compounds, carbamoyl hydroxylamine compounds, carbamic acid compounds, formamide compounds, acetamide compounds, carbamate compounds, benzyl carbamate compounds, nitrobenzyl carbamate compounds, sulfonamide compounds, imidazole derivative compounds, amine imide compounds, pyridine derivative compounds, α-aminoacetophenone derivative compounds, quaternary ammonium salt derivative compounds, iminium salts, pyridinium salts, α-lactone ring derivative compounds, amine imide compounds, phthalimide derivative compounds, and acyloxyimino compounds.

 樹脂組成物が塩基発生剤を含む場合、塩基発生剤の含有量は、樹脂組成物中の樹脂100質量部に対し、0.1~50質量部が好ましい。下限は、0.3質量部以上がより好ましく、0.5質量部以上が更に好ましい。上限は、30質量部以下がより好ましく、20質量部以下が更に好ましく、10質量部以下が一層好ましく、5質量部以下がより一層好ましく、4質量部以下が特に好ましい。
 塩基発生剤は、1種又は2種以上を用いることができる。2種以上を用いる場合は、合計量が上記範囲であることが好ましい。
When the resin composition contains a base generator, the content of the base generator is preferably 0.1 to 50 parts by mass relative to 100 parts by mass of the resin in the resin composition. The lower limit is more preferably 0.3 parts by mass or more, and even more preferably 0.5 parts by mass or more. The upper limit is more preferably 30 parts by mass or less, even more preferably 20 parts by mass or less, still more preferably 10 parts by mass or less, even more preferably 5 parts by mass or less, and particularly preferably 4 parts by mass or less.
The base generator may be used alone or in combination of two or more. When two or more types are used, the total amount is preferably within the above range.

<溶剤>
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、溶剤を含むことが好ましい。
 溶剤は、公知の溶剤を任意に使用できる。溶剤は有機溶剤が好ましい。有機溶剤としては、エステル類、エーテル類、ケトン類、環状炭化水素類、スルホキシド類、アミド類、ウレア類、アルコール類などの化合物が挙げられる。
<Solvent>
The resin composition of the present invention preferably contains a solvent.
Any known solvent can be used as the solvent. The solvent is preferably an organic solvent. Examples of the organic solvent include compounds such as esters, ethers, ketones, cyclic hydrocarbons, sulfoxides, amides, ureas, and alcohols.

 エステル類として、例えば、酢酸エチル、酢酸-n-ブチル、酢酸イソブチル、酢酸へキシル、ギ酸アミル、酢酸イソアミル、プロピオン酸ブチル、酪酸イソプロピル、酪酸エチル、酪酸ブチル、乳酸メチル、乳酸エチル、γ-ブチロラクトン、ε-カプロラクトン、δ-バレロラクトン、γ-バレロラクトン、アルキルオキシ酢酸アルキル(例えば、アルキルオキシ酢酸メチル、アルキルオキシ酢酸エチル、アルキルオキシ酢酸ブチル(例えば、メトキシ酢酸メチル、メトキシ酢酸エチル、メトキシ酢酸ブチル、エトキシ酢酸メチル、エトキシ酢酸エチル等))、3-アルキルオキシプロピオン酸アルキルエステル類(例えば、3-アルキルオキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-アルキルオキシプロピオン酸エチル等(例えば、3-メトキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-メトキシプロピオン酸エチル、3-エトキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル等))、2-アルキルオキシプロピオン酸アルキルエステル類(例えば、2-アルキルオキシプロピオン酸メチル、2-アルキルオキシプロピオン酸エチル、2-アルキルオキシプロピオン酸プロピル等(例えば、2-メトキシプロピオン酸メチル、2-メトキシプロピオン酸エチル、2-メトキシプロピオン酸プロピル、2-エトキシプロピオン酸メチル、2-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル))、2-アルキルオキシ-2-メチルプロピオン酸メチル及び2-アルキルオキシ-2-メチルプロピオン酸エチル(例えば、2-メトキシ-2-メチルプロピオン酸メチル、2-エトキシ-2-メチルプロピオン酸エチル等)、ピルビン酸メチル、ピルビン酸エチル、ピルビン酸プロピル、アセト酢酸メチル、アセト酢酸エチル、2-オキソブタン酸メチル、2-オキソブタン酸エチル、ヘキサン酸エチル、ヘプタン酸エチル、マロン酸ジメチル、マロン酸ジエチル等が好適なものとして挙げられる。 Esters, for example, ethyl acetate, n-butyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, hexyl acetate, amyl formate, isoamyl acetate, butyl propionate, isopropyl butyrate, ethyl butyrate, butyl butyrate, methyl lactate, ethyl lactate, γ-butyrolactone, ε-caprolactone, δ-valerolactone, γ-valerolactone, alkyl alkyloxyacetates (for example, methyl alkyloxyacetate, ethyl alkyloxyacetate, butyl alkyloxyacetate (for example, methyl methoxyacetate, ethyl methoxyacetate, butyl methoxyacetate, methyl ethoxyacetate, ethyl ethoxyacetate, etc.)), alkyl 3-alkyloxypropionates (for example, methyl 3-alkyloxypropionate, ethyl 3-alkyloxypropionate, etc. (for example, methyl 3-methoxypropionate, ethyl 3-methoxypropionate, methyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, etc.)), 2- Suitable examples include alkyl esters of alkyloxypropionates (e.g., methyl 2-alkyloxypropionate, ethyl 2-alkyloxypropionate, and propyl 2-alkyloxypropionate (e.g., methyl 2-methoxypropionate, ethyl 2-methoxypropionate, propyl 2-methoxypropionate, methyl 2-ethoxypropionate, and ethyl 2-ethoxypropionate)), methyl 2-alkyloxy-2-methylpropionate and ethyl 2-alkyloxy-2-methylpropionate (e.g., methyl 2-methoxy-2-methylpropionate and ethyl 2-ethoxy-2-methylpropionate), methyl pyruvate, ethyl pyruvate, propyl pyruvate, methyl acetoacetate, ethyl acetoacetate, methyl 2-oxobutanoate, ethyl 2-oxobutanoate, ethyl hexanoate, ethyl heptanoate, dimethyl malonate, and diethyl malonate.

 エーテル類として、例えば、エチレングリコールジメチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールジエチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールエチルメチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールブチルメチルエーテル、トリエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル、テトラエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル、テトラヒドロフラン、エチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、エチレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、メチルセロソルブアセテート、エチルセロソルブアセテート、ジエチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールモノブチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールジメチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート、プロピレングリコールモノエチルエーテルアセテート、エチレングリコールモノブチルエーテル、エチレングリコールモノブチルエーテルアセテート、ジエチレングリコールエチルメチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノプロピルエーテルアセテート、ジプロピレングリコールジメチルエーテル等が好適なものとして挙げられる。 Suitable examples of ethers include ethylene glycol dimethyl ether, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, diethylene glycol diethyl ether, diethylene glycol ethyl methyl ether, diethylene glycol butyl methyl ether, triethylene glycol dimethyl ether, tetraethylene glycol dimethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, ethylene glycol monoethyl ether, methyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, diethylene glycol monomethyl ether, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, diethylene glycol monobutyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol dimethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, ethylene glycol monobutyl ether, ethylene glycol monobutyl ether acetate, diethylene glycol ethyl methyl ether, propylene glycol monopropyl ether acetate, and dipropylene glycol dimethyl ether.

 ケトン類として、例えば、メチルエチルケトン、シクロヘキサノン、シクロペンタノン、2-ヘプタノン、3-ヘプタノン、3-メチルシクロヘキサノン、レボグルコセノン、ジヒドロレボグルコセノン等が好適なものとして挙げられる。 Suitable examples of ketones include methyl ethyl ketone, cyclohexanone, cyclopentanone, 2-heptanone, 3-heptanone, 3-methylcyclohexanone, levoglucosenone, and dihydrolevoglucosenone.

 環状炭化水素類として、例えば、トルエン、キシレン、アニソール等の芳香族炭化水素類、リモネン等の環式テルペン類が好適なものとして挙げられる。 Suitable examples of cyclic hydrocarbons include aromatic hydrocarbons such as toluene, xylene, and anisole, and cyclic terpenes such as limonene.

 スルホキシド類として、例えば、ジメチルスルホキシドが好適なものとして挙げられる。 A suitable example of a sulfoxide is dimethyl sulfoxide.

 アミド類として、N-メチル-2-ピロリドン、N-エチル-2-ピロリドン、N-シクロヘキシル-2-ピロリドン、N,N-ジメチルアセトアミド、N,N-ジメチルホルムアミド、N,N-ジメチルイソブチルアミド、3-メトキシ-N,N-ジメチルプロピオンアミド、3-ブトキシ-N,N-ジメチルプロピオンアミド、N-ホルミルモルホリン、N-アセチルモルホリン等が好適なものとして挙げられる。 Preferred amides include N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone, N-ethyl-2-pyrrolidone, N-cyclohexyl-2-pyrrolidone, N,N-dimethylacetamide, N,N-dimethylformamide, N,N-dimethylisobutyramide, 3-methoxy-N,N-dimethylpropionamide, 3-butoxy-N,N-dimethylpropionamide, N-formylmorpholine, and N-acetylmorpholine.

 ウレア類として、N,N,N’,N’-テトラメチルウレア、1,3-ジメチル-2-イミダゾリジノン等が好適なものとして挙げられる。 Preferred ureas include N,N,N',N'-tetramethylurea and 1,3-dimethyl-2-imidazolidinone.

 アルコール類として、メタノール、エタノール、1-プロパノール、2-プロパノール、1-ブタノール、1-ペンタノール、1-ヘキサノール、ベンジルアルコール、エチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、1-メトキシ-2-プロパノール、2-エトキシエタノール、ジエチレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールモノヘキシルエーテル、トリエチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、ポリエチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、ポリプロピレングリコール、テトラエチレングリコール、エチレングリコールモノブチルエーテル、エチレングリコールモノベンジルエーテル、エチレングリコールモノフェニルエーテル、メチルフェニルカルビノール、n-アミルアルコール、メチルアミルアルコール、および、ダイアセトンアルコール等が挙げられる。 Alcohols include methanol, ethanol, 1-propanol, 2-propanol, 1-butanol, 1-pentanol, 1-hexanol, benzyl alcohol, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, 1-methoxy-2-propanol, 2-ethoxyethanol, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, diethylene glycol monohexyl ether, triethylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monoethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, polyethylene glycol monomethyl ether, polypropylene glycol, tetraethylene glycol, ethylene glycol monobutyl ether, ethylene glycol monobenzyl ether, ethylene glycol monophenyl ether, methylphenyl carbinol, n-amyl alcohol, methyl amyl alcohol, and diacetone alcohol.

 溶剤は、塗布面性状の改良などの観点から、2種以上を混合する形態も好ましい。 From the perspective of improving the properties of the coated surface, it is also preferable to mix two or more solvents.

 本発明では、3-エトキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル、エチルセロソルブアセテート、乳酸エチル、ジエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル、酢酸ブチル、3-メトキシプロピオン酸メチル、2-ヘプタノン、シクロヘキサノン、シクロペンタノン、γ-ブチロラクトン、γ-バレロラクトン、3-メトキシ-N,N-ジメチルプロピオンアミド、トルエン、ジメチルスルホキシド、エチルカルビトールアセテート、ブチルカルビトールアセテート、N-メチル-2-ピロリドン、プロピレングリコールメチルエーテル、及びプロピレングリコールメチルエーテルアセテート、レボグルコセノン、ジヒドロレボグルコセノンから選択される1種の溶剤、又は、2種以上で構成される混合溶剤が好ましい。ジメチルスルホキシドとγ-ブチロラクトンとの併用、ジメチルスルホキシドとγ-バレロラクトンとの併用、3-メトキシ-N,N-ジメチルプロピオンアミドとγ-ブチロラクトンとの併用、3-メトキシ-N,N-ジメチルプロピオンアミドとγ-ブチロラクトンとジメチルスルホキシドとの併用、又は、N-メチル-2-ピロリドンと乳酸エチルとの併用が特に好ましい。これらの併用された溶剤に、更にトルエンを溶剤の全質量に対して1~10質量%程度添加する態様も、本発明の好ましい態様の1つである。
 特に、樹脂組成物の保存安定性等の観点からは、溶剤としてγ-バレロラクトンを含む態様も、本発明の好ましい態様の1つである。このような態様において、溶剤の全質量に対するγ-バレロラクトンの含有量は、50質量%以上であることが好ましく、60質量%以上であることがより好ましく、70質量%以上であることが更に好ましい。また、上記含有量の上限は、特に限定されず100質量%であってもよい。上記含有量は、樹脂組成物に含まれる特定樹脂などの成分の溶解度等を考慮して決定すればよい。
 また、ジメチルスルホキシドとγ-バレロラクトンとを併用する場合、溶剤の全質量に対して、60~90質量%のγ-バレロラクトンと10~40質量%のジメチルスルホキシドとを含むことが好ましく、70~90質量%のγ-バレロラクトンと10~30質量%のジメチルスルホキシドとを含むことがより好ましく、75~85質量%のγ-バレロラクトンと15~25質量%のジメチルスルホキシドとを含むことが更に好ましい。
In the present invention, one solvent selected from methyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl lactate, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, butyl acetate, methyl 3-methoxypropionate, 2-heptanone, cyclohexanone, cyclopentanone, γ-butyrolactone, γ-valerolactone, 3-methoxy-N,N-dimethylpropionamide, toluene, dimethyl sulfoxide, ethyl carbitol acetate, butyl carbitol acetate, N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone, propylene glycol methyl ether, propylene glycol methyl ether acetate, levoglucosenone, and dihydrolevoglucosenone, or a mixed solvent composed of two or more solvents, is preferred. Particularly preferred are a combination of dimethyl sulfoxide and γ-butyrolactone, a combination of dimethyl sulfoxide and γ-valerolactone, a combination of 3-methoxy-N,N-dimethylpropionamide and γ-butyrolactone, a combination of 3-methoxy-N,N-dimethylpropionamide, γ-butyrolactone and dimethyl sulfoxide, or a combination of N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone and ethyl lactate. Another preferred embodiment of the present invention is to further add toluene to these combined solvents in an amount of about 1 to 10% by mass, based on the total mass of the solvents.
In particular, from the viewpoint of storage stability of the resin composition, an embodiment in which γ-valerolactone is contained as a solvent is also one of the preferred embodiments of the present invention. In such an embodiment, the content of γ-valerolactone relative to the total mass of the solvent is preferably 50% by mass or more, more preferably 60% by mass or more, and even more preferably 70% by mass or more. The upper limit of the content is not particularly limited and may be 100% by mass. The content may be determined taking into consideration the solubility of components such as the specific resin contained in the resin composition, etc.
Furthermore, when dimethyl sulfoxide and γ-valerolactone are used in combination, the solvent preferably contains 60 to 90% by mass of γ-valerolactone and 10 to 40% by mass of dimethyl sulfoxide, more preferably 70 to 90% by mass of γ-valerolactone and 10 to 30% by mass of dimethyl sulfoxide, and even more preferably 75 to 85% by mass of γ-valerolactone and 15 to 25% by mass of dimethyl sulfoxide, relative to the total mass of the solvent.

 また、本発明の樹脂組成物は、1気圧における沸点が50℃~300℃である溶剤を含むことが好ましく、上記沸点が100~260℃である溶剤を含むことがより好ましい。本発明において、溶剤の沸点は1気圧における沸点である。
 このような態様によれば、溶剤の除去性に優れ、解像性に優れた硬化物が得られると考えられる。
 上記沸点は、150℃以上が好ましく、180℃以上がより好ましく、200℃以上であることがさらに好ましい。沸点の上限は、250℃以下であることが好ましく、240℃以下であることがより好ましく、230℃以下であることが更に好ましい。
 また、本発明の樹脂組成物は、沸点が100~260℃である溶剤を2種以上含むことが好ましく、沸点が150~250℃である溶剤を2種以上含むことがより好ましく、沸点が180~230℃である溶剤を2種以上含むことが更に好ましい。
 また、沸点が100~260℃である溶剤の含有量は、組成物の全質量に対して40質量%以上であることが好ましく、45質量%以上であることがより好ましく、50質量%以上であることが更に好ましい。沸点が100~260℃である溶剤を2種以上含む場合、それらの合計量が上記範囲内であることが好ましい。
Furthermore, the resin composition of the present invention preferably contains a solvent having a boiling point at 1 atmosphere of 50° C. to 300° C., and more preferably contains a solvent having a boiling point at 100° C. to 260° C. In the present invention, the boiling point of the solvent is the boiling point at 1 atmosphere.
According to such an embodiment, it is believed that a cured product having excellent solvent removability and resolution can be obtained.
The boiling point is preferably 150° C. or higher, more preferably 180° C. or higher, and even more preferably 200° C. or higher. The upper limit of the boiling point is preferably 250° C. or lower, more preferably 240° C. or lower, and even more preferably 230° C. or lower.
Furthermore, the resin composition of the present invention preferably contains two or more solvents having a boiling point of 100 to 260°C, more preferably two or more solvents having a boiling point of 150 to 250°C, and even more preferably two or more solvents having a boiling point of 180 to 230°C.
The content of the solvent having a boiling point of 100 to 260°C is preferably 40% by mass or more, more preferably 45% by mass or more, and even more preferably 50% by mass or more, based on the total mass of the composition. When two or more solvents having a boiling point of 100 to 260°C are contained, the total amount thereof is preferably within the above range.

 溶剤の含有量は、塗布性の観点から、本発明の樹脂組成物の全固形分濃度が5~80質量%になる量とすることが好ましく、5~75質量%となる量にすることがより好ましく、10~70質量%となる量にすることが更に好ましく、20~70質量%となるようにすることが一層好ましい。溶剤含有量は、塗膜の所望の厚さと塗布方法に応じて調節すればよい。溶剤を2種以上含有する場合は、その合計が上記範囲であることが好ましい。 From the standpoint of coatability, the solvent content is preferably an amount that results in a total solids concentration of the resin composition of the present invention of 5 to 80 mass%, more preferably an amount that results in a total solids concentration of 5 to 75 mass%, even more preferably an amount that results in a total solids concentration of 10 to 70 mass%, and even more preferably an amount that results in a total solids concentration of 20 to 70 mass%. The solvent content may be adjusted depending on the desired thickness of the coating film and the application method. When two or more solvents are used, the total amount is preferably within the above range.

<金属接着性改良剤>
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、電極や配線などに用いられる金属材料との接着性を向上させる観点から、金属接着性改良剤を含むことが好ましい。金属接着性改良剤としては、アルコキシシリル基を有するシランカップリング剤、アルミニウム系接着助剤、チタン系接着助剤、スルホンアミド構造を有する化合物及びチオウレア構造を有する化合物、リン酸誘導体化合物、β-ケトエステル化合物、アミノ化合物等が挙げられる。
<Metal adhesion improver>
The resin composition of the present invention preferably contains a metal adhesion improver from the viewpoint of improving adhesion to metal materials used in electrodes, wiring, etc. Examples of metal adhesion improvers include silane coupling agents having an alkoxysilyl group, aluminum-based adhesion aids, titanium-based adhesion aids, compounds having a sulfonamide structure, compounds having a thiourea structure, phosphoric acid derivative compounds, β-ketoester compounds, and amino compounds.

〔シランカップリング剤〕
 シランカップリング剤としては、例えば、国際公開第2021/112189号の段落0316に記載の化合物、特開2018-173573号公報の段落0067~0078に記載の化合物が挙げられ、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。また、特開2011-128358号公報の段落0050~0058に記載のように異なる2種以上のシランカップリング剤を用いることも好ましい。シランカップリング剤は、下記化合物を用いることも好ましい。以下の式中、Meはメチル基を、Etはエチル基を表す。また、下記Rはブロックイソシアネート基におけるブロック化剤由来の構造が挙げられる。ブロック化剤としては、脱離温度に応じて選択すればよいが、アルコール化合物、フェノール化合物、ピラゾール化合物、トリアゾール化合物、ラクタム化合物、活性メチレン化合物等が挙げられる。例えば、脱離温度を160~180℃としたい観点からは、カプロラクタムなどが好ましい。このような化合物の市販品としては、X-12-1293(信越化学工業(株)製)などが挙げられる。
[Silane coupling agent]
Examples of silane coupling agents include the compounds described in paragraph 0316 of WO 2021/112189 and the compounds described in paragraphs 0067 to 0078 of JP 2018-173573 A, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference. It is also preferable to use two or more different silane coupling agents, as described in paragraphs 0050 to 0058 of JP 2011-128358 A. It is also preferable to use the following compounds as the silane coupling agent. In the following formula, Me represents a methyl group, and Et represents an ethyl group. Furthermore, the following R represents a structure derived from a blocking agent in a blocked isocyanate group. The blocking agent may be selected depending on the desorption temperature, and examples include alcohol compounds, phenol compounds, pyrazole compounds, triazole compounds, lactam compounds, and active methylene compounds. For example, caprolactam is preferred from the viewpoint of achieving a desorption temperature of 160 to 180°C. Commercially available products of such compounds include X-12-1293 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.).

 他のシランカップリング剤としては、例えば、ビニルトリメトキシシラン、ビニルトリエトキシシラン、2-(3,4-エポキシシクロヘキシル)エチルトリメトキシシラン、3-グリシドキシプロピルメチルジメトキシシラン、3-グリシドキシプロピルトリメトキシシラン、3-グリシドキシプロピルメチルジエトキシシラン、3-グリシドキシプロピルトリエトキシシラン、p-スチリルトリメトキシシラン、3-メタクリロキシプロピルメチルジメトキシシラン、3-メタクリロキシプロピルトリメトキシシラン、3-メタクリロキシプロピルメチルジエトキシシラン、3-メタクリロキシプロピルトリエトキシシラン、3-アクリロキシプロピルトリメトキシシラン、N-2-(アミノエチル)-3-アミノプロピルメチルジメトキシシラン、N-2-(アミノエチル)-3-アミノプロピルトリメトキシシラン、3-アミノプロピルトリメトキシシラン、3-アミノプロピルトリエトキシシラン、3-トリエトキシシリル-N-(1,3-ジメチル-ブチリデン)プロピルアミン、N-フェニル-3-アミノプロピルトリメトキシシラン、トリス-(トリメトキシシリルプロピル)イソシアヌレート、3-ウレイドプロピルトリアルコキシシラン、3-メルカプトプロピルメチルジメトキシシラン、3-メルカプトプロピルトリメトキシシラン、3-イソシアネートプロピルトリエトキシシラン、3-トリメトキシシリルプロピルコハク酸無水物が挙げられる。これらは1種単独または2種以上を組み合わせて使用することができる。
 また、シランカップリング剤として、アルコキシシリル基を複数個有するオリゴマータイプの化合物を用いることもできる。
 このようなオリゴマータイプの化合物としては、下記式(S-1)で表される繰返し単位を含む化合物などが挙げられる。
 式(S-1)中、RS1は1価の有機基を表し、RS2は水素原子、ヒドロキシ基又はアルコキシ基を表し、nは0~2の整数を表す。
 RS1は重合性基を含む構造であることが好ましい。重合性基としては、エチレン性不飽和結合を有する基、エポキシ基、オキセタニル基、ベンゾオキサゾリル基、ブロックイソシアネート基、アミノ基等が挙げられる。エチレン性不飽和結合を有する基としては、ビニル基、アリル基、イソアリル基、2-メチルアリル基、ビニル基と直接結合した芳香環を有する基(例えば、ビニルフェニル基など)、(メタ)アクリルアミド基、(メタ)アクリロイルオキシ基などが挙げられ、ビニルフェニル基、(メタ)アクリルアミド基又は(メタ)アクリロイルオキシ基が好ましく、ビニルフェニル基又は(メタ)アクリロイルオキシ基がより好ましく、(メタ)アクリロイルオキシ基が更に好ましい。
 RS2はアルコキシ基であることが好ましく、メトキシ基又はエトキシ基であることがより好ましい。
 nは0~2の整数を表し、1であることが好ましい。
 ここで、オリゴマータイプの化合物に含まれる複数の式(S-1)で表される繰返し単位の構造は、それぞれ同一であってもよい。
 ここで、オリゴマータイプの化合物に含まれる複数の式(S-1)で表される繰返し単位のうち、少なくとも1つにおいてnが1又は2であることが好ましく、少なくとも2つにおいてnが1又は2であることがより好ましく、少なくとも2つにおいてnが1であることが更に好ましい。
 このようなオリゴマータイプの化合物としては市販品を用いることができ、市販品としては例えば、KR-513(信越化学工業(株)製)が挙げられる。
Other silane coupling agents include, for example, vinyltrimethoxysilane, vinyltriethoxysilane, 2-(3,4-epoxycyclohexyl)ethyltrimethoxysilane, 3-glycidoxypropylmethyldimethoxysilane, 3-glycidoxypropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-glycidoxypropylmethyldiethoxysilane, 3-glycidoxypropyltriethoxysilane, p-styryltrimethoxysilane, 3-methacryloxypropylmethyldimethoxysilane, 3-methacryloxypropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-methacryloxypropylmethyldiethoxysilane, 3-methacryloxypropyltriethoxysilane, 3-acryloxypropyltrimethoxysilane, N-2- (aminoethyl)-3-aminopropylmethyldimethoxysilane, N-2-(aminoethyl)-3-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-aminopropyltriethoxysilane, 3-triethoxysilyl-N-(1,3-dimethylbutylidene)propylamine, N-phenyl-3-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, tris-(trimethoxysilylpropyl)isocyanurate, 3-ureidopropyltrialkoxysilane, 3-mercaptopropylmethyldimethoxysilane, 3-mercaptopropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-isocyanatopropyltriethoxysilane, and 3-trimethoxysilylpropylsuccinic anhydride. These can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
Furthermore, an oligomer type compound having a plurality of alkoxysilyl groups can also be used as the silane coupling agent.
Such oligomer-type compounds include compounds containing a repeating unit represented by the following formula (S-1).
In formula (S-1), R 1 S1 represents a monovalent organic group, R 1 S2 represents a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy group or an alkoxy group, and n represents an integer of 0 to 2.
R S1 preferably has a structure containing a polymerizable group. Examples of the polymerizable group include a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond, an epoxy group, an oxetanyl group, a benzoxazolyl group, a blocked isocyanate group, and an amino group. Examples of the group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond include a vinyl group, an allyl group, an isoallyl group, a 2-methylallyl group, a group having an aromatic ring directly bonded to a vinyl group (for example, a vinylphenyl group), a (meth)acrylamide group, and a (meth)acryloyloxy group. A vinylphenyl group, a (meth)acrylamide group, or a (meth)acryloyloxy group is preferred, a vinylphenyl group or a (meth)acryloyloxy group is more preferred, and a (meth)acryloyloxy group is even more preferred.
R S2 is preferably an alkoxy group, more preferably a methoxy group or an ethoxy group.
n represents an integer of 0 to 2, and is preferably 1.
Here, the structures of the repeating units represented by formula (S-1) contained in the oligomer-type compound may be the same.
Here, among the multiple repeating units represented by formula (S-1) contained in the oligomer-type compound, it is preferable that n is 1 or 2 in at least one, more preferably that n is 1 or 2 in at least two, and even more preferably that n is 1 in at least two.
As such oligomer type compounds, commercially available products can be used, and examples of commercially available products include KR-513 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.).

〔アルミニウム系接着助剤〕
 アルミニウム系接着助剤としては、例えば、アルミニウムトリス(エチルアセトアセテート)、アルミニウムトリス(アセチルアセトネート)、エチルアセトアセテートアルミニウムジイソプロピレート等を挙げることができる。
[Aluminum-based adhesion promoter]
Examples of aluminum-based adhesion promoters include aluminum tris(ethylacetoacetate), aluminum tris(acetylacetonate), and ethylacetoacetate aluminum diisopropylate.

 その他の金属接着性改良剤としては、特開2014-186186号公報の段落0046~0049に記載の化合物、特開2013-072935号公報の段落0032~0043に記載のスルフィド系化合物を用いることもでき、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Other metal adhesion improvers that can be used include the compounds described in paragraphs 0046 to 0049 of JP 2014-186186 A and the sulfide-based compounds described in paragraphs 0032 to 0043 of JP 2013-072935 A, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.

 金属接着性改良剤の含有量は特定樹脂100質量部に対して、0.01~30質量部が好ましく、0.1~10質量部がより好ましく、0.5~5質量部が更に好ましい。上記下限値以上とすることでパターンと金属層との接着性が良好となり、上記上限値以下とすることでパターンの耐熱性、機械特性が良好となる。金属接着性改良剤は1種のみでもよいし、2種以上であってもよい。2種以上用いる場合は、その合計が上記範囲であることが好ましい。 The content of the metal adhesion improver is preferably 0.01 to 30 parts by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 10 parts by mass, and even more preferably 0.5 to 5 parts by mass, per 100 parts by mass of the specific resin. By ensuring that the content is above the above lower limit, the adhesion between the pattern and the metal layer will be good, and by ensuring that the content is below the above upper limit, the heat resistance and mechanical properties of the pattern will be good. Only one type of metal adhesion improver may be used, or two or more types may be used. When two or more types are used, it is preferable that the total amount is within the above range.

<マイグレーション抑制剤>
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、マイグレーション抑制剤を更に含むことが好ましい。マイグレーション抑制剤を含むことにより、例えば、樹脂組成物を金属層(又は金属配線)に適用して膜を形成した際に、金属層(又は金属配線)由来の金属イオンが膜内へ移動することを効果的に抑制することができる。
<Migration inhibitor>
The resin composition of the present invention preferably further contains a migration inhibitor. By including the migration inhibitor, for example, when the resin composition is applied to a metal layer (or metal wiring) to form a film, migration of metal ions derived from the metal layer (or metal wiring) into the film can be effectively suppressed.

 マイグレーション抑制剤としては、特に制限はないが、複素環(ピロール環、フラン環、チオフェン環、イミダゾール環、オキサゾール環、チアゾール環、ピラゾール環、イソオキサゾール環、イソチアゾール環、テトラゾール環、ピリジン環、ピリダジン環、ピリミジン環、ピラジン環、ピペリジン環、ピペラジン環、モルホリン環、2H-ピラン環及び6H-ピラン環、トリアジン環)を有する化合物、チオ尿素類及びスルファニル基を有する化合物、ヒンダードフェノール系化合物、サリチル酸誘導体系化合物、ヒドラジド誘導体系化合物が挙げられる。特に、1,2,4-トリアゾール、ベンゾトリアゾール、3-アミノ-1,2,4-トリアゾール、3,5-ジアミノ-1,2,4-トリアゾール等のトリアゾール系化合物、1H-テトラゾール、5-フェニルテトラゾール、5-アミノ―1H-テトラゾール等のテトラゾール系化合物が好ましく使用できる。 Migration inhibitors are not particularly limited, but include compounds having a heterocycle (pyrrole ring, furan ring, thiophene ring, imidazole ring, oxazole ring, thiazole ring, pyrazole ring, isoxazole ring, isothiazole ring, tetrazole ring, pyridine ring, pyridazine ring, pyrimidine ring, pyrazine ring, piperidine ring, piperazine ring, morpholine ring, 2H-pyran ring, 6H-pyran ring, triazine ring), thioureas and compounds having a sulfanyl group, hindered phenol compounds, salicylic acid derivative compounds, and hydrazide derivative compounds. In particular, triazole compounds such as 1,2,4-triazole, benzotriazole, 3-amino-1,2,4-triazole, and 3,5-diamino-1,2,4-triazole, and tetrazole compounds such as 1H-tetrazole, 5-phenyltetrazole, and 5-amino-1H-tetrazole are preferred.

 マイグレーション抑制剤としては、ハロゲンイオンなどの陰イオンを捕捉するイオントラップ剤を使用することもできる。 Ion trapping agents that capture anions such as halogen ions can also be used as migration inhibitors.

 その他のマイグレーション抑制剤としては、特開2013-015701号公報の段落0094に記載の防錆剤、特開2009-283711号公報の段落0073~0076に記載の化合物、特開2011-059656号公報の段落0052に記載の化合物、特開2012-194520号公報の段落0114、0116及び0118に記載の化合物、国際公開第2015/199219号の段落0166に記載の化合物などを使用することができ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Other migration inhibitors that can be used include the rust inhibitors described in paragraph 0094 of JP 2013-015701 A, the compounds described in paragraphs 0073 to 0076 of JP 2009-283711 A, the compounds described in paragraph 0052 of JP 2011-059656 A, the compounds described in paragraphs 0114, 0116, and 0118 of JP 2012-194520 A, and the compounds described in paragraph 0166 of WO 2015/199219, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.

 マイグレーション抑制剤の具体例としては、下記化合物を挙げることができる。 Specific examples of migration inhibitors include the following compounds:

 これらの中でも、本発明の樹脂組成物は、アゾール構造を有する化合物(アゾール化合物)を含むことが好ましく、アゾール化合物及び上述のシランカップリング剤を含むことがより好ましい。 Among these, the resin composition of the present invention preferably contains a compound having an azole structure (azole compound), and more preferably contains an azole compound and the above-mentioned silane coupling agent.

 本発明の樹脂組成物がマイグレーション抑制剤を有する場合、マイグレーション抑制剤の含有量は、樹脂組成物の全固形分に対して、0.01~5.0質量%であることが好ましく、0.05~2.0質量%であることがより好ましく、0.1~1.0質量%であることが更に好ましい。 When the resin composition of the present invention contains a migration inhibitor, the content of the migration inhibitor is preferably 0.01 to 5.0 mass%, more preferably 0.05 to 2.0 mass%, and even more preferably 0.1 to 1.0 mass%, relative to the total solids content of the resin composition.

 マイグレーション抑制剤は1種のみでもよいし、2種以上であってもよい。マイグレーション抑制剤が2種以上の場合は、その合計が上記範囲であることが好ましい。 The migration inhibitor may be one type or two or more types. If two or more types of migration inhibitors are used, it is preferable that the total amount is within the above range.

<光吸収剤>
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、露光によりその露光波長の吸光度が小さくなる化合物(光吸収剤)を含むことも好ましい。
 光吸収剤としては、国際公開第2022/202647号の段落0159~0183に記載の化合物、特開2019-206689号公報の段落0088~0108に記載の化合物等が挙げられる。これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
<Light absorber>
The resin composition of the present invention also preferably contains a compound (light absorber) that reduces the absorbance of light at the exposure wavelength upon exposure.
Examples of the light absorber include the compounds described in paragraphs 0159 to 0183 of WO 2022/202647 and the compounds described in paragraphs 0088 to 0108 of JP 2019-206689 A. The contents of these compounds are incorporated herein by reference.

<重合禁止剤>
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、重合禁止剤を含むことが好ましい。重合禁止剤としてはフェノール系化合物、キノン系化合物、アミノ系化合物、N-オキシルフリーラジカル化合物系化合物、ニトロ系化合物、ニトロソ系化合物、ヘテロ芳香環系化合物、金属化合物などが挙げられる。
<Polymerization inhibitor>
The resin composition of the present invention preferably contains a polymerization inhibitor, such as a phenolic compound, a quinone compound, an amino compound, an N-oxyl free radical compound, a nitro compound, a nitroso compound, a heteroaromatic ring compound, or a metal compound.

 重合禁止剤の具体的な化合物としては、国際公開第2021/112189号の段落0310に記載の化合物、p-ヒドロキノン、o-ヒドロキノン、4-ヒドロキシ-2,2,6,6-テトラメチルピペリジン1-オキシルフリーラジカル、フェノキサジン、1,4,4-トリメチル-2,3-ジアザビシクロ[3.2.2]ノナ-2-エン-N,N-ジオキシド等が挙げられる。この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Specific examples of polymerization inhibitor compounds include the compounds described in paragraph 0310 of WO 2021/112189, p-hydroquinone, o-hydroquinone, 4-hydroxy-2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine 1-oxyl free radical, phenoxazine, and 1,4,4-trimethyl-2,3-diazabicyclo[3.2.2]non-2-ene-N,N-dioxide. The contents of this document are incorporated herein by reference.

 本発明の樹脂組成物が重合禁止剤を有する場合、重合禁止剤の含有量は、樹脂組成物の全固形分に対して、0.01~20質量%であることが好ましく、0.02~15質量%であることがより好ましく、0.05~10質量%であることが更に好ましい。 When the resin composition of the present invention contains a polymerization inhibitor, the content of the polymerization inhibitor is preferably 0.01 to 20 mass%, more preferably 0.02 to 15 mass%, and even more preferably 0.05 to 10 mass%, based on the total solids content of the resin composition.

 重合禁止剤は1種のみでもよいし、2種以上であってもよい。重合禁止剤が2種以上の場合は、その合計が上記範囲であることが好ましい。 The polymerization inhibitor may be one type only, or two or more types. If two or more types of polymerization inhibitors are used, it is preferable that the total amount is within the above range.

<その他の添加剤>
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、本発明の効果が得られる範囲で、必要に応じて、各種の添加物、例えば、界面活性剤、高級脂肪酸誘導体、熱重合開始剤、無機粒子、紫外線吸収剤、有機チタン化合物、酸化防止剤、光酸発生剤、凝集防止剤、フェノール系化合物、他の高分子化合物、可塑剤及びその他の助剤類(例えば、消泡剤、難燃剤など)等を含んでいてもよい。これらの成分を適宜含有させることにより、膜物性などの性質を調整することができる。これらの成分は、例えば、特開2012-003225号公報の段落0183以降(対応する米国特許出願公開第2013/0034812号明細書の段落0237)の記載、特開2008-250074号公報の段落0101~0104、0107~0109等の記載を参酌でき、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。これらの添加剤を配合する場合、その合計含有量は本発明の樹脂組成物の固形分の3質量%以下とすることが好ましい。
<Other additives>
The resin composition of the present invention may contain various additives, such as surfactants, higher fatty acid derivatives, thermal polymerization initiators, inorganic particles, UV absorbers, organic titanium compounds, antioxidants, photoacid generators, anti-aggregation agents, phenolic compounds, other polymer compounds, plasticizers, and other auxiliary agents (e.g., antifoaming agents, flame retardants, etc.), as needed, as long as the effects of the present invention are obtained. By appropriately incorporating these components, film properties and other properties can be adjusted. For details of these components, please refer to, for example, paragraphs 0183 and after of JP 2012-003225 A (corresponding to paragraph 0237 of U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2013/0034812), and paragraphs 0101-0104, 0107-0109 of JP 2008-250074 A, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference. When these additives are incorporated, the total content is preferably 3% by mass or less of the solid content of the resin composition of the present invention.

〔界面活性剤〕
 界面活性剤としては、フッ素系界面活性剤、シリコーン系界面活性剤、炭化水素系界面活性剤などの各種界面活性剤を使用できる。界面活性剤はノニオン型界面活性剤であってもよく、カチオン型界面活性剤であってもよく、アニオン型界面活性剤であってもよい。
[Surfactant]
As the surfactant, various surfactants can be used, such as a fluorine-based surfactant, a silicone-based surfactant, a hydrocarbon-based surfactant, etc. The surfactant may be a nonionic surfactant, a cationic surfactant, or an anionic surfactant.

 本発明の樹脂組成物に界面活性剤を含有させることで、塗布液組成物を調製したときの液特性(特に、流動性)がより向上し、塗布厚の均一性や省液性をより改善することができる。即ち、界面活性剤を含有する塗布液を用いて膜形成する場合、被塗布面と塗布液との界面張力が低下して、被塗布面への濡れ性が改善され、被塗布面への塗布性が向上する。このため、厚みムラが小さい均一な膜の形成をより好適に行うことができる。 By including a surfactant in the resin composition of the present invention, the liquid properties (particularly fluidity) when the coating liquid composition is prepared are further improved, and the uniformity of the coating thickness and liquid saving can be further improved. In other words, when a film is formed using a coating liquid containing a surfactant, the interfacial tension between the surface to be coated and the coating liquid is reduced, improving the wettability of the surface to be coated and the coatability of the surface to be coated. This makes it possible to more effectively form a uniform film with minimal thickness unevenness.

 フッ素系界面活性剤としては、国際公開第2021/112189号の段落0328に記載の化合物が挙げられ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
 フッ素系界面活性剤としては、フッ素原子を有する(メタ)アクリレート化合物に由来する繰り返し単位と、アルキレンオキシ基(好ましくはエチレンオキシ基、プロピレンオキシ基)を2以上(好ましくは5以上)有する(メタ)アクリレート化合物に由来する繰り返し単位と、を含む含フッ素高分子化合物も好ましく用いることができ、例えば、下記化合物が挙げられる。
Examples of fluorosurfactants include compounds described in paragraph 0328 of WO 2021/112189, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
As the fluorine-based surfactant, a fluorine-containing polymer compound containing a repeating unit derived from a (meth)acrylate compound having a fluorine atom and a repeating unit derived from a (meth)acrylate compound having two or more (preferably five or more) alkyleneoxy groups (preferably ethyleneoxy groups or propyleneoxy groups) can also be preferably used, and examples thereof include the following compounds.

 上記化合物の重量平均分子量は、3,000~50,000であることが好ましく、5,000~30,000であることがより好ましい。
 フッ素系界面活性剤は、エチレン性不飽和基を側鎖に有する含フッ素重合体をフッ素系界面活性剤として用いることもできる。具体例としては、特開2010-164965号公報の段落0050~0090および段落0289~0295に記載された化合物が挙げられ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。また、市販品としては、例えばDIC(株)製のメガファックRS-101、RS-102、RS-718K等が挙げられる。
The weight average molecular weight of the compound is preferably 3,000 to 50,000, and more preferably 5,000 to 30,000.
The fluorosurfactant may also be a fluorine-containing polymer having an ethylenically unsaturated group in the side chain. Specific examples include the compounds described in paragraphs 0050 to 0090 and 0289 to 0295 of JP 2010-164965 A, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference. Commercially available products include Megafac RS-101, RS-102, and RS-718K manufactured by DIC Corporation.

 フッ素系界面活性剤中のフッ素含有率は、3~40質量%が好ましく、5~30質量%がより好ましく、7~25質量%が特に好ましい。フッ素含有率がこの範囲内であるフッ素系界面活性剤は、塗布膜の厚さの均一性や省液性の点で効果的であり、組成物中における溶解性も良好である。 The fluorine content in the fluorosurfactant is preferably 3 to 40% by mass, more preferably 5 to 30% by mass, and particularly preferably 7 to 25% by mass. Fluorosurfactants with a fluorine content within this range are effective in terms of uniformity of the coating film thickness and liquid saving, and also have good solubility in the composition.

 シリコーン系界面活性剤、炭化水素系界面活性剤、ノニオン型界面活性剤、カチオン型界面活性剤、アニオン型界面活性剤としては、それぞれ、国際公開第2021/112189号の段落0329~0334に記載の化合物が挙げられ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Examples of silicone surfactants, hydrocarbon surfactants, nonionic surfactants, cationic surfactants, and anionic surfactants include the compounds described in paragraphs 0329 to 0334 of WO 2021/112189, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.

 界面活性剤は、1種のみを用いてもよいし、2種類以上を組み合わせてもよい。
界面活性剤の含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対して、0.001~2.0質量%が好ましく、0.005~1.0質量%がより好ましい。
The surfactant may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The content of the surfactant is preferably from 0.001 to 2.0% by mass, more preferably from 0.005 to 1.0% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition.

〔無機粒子〕
 無機粒子として、具体的には、炭酸カルシウム、リン酸カルシウム、シリカ、カオリン、タルク、二酸化チタン、アルミナ、硫酸バリウム、フッ化カルシウム、フッ化リチウム、ゼオライト、硫化モリブデン、ガラス等が挙げられる。
[Inorganic particles]
Specific examples of inorganic particles include calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate, silica, kaolin, talc, titanium dioxide, alumina, barium sulfate, calcium fluoride, lithium fluoride, zeolite, molybdenum sulfide, and glass.

 無機粒子の平均粒子径は、0.01~2.0μmが好ましく、0.02~1.5μmがより好ましく、0.03~1.0μmがさらに好ましく、0.04~0.5μmが特に好ましい。
 無機粒子の上記平均粒子径は、一次粒子径であり、また体積平均粒子径である。体積平均粒子径は、例えば、Nanotrac WAVE II EX-150(日機装社製)による動的光散乱法で測定できる。
 上記測定が困難である場合は、遠心沈降光透過法、X線透過法、レーザー回折・散乱法で測定することもできる。
The average particle size of the inorganic particles is preferably from 0.01 to 2.0 μm, more preferably from 0.02 to 1.5 μm, even more preferably from 0.03 to 1.0 μm, and particularly preferably from 0.04 to 0.5 μm.
The above-mentioned average particle size of the inorganic particles is the primary particle size and also the volume average particle size, which can be measured by a dynamic light scattering method using, for example, a Nanotrac WAVE II EX-150 (manufactured by Nikkiso Co., Ltd.).
When the above measurement is difficult, the measurement can also be performed by a centrifugal sedimentation light transmission method, an X-ray transmission method, or a laser diffraction/scattering method.

 他の添加剤としては、国際公開第2022/145355号の段落0249~0282、0316~0358に記載の化合物が挙げられる。上記記載は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Other additives include the compounds described in paragraphs 0249-0282 and 0316-0358 of WO 2022/145355. The above descriptions are incorporated herein by reference.

<樹脂組成物の特性>
 本発明の樹脂組成物の粘度は、樹脂組成物の固形分濃度により調整できる。塗布膜厚の観点から、1,000mm/s~12,000mm/sが好ましく、2,000mm/s~10,000mm/sがより好ましく、2,500mm/s~8,000mm/sが更に好ましい。上記範囲であれば、均一性の高い塗布膜を得ることが容易になる。1,000mm/s以上であれば、例えば再配線用絶縁膜として必要とされる膜厚で塗布することが容易であり、12,000mm/s以下であれば、塗布面状に優れた塗膜が得られる。
<Characteristics of Resin Composition>
The viscosity of the resin composition of the present invention can be adjusted by the solids concentration of the resin composition. From the viewpoint of coating film thickness, it is preferably 1,000 mm 2 /s to 12,000 mm 2 /s, more preferably 2,000 mm 2 /s to 10,000 mm 2 /s, and even more preferably 2,500 mm 2 /s to 8,000 mm 2 /s. Within the above range, it is easy to obtain a highly uniform coating film. If it is 1,000 mm 2 /s or more, it is easy to apply the film to a thickness required for, for example, an insulating film for rewiring, and if it is 12,000 mm 2 /s or less, a coating film with excellent coating surface condition can be obtained.

 本発明の樹脂組成物を用いて、膜厚10μmの硬化物を形成した場合の、上記硬化物の波長365nmの光の透過率は、15%以上であることが好ましく、20%以上であることがより好ましく、25%以上であることが更に好ましい。
 上記透過率の上限は、特に限定されず、100%であってもよい。
 上記硬化物は、例えば、本発明の樹脂組成物をシリコンウエハに塗布した後、100℃で5分間乾燥して、500mJ/cmの露光エネルギーでi線により全面露光した後に、窒素雰囲気下で、10℃/分の昇温速度で昇温し、230℃で180分間加熱することにより得ることができる。
When a cured product having a film thickness of 10 μm is formed using the resin composition of the present invention, the transmittance of the cured product at a wavelength of 365 nm is preferably 15% or more, more preferably 20% or more, and even more preferably 25% or more.
The upper limit of the transmittance is not particularly limited and may be 100%.
The cured product can be obtained, for example, by applying the resin composition of the present invention to a silicon wafer, drying it at 100°C for 5 minutes, exposing the entire surface to i-rays at an exposure energy of 500 mJ/ cm2 , and then heating it at a temperature increase rate of 10°C/min in a nitrogen atmosphere and at 230°C for 180 minutes.

<樹脂組成物の含有物質についての制限>
 本発明の樹脂組成物の含水率は、2.0質量%未満であることが好ましく、1.5質量%未満であることがより好ましく、1.0質量%未満であることが更に好ましい。2.0%未満であれば、樹脂組成物の保存安定性が向上する。
 水分の含有量を維持する方法としては、保管条件における湿度の調整、保管時の収容容器の空隙率低減などが挙げられる。
<Restrictions on substances contained in resin composition>
The water content of the resin composition of the present invention is preferably less than 2.0% by mass, more preferably less than 1.5% by mass, and even more preferably less than 1.0% by mass. If the water content is less than 2.0%, the storage stability of the resin composition is improved.
Methods for maintaining the moisture content include adjusting the humidity during storage and reducing the porosity of the container during storage.

 本発明の樹脂組成物の金属含有量は、絶縁性の観点から、5質量ppm(parts per million)未満が好ましく、1質量ppm未満がより好ましく、0.5質量ppm未満が更に好ましい。金属としては、ナトリウム、カリウム、マグネシウム、カルシウム、鉄、銅、クロム、ニッケルなどが挙げられるが、有機化合物と金属との錯体として含まれる金属は除く。金属を複数含む場合は、これらの金属の合計が上記範囲であることが好ましい。 From the viewpoint of insulating properties, the metal content of the resin composition of the present invention is preferably less than 5 ppm by mass (parts per million), more preferably less than 1 ppm by mass, and even more preferably less than 0.5 ppm by mass. Examples of metals include sodium, potassium, magnesium, calcium, iron, copper, chromium, and nickel, but this does not include metals contained as complexes of organic compounds with metals. When multiple metals are contained, it is preferable that the total amount of these metals is within the above range.

 また、本発明の樹脂組成物に意図せずに含まれる金属不純物を低減する方法としては、本発明の樹脂組成物を構成する原料として金属含有量が少ない原料を選択する、本発明の樹脂組成物を構成する原料に対してフィルターろ過を行う、装置内をポリテトラフルオロエチレン等でライニングしてコンタミネーションを可能な限り抑制した条件下で蒸留を行う等の方法を挙げることができる。 Furthermore, methods for reducing metal impurities unintentionally contained in the resin composition of the present invention include selecting raw materials with low metal content as the raw materials for constituting the resin composition of the present invention, filtering the raw materials for constituting the resin composition of the present invention, and lining the inside of the apparatus with polytetrafluoroethylene or the like to perform distillation under conditions that minimize contamination as much as possible.

 本発明の樹脂組成物は、半導体材料としての用途を考慮すると、ハロゲン原子の含有量が、配線腐食性の観点から、500質量ppm未満が好ましく、300質量ppm未満がより好ましく、200質量ppm未満が更に好ましい。中でも、ハロゲンイオンの状態で存在するものは、5質量ppm未満が好ましく、1質量ppm未満がより好ましく、0.5質量ppm未満が更に好ましい。ハロゲン原子としては、塩素原子及び臭素原子が挙げられる。塩素原子及び臭素原子、又は塩素イオン及び臭素イオンの合計がそれぞれ上記範囲であることが好ましい。
 ハロゲン原子の含有量を調節する方法としては、イオン交換処理などが好ましく挙げられる。
Considering the use of the resin composition of the present invention as a semiconductor material, the content of halogen atoms is preferably less than 500 ppm by mass, more preferably less than 300 ppm by mass, and even more preferably less than 200 ppm by mass from the viewpoint of wiring corrosion. Among them, those present in the form of halogen ions are preferably less than 5 ppm by mass, more preferably less than 1 ppm by mass, and even more preferably less than 0.5 ppm by mass. Examples of halogen atoms include chlorine atoms and bromine atoms. It is preferable that the total of chlorine atoms and bromine atoms, or chlorine ions and bromine ions, is within the above range.
A preferred method for adjusting the content of halogen atoms is ion exchange treatment.

 本発明の樹脂組成物の収容容器としては従来公知の収容容器を用いることができる。収容容器としては、原材料や本発明の樹脂組成物中への不純物混入を抑制することを目的に、容器内壁を6種6層の樹脂で構成された多層ボトルや、6種の樹脂を7層構造にしたボトルを使用することも好ましい。このような容器としては例えば特開2015-123351号公報に記載の容器が挙げられる。 Any conventional container known in the art can be used as a container for storing the resin composition of the present invention. For the purpose of preventing impurities from being mixed into the raw materials or the resin composition of the present invention, it is also preferable to use a multi-layer bottle whose inner wall is made up of six layers of six types of resin, or a bottle with a seven-layer structure made up of six types of resin. Examples of such containers include the container described in JP 2015-123351 A.

<樹脂組成物の硬化物>
 本発明の樹脂組成物を硬化することにより、樹脂組成物の硬化物を得ることができる。
 本発明の硬化物は、樹脂組成物を硬化してなる硬化物である。
 樹脂組成物の硬化は加熱によるものであることが好ましく、加熱温度が120℃~400℃がより好ましく、140℃~380℃が更に好ましく、170℃~350℃が特に好ましい。樹脂組成物の硬化物の形態は、特に限定されず、フィルム状、棒状、球状、ペレット状など、用途に合わせて選択することができる。本発明において、硬化物は、フィルム状であることが好ましい。樹脂組成物のパターン加工によって、壁面への保護膜の形成、導通のためのビアホール形成、インピーダンスや静電容量あるいは内部応力の調整、放熱機能付与など、用途にあわせて、硬化物の形状を選択することもできる。硬化物(硬化物からなる膜)の膜厚は、0.5μm以上150μm以下であることが好ましい。
 本発明の樹脂組成物を硬化した際の収縮率は、50%以下が好ましく、45%以下がより好ましく、40%以下が更に好ましい。ここで、収縮率は、樹脂組成物の硬化前後の体積変化の百分率を指し、下記の式より算出することができる。
 収縮率[%]=100-(硬化後の体積÷硬化前の体積)×100
<Cured product of resin composition>
By curing the resin composition of the present invention, a cured product of the resin composition can be obtained.
The cured product of the present invention is a cured product obtained by curing a resin composition.
The resin composition is preferably cured by heating, with the heating temperature being more preferably 120°C to 400°C, even more preferably 140°C to 380°C, and particularly preferably 170°C to 350°C. The form of the cured product of the resin composition is not particularly limited, and can be selected according to the application, such as film, rod, sphere, or pellet. In the present invention, the cured product is preferably in the form of a film. By patterning the resin composition, the shape of the cured product can be selected according to the application, such as forming a protective film on the wall surface, forming via holes for electrical conduction, adjusting impedance, capacitance, or internal stress, or imparting heat dissipation functionality. The film thickness of the cured product (film made of the cured product) is preferably 0.5 μm or more and 150 μm or less.
The shrinkage percentage of the resin composition of the present invention when cured is preferably 50% or less, more preferably 45% or less, and even more preferably 40% or less. Here, the shrinkage percentage refers to the percentage of volume change before and after curing of the resin composition, and can be calculated using the following formula.
Shrinkage rate [%] = 100 - (volume after curing / volume before curing) x 100

<樹脂組成物の硬化物の特性>
 本発明の樹脂組成物の硬化物のイミド化反応率は、70%以上が好ましく、80%以上がより好ましく、90%以上が更に好ましい。70%以上であれば、機械特性に優れた硬化物となる場合がある。
 本発明の樹脂組成物の硬化物の破断伸びは、30%以上が好ましく、40%以上がより好ましく、50%以上が更に好ましい。
 本発明の樹脂組成物の硬化物のガラス転移温度(Tg)は、180℃以上であることが好ましく、210℃以上であることがより好ましく、230℃以上であることがさらに好ましい。
<Characteristics of the cured product of the resin composition>
The imidization reaction rate of the cured product of the resin composition of the present invention is preferably 70% or more, more preferably 80% or more, and even more preferably 90% or more. If it is 70% or more, the cured product may have excellent mechanical properties.
The elongation at break of the cured product of the resin composition of the present invention is preferably 30% or more, more preferably 40% or more, and even more preferably 50% or more.
The glass transition temperature (Tg) of the cured product of the resin composition of the present invention is preferably 180°C or higher, more preferably 210°C or higher, and even more preferably 230°C or higher.

<樹脂組成物の調製>
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、上記各成分を混合して調製することができる。混合方法は特に限定はなく、従来公知の方法で行うことができる。
 混合方法としては、撹拌羽による混合、ボールミルによる混合、タンクを回転させる混合などが挙げられる。
 混合中の温度は10~30℃が好ましく、15~25℃がより好ましい。
<Preparation of Resin Composition>
The resin composition of the present invention can be prepared by mixing the above-mentioned components. The mixing method is not particularly limited, and can be carried out by a conventionally known method.
Examples of the mixing method include mixing with a stirring blade, mixing with a ball mill, and mixing by rotating a tank.
The temperature during mixing is preferably 10 to 30°C, more preferably 15 to 25°C.

 本発明の樹脂組成物中のゴミや微粒子等の異物を除去する目的で、フィルターを用いたろ過を行うことが好ましい。フィルター孔径は、例えば5μm以下が好ましく、1μm以下がより好ましく、0.5μm以下が更に好ましく、0.1μm以下が更により好ましい。フィルターの材質は、ポリテトラフルオロエチレン、ポリエチレン又はナイロンが好ましい。フィルターの材質がポリエチレンである場合はHDPE(高密度ポリエチレン)であることがより好ましい。フィルターは、有機溶剤であらかじめ洗浄したものを用いてもよい。フィルターろ過工程では、複数種のフィルターを直列又は並列に接続して用いてもよい。複数種のフィルターを使用する場合は、孔径又は材質が異なるフィルターを組み合わせて使用してもよい。接続態様としては、例えば、1段目として孔径1μmのHDPEフィルターを、2段目として孔径0.2μmのHDPEフィルターを、直列に接続した態様が挙げられる。また、各種材料を複数回ろ過してもよい。複数回ろ過する場合は、循環ろ過であってもよい。また、加圧してろ過を行ってもよい。加圧してろ過を行う場合、加圧する圧力は例えば0.01MPa以上1.0MPa以下が好ましく、0.03MPa以上0.9MPa以下がより好ましく、0.05MPa以上0.7MPa以下が更に好ましく、0.05MPa以上0.5MPa以下が更により好ましい。
 フィルターを用いたろ過の他、吸着材を用いた不純物の除去処理を行ってもよい。フィルターろ過と吸着材を用いた不純物除去処理とを組み合わせてもよい。吸着材としては、公知の吸着材を用いることができる。例えば、シリカゲル、ゼオライトなどの無機系吸着材、活性炭などの有機系吸着材が挙げられる。
 フィルターを用いたろ過後、ボトルに充填した樹脂組成物を減圧下に置き、脱気する工程を施しても良い。
Filtration using a filter is preferably performed to remove foreign matter such as dust and fine particles from the resin composition of the present invention. The filter pore size is, for example, preferably 5 μm or less, more preferably 1 μm or less, even more preferably 0.5 μm or less, and even more preferably 0.1 μm or less. The filter material is preferably polytetrafluoroethylene, polyethylene, or nylon. When the filter material is polyethylene, HDPE (high-density polyethylene) is more preferable. The filter may be pre-washed with an organic solvent. In the filter filtration process, multiple types of filters may be connected in series or parallel. When multiple types of filters are used, filters with different pore sizes or materials may be combined. An example of a connection mode is a mode in which an HDPE filter with a pore size of 1 μm is connected in series as the first stage and an HDPE filter with a pore size of 0.2 μm is connected in series as the second stage. Various materials may also be filtered multiple times. When filtration is performed multiple times, circulating filtration may be used. Filtration may also be performed under pressure. When filtration is performed under pressure, the pressure to be applied is, for example, preferably 0.01 MPa or more and 1.0 MPa or less, more preferably 0.03 MPa or more and 0.9 MPa or less, even more preferably 0.05 MPa or more and 0.7 MPa or less, and even more preferably 0.05 MPa or more and 0.5 MPa or less.
In addition to filtration using a filter, impurities may be removed using an adsorbent. Filter filtration and impurity removal using an adsorbent may be combined. Known adsorbents can be used as the adsorbent. Examples of the adsorbent include inorganic adsorbents such as silica gel and zeolite, and organic adsorbents such as activated carbon.
After filtration using a filter, the resin composition filled in the bottle may be subjected to a degassing step by placing it under reduced pressure.

(硬化物の製造方法)
 本発明の硬化物の製造方法は、樹脂組成物を基材上に適用して膜を形成する膜形成工程を含むことが好ましい。
 硬化物の製造方法は、上記膜形成工程、膜形成工程により形成された膜を選択的に露光する露光工程、及び、露光工程により露光された膜を現像液を用いて現像してパターンを形成する現像工程を含むことがより好ましい。
 硬化物の製造方法は、上記膜形成工程、上記露光工程、上記現像工程、並びに、現像工程により得られたパターンを加熱する加熱工程及び現像工程により得られたパターンを露光する現像後露光工程の少なくとも一方を含むことが特に好ましい。
 また、硬化物の製造方法は、上記膜形成工程、及び、上記膜を加熱する工程を含むことも好ましい。
 以下、各工程の詳細について説明する。
(Method for producing cured product)
The method for producing a cured product of the present invention preferably includes a film-forming step of applying the resin composition onto a substrate to form a film.
The method for producing a cured product more preferably includes the above-mentioned film formation step, an exposure step of selectively exposing the film formed in the film formation step, and a development step of developing the film exposed in the exposure step with a developer to form a pattern.
It is particularly preferable that the method for producing a cured product includes the above-mentioned film-forming step, the above-mentioned exposure step, the above-mentioned development step, and at least one of a heating step of heating the pattern obtained in the development step and a post-development exposure step of exposing the pattern obtained in the development step.
The method for producing a cured product preferably includes the film-forming step and the step of heating the film.
Each step will be described in detail below.

<膜形成工程>
 本発明の樹脂組成物は、基材上に適用して膜を形成する膜形成工程に用いることができる。
 本発明の硬化物の製造方法は、樹脂組成物を基材上に適用して膜を形成する膜形成工程を含むことが好ましい。
<Film formation process>
The resin composition of the present invention can be used in a film-forming process in which the resin composition is applied to a substrate to form a film.
The method for producing a cured product of the present invention preferably includes a film-forming step of applying the resin composition onto a substrate to form a film.

〔基材〕
 基材の種類は、用途に応じて適宜定めることができ、特に限定されない。基材としては、例えば、シリコン、窒化シリコン、ポリシリコン、酸化シリコン、アモルファスシリコンなどの半導体作製基材、石英、ガラス、光学フィルム、セラミック材料、蒸着膜、磁性膜、反射膜、Ni、Cu、Cr、Feなどの金属基材(例えば、金属から形成された基材、及び、金属層が例えばめっきや蒸着等により形成された基材のいずれであってもよい)、紙、SOG(Spin On Glass)、TFT(薄膜トランジスタ)アレイ基材、モールド基材、プラズマディスプレイパネル(PDP)の電極板などが挙げられる。基材は、特に、半導体作製基材が好ましく、シリコン基材、Cu基材およびモールド基材がより好ましい。
 これらの基材にはヘキサメチルジシラザン(HMDS)等による密着層や酸化層などの層が表面に設けられていてもよい。
 基材の形状は特に限定されず、円形状であってもよく、矩形状であってもよい。
 基材のサイズは、円形状であれば、例えば直径が100~450mmが好ましく、200~450mmがより好ましい。矩形状であれば、例えば短辺の長さが100~1000mmが好ましく、200~700mmがより好ましい。
基材としては、例えば板状、好ましくはパネル状の基材(基板)が用いられる。
[Base material]
The type of substrate can be appropriately determined depending on the application and is not particularly limited. Examples of substrates include semiconductor production substrates such as silicon, silicon nitride, polysilicon, silicon oxide, and amorphous silicon, quartz, glass, optical films, ceramic materials, vapor deposition films, magnetic films, reflective films, metal substrates such as Ni, Cu, Cr, and Fe (for example, substrates formed from metals, and substrates on which a metal layer is formed by plating, vapor deposition, etc.), paper, SOG (Spin On Glass), TFT (thin film transistor) array substrates, mold substrates, and electrode plates for plasma display panels (PDPs). The substrate is particularly preferably a semiconductor production substrate, and more preferably a silicon substrate, a Cu substrate, or a mold substrate.
These substrates may have a layer such as an adhesion layer made of hexamethyldisilazane (HMDS) or an oxide layer provided on the surface.
The shape of the substrate is not particularly limited, and may be circular or rectangular.
The size of the substrate is preferably, for example, a diameter of 100 to 450 mm, more preferably 200 to 450 mm, if it is circular, and preferably, a short side length of 100 to 1000 mm, more preferably 200 to 700 mm, if it is rectangular.
As the substrate, for example, a plate-shaped substrate, preferably a panel-shaped substrate (substrate) is used.

 樹脂層(例えば、硬化物からなる層)の表面や金属層の表面に樹脂組成物を適用して膜を形成する場合は、樹脂層や金属層が基材となる。 When a film is formed by applying a resin composition to the surface of a resin layer (e.g., a layer made of a cured product) or the surface of a metal layer, the resin layer or metal layer serves as the substrate.

 樹脂組成物を基材上に適用する手段としては、塗布が好ましい。
 適用する手段としては、具体的には、ディップコート法、エアーナイフコート法、カーテンコート法、ワイヤーバーコート法、グラビアコート法、エクストルージョンコート法、スプレーコート法、スピンコート法、スリットコート法、インクジェット法などが挙げられる。膜の厚さの均一性の観点から、スピンコート法、スリットコート法、スプレーコート法、又は、インクジェット法が好ましく、膜の厚さの均一性の観点および生産性の観点からスピンコート法およびスリットコート法がより好ましい。適用する手段に応じて樹脂組成物の固形分濃度や塗布条件を調整することで、所望の厚さの膜を得ることができる。また、基材の形状によっても塗布方法を適宜選択でき、ウエハ等の円形基材であればスピンコート法、スプレーコート法、インクジェット法等が好ましく、矩形基材であればスリットコート法、スプレーコート法、インクジェット法等が好ましい。スピンコート法の場合は、例えば、500~3,500rpmの回転数で、10秒~3分程度適用することができる。
 また、あらかじめ仮支持体上に上記付与方法によって付与して形成した塗膜を、基材上に転写する方法を適用することもできる。
 転写方法に関しては特開2006-023696号公報の段落0023、0036~0051や、特開2006-047592号公報の段落0096~0108に記載の作製方法を好適に用いることができる。
 また、基材の端部において余分な膜の除去を行なう工程を行なってもよい。このような工程の例には、エッジビードリンス(EBR)、バックリンスなどが挙げられる。
 樹脂組成物を基材に塗布する前に基材を種々の溶剤を塗布し、基材の濡れ性を向上させた後に樹脂組成物を塗布するプリウェット工程を採用しても良い。
The resin composition is preferably applied to a substrate by coating.
Specific examples of the application method include dip coating, air knife coating, curtain coating, wire bar coating, gravure coating, extrusion coating, spray coating, spin coating, slit coating, and inkjet coating. From the viewpoint of uniformity of film thickness, spin coating, slit coating, spray coating, or inkjet coating is preferred, and from the viewpoint of uniformity of film thickness and productivity, spin coating and slit coating are more preferred. By adjusting the solid content concentration of the resin composition and coating conditions depending on the application method, a film of the desired thickness can be obtained. In addition, the application method can be appropriately selected depending on the shape of the substrate. For circular substrates such as wafers, spin coating, spray coating, inkjet coating, etc. are preferred, and for rectangular substrates, slit coating, spray coating, inkjet coating, etc. are preferred. In the case of spin coating, for example, it can be applied at a rotation speed of 500 to 3,500 rpm for about 10 seconds to 3 minutes.
Alternatively, a coating film formed by applying the coating to a temporary support in advance using the above-mentioned application method may be transferred onto the substrate.
As for the transfer method, the production methods described in paragraphs 0023 and 0036 to 0051 of JP-A No. 2006-023696 and paragraphs 0096 to 0108 of JP-A No. 2006-047592 can be suitably used.
In addition, a process for removing excess film from the edge of the substrate may be performed, such as edge bead rinsing (EBR) or back rinsing.
Before applying the resin composition to the substrate, a pre-wetting step may be employed in which the substrate is coated with various solvents to improve the wettability of the substrate, and then the resin composition is applied.

<乾燥工程>
 上記膜は、膜形成工程(層形成工程)の後に、溶剤を除去するため、形成された膜(層)を乾燥する工程(乾燥工程)に供されてもよい。
 すなわち、本発明の硬化物の製造方法は、膜形成工程により形成された膜を乾燥する乾燥工程を含んでもよい。
 上記乾燥工程は膜形成工程の後、露光工程の前に行われることが好ましい。
 乾燥工程における膜の乾燥温度は50~150℃が好ましく、70℃~130℃がより好ましく、90℃~110℃が更に好ましい。また、減圧により乾燥を行っても良い。乾燥時間としては、30秒~20分が例示され、1分~10分が好ましく、2分~7分がより好ましい。
<Drying process>
After the film-forming step (layer-forming step), the film may be subjected to a step (drying step) of drying the formed film (layer) to remove the solvent.
That is, the method for producing a cured product of the present invention may include a drying step of drying the film formed in the film forming step.
The drying step is preferably carried out after the film-forming step and before the exposure step.
The drying temperature of the film in the drying step is preferably 50 to 150°C, more preferably 70 to 130°C, and even more preferably 90 to 110°C. Drying may also be performed under reduced pressure. The drying time is, for example, 30 seconds to 20 minutes, preferably 1 to 10 minutes, and more preferably 2 to 7 minutes.

<露光工程>
 上記膜は、膜を選択的に露光する露光工程に供されてもよい。
 硬化物の製造方法は、膜形成工程により形成された膜を選択的に露光する露光工程を含んでもよい。
 選択的に露光するとは、膜の一部を露光することを意味している。また、選択的に露光することにより、膜には露光された領域(露光部)と露光されていない領域(非露光部)が形成される。
 露光量は、本発明の樹脂組成物を硬化できる限り特に限定されないが、例えば、波長365nmでの露光エネルギー換算で50~10,000mJ/cmが好ましく、200~8,000mJ/cmがより好ましい。
<Exposure process>
The film may be subjected to an exposure step to selectively expose the film to light.
The method for producing a cured product may include an exposure step of selectively exposing the film formed in the film formation step to light.
Selective exposure means that only a portion of the film is exposed, and selective exposure results in exposed and unexposed areas of the film.
The exposure dose is not particularly limited as long as it can cure the resin composition of the present invention, but is preferably 50 to 10,000 mJ/cm 2 and more preferably 200 to 8,000 mJ/cm 2 in terms of exposure energy at a wavelength of 365 nm.

 露光波長は、190~1,000nmの範囲で適宜定めることができ、240~550nmが好ましい。 The exposure wavelength can be appropriately set in the range of 190 to 1,000 nm, with 240 to 550 nm being preferred.

 露光波長は、光源との関係でいうと、(1)半導体レーザー(波長 830nm、532nm、488nm、405nm、375nm、355nm etc.)、(2)メタルハライドランプ、(3)高圧水銀灯、g線(波長 436nm)、h線(波長 405nm)、i線(波長 365nm)、ブロード(g,h,i線の3波長)、(4)エキシマレーザー、KrFエキシマレーザー(波長 248nm)、ArFエキシマレーザー(波長 193nm)、Fエキシマレーザー(波長 157nm)、(5)極紫外線;EUV(波長 13.6nm)、(6)電子線、(7)YAGレーザーの第二高調波532nm、第三高調波355nm等が挙げられる。本発明の樹脂組成物については、特に高圧水銀灯による露光が好ましく、露光感度の観点で、i線による露光がより好ましい。
 露光の方式は特に限定されず、本発明の樹脂組成物からなる膜の少なくとも一部が露光される方式であればよいが、フォトマスクを使用した露光、レーザーダイレクトイメージング法による露光等が挙げられる。
In terms of the exposure wavelength, in relation to the light source, (1) semiconductor laser (wavelengths 830 nm, 532 nm, 488 nm, 405 nm, 375 nm, 355 nm, etc.), (2) metal halide lamp, (3) high-pressure mercury lamp, g-line (wavelength 436 nm), h-line (wavelength 405 nm), i-line (wavelength 365 nm), broad (three wavelengths of g, h, i-line), (4) excimer laser, KrF excimer laser (wavelength 248 nm), ArF excimer laser (wavelength 193 nm), F2 excimer laser (wavelength 157 nm), (5) extreme ultraviolet light; EUV (wavelength 13.6 nm), (6) electron beam, (7) YAG laser second harmonic 532 nm, third harmonic 355 nm, etc. For the resin composition of the present invention, exposure with a high-pressure mercury lamp is particularly preferred, and exposure with i-line is more preferred from the viewpoint of exposure sensitivity.
The exposure method is not particularly limited as long as it is a method that exposes at least a part of the film made of the resin composition of the present invention, and examples thereof include exposure using a photomask and exposure by laser direct imaging.

<露光後加熱工程>
 上記膜は、露光後に加熱する工程(露光後加熱工程)に供されてもよい。
 すなわち、本発明の硬化物の製造方法は、露光工程により露光された膜を加熱する露光後加熱工程を含んでもよい。
 露光後加熱工程は、露光工程後、現像工程前に行うことができる。
 露光後加熱工程における加熱温度は、50℃~140℃が好ましく、60℃~120℃がより好ましい。
 露光後加熱工程における加熱時間は、30秒間~300分間が好ましく、1分間~10分間がより好ましい。
 露光後加熱工程における昇温速度は、加熱開始時の温度から最高加熱温度まで1~12℃/分が好ましく、2~10℃/分がより好ましく、3~10℃/分が更に好ましい。
 また、昇温速度は加熱途中で適宜変更してもよい。
 露光後加熱工程における加熱手段としては、特に限定されず、公知のホットプレート、オーブン、赤外線ヒーター等を用いることができる。
 また、加熱に際し、窒素、ヘリウム、アルゴンなどの不活性ガスを流す等により、低酸素濃度の雰囲気下で行うことも好ましい。
<Post-exposure baking step>
The film may be subjected to a step of heating after exposure (post-exposure baking step).
That is, the method for producing a cured product of the present invention may include a post-exposure baking step in which the film exposed in the exposure step is heated.
The post-exposure baking step can be carried out after the exposure step and before the development step.
The heating temperature in the post-exposure baking step is preferably 50°C to 140°C, more preferably 60°C to 120°C.
The heating time in the post-exposure baking step is preferably from 30 seconds to 300 minutes, more preferably from 1 minute to 10 minutes.
The temperature rise rate in the post-exposure heating step from the starting temperature to the maximum heating temperature is preferably 1 to 12° C./min, more preferably 2 to 10° C./min, and even more preferably 3 to 10° C./min.
The temperature rise rate may be changed during heating as needed.
The heating means in the post-exposure baking step is not particularly limited, and known means such as a hot plate, an oven, and an infrared heater can be used.
It is also preferable that the heating be carried out in an atmosphere of low oxygen concentration by flowing an inert gas such as nitrogen, helium, or argon.

<現像工程>
 露光後の上記膜は、現像液を用いて現像してパターンを形成する現像工程に供されてもよい。
 すなわち、本発明の硬化物の製造方法は、露光工程により露光された膜を現像液を用いて現像してパターンを形成する現像工程を含んでもよい。
 現像を行うことにより、膜の露光部及び非露光部のうち一方が除去され、パターンが形成される。
 ここで、膜の非露光部が現像工程により除去される現像をネガ型現像といい、膜の露光部が現像工程により除去される現像をポジ型現像という。
<Developing process>
After exposure, the film may be subjected to a development step in which it is developed with a developer to form a pattern.
That is, the method for producing a cured product of the present invention may include a development step in which the film exposed in the exposure step is developed with a developer to form a pattern.
Development removes either the exposed or unexposed portions of the film, forming a pattern.
Here, development in which the non-exposed portions of the film are removed by the development process is called negative development, and development in which the exposed portions of the film are removed by the development process is called positive development.

〔現像液〕
 現像工程において用いられる現像液としては、アルカリ水溶液、又は、有機溶剤を含む現像液が挙げられる。
[Developer]
The developer used in the development step may be an aqueous alkaline solution or a developer containing an organic solvent.

 現像液がアルカリ水溶液である場合、アルカリ水溶液が含みうる塩基性化合物としては、無機アルカリ類、第一級アミン類、第二級アミン類、第三級アミン類、第四級アンモニウム塩が挙げられ、TMAH(テトラメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド)、水酸化カリウム、炭酸ナトリウム、水酸化ナトリウム、ケイ酸ナトリウム、メタケイ酸ナトリウム、アンモニア、エチルアミン、n-プロピルアミン、ジエチルアミン、ジ-n-ブチルアミン、トリエチルアミン、メチルジエチルアミン、ジメチルエタノールアミン、トリエタノールアミン、テトラエチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラプロピルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラブチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラペンチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラヘキシルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラオクチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、エチルトリメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、ブチルトリメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、メチルトリアミルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、ジブチルジペンチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、ジメチルビス(2-ヒドロキシエチル)アンモニウムヒドロキシド、トリメチルフェニルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、トリメチルベンジルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、トリエチルベンジルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、ピロール、ピペリジンが好ましく、より好ましくはTMAHである。現像液における塩基性化合物の含有量は、現像液全質量中0.01~10質量%が好ましく、0.1~5質量%がより好ましく、0.3~3質量%が更に好ましい。 When the developer is an alkaline aqueous solution, basic compounds that the alkaline aqueous solution may contain include inorganic alkalis, primary amines, secondary amines, tertiary amines, and quaternary ammonium salts, of which TMAH (tetramethylammonium hydroxide), potassium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, sodium hydroxide, sodium silicate, sodium metasilicate, ammonia, ethylamine, n-propylamine, diethylamine, di-n-butylamine, triethylamine, methyldiethylamine, dimethylethanolamine, triethanolamine, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, tetrapropylammonium hydroxide, tetrabutylammonium hydroxide, tetrapentylammonium hydroxide, tetrahexylammonium hydroxide, tetraoctylammonium hydroxide, ethyltrimethylammonium hydroxide, butyltrimethylammonium hydroxide, methyltriamylammonium hydroxide, dibutyldipentylammonium hydroxide, dimethylbis(2-hydroxyethyl)ammonium hydroxide, trimethylphenylammonium hydroxide, trimethylbenzylammonium hydroxide, triethylbenzylammonium hydroxide, pyrrole, and piperidine are preferred, with TMAH being more preferred. The content of the basic compound in the developer is preferably 0.01 to 10% by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 5% by mass, and even more preferably 0.3 to 3% by mass, based on the total mass of the developer.

 現像液が有機溶剤を含む場合、有機溶剤としては、国際公開第2021/112189号の段落0387に記載の化合物を用いることができる。この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。また、アルコール類として、メタノール、エタノール、プロパノール、イソプロパノール、ブタノール、ペンタノール、オクタノール、ジエチレングリコール、プロピレングリコール、メチルイソブチルカルビノール、トリエチレングリコール等、アミド類として、N-メチルピロリドン、N-エチルピロリドン、ジメチルホルムアミド等も好適に挙げられる。 When the developer contains an organic solvent, the compounds described in paragraph 0387 of WO 2021/112189 can be used as the organic solvent. The contents of this document are incorporated herein by reference. Suitable alcohols include methanol, ethanol, propanol, isopropanol, butanol, pentanol, octanol, diethylene glycol, propylene glycol, methyl isobutylcarbinol, and triethylene glycol, and suitable amides include N-methylpyrrolidone, N-ethylpyrrolidone, and dimethylformamide.

 現像液が有機溶剤を含む場合、有機溶剤は1種又は、2種以上を混合して使用することができる。本発明では特にシクロペンタノン、γ-ブチロラクトン、ジメチルスルホキシド、N-メチル-2-ピロリドン、及び、シクロヘキサノンからなる群より選ばれた少なくとも1種を含む現像液が好ましく、シクロペンタノン、γ-ブチロラクトン及びジメチルスルホキシドからなる群より選ばれた少なくとも1種を含む現像液がより好ましく、シクロペンタノンを含む現像液が特に好ましい。 When the developer contains an organic solvent, the organic solvent can be used alone or in combination of two or more. In the present invention, a developer containing at least one selected from the group consisting of cyclopentanone, γ-butyrolactone, dimethyl sulfoxide, N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone, and cyclohexanone is particularly preferred, a developer containing at least one selected from the group consisting of cyclopentanone, γ-butyrolactone, and dimethyl sulfoxide is more preferred, and a developer containing cyclopentanone is particularly preferred.

 現像液が有機溶剤を含む場合、現像液の全質量に対する有機溶剤の含有量は、50質量%以上であることが好ましく、70質量%以上であることがより好ましく、80質量%以上であることが更に好ましく、90質量%以上であることが特に好ましい。また、上記含有量は、100質量%であってもよい。 When the developer contains an organic solvent, the content of the organic solvent relative to the total weight of the developer is preferably 50% by weight or more, more preferably 70% by weight or more, even more preferably 80% by weight or more, and particularly preferably 90% by weight or more. The above content may also be 100% by weight.

現像液が有機溶剤を含む場合、現像液は塩基性化合物及び塩基発生剤の少なくとも一方を更に含んでもよい。現像液中の塩基性化合物及び塩基発生剤の少なくとも一方がパターンに浸透することにより、パターンの破断伸び等の性能が向上する場合がある。 When the developer contains an organic solvent, the developer may further contain at least one of a basic compound and a base generator. When at least one of the basic compound and the base generator in the developer penetrates into the pattern, the performance of the pattern, such as breaking elongation, may be improved.

 塩基性化合物としては、硬化後の膜に残存した場合の信頼性(硬化物を更に加熱した場合の基材との密着性)の観点からは、有機塩基が好ましい。
 塩基性化合物としては、アミノ基を有する塩基性化合物が好ましく、1級アミン、2級アミン、3級アミン、アンモニウム塩、3級アミドなどが好ましいが、イミド化反応を促進する為には、1級アミン、2級アミン、3級アミン又はアンモニウム塩が好ましく、2級アミン、3級アミン又はアンモニウム塩がより好ましく、2級アミン又は3級アミンが更に好ましく、3級アミンが特に好ましい。
 塩基性化合物としては、硬化物の機械特性(破断伸び)の観点からは、硬化膜(得られる硬化物)中に残存しにくいものが好ましく、環化の促進の観点からは、気化等により、加熱前に残存量が減少しにくいものであることが好ましい。
 したがって、塩基性化合物の沸点は、常圧(101,325Pa)で30℃~350℃が好ましく、80℃~270℃がより好ましく、100℃~230℃が更に好ましい。
 塩基性化合物の沸点は、現像液に含まれる有機溶剤の沸点から20℃を減算した温度よりも高いことが好ましく、現像液に含まれる有機溶剤の沸点よりも高いことがより好ましい。
 例えば、有機溶剤の沸点が100℃である場合、使用される塩基性化合物は、沸点が80℃以上が好ましく、沸点が100℃以上がより好ましい。
 現像液は塩基性化合物を1種のみ含有してもよいし、2種以上を含有してもよい。
As the basic compound, an organic base is preferred from the viewpoint of reliability when it remains in the film after curing (adhesion to the substrate when the cured product is further heated).
The basic compound is preferably a basic compound having an amino group, and is preferably a primary amine, a secondary amine, a tertiary amine, an ammonium salt, or a tertiary amide. In order to promote the imidization reaction, a primary amine, a secondary amine, a tertiary amine, or an ammonium salt is preferred, a secondary amine, a tertiary amine, or an ammonium salt is more preferred, a secondary amine or a tertiary amine is even more preferred, and a tertiary amine is particularly preferred.
From the viewpoint of the mechanical properties (elongation at break) of the cured product, it is preferable that the basic compound is one that is unlikely to remain in the cured film (the obtained cured product), and from the viewpoint of promoting cyclization, it is preferable that the amount of the basic compound that remains is unlikely to decrease due to vaporization or the like before heating.
Therefore, the boiling point of the basic compound is preferably 30°C to 350°C, more preferably 80°C to 270°C, and even more preferably 100°C to 230°C at normal pressure (101,325 Pa).
The boiling point of the basic compound is preferably higher than the temperature obtained by subtracting 20° C. from the boiling point of the organic solvent contained in the developer, and more preferably higher than the boiling point of the organic solvent contained in the developer.
For example, when the boiling point of the organic solvent is 100°C, the basic compound used preferably has a boiling point of 80°C or higher, more preferably 100°C or higher.
The developer may contain only one kind of basic compound or two or more kinds of basic compounds.

 塩基性化合物の具体例としては、エタノールアミン、ジエタノールアミン、トリエタノールアミン、エチルアミン、ジエチルアミン、トリエチルアミン、ヘキシルアミン、ドデシルアミン、シクロヘキシルアミン、シクロヘキシルメチルアミン、シクロヘキシルジメチルアミン、アニリン、N-メチルアニリン、N,N-ジメチルアニリン、ジフェニルアミン、ピリジン、ブチルアミン、イソブチルアミン、ジブチルアミン、トリブチルアミン、ジシクロヘキシルアミン、DBU(ジアザビシクロウンデセン)、DABCO(1,4-ジアザビシクロ[2.2.2]オクタン)、N,N-ジイソプロピルエチルアミン、テトラメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラブチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、エチレンジアミン、ブタンジアミン、1,5-ジアミノペンタン、N-メチルヘキシルアミン、N-メチルジシクロヘキシルアミン、トリオクチルアミン、N-エチルエチレンジアミン、N,N―ジエチルエチレンジアミン、N,N,N’,N’-テトラブチルー1,6-ヘキサンジアミン、スペルミジン、ジアミノシクロヘキサン、ビス(2-メトキシエチル)アミン、ピペリジン、メチルピペリジン、ジメチルピペリジン、ピペラジン、トロパン、N-フェニルベンジルアミン、1,2-ジアニリノエタン、2-アミノエタノール、トルイジン、アミノフェノール、ヘキシルアニリン、フェニレンジアミン、フェニルエチルアミン、ジベンジルアミン、ピロール、N-メチルピロール、N,N,N,Nテトラメチルエチレンジアミン、N,N,N,N-テトラメチルー1,3-プロパンジアミン等が挙げられる。 Specific examples of basic compounds include ethanolamine, diethanolamine, triethanolamine, ethylamine, diethylamine, triethylamine, hexylamine, dodecylamine, cyclohexylamine, cyclohexylmethylamine, cyclohexyldimethylamine, aniline, N-methylaniline, N,N-dimethylaniline, diphenylamine, pyridine, butylamine, isobutylamine, dibutylamine, tributylamine, dicyclohexylamine, DBU (diazabicycloundecene), DABCO (1,4-diazabicyclo[2.2.2]octane), N,N-diisopropylethylamine, tetramethylammonium hydroxide, tetrabutylammonium hydroxide, ethylenediamine, butanediamine, 1,5-diamino Examples include pentane, N-methylhexylamine, N-methyldicyclohexylamine, trioctylamine, N-ethylethylenediamine, N,N-diethylethylenediamine, N,N,N',N'-tetrabutyl-1,6-hexanediamine, spermidine, diaminocyclohexane, bis(2-methoxyethyl)amine, piperidine, methylpiperidine, dimethylpiperidine, piperazine, tropane, N-phenylbenzylamine, 1,2-dianilinoethane, 2-aminoethanol, toluidine, aminophenol, hexylaniline, phenylenediamine, phenylethylamine, dibenzylamine, pyrrole, N-methylpyrrole, N,N,N,N-tetramethylethylenediamine, and N,N,N,N-tetramethyl-1,3-propanediamine.

 塩基発生剤の好ましい態様は、上述の組成物に含まれる塩基発生剤の好ましい態様と同様である。特に、塩基発生剤は熱塩基発生剤であることが好ましい。 Preferred embodiments of the base generator are the same as those of the base generator contained in the composition described above. In particular, it is preferable that the base generator be a thermal base generator.

 現像液が塩基性化合物及び塩基発生剤の少なくとも一方を含む場合、塩基性化合物又は塩基発生剤の含有量は、現像液の全質量に対して、10質量%以下が好ましく、5質量%以下がより好ましい。上記含有量の下限は特に限定されないが、例えば0.1質量%以上が好ましい。
 塩基性化合物又は塩基発生剤が現像液が用いられる環境で固体である場合、塩基性化合物又は塩基発生剤の含有量は、現像液の全固形分に対して、70~100質量%であることも好ましい。
 現像液は塩基性化合物及び塩基発生剤の少なくとも一方を1種のみ含有してもよいし、2種以上を含有してもよい。塩基性化合物及び塩基発生剤の少なくとも一方が2種以上である場合は、その合計が上記範囲であることが好ましい。
When the developer contains at least one of a basic compound and a base generator, the content of the basic compound or the base generator is preferably 10% by mass or less, more preferably 5% by mass or less, based on the total mass of the developer. The lower limit of the content is not particularly limited, but is preferably, for example, 0.1% by mass or more.
When the basic compound or base generator is solid in the environment in which the developer is used, the content of the basic compound or base generator is preferably 70 to 100 mass % based on the total solid content of the developer.
The developer may contain only one kind of at least one of a basic compound and a base generator, or may contain two or more kinds. When two or more kinds of at least one of a basic compound and a base generator are used, the total amount thereof is preferably within the above range.

 現像液は、他の成分を更に含んでもよい。
 他の成分としては、例えば、公知の界面活性剤や公知の消泡剤等が挙げられる。
The developer may further contain other components.
Examples of other components include known surfactants and known defoaming agents.

〔現像液の供給方法〕
 現像液の供給方法は、所望のパターンを形成できれば特に制限は無く、膜が形成された基材を現像液に浸漬する方法、基材上に形成された膜にノズルを用いて現像液を供給するパドル現像、または、現像液を連続供給する方法がある。ノズルの種類は特に制限は無く、ストレートノズル、シャワーノズル、スプレーノズル等が挙げられる。
 現像液の浸透性、非画像部の除去性、製造上の効率の観点から、現像液をストレートノズルで供給する方法、又はスプレーノズルにて連続供給する方法が好ましく、画像部への現像液の浸透性の観点からは、スプレーノズルで供給する方法がより好ましい。
 また、現像液をストレートノズルにて連続供給後、基材をスピンし現像液を基材上から除去し、スピン乾燥後に再度ストレートノズルにて連続供給後、基材をスピンし現像液を基材上から除去する工程を採用してもよく、この工程を複数回繰り返しても良い。
 現像工程における現像液の供給方法としては、現像液が連続的に基材に供給され続ける工程、基材上で現像液が略静止状態で保たれる工程、基材上で現像液を超音波等で振動させる工程及びそれらを組み合わせた工程などが挙げられる。
[Method of Supplying Developer]
The method of supplying the developer is not particularly limited as long as it can form a desired pattern, and includes a method of immersing a substrate on which a film has been formed in the developer, puddle development in which the developer is supplied to a film formed on a substrate using a nozzle, and a method of continuously supplying the developer. The type of nozzle is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a straight nozzle, a shower nozzle, and a spray nozzle.
From the viewpoints of the permeability of the developer, the removability of non-image areas, and production efficiency, a method of supplying the developer through a straight nozzle or a method of continuously supplying the developer through a spray nozzle is preferred, and from the viewpoint of the permeability of the developer into the image areas, a method of supplying the developer through a spray nozzle is more preferred.
Alternatively, a process may be employed in which the developer is continuously supplied through a straight nozzle, the substrate is spun to remove the developer from the substrate, and after spin drying, the developer is continuously supplied again through a straight nozzle, and the substrate is spun to remove the developer from the substrate, and this process may be repeated multiple times.
Methods for supplying the developer in the development step include a step in which the developer is continuously supplied to the substrate, a step in which the developer is kept substantially stationary on the substrate, a step in which the developer is vibrated on the substrate by ultrasonic waves or the like, and a step in which these are combined.

 現像時間としては、10秒~10分間が好ましく、20秒~5分間がより好ましい。現像時の現像液の温度は、特に定めるものではないが、10~45℃が好ましく、18℃~30℃がより好ましい。 The development time is preferably 10 seconds to 10 minutes, and more preferably 20 seconds to 5 minutes. The temperature of the developer during development is not particularly specified, but is preferably 10 to 45°C, and more preferably 18 to 30°C.

 現像工程において、現像液を用いた処理の後、更に、リンス液によるパターンの洗浄(リンス)を行ってもよい。また、パターン上に接する現像液が乾燥しきらないうちにリンス液を供給するなどの方法を採用しても良い。 In the development process, after treatment with the developer, the pattern may be further washed (rinsed) with a rinse solution. Alternatively, a rinse solution may be supplied before the developer in contact with the pattern has completely dried.

〔リンス液〕
 現像液がアルカリ水溶液である場合、リンス液としては、例えば水を用いることができる。現像液が有機溶剤を含む現像液である場合、リンス液としては、例えば、現像液に含まれる溶剤とは異なる溶剤(例えば、水、現像液に含まれる有機溶剤とは異なる有機溶剤)を用いることができる。
[Rinse solution]
When the developer is an alkaline aqueous solution, for example, water can be used as the rinse liquid. When the developer is a developer containing an organic solvent, for example, a solvent different from the solvent contained in the developer (for example, water, an organic solvent different from the organic solvent contained in the developer) can be used as the rinse liquid.

 リンス液が有機溶剤を含む場合の有機溶剤としては、上述の現像液が有機溶剤を含む場合において例示した有機溶剤と同様の有機溶剤が挙げられる。
 リンス液に含まれる有機溶剤は、現像液に含まれる有機溶剤とは異なる有機溶剤であることが好ましく、現像液に含まれる有機溶剤よりも、パターンの溶解度が小さい有機溶剤がより好ましい。
When the rinse liquid contains an organic solvent, examples of the organic solvent include the same organic solvents as those exemplified when the developer contains an organic solvent.
The organic solvent contained in the rinse liquid is preferably different from the organic solvent contained in the developer, and more preferably an organic solvent that has a lower solubility for the pattern than the organic solvent contained in the developer.

 リンス液が有機溶剤を含む場合、有機溶剤は1種又は、2種以上を混合して使用することができる。有機溶剤は、シクロペンタノン、γ-ブチロラクトン、ジメチルスルホキシド、N-メチルピロリドン、シクロヘキサノン、PGMEA、PGMEが好ましく、シクロペンタノン、γ-ブチロラクトン、ジメチルスルホキシド、PGMEA、PGMEがより好ましく、シクロヘキサノン、PGMEAがさらに好ましい。 When the rinse solution contains an organic solvent, the organic solvent can be used alone or in combination of two or more. Preferred organic solvents are cyclopentanone, gamma-butyrolactone, dimethyl sulfoxide, N-methylpyrrolidone, cyclohexanone, PGMEA, and PGME, with cyclopentanone, gamma-butyrolactone, dimethyl sulfoxide, PGMEA, and PGME being more preferred, and cyclohexanone and PGMEA being even more preferred.

 リンス液が有機溶剤を含む場合、リンス液の全質量に対し、有機溶剤は50質量%以上が好ましく、70質量%以上がより好ましく、90質量%以上が更に好ましい。また、リンス液の全質量に対し、有機溶剤は100質量%であってもよい。 When the rinse solution contains an organic solvent, the organic solvent preferably accounts for 50% by mass or more, more preferably 70% by mass or more, and even more preferably 90% by mass or more, of the total mass of the rinse solution. Alternatively, the organic solvent may account for 100% by mass of the total mass of the rinse solution.

 リンス液は塩基性化合物及び塩基発生剤の少なくとも一方を含んでもよい。
 特に限定されないが、現像液が有機溶剤を含む場合、リンス液が有機溶剤と塩基性化合物及び塩基発生剤の少なくとも一方とを含む態様も、本発明の好ましい態様の一つである。
 リンス液に含まれる塩基性化合物及び塩基発生剤としては、上述の現像液が有機溶剤を含む場合に含まれてもよい塩基性化合物及び塩基発生剤として例示された化合物が挙げられ、好ましい態様も同様である。
 リンス液に含まれる塩基性化合物及び塩基発生剤は、リンス液における溶剤への溶解度等を考慮して選択すればよい。
The rinse liquid may contain at least one of a basic compound and a base generator.
Although not particularly limited, when the developer contains an organic solvent, one preferred embodiment of the present invention is one in which the rinse liquid contains an organic solvent and at least one of a basic compound and a base generator.
Examples of the basic compound and base generator contained in the rinse solution include the compounds exemplified as the basic compound and base generator that may be contained in the above-mentioned developer containing an organic solvent, and preferred embodiments are also the same.
The basic compound and base generator contained in the rinse solution may be selected in consideration of the solubility in the solvent in the rinse solution.

 リンス液が塩基性化合物及び塩基発生剤の少なくとも一方を含む場合、塩基性化合物又は塩基発生剤の含有量はリンス液の全質量に対して、10質量%以下が好ましく、5質量%以下がより好ましい。上記含有量の下限は特に限定されないが、例えば0.1質量%以上が好ましい。
 塩基性化合物又は塩基発生剤がリンス液が用いられる環境で固体である場合、塩基性化合物又は塩基発生剤の含有量は、リンス液の全固形分に対して、70~100質量%であることも好ましい。
 リンス液が塩基性化合物及び塩基発生剤の少なくとも一方を含む場合、リンス液は塩基性化合物及び塩基発生剤の少なくとも一方を1種のみ含有してもよいし、2種以上を含有してもよい。塩基性化合物及び塩基発生剤の少なくとも一方が2種以上である場合は、その合計が上記範囲であることが好ましい。
When the rinse solution contains at least one of a basic compound and a base generator, the content of the basic compound or the base generator is preferably 10% by mass or less, and more preferably 5% by mass or less, based on the total mass of the rinse solution. The lower limit of the content is not particularly limited, but is preferably, for example, 0.1% by mass or more.
When the basic compound or base generator is solid in the environment in which the rinse solution is used, the content of the basic compound or base generator is also preferably 70 to 100 mass % based on the total solid content of the rinse solution.
When the rinse solution contains at least one of a basic compound and a base generator, the rinse solution may contain only one kind of at least one of a basic compound and a base generator, or may contain two or more kinds. When there are two or more kinds of at least one of a basic compound and a base generator, the total amount thereof is preferably within the above range.

 リンス液は、他の成分を更に含んでもよい。
 他の成分としては、例えば、公知の界面活性剤や公知の消泡剤等が挙げられる。
The rinse solution may further contain other ingredients.
Examples of other components include known surfactants and known defoaming agents.

〔リンス液の供給方法〕
 リンス液の供給方法は、所望のパターンを形成できれば特に制限は無く、基材をリンス液に浸漬する方法、基材に液盛りによりリンス液を供給する方法、基材にリンス液をシャワーで供給する方法、基材上にストレートノズル等の手段によりリンス液を連続供給する方法がある。
 リンス液の浸透性、非画像部の除去性、製造上の効率の観点から、リンス液をシャワーノズル、ストレートノズル、スプレーノズルなどで供給する方法があり、スプレーノズルにて連続供給する方法が好ましく、画像部へのリンス液の浸透性の観点からは、スプレーノズルで供給する方法がより好ましい。ノズルの種類は特に制限は無く、ストレートノズル、シャワーノズル、スプレーノズル等が挙げられる。
 すなわち、リンス工程は、リンス液を上記露光後の膜に対してストレートノズルにより供給、又は、連続供給する工程であることが好ましく、リンス液をスプレーノズルにより供給する工程であることがより好ましい。
 リンス工程におけるリンス液の供給方法としては、リンス液が連続的に基材に供給され続ける工程、基材上でリンス液が略静止状態で保たれる工程、基材上でリンス液を超音波等で振動させる工程及びそれらを組み合わせた工程などが採用可能である。
[Method of supplying rinse liquid]
The method of supplying the rinse liquid is not particularly limited as long as it can form a desired pattern, and examples thereof include a method of immersing the substrate in the rinse liquid, a method of supplying the rinse liquid to the substrate by puddling, a method of supplying the rinse liquid to the substrate by showering, and a method of continuously supplying the rinse liquid onto the substrate by means of a straight nozzle or the like.
From the viewpoints of the permeability of the rinse liquid, the removability of non-image areas, and production efficiency, the rinse liquid can be supplied using a shower nozzle, a straight nozzle, a spray nozzle, etc., and the method of continuously supplying the rinse liquid using a spray nozzle is preferred, and from the viewpoint of the permeability of the rinse liquid into the image areas, the method of supplying the rinse liquid using a spray nozzle is more preferred. The type of nozzle is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a straight nozzle, a shower nozzle, a spray nozzle, etc.
That is, the rinsing step is preferably a step of supplying a rinsing liquid to the exposed film through a straight nozzle or continuously supplying the rinsing liquid to the exposed film, and more preferably a step of supplying the rinsing liquid through a spray nozzle.
The method of supplying the rinse liquid in the rinsing step may include a step of continuously supplying the rinse liquid to the substrate, a step of keeping the rinse liquid substantially stationary on the substrate, a step of vibrating the rinse liquid on the substrate by ultrasonic waves or the like, and a combination of these steps.

 リンス時間としては、10秒~10分間が好ましく、20秒~5分間がより好ましい。リンス時のリンス液の温度は、特に定めるものではないが、10~45℃が好ましく、18℃~30℃がより好ましい。 The rinsing time is preferably 10 seconds to 10 minutes, and more preferably 20 seconds to 5 minutes. The temperature of the rinse solution during rinsing is not particularly specified, but is preferably 10 to 45°C, and more preferably 18 to 30°C.

 現像工程において、現像液を用いた処理の後、又は、リンス液によるパターンの洗浄の後に、処理液とパターンとを接触させる工程を含んでもよい。また、パターン上に接する現像液又はリンス液が乾燥しきらないうちに処理液を供給するなどの方法を採用しても良い。 The development process may include a step of contacting the pattern with a processing liquid after treatment with a developer or after washing the pattern with a rinse liquid. It may also be possible to employ a method in which the processing liquid is supplied before the developer or rinse liquid in contact with the pattern has completely dried.

 上記処理液としては、水及び有機溶剤の少なくとも一方と、塩基性化合物及び塩基発生剤の少なくとも一方とを含む処理液が挙げられる。
 上記有機溶剤、及び、塩基性化合物及び塩基発生剤の少なくとも一方の好ましい態様は、上述のリンス液において用いられる有機溶剤、及び、塩基性化合物及び塩基発生剤の少なくとも一方の好ましい態様と同様である。
 処理液のパターンへの供給方法は、上述のリンス液の供給方法と同様の方法を用いることができ、好ましい態様も同様である。
The treatment liquid may include a treatment liquid containing at least one of water and an organic solvent, and at least one of a basic compound and a base generator.
Preferred aspects of the organic solvent, and at least one of the basic compound and the base generator are the same as the preferred aspects of the organic solvent, and at least one of the basic compound and the base generator used in the rinse liquid described above.
The method of supplying the processing liquid to the pattern can be the same as the method of supplying the rinse liquid described above, and the preferred embodiments are also the same.

 処理液における塩基性化合物又は塩基発生剤の含有量は、処理液の全質量に対して、10質量%以下が好ましく、5質量%以下がより好ましい。上記含有量の下限は特に限定されないが、例えば0.1質量%以上であることが好ましい。
 また、塩基性化合物又は塩基発生剤が処理液が用いられる環境で固体である場合、塩基性化合物又は塩基発生剤の含有量は、処理液の全固形分に対して、70~100質量%であることも好ましい。
 処理液が塩基性化合物及び塩基発生剤の少なくとも一方を含む場合、処理液は塩基性化合物及び塩基発生剤の少なくとも一方を1種のみ含有してもよいし、2種以上を含有してもよい。塩基性化合物及び塩基発生剤の少なくとも一方が2種以上である場合は、その合計が上記範囲であることが好ましい。
The content of the basic compound or base generator in the treatment liquid is preferably 10% by mass or less, and more preferably 5% by mass or less, based on the total mass of the treatment liquid. The lower limit of the content is not particularly limited, but is preferably, for example, 0.1% by mass or more.
Furthermore, when the basic compound or base generator is solid in the environment in which the treatment liquid is used, the content of the basic compound or base generator is preferably 70 to 100 mass % relative to the total solid content of the treatment liquid.
When the treatment liquid contains at least one of a basic compound and a base generator, the treatment liquid may contain only one kind of at least one of a basic compound and a base generator, or may contain two or more kinds. When there are two or more kinds of at least one of a basic compound and a base generator, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is in the above range.

<加熱工程>
 現像工程により得られたパターン(リンス工程を行う場合は、リンス後のパターン)は、上記現像により得られたパターンを加熱する加熱工程に供されてもよい。
 すなわち、本発明の硬化物の製造方法は、現像工程により得られたパターンを加熱する加熱工程を含んでもよい。
 また、本発明の硬化物の製造方法は、現像工程を行わずに他の方法で得られたパターン、又は、膜形成工程により得られた膜を加熱する加熱工程を含んでもよい。
 加熱工程において、ポリイミド前駆体等の樹脂は環化してポリイミド等の樹脂となる。
 また、特定樹脂又は特定樹脂以外の架橋剤における未反応の架橋性基の架橋なども進行する。
 加熱工程における加熱温度(最高加熱温度)としては、50~450℃が好ましく、150~350℃がより好ましく、150~250℃が更に好ましく、160~250℃が一層好ましく、160~230℃が特に好ましい。
<Heating process>
The pattern obtained by the development step (if a rinsing step is performed, the pattern after rinsing) may be subjected to a heating step in which the pattern obtained by the development step is heated.
That is, the method for producing a cured product of the present invention may include a heating step of heating the pattern obtained in the development step.
The method for producing a cured product of the present invention may also include a heating step of heating a pattern obtained by another method without performing a development step, or a film obtained in the film-forming step.
In the heating step, the resin such as the polyimide precursor is cyclized to form a resin such as a polyimide.
Furthermore, crosslinking of unreacted crosslinkable groups in the specific resin or in the crosslinking agent other than the specific resin also proceeds.
The heating temperature (maximum heating temperature) in the heating step is preferably 50 to 450°C, more preferably 150 to 350°C, even more preferably 150 to 250°C, still more preferably 160 to 250°C, and particularly preferably 160 to 230°C.

 加熱工程は、加熱により、上記塩基発生剤から発生した塩基等の作用により、上記パターン内で上記ポリイミド前駆体の環化反応を促進する工程であることが好ましい。 The heating step is preferably a step in which the cyclization reaction of the polyimide precursor is promoted within the pattern by the action of the base generated from the base generator due to heating.

 加熱工程における加熱は、加熱開始時の温度から最高加熱温度まで1~12℃/分の昇温速度で行うことが好ましい。上記昇温速度は2~10℃/分がより好ましく、3~10℃/分が更に好ましい。昇温速度を1℃/分以上とすることにより、生産性を確保しつつ、酸又は溶剤の過剰な揮発を防止することができ、昇温速度を12℃/分以下とすることにより、硬化物の残存応力を緩和することができる。
 加えて、急速加熱可能なオーブンの場合、加熱開始時の温度から最高加熱温度まで1~8℃/秒の昇温速度で行うことが好ましく、2~7℃/秒がより好ましく、3~6℃/秒が更に好ましい。
The heating step is preferably carried out at a temperature increase rate of 1 to 12°C/min from the temperature at the start of heating to the maximum heating temperature. The temperature increase rate is more preferably 2 to 10°C/min, and even more preferably 3 to 10°C/min. By setting the temperature increase rate to 1°C/min or more, it is possible to prevent excessive volatilization of the acid or solvent while ensuring productivity, and by setting the temperature increase rate to 12°C/min or less, it is possible to alleviate residual stress in the cured product.
Additionally, in the case of a rapid heating oven, the heating rate from the initial temperature to the maximum heating temperature is preferably 1 to 8°C/sec, more preferably 2 to 7°C/sec, and even more preferably 3 to 6°C/sec.

 加熱開始時の温度は、20℃~150℃が好ましく、20℃~130℃がより好ましく、25℃~120℃が更に好ましい。加熱開始時の温度は、最高加熱温度まで加熱する工程を開始する際の温度のことをいう。例えば、本発明の樹脂組成物を基材の上に適用した後、乾燥させる場合、この乾燥後の膜(層)の温度であり、例えば、樹脂組成物に含まれる溶剤の沸点よりも、30~200℃低い温度から昇温させることが好ましい。 The temperature at the start of heating is preferably 20°C to 150°C, more preferably 20°C to 130°C, and even more preferably 25°C to 120°C. The temperature at the start of heating refers to the temperature at which the process of heating up to the maximum heating temperature begins. For example, when the resin composition of the present invention is applied to a substrate and then dried, this is the temperature of the film (layer) after drying. For example, it is preferable to raise the temperature from a temperature 30 to 200°C lower than the boiling point of the solvent contained in the resin composition.

 加熱時間(最高加熱温度での加熱時間)は、5~360分が好ましく、10~300分がより好ましく、15~240分が更に好ましい。 The heating time (heating time at the maximum heating temperature) is preferably 5 to 360 minutes, more preferably 10 to 300 minutes, and even more preferably 15 to 240 minutes.

 特に多層の積層体を形成する場合、層間の密着性の観点から、加熱温度は30℃以上であることが好ましく、80℃以上がより好ましく、100℃以上が更に好ましく、120℃以上が特に好ましい。
 上記加熱温度の上限は、350℃以下が好ましく、250℃以下がより好ましく、240℃以下が更に好ましい。
In particular, when forming a multilayer laminate, from the viewpoint of adhesion between layers, the heating temperature is preferably 30°C or higher, more preferably 80°C or higher, even more preferably 100°C or higher, and particularly preferably 120°C or higher.
The upper limit of the heating temperature is preferably 350°C or less, more preferably 250°C or less, and even more preferably 240°C or less.

 加熱は段階的に行ってもよい。例として、25℃から120℃まで3℃/分で昇温し、120℃にて60分保持し、120℃から180℃まで2℃/分で昇温し、180℃にて120分保持する、といった工程を行ってもよい。また、米国特許第9159547号明細書に記載のように紫外線を照射しながら処理することも好ましい。このような前処理工程により膜の特性を向上させることが可能である。前処理工程は10秒間~2時間程度の短い時間で行うとよく、15秒~30分間がより好ましい。前処理は2段階以上のステップとしてもよく、例えば100~150℃の範囲で1段階目の前処理工程を行い、その後に150~200℃の範囲で2段階目の前処理工程を行ってもよい。
 更に、加熱後冷却してもよく、この場合の冷却速度としては、1~5℃/分であることが好ましい。
Heating may be performed in stages. For example, the temperature may be increased from 25°C to 120°C at a rate of 3°C/min, held at 120°C for 60 minutes, increased from 120°C to 180°C at a rate of 2°C/min, and held at 180°C for 120 minutes. It is also preferable to treat the film while irradiating it with ultraviolet light, as described in U.S. Pat. No. 9,159,547. Such a pretreatment step can improve the film properties. The pretreatment step may be performed for a short period of time, preferably from 10 seconds to 2 hours, more preferably from 15 seconds to 30 minutes. The pretreatment may be performed in two or more steps. For example, a first pretreatment step may be performed in the range of 100 to 150°C, followed by a second pretreatment step in the range of 150 to 200°C.
Furthermore, after heating, the material may be cooled, and in this case, the cooling rate is preferably 1 to 5° C./min.

 加熱工程は、窒素、ヘリウム、アルゴンなどの不活性ガスを流す、減圧下で行う等により、低酸素濃度の雰囲気で行うことが特定樹脂の分解を防ぐ観点で好ましい。酸素濃度は、50ppm(体積比)以下が好ましく、20ppm(体積比)以下がより好ましい。
 加熱工程における加熱手段としては、特に限定されないが、例えばホットプレート、赤外炉、電熱式オーブン、熱風式オーブン、赤外線オーブンなどが挙げられる。
From the viewpoint of preventing decomposition of the specific resin, the heating step is preferably performed in an atmosphere with a low oxygen concentration by flowing an inert gas such as nitrogen, helium, or argon, or by performing the heating step under reduced pressure, etc. The oxygen concentration is preferably 50 ppm (volume ratio) or less, more preferably 20 ppm (volume ratio) or less.
The heating means in the heating step is not particularly limited, but examples thereof include a hot plate, an infrared oven, an electric heating oven, a hot air oven, and an infrared oven.

<現像後露光工程>
 現像工程により得られたパターン(リンス工程を行う場合は、リンス後のパターン)は、上記加熱工程に代えて、又は、上記加熱工程に加えて、現像工程後のパターンを露光する現像後露光工程に供されてもよい。
 すなわち、本発明の硬化物の製造方法は、現像工程により得られたパターンを露光する現像後露光工程を含んでもよい。本発明の硬化物の製造方法は、加熱工程及び現像後露光工程を含んでもよいし、加熱工程及び現像後露光工程の一方のみを含んでもよい。
 現像後露光工程においては、例えば、光塩基発生剤の感光によってポリイミド前駆体等の環化が進行する反応や、光酸発生剤の感光によって酸分解性基の脱離が進行する反応などを促進することができる。
 現像後露光工程においては、現像工程において得られたパターンの少なくとも一部が露光されればよいが、上記パターンの全部が露光されることが好ましい。
 現像後露光工程における露光量は、感光性化合物が感度を有する波長における露光エネルギー換算で、50~20,000mJ/cmが好ましく、100~15,000mJ/cmがより好ましい。
 現像後露光工程は、例えば、上述の露光工程における光源を用いて行うことができ、ブロードバンド光を用いることが好ましい。
<Post-development exposure step>
The pattern obtained by the development step (if a rinsing step is performed, the pattern after rinsing) may be subjected to a post-development exposure step in which the pattern after the development step is exposed to light, instead of or in addition to the heating step.
That is, the method for producing a cured product of the present invention may include a post-development exposure step of exposing the pattern obtained by the development step. The method for producing a cured product of the present invention may include both a heating step and a post-development exposure step, or may include only one of the heating step and the post-development exposure step.
In the post-development exposure step, for example, a reaction in which cyclization of a polyimide precursor or the like progresses due to exposure of a photobase generator to light, or a reaction in which elimination of an acid-decomposable group progresses due to exposure of a photoacid generator to light, can be promoted.
In the post-development exposure step, it is sufficient that at least a part of the pattern obtained in the development step is exposed, but it is preferable that the entire pattern is exposed.
The exposure dose in the post-development exposure step is preferably 50 to 20,000 mJ/cm 2 , more preferably 100 to 15,000 mJ/cm 2 , in terms of exposure energy at a wavelength to which the photosensitive compound has sensitivity.
The post-development exposure step can be carried out using, for example, the light source used in the exposure step described above, and it is preferable to use broadband light.

<金属層形成工程>
 現像工程により得られたパターン(加熱工程及び現像後露光工程の少なくとも一方に供されたものが好ましい)は、パターン上に金属層を形成する金属層形成工程に供されてもよい。
 すなわち、本発明の硬化物の製造方法は、現像工程により得られたパターン(加熱工程及び現像後露光工程の少なくとも一方に供されたものが好ましい)上に金属層を形成する金属層形成工程を含むことが好ましい。
<Metal layer formation process>
The pattern obtained by the development step (which is preferably subjected to at least one of the heating step and the post-development exposure step) may be subjected to a metal layer forming step in which a metal layer is formed on the pattern.
That is, the method for producing a cured product of the present invention preferably includes a metal layer forming step of forming a metal layer on the pattern obtained by the development step (preferably the pattern has been subjected to at least one of a heating step and a post-development exposure step).

 金属層としては、特に限定なく、既存の金属種を使用することができ、銅、アルミニウム、ニッケル、バナジウム、チタン、クロム、コバルト、金、タングステン、錫、銀及びこれらの金属を含む合金が例示され、銅及びアルミニウムがより好ましく、銅が更に好ましい。 The metal layer is not particularly limited and any existing metal species can be used, including copper, aluminum, nickel, vanadium, titanium, chromium, cobalt, gold, tungsten, tin, silver, and alloys containing these metals. Copper and aluminum are more preferred, and copper is even more preferred.

 金属層の形成方法は、特に限定なく、既存の方法を適用することができる。例えば、特開2007-157879号公報、特表2001-521288号公報、特開2004-214501号公報、特開2004-101850号公報、米国特許第7888181号明細書、米国特許第9177926号明細書に記載された方法を使用することができる。例えば、フォトリソグラフィ、PVD(物理蒸着法)、CVD(化学気相成長法)、リフトオフ、電解めっき、無電解めっき、エッチング、印刷、及びこれらを組み合わせた方法などが考えられる。より具体的には、スパッタリング、フォトリソグラフィ及びエッチングを組み合わせたパターニング方法、フォトリソグラフィと電解めっきを組み合わせたパターニング方法が挙げられる。めっきの好ましい態様としては、硫酸銅やシアン化銅めっき液を用いた電解めっきが挙げられる。 The method for forming the metal layer is not particularly limited, and existing methods can be applied. For example, the methods described in JP 2007-157879 A, JP 2001-521288 A, JP 2004-214501 A, JP 2004-101850 A, U.S. Pat. No. 7,888,181, and U.S. Pat. No. 9,177,926 can be used. Examples of suitable methods include photolithography, PVD (physical vapor deposition), CVD (chemical vapor deposition), lift-off, electroplating, electroless plating, etching, printing, and combinations of these. More specific examples include patterning methods that combine sputtering, photolithography, and etching, and patterning methods that combine photolithography and electroplating. Preferred plating methods include electroplating using copper sulfate or copper cyanide plating solutions.

 金属層の厚さとしては、最も厚肉の部分で、0.01~50μmが好ましく、1~10μmがより好ましい。 The thickness of the metal layer at its thickest point is preferably 0.01 to 50 μm, and more preferably 1 to 10 μm.

<用途>
 本発明の硬化物の製造方法、又は、硬化物の適用可能な分野としては、電子デバイスの絶縁膜、再配線層用層間絶縁膜、ストレスバッファ膜などが挙げられる。そのほか、封止フィルム、基板材料(フレキシブルプリント基板のベースフィルムやカバーレイ、層間絶縁膜)、又は上記のような実装用途の絶縁膜をエッチングでパターン形成することなどが挙げられる。これらの用途については、例えば、サイエンス&テクノロジー(株)「ポリイミドの高機能化と応用技術」2008年4月、柿本雅明/監修、CMCテクニカルライブラリー「ポリイミド材料の基礎と開発」2011年11月発行、日本ポリイミド・芳香族系高分子研究会/編「最新ポリイミド 基礎と応用」エヌ・ティー・エス,2010年8月等を参照することができる。
<Application>
Examples of fields to which the cured product manufacturing method of the present invention or the cured product can be applied include insulating films for electronic devices, interlayer insulating films for rewiring layers, stress buffer films, etc. Other examples include etching patterns for sealing films, substrate materials (base films, coverlays, and interlayer insulating films for flexible printed circuit boards), and insulating films for packaging applications such as those described above. For these applications, see, for example, Science & Technology Co., Ltd.'s "High Performance Polyimide and Application Technology," April 2008, edited by Masaaki Kakimoto, CMC Technical Library's "Fundamentals and Development of Polyimide Materials," published November 2011, and Japan Polyimide and Aromatic Polymer Research Association's "Latest Polyimide Fundamentals and Applications," NTS, August 2010.

 本発明の硬化物の製造方法、又は、本発明の硬化物は、オフセット版面又はスクリーン版面などの版面の製造、成形部品のエッチングへの使用、エレクトロニクス、特に、マイクロエレクトロニクスにおける保護ラッカー及び誘電層の製造などにも用いることもできる。 The method for producing the cured product of the present invention, or the cured product of the present invention, can also be used to produce printing plates such as offset printing plates or screen printing plates, to etch molded parts, and to produce protective lacquers and dielectric layers in electronics, particularly microelectronics.

(積層体、及び、積層体の製造方法)
 本発明の積層体とは、本発明の硬化物からなる層を複数層有する構造体をいう。
 積層体は、硬化物からなる層を2層以上含む積層体であり、3層以上積層した積層体としてもよい。
 上記積層体に含まれる2層以上の上記硬化物からなる層のうち、少なくとも1つが本発明の硬化物からなる層であり、硬化物の収縮、又は、上記収縮に伴う硬化物の変形等を抑制する観点からは、上記積層体に含まれる全ての硬化物からなる層が本発明の硬化物からなる層であることも好ましい。
(Laminate and method for manufacturing laminate)
The laminate of the present invention refers to a structure having a plurality of layers each made of the cured product of the present invention.
The laminate is a laminate including two or more layers made of a cured product, and may be a laminate including three or more layers.
Of the two or more layers made of the cured product contained in the laminate, at least one is a layer made of the cured product of the present invention, and from the viewpoint of suppressing shrinkage of the cured product or deformation of the cured product associated with the shrinkage, it is also preferable that all of the layers made of the cured product contained in the laminate are layers made of the cured product of the present invention.

 すなわち、本発明の積層体の製造方法は、本発明の硬化物の製造方法を含むことが好ましく、本発明の硬化物の製造方法を複数回繰り返すことを含むことがより好ましい。 In other words, the method for producing a laminate of the present invention preferably includes the method for producing a cured product of the present invention, and more preferably includes repeating the method for producing a cured product of the present invention multiple times.

 本発明の積層体は、硬化物からなる層を2層以上含み、上記硬化物からなる層同士のいずれかの間に金属層を含む態様が好ましい。上記金属層は、上記金属層形成工程により形成されることが好ましい。
 すなわち、本発明の積層体の製造方法は、複数回行われる硬化物の製造方法の間に、硬化物からなる層上に金属層を形成する金属層形成工程を更に含むことが好ましい。金属層形成工程の好ましい態様は上述の通りである。
 上記積層体としては、例えば、第一の硬化物からなる層、金属層、第二の硬化物からなる層の3つの層がこの順に積層された層構造を少なくとも含む積層体が好ましいものとして挙げられる。
 上記第一の硬化物からなる層及び上記第二の硬化物からなる層は、いずれも本発明の硬化物からなる層であることが好ましい。上記第一の硬化物からなる層の形成に用いられる本発明の樹脂組成物と、上記第二の硬化物からなる層の形成に用いられる本発明の樹脂組成物とは、組成が同一の組成物であってもよいし、組成が異なる組成物であってもよい。本発明の積層体における金属層は、再配線層などの金属配線として好ましく用いられる。
The laminate of the present invention preferably includes two or more layers made of a cured product, and a metal layer between any two of the layers made of the cured product. The metal layer is preferably formed by the metal layer-forming step.
That is, the method for producing a laminate of the present invention preferably further includes a metal layer-forming step of forming a metal layer on the layer made of the cured product, between the steps for producing a cured product that are performed multiple times. Preferred aspects of the metal layer-forming step are as described above.
As the laminate, for example, a laminate including at least a layer structure in which three layers, a layer made of a first cured product, a metal layer, and a layer made of a second cured product, are laminated in this order, can be mentioned as a preferred example.
It is preferable that the layer made of the first cured product and the layer made of the second cured product are both layers made of the cured product of the present invention. The resin composition of the present invention used to form the layer made of the first cured product and the resin composition of the present invention used to form the layer made of the second cured product may have the same composition or different compositions. The metal layer in the laminate of the present invention is preferably used as metal wiring such as a rewiring layer.

<積層工程>
 本発明の積層体の製造方法は、積層工程を含むことが好ましい。
 積層工程とは、パターン(樹脂層)又は金属層の表面に、再度、(a)膜形成工程(層形成工程)、(b)露光工程、(c)現像工程、(d)加熱工程及び現像後露光工程の少なくとも一方を、この順に行うことを含む一連の工程である。ただし、(a)膜形成工程および(d)加熱工程及び現像後露光工程の少なくとも一方を繰り返す態様であってもよい。また、(d)加熱工程及び現像後露光工程の少なくとも一方の後には(e)金属層形成工程を含んでもよい。積層工程には、更に、上記乾燥工程等を適宜含んでいてもよいことは言うまでもない。
<Lamination process>
The method for producing the laminate of the present invention preferably includes a lamination step.
The lamination process is a series of processes including (a) a film formation process (layer formation process), (b) an exposure process, (c) a development process, and (d) at least one of a heating process and a post-development exposure process, which are carried out again on the surface of the pattern (resin layer) or metal layer in this order. However, at least one of the (a) film formation process and the (d) heating process and the post-development exposure process may be repeated. Furthermore, after at least one of the (d) heating process and the post-development exposure process, the (e) metal layer formation process may be included. It goes without saying that the lamination process may further include the above-mentioned drying process, etc. as appropriate.

 積層工程後、更に積層工程を行う場合には、上記露光工程後、上記加熱工程の後、又は、上記金属層形成工程後に、更に、表面活性化処理工程を行ってもよい。表面活性化処理としては、プラズマ処理が例示される。表面活性化処理の詳細については後述する。 If a further lamination step is performed after the lamination step, a surface activation treatment step may be performed after the exposure step, the heating step, or the metal layer formation step. An example of a surface activation treatment is plasma treatment. Details of the surface activation treatment will be described later.

 上記積層工程は、2~20回行うことが好ましく、2~9回行うことがより好ましい。
 例えば、樹脂層/金属層/樹脂層/金属層/樹脂層/金属層のように、樹脂層を2層以上20層以下とする構成が好ましく、2層以上9層以下とする構成が更に好ましい。
 上記各層はそれぞれ、組成、形状、膜厚等が同一であってもよいし、異なっていてもよい。
The lamination step is preferably carried out 2 to 20 times, more preferably 2 to 9 times.
For example, a structure of 2 to 20 resin layers, such as resin layer/metal layer/resin layer/metal layer/resin layer/metal layer, is preferred, and a structure of 2 to 9 resin layers is more preferred.
The above layers may be the same or different in composition, shape, film thickness, etc.

 本発明では特に、金属層を設けた後、更に、上記金属層を覆うように、上記本発明の樹脂組成物の硬化物(樹脂層)を形成する態様が好ましい。具体的には、(a)膜形成工程、(b)露光工程、(c)現像工程、(d)加熱工程及び現像後露光工程の少なくとも一方、(e)金属層形成工程、の順序で繰り返す態様、又は、(a)膜形成工程、(d)加熱工程及び現像後露光工程の少なくとも一方、(e)金属層形成工程の順序で繰り返す態様が挙げられる。本発明の樹脂組成物層(樹脂層)を積層する積層工程と、金属層形成工程を交互に行うことにより、本発明の樹脂組成物層(樹脂層)と金属層を交互に積層することができる。 In a particularly preferred embodiment of the present invention, after providing a metal layer, a cured product (resin layer) of the resin composition of the present invention is further formed to cover the metal layer. Specific examples include an embodiment in which the following steps are repeated in this order: (a) film formation step, (b) exposure step, (c) development step, (d) at least one of a heating step and a post-development exposure step, and (e) metal layer formation step; or an embodiment in which the following steps are repeated in this order: (a) film formation step, (d) at least one of a heating step and a post-development exposure step, and (e) metal layer formation step. By alternately performing the lamination step of laminating layers of the resin composition of the present invention (resin layers) and the metal layer formation step, it is possible to alternately laminate layers of the resin composition of the present invention (resin layers) and metal layers.

(表面活性化処理工程)
 本発明の積層体の製造方法は、上記金属層および樹脂組成物層の少なくとも一部を表面活性化処理する、表面活性化処理工程を含むことが好ましい。
 表面活性化処理工程は、通常、金属層形成工程の後に行うが、上記現像工程の後(好ましくは、加熱工程及び現像後露光工程の少なくとも一方の後)、樹脂組成物層に表面活性化処理工程を行ってから、金属層形成工程を行ってもよい。
 表面活性化処理は、金属層の少なくとも一部のみに行ってもよいし、露光後の樹脂組成物層の少なくとも一部のみに行ってもよいし、金属層および露光後の樹脂組成物層の両方について、それぞれ、少なくとも一部に行ってもよい。表面活性化処理は、金属層の少なくとも一部について行うことが好ましく、金属層のうち、表面に樹脂組成物層を形成する領域の一部または全部に表面活性化処理を行うことが好ましい。このように、金属層の表面に表面活性化処理を行うことにより、その表面に設けられる樹脂組成物層(膜)との密着性を向上させることができる。
 表面活性化処理は、露光後の樹脂組成物層(樹脂層)の一部または全部についても行うことが好ましい。このように、樹脂組成物層の表面に表面活性化処理を行うことにより、表面活性化処理した表面に設けられる金属層や樹脂層との密着性を向上させることができる。特にネガ型現像を行う場合など、樹脂組成物層が硬化されている場合には、表面処理によるダメージを受けにくく、密着性が向上しやすい。
 表面活性化処理は、例えば、国際公開第2021/112189号の段落0415に記載の方法により実施することができる。この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
(Surface activation treatment step)
The method for producing a laminate of the present invention preferably includes a surface activation treatment step of subjecting at least a portion of the metal layer and the resin composition layer to a surface activation treatment.
The surface activation treatment step is usually performed after the metal layer formation step, but the resin composition layer may be subjected to the surface activation treatment step after the above-mentioned development step (preferably after at least one of the heating step and the post-development exposure step) and then the metal layer formation step may be performed.
The surface activation treatment may be performed on at least a portion of the metal layer, or on at least a portion of the resin composition layer after exposure, or on at least a portion of both the metal layer and the resin composition layer after exposure. The surface activation treatment is preferably performed on at least a portion of the metal layer, and it is preferable to perform the surface activation treatment on part or all of the region of the metal layer on which the resin composition layer is formed on the surface. In this way, by performing the surface activation treatment on the surface of the metal layer, it is possible to improve the adhesion with the resin composition layer (film) provided on the surface.
The surface activation treatment is preferably performed on a part or all of the resin composition layer (resin layer) after exposure. By performing the surface activation treatment on the surface of the resin composition layer in this way, it is possible to improve the adhesion with a metal layer or a resin layer provided on the surface that has been surface-activated. In particular, when negative development is performed, for example, if the resin composition layer is cured, it is less susceptible to damage due to the surface treatment, and adhesion is likely to be improved.
The surface activation treatment can be carried out, for example, by the method described in paragraph 0415 of WO 2021/112189, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.

(半導体デバイス及びその製造方法)
 本発明は、本発明の硬化物、又は、積層体を含む半導体デバイスも開示する。
 また、本発明は、本発明の硬化物の製造方法、又は、積層体の製造方法を含む半導体デバイスの製造方法も開示する。
 本発明の樹脂組成物を再配線層用層間絶縁膜の形成に用いた半導体デバイスの具体例としては、特開2016-027357号公報の段落0213~0218の記載及び図1の記載を参酌でき、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
(Semiconductor device and its manufacturing method)
The present invention also discloses a semiconductor device comprising the cured product or laminate of the present invention.
The present invention also discloses a method for producing a semiconductor device, which includes the method for producing the cured product of the present invention or the method for producing the laminate.
As specific examples of semiconductor devices using the resin composition of the present invention for forming an interlayer insulating film for a rewiring layer, the descriptions in paragraphs 0213 to 0218 and FIG. 1 of JP-A-2016-027357 can be referred to, and the contents of these can be incorporated into this specification.

(樹脂)
 本発明の樹脂は、式(1-1)で表される繰返し単位、及び、式(B-1)で表される基を有する。
 式(1-1)中、Xは炭素数4以上の有機基を表し、Yは炭素数4以上の有機基を表し、Rはそれぞれ独立に、下記式(R-1)で表される構造を表し、mは0~4の整数を表し、nは0以上の整数を表し、n+mは1以上の整数である。
 式(R-1)中、Lはa1+1価の連結基を表し、Aは重合性基を表し、a1は1以上の整数を表し、*は式(1-1)中のX又はYとの結合部位を表す。
 式(B-1)中、Rは2価の連結基を表し、Zは置換若しくは無置換の炭素数1~30のアルキレン基、又は、ケイ素原子を表し、Zが上記アルキレン基である場合にはnは1であり、且つ、Rは水素原子又は1価の有機基を表し、Zが上記ケイ素原子である場合にはnは3であり、且つ、Rはそれぞれ独立に、1価の有機基を表し、*は他の構造との結合部位を表す。
(resin)
The resin of the present invention has a repeating unit represented by formula (1-1) and a group represented by formula (B-1).
In formula (1-1), X1 represents an organic group having 4 or more carbon atoms, Y1 represents an organic group having 4 or more carbon atoms, R1 each independently represents a structure represented by formula (R-1) below, m represents an integer of 0 to 4, n represents an integer of 0 or more, and n+m is an integer of 1 or more.
In formula (R-1), L 1 represents a linking group having a valence of a1+1, A 1 represents a polymerizable group, a1 represents an integer of 1 or more, and * represents a bonding site with X 1 or Y 1 in formula (1-1).
In formula (B-1), R 1 represents a divalent linking group, Z 1 represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkylene group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms or a silicon atom, when Z 1 is the alkylene group, n is 1, and R 2 represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group, when Z 1 is the silicon atom, n is 3, and each R 2 independently represents a monovalent organic group, and * represents a bonding site to another structure.

 本発明の樹脂における、式(1-1)及び式(B-1)の好ましい態様は、それぞれ、上述の本発明の樹脂組成物における特定樹脂におけるこれらの式の好ましい態様と同様である。
 その他、本発明の樹脂の好ましい態様は、上述の特定樹脂の好ましい態様と同様である。
Preferred embodiments of formula (1-1) and formula (B-1) in the resin of the present invention are the same as the preferred embodiments of these formulas in the specific resin in the resin composition of the present invention described above.
Other preferred aspects of the resin of the present invention are the same as the preferred aspects of the specific resin described above.

 以下に実施例を挙げて本発明を更に具体的に説明する。以下の実施例に示す材料、使用量、割合、処理内容、処理手順等は、本発明の趣旨を逸脱しない限り、適宜、変更することができる。従って、本発明の範囲は以下に示す具体例に限定されるものではない。「部」、「%」は特に述べない限り、質量基準である。 The present invention will be explained in more detail below with reference to the following examples. The materials, amounts used, ratios, processing details, processing procedures, etc. shown in the following examples can be modified as appropriate without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Therefore, the scope of the present invention is not limited to the specific examples shown below. Unless otherwise specified, "parts" and "%" are based on mass.

<合成例>
〔3-クロロプロピルメタクリレートの合成〕
 フラスコに、3-クロロプロパノールを25.00g(264ミリモル)、ピリジンを25.1g(316.8ミリモル)、テトラヒドロフラン150gに溶解し、-10℃~0℃に冷却した。続いて、メタクリル酸クロリド29.03g(277.2ミリモル)を滴下ロートにて、30分かけて滴下し、20℃~25℃に昇温し、3時間撹拌した。
続いて、上記反応液を2Lの分液ロートに移し、酢酸エチル1Lで希釈した後、水500mLで2回、0.5N(mol/L)塩酸水溶液300mLで2回、飽和重曹水500mLで2回、飽和食塩水500mLで洗浄し、硫酸マグネシウムで乾燥した後、p-メトキシフェノール0.02gを加え、エバポレーターで溶媒を取り除き、3-クロロプロピルメタクリレートを40g得た。
<Synthesis Example>
[Synthesis of 3-chloropropyl methacrylate]
In a flask, 25.00 g (264 mmol) of 3-chloropropanol, 25.1 g (316.8 mmol) of pyridine, and 150 g of tetrahydrofuran were dissolved and cooled to −10° C. to 0° C. Subsequently, 29.03 g (277.2 mmol) of methacrylic acid chloride was added dropwise using a dropping funnel over 30 minutes, and the mixture was heated to 20° C. to 25° C. and stirred for 3 hours.
Subsequently, the reaction solution was transferred to a 2 L separatory funnel and diluted with 1 L of ethyl acetate. After that, the reaction solution was washed twice with 500 mL of water, twice with 300 mL of 0.5 N (mol/L) aqueous hydrochloric acid, twice with 500 mL of saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate, and 500 mL of saturated saline, and then dried over magnesium sulfate. After that, 0.02 g of p-methoxyphenol was added, and the solvent was removed using an evaporator to obtain 40 g of 3-chloropropyl methacrylate.

〔AA-1aの合成〕
 48.65g(225ミリモル)の3,3’-ジヒドロキシベンジジンとジメチルホルムアミド375mLを1Lのフラスコ中で混合した。氷冷下、二炭酸ジ-t-ブチル98.21g(450ミリモル)を滴下した。滴下終了後60℃の温度で5時間撹拌した。反応終了後、室温まで冷却した後、2,2,6,6-テトラメチルピペリジン1-オキシル フリーラジカルを35mg、p-クロロメチルスチレン68.68g(450ミリモル)、炭酸カリウム74.63g(540ミリモル)とヨウ化カリウム8.96g(54.0ミリモル)を添加し、60℃の温度で3時間撹拌した。反応終了後、吸引ろ過操作によりろ過を行い、ろ液を500mLの水中に滴下した。白色結晶が析出したので吸引ろ過により析出固体を回収した。得られた白色固体はアセトン1,000mLを用いて60℃下で再結晶精製を行った。下記中間体AA-1aが125g(収率85.6%)得られた。
 AA-1aの構造を下記に示す。下記構造であることはH-NMRスペクトルから確認した。
[Synthesis of AA-1a]
48.65 g (225 mmol) of 3,3'-dihydroxybenzidine and 375 mL of dimethylformamide were mixed in a 1 L flask. Under ice cooling, 98.21 g (450 mmol) of di-t-butyl dicarbonate was added dropwise. After the completion of the dropwise addition, the mixture was stirred at 60°C for 5 hours. After the reaction was completed and the mixture was cooled to room temperature, 35 mg of 2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine 1-oxyl free radical, 68.68 g (450 mmol) of p-chloromethylstyrene, 74.63 g (540 mmol) of potassium carbonate, and 8.96 g (54.0 mmol) of potassium iodide were added, and the mixture was stirred at 60°C for 3 hours. After the reaction was completed, the mixture was filtered by suction filtration, and the filtrate was added dropwise to 500 mL of water. White crystals precipitated, and the precipitated solid was recovered by suction filtration. The obtained white solid was purified by recrystallization using 1,000 mL of acetone at 60°C. 125 g (yield 85.6%) of the following intermediate AA-1a was obtained.
The structure of AA-1a is shown below: The structure was confirmed to be as shown below by 1 H-NMR spectrum.

〔AA-2a~AA-4aの合成〕
 3,3’-ジヒドロキシベンジジンを2,2-ビス(3-アミノ-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)プロパンに変更した以外は、AA-1aと同様の方法で、AA-2aを合成した。
 クロロメチルスチレンを10-クロロ-3-デシンに変更した以外は、AA-1aと同様の方法で、AA-3aを合成した。
 クロロメチルスチレンを上記で合成した3-クロロプロピルメタクリレートに変更した以外は、AA-1aと同様の方法で、AA-4aを合成した。
 AA-2a~AA-4aの構造を下記に示す。下記構造であることはH-NMRスペクトルから確認した。
[Synthesis of AA-2a to AA-4a]
AA-2a was synthesized in the same manner as AA-1a, except that 3,3'-dihydroxybenzidine was replaced with 2,2-bis(3-amino-4-hydroxyphenyl)propane.
AA-3a was synthesized in the same manner as AA-1a, except that chloromethylstyrene was changed to 10-chloro-3-decyne.
AA-4a was synthesized in the same manner as AA-1a, except that chloromethylstyrene was replaced with the 3-chloropropyl methacrylate synthesized above.
The structures of AA-2a to AA-4a are shown below: The structures were confirmed to be as shown below by 1 H-NMR spectrum.

〔AA-1の合成〕
 75.0g(115.6ミリモル)の(AA-1a)と塩化メチレン500mLを1Lのフラスコ中で混合した。室温下でトリフルオロ酢酸131.8g(1156ミリモル)を添加した後、40℃の温度で5時間撹拌した。反応終了後、氷冷下でメタノール250mL、次いでトリエチルアミン117.0g(1156ミリモル)を滴下した。淡黄色の結晶が析出したので吸引ろ過により析出固体を回収した。メタノール750mLで懸濁洗浄を行い、(AA-1)40.5g(収率73%)を得た。AA-1の構造を下記に示す。下記構造であることはH-NMRスペクトルから確認した。
[Synthesis of AA-1]
75.0 g (115.6 mmol) of (AA-1a) and 500 mL of methylene chloride were mixed in a 1 L flask. 131.8 g (1156 mmol) of trifluoroacetic acid was added at room temperature, and then the mixture was stirred at 40°C for 5 hours. After the reaction was completed, 250 mL of methanol was added dropwise under ice cooling, followed by 117.0 g (1156 mmol) of triethylamine. Pale yellow crystals were precipitated, and the precipitated solid was recovered by suction filtration. The mixture was suspended and washed in 750 mL of methanol, yielding 40.5 g (73% yield) of (AA-1). The structure of AA-1 is shown below. The structure was confirmed to be as shown below by 1 H-NMR spectrum.

〔AA-2~AA-4の合成〕
 AA-1aの代わりにAA-2a~AA-4aのいずれかを用いた以外は、AA-1と同様の方法で、AA-2~AA-4を合成した。
[Synthesis of AA-2 to AA-4]
AA-2 to AA-4 were synthesized in the same manner as for AA-1, except that one of AA-2a to AA-4a was used instead of AA-1a.

〔合成例SP-1:ポリイミド(SP-1)の合成〕
 30.0g(57.64ミリモル)の4,4’-(4,4’-イソプロピリデンジフェノキシ)ジフタル酸無水物と0.08gの2,2,6,6-テトラメチルピペリジン1-オキシル フリーラジカルをN-メチルピロリドン(NMP)120gに溶解し、溶解液を得た。続いて、9.34g(25.36ミリモル)の4,4‘-ビス(3-アミノフェノキシ)ビフェニル、11.38g(25.36ミリモル)のAA-1を100gのNMPに溶解させ、10℃~25℃の温度で1時間かけて上記溶解液に滴下し、25℃で2時間撹拌した後、1.49g(12.68ミリモル)の4-アミノフェニルアセチレンを添加し、更に25℃で2時間撹拌した。続いて、ピリジン18.2gと無水酢酸14.7gを添加し、80℃で4時間反応させた。反応終了後、25℃まで冷却し、テトラヒドロフラン200gで希釈した。続いて、2.0Lのメタノールと0.5Lの水の混合液に反応液を滴下させて、15分撹拌した後、ポリイミド樹脂をろ過した。次に、1Lの水で上記樹脂をリスラリーし、ろ過した後、1Lのメタノールで再度リスラリーし、ろ過し、減圧下、40℃で10時間乾燥させた。続いて、上記で乾燥した樹脂をテトラヒドロフラン250gに溶解し、イオン交換樹脂(MB-1:オルガノ社製)40gを添加し、4時間撹拌し、イオン交換樹脂をろ過して取り除いた後、2Lのメタノールの中でポリイミド樹脂を沈殿させ、15分間撹拌した。ポリイミド樹脂を濾過して取得し、減圧下、45℃で1日間乾燥しポリイミド樹脂(SP-1)を得た。
得られたポリイミド(SP-1)の重量平均分子量は20,100、数平均分子量は8,000であった。ポリイミド(SP-1)は、下記式(SP-1)で表される繰返し単位を有する樹脂である。繰返し単位の構造は、H-NMRスペクトルから決定した。下記構造中、繰返し単位の添え字は各繰返し単位の含有モル比を表す。
[Synthesis Example SP-1: Synthesis of Polyimide (SP-1)]
30.0 g (57.64 mmol) of 4,4'-(4,4'-isopropylidenediphenoxy)diphthalic anhydride and 0.08 g of 2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine 1-oxyl free radical were dissolved in 120 g of N-methylpyrrolidone (NMP) to obtain a solution. Subsequently, 9.34 g (25.36 mmol) of 4,4'-bis(3-aminophenoxy)biphenyl and 11.38 g (25.36 mmol) of AA-1 were dissolved in 100 g of NMP and added dropwise to the solution over 1 hour at a temperature of 10 to 25°C. After stirring at 25°C for 2 hours, 1.49 g (12.68 mmol) of 4-aminophenylacetylene was added and the mixture was further stirred at 25°C for 2 hours. Subsequently, 18.2 g of pyridine and 14.7 g of acetic anhydride were added, and the mixture was reacted at 80°C for 4 hours. After completion of the reaction, the mixture was cooled to 25°C and diluted with 200 g of tetrahydrofuran. Subsequently, the reaction solution was added dropwise to a mixture of 2.0 L of methanol and 0.5 L of water, stirred for 15 minutes, and then the polyimide resin was filtered. Next, the resin was reslurried in 1 L of water, filtered, and then reslurried again in 1 L of methanol, filtered, and dried under reduced pressure at 40°C for 10 hours. Subsequently, the dried resin was dissolved in 250 g of tetrahydrofuran, 40 g of ion exchange resin (MB-1: manufactured by Organo Corporation) was added, and the mixture was stirred for 4 hours. The ion exchange resin was removed by filtration, and then the polyimide resin was precipitated in 2 L of methanol and stirred for 15 minutes. The polyimide resin was collected by filtration and dried under reduced pressure at 45°C for 1 day to obtain polyimide resin (SP-1).
The resulting polyimide (SP-1) had a weight-average molecular weight of 20,100 and a number-average molecular weight of 8,000. Polyimide (SP-1) is a resin having a repeating unit represented by the following formula (SP-1). The structure of the repeating unit was determined from 1 H-NMR spectrum. In the following structure, the subscripts of the repeating units represent the molar ratio of each repeating unit.

〔合成例SP-2~SP-5、SP-9~SP-11:ポリイミド(SP-2~SP-5、SP-9~SP-11)の合成〕
 原料のジアミン及びアミン、酸無水物を変更した以外は、SP-1と同様の方法でSP-2~SP-5、SP-9~SP-11を合成した。重量平均分子量および数平均分子量は後述の表に記載した。各ポリイミドは、それぞれ下記式で表される繰返し単位を有する樹脂である。繰返し単位の構造は、H-NMRスペクトルから決定した。下記構造中、繰返し単位の添え字は各繰返し単位の含有モル比を表す。
[Synthesis Examples SP-2 to SP-5, SP-9 to SP-11: Synthesis of Polyimides (SP-2 to SP-5, SP-9 to SP-11)]
SP-2 to SP-5 and SP-9 to SP-11 were synthesized in the same manner as SP-1, except that the raw material diamine, amine, and acid anhydride were changed. The weight average molecular weight and number average molecular weight are shown in the table below. Each polyimide is a resin having a repeating unit represented by the following formula. The structure of the repeating unit was determined from 1 H-NMR spectrum. In the following structures, the subscripts of the repeating units indicate the molar ratio of each repeating unit.

〔合成例SP-6:ポリイミド(SP-6)の合成〕
 30.0g(57.64ミリモル)の4,4’-(4,4’-イソプロピリデンジフェノキシ)ジフタル酸無水物をN-メチルピロリドン(NMP)130gに溶解した。続いて、5.61g(25.94ミリモル)のHAB(和歌山精化工業(株)製)、5.51g(25.94ミリモル)のm-トリジン(東京化成工業(株)製)、2.21g(11.53ミリモル)のヘプチルアニリンを50gのNMPで洗い流しながら添加し、20℃~50℃の範囲で30分撹拌した後、トルエンを10g添加し、窒素フローしながら200℃で4時間反応し、25℃まで冷却した。
 続いて、1-クロロ―2-オクタン2.36g(16.34ミリモル)、炭酸カリウム19.92g(144ミリモル)、ヨウ化カリウム2.39g(14ミリモル)を添加し、110℃で15時間反応した後、4-(クロロメチル)スチレン15.3g(100ミリモル)及び、2,2,6,6-テトラメチルピペリジン1-オキシル フリーラジカル0.1gを添加し、更に95℃で15時間反応した。続いて、上記反応液を25℃に冷却し、テトラヒドロフラン200gで希釈し、反応液中の塩をろ紙でろ過した後、1.8Lのメタノールと0.6Lの水の混合液に反応液を滴下させて、15分撹拌し、ポリイミド樹脂をろ過した。次に、1Lの水で上記樹脂をリスラリーし、ろ過した後、1Lのメタノールで再度リスラリーし、ろ過し、減圧下、40℃で8時間乾燥させた。続いて、上記で乾燥した樹脂をテトラヒドロフラン300gに溶解し、イオン交換樹脂(MB-1:オルガノ社製)40gを添加し、4時間撹拌し、イオン交換樹脂をろ過して取り除いた後、2Lのメタノールの中でポリイミド樹脂を沈殿させ、15分間撹拌した。ポリイミド樹脂を濾過して取得し、減圧下、45℃で1日間乾燥しポリイミド樹脂(SP-6)を得た。得られたポリイミド樹脂SP-6の重量平均分子量は18,900、数平均分子量は7,800であった。ポリイミド(SP-6)は、下記式(SP-6)で表される繰返し単位を有する樹脂である。繰返し単位の構造は、H-NMRスペクトルから決定した。下記構造中、繰返し単位の添え字は各繰返し単位の含有モル比を表す。
[Synthesis Example SP-6: Synthesis of Polyimide (SP-6)]
30.0 g (57.64 mmol) of 4,4'-(4,4'-isopropylidenediphenoxy)diphthalic anhydride was dissolved in 130 g of N-methylpyrrolidone (NMP). Subsequently, 5.61 g (25.94 mmol) of HAB (manufactured by Wakayama Seika Kogyo Co., Ltd.), 5.51 g (25.94 mmol) of m-tolidine (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), and 2.21 g (11.53 mmol) of heptylaniline were added while washing with 50 g of NMP. The mixture was stirred at a temperature ranging from 20 to 50°C for 30 minutes, after which 10 g of toluene was added. The mixture was reacted at 200°C for 4 hours under a nitrogen flow and then cooled to 25°C.
Subsequently, 2.36 g (16.34 mmol) of 1-chloro-2-octane, 19.92 g (144 mmol) of potassium carbonate, and 2.39 g (14 mmol) of potassium iodide were added, and the mixture was reacted at 110 ° C. for 15 hours. Then, 15.3 g (100 mmol) of 4-(chloromethyl)styrene and 0.1 g of 2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine 1-oxyl free radical were added, and the mixture was reacted at 95 ° C. for an additional 15 hours. Subsequently, the reaction solution was cooled to 25 ° C., diluted with 200 g of tetrahydrofuran, and the salt in the reaction solution was filtered with filter paper. The reaction solution was then added dropwise to a mixture of 1.8 L of methanol and 0.6 L of water, stirred for 15 minutes, and the polyimide resin was filtered. Next, the resin was reslurried in 1 L of water and filtered, and then reslurried again in 1 L of methanol and filtered, and dried under reduced pressure at 40 ° C. for 8 hours. Next, the dried resin was dissolved in 300 g of tetrahydrofuran, and 40 g of ion exchange resin (MB-1: manufactured by Organo Corporation) was added. The mixture was stirred for 4 hours. The ion exchange resin was removed by filtration, and then the polyimide resin was precipitated in 2 L of methanol and stirred for 15 minutes. The polyimide resin was collected by filtration and dried at 45°C under reduced pressure for 1 day to obtain polyimide resin (SP-6). The resulting polyimide resin SP-6 had a weight average molecular weight of 18,900 and a number average molecular weight of 7,800. Polyimide (SP-6) is a resin having a repeating unit represented by the following formula (SP-6). The structure of the repeating unit was determined from 1 H-NMR spectrum. In the following structure, the subscripts of the repeating units indicate the molar ratio of each repeating unit.

〔合成例SP-7:ポリイミド(SP-7)の合成〕
 ジアミン原料と4-(クロロメチル)スチレンを1-クロロドデカン及び、3-クロロプロピルメタクリレートに変更した以外は、SP-6と同様の方法でSP-7を合成した。
ポリイミド樹脂SP-7の重量平均分子量は25,100、数平均分子量は9,200であった。ポリイミド(SP-7)は、下記式(SP-7)で表される繰返し単位を有する樹脂である。繰返し単位の構造は、H-NMRスペクトルから決定した。下記構造中、繰返し単位の添え字は各繰返し単位の含有モル比を表す。
[Synthesis Example SP-7: Synthesis of Polyimide (SP-7)]
SP-7 was synthesized in the same manner as SP-6, except that the diamine raw material and 4-(chloromethyl)styrene were changed to 1-chlorododecane and 3-chloropropyl methacrylate.
The polyimide resin SP-7 had a weight average molecular weight of 25,100 and a number average molecular weight of 9,200. Polyimide (SP-7) is a resin having a repeating unit represented by the following formula (SP-7). The structure of the repeating unit was determined from 1 H-NMR spectrum. In the following structure, the subscripts of the repeating units represent the molar ratio of each repeating unit.

〔6-マレイミドヘキサン酸クロリドの合成〕
 温度計と塩化カルシウム管を取り付けたナスフラスコに、6-マレイミドヘキサン酸7.92g(37.5ミリモル)をテトラヒドロフラン30gに溶解し、N,N’-ジメチルホルムアミドを0.1g加え、マグネチックスターラーで撹拌しながら、0℃に冷却した。続いて、塩化オキサリル4.85g(38.25ミリモル)を滴下し、0℃~10℃で1時間撹拌した。続いて、25℃に昇温したあと、2時間撹拌して6-マレイミドヘキサン酸クロリドを合成した。
[Synthesis of 6-maleimidohexanoic acid chloride]
In a recovery flask equipped with a thermometer and a calcium chloride tube, 7.92 g (37.5 mmol) of 6-maleimidohexanoic acid was dissolved in 30 g of tetrahydrofuran, 0.1 g of N,N'-dimethylformamide was added, and the mixture was cooled to 0°C while stirring with a magnetic stirrer. Subsequently, 4.85 g (38.25 mmol) of oxalyl chloride was added dropwise, and the mixture was stirred at 0°C to 10°C for 1 hour. Subsequently, the temperature was raised to 25°C, and the mixture was stirred for 2 hours to synthesize 6-maleimidohexanoic acid chloride.

〔合成例SP-8:ポリイミド(SP-8)の合成〕
 30.0g(57.64ミリモル)の4,4’-(4,4’-イソプロピリデンジフェノキシ)ジフタル酸無水物をN-メチルピロリドン(NMP)130gに溶解した。続いて、3.20g(12.39ミリモル)の2,2-ビス(3-アミノ-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)プロパン、4.02g(15.56ミリモル)の1,4-フェニレンジアミン、2.18g(11.53ミリモル)の4-[(トリメチルシリル)エチニル]アニリンを50gのNMPで洗い流しながら添加し、20℃~50℃の範囲で30分撹拌した後、トルエンを10g添加し、窒素フローしながら200℃で4時間反応し、25℃まで冷却した。続いて、上記で合成した6―マレイミドヘキサン酸クロリドTHF溶液(37.5ミリモル)、ピリジン6.13g(77.5ミリモル、2,2,6,6-テトラメチルピペリジン1-オキシル フリーラジカル0.10gを添加し、25℃で2時間反応した後、45℃に昇温し、更に10時間撹拌した。続いて反応液を25℃に冷却した後、テトラヒドロフラン200gで希釈し、2.0Lのメタノールと0.5Lの水の混合液に反応液を滴下させて、15分撹拌した後、ポリイミド樹脂をろ過した。次に、1Lの水で上記樹脂をリスラリーし、ろ過した後、1Lのメタノールで再度リスラリーし、ろ過し、減圧下、40℃で10時間乾燥させた。続いて、上記で乾燥した樹脂をテトラヒドロフラン250gに溶解し、イオン交換樹脂(MB-1:オルガノ社製)40gを添加し、4時間撹拌し、イオン交換樹脂をろ過して取り除いた後、2Lのメタノールの中でポリイミド樹脂を沈殿させ、15分間撹拌した。ポリイミド樹脂を濾過して取得し、減圧下、45℃で1日間乾燥しポリイミド樹脂(SP-8)を得た。得られたポリイミド樹脂SP-8の重量平均分子量は21,000、数平均分子量は8,500であった。
[Synthesis Example SP-8: Synthesis of Polyimide (SP-8)]
30.0 g (57.64 mmol) of 4,4'-(4,4'-isopropylidenediphenoxy)diphthalic anhydride was dissolved in 130 g of N-methylpyrrolidone (NMP). Subsequently, 3.20 g (12.39 mmol) of 2,2-bis(3-amino-4-hydroxyphenyl)propane, 4.02 g (15.56 mmol) of 1,4-phenylenediamine, and 2.18 g (11.53 mmol) of 4-[(trimethylsilyl)ethynyl]aniline were added while washing with 50 g of NMP. The mixture was stirred at a temperature ranging from 20 to 50°C for 30 minutes, after which 10 g of toluene was added. The mixture was reacted at 200°C for 4 hours under a nitrogen flow and then cooled to 25°C. Next, the above-synthesized 6-maleimidohexanoic acid chloride THF solution (37.5 mmol), 6.13 g of pyridine (77.5 mmol), and 0.10 g of 2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine 1-oxyl free radical were added, and the mixture was reacted at 25°C for 2 hours, then heated to 45°C, and stirred for an additional 10 hours. The reaction solution was then cooled to 25°C, diluted with 200 g of tetrahydrofuran, and added dropwise to a mixture of 2.0 L of methanol and 0.5 L of water. The mixture was stirred for 15 minutes, and the polyimide resin was filtered. Next, the above resin was reslurried in 1 L of water and filtered, and then reslurried again in 1 L of methanol and filtered, and dried under reduced pressure at 40°C for 10 hours. Next, the above resin was diluted with 200 g of tetrahydrofuran, and added dropwise to a mixture of 2.0 L of methanol and 0.5 L of water. The mixture was stirred for 15 minutes, and the polyimide resin was filtered. Next, the above resin was reslurried in 1 L of water, filtered, and then reslurried again in 1 L of methanol, filtered, and dried under reduced pressure at 40°C for 10 hours. The dried resin was dissolved in 250 g of tetrahydrofuran, and 40 g of an ion exchange resin (MB-1, manufactured by Organo Corporation) was added. The mixture was stirred for 4 hours. The ion exchange resin was removed by filtration, and then the polyimide resin was precipitated in 2 L of methanol and stirred for 15 minutes. The polyimide resin was collected by filtration and dried under reduced pressure at 45°C for 1 day to obtain polyimide resin (SP-8). The weight average molecular weight of the resulting polyimide resin SP-8 was 21,000, and the number average molecular weight was 8,500.

 以下の表に、SP-1~SP-11のエチレン性不飽和結合価(C=C価、樹脂の全質量に対するエチレン性不飽和結合の含有量)、及び、アルキニル基価を記載した。
 各樹脂の構造から、各樹脂におけるエチレン性不飽和結合価は、重合性基価及びラジカル重合性基価と同様の値となると考えられる。
The table below shows the ethylenically unsaturated bond valence (C=C valence, the content of ethylenically unsaturated bonds relative to the total mass of the resin) and alkynyl group value of SP-1 to SP-11.
From the structure of each resin, it is considered that the ethylenically unsaturated bond value in each resin is the same as the polymerizable group value and the radically polymerizable group value.

 エチレン性不飽和結合価は以下の方法により算出した。
 樹脂 0.1gを重ジメチルスルホキシド0.9gに溶解した後、H-NMRで測定し、エチレン性不飽和結合の量を算出した。H-NMRの積算回数は640回とした。
 基準物質としてテトラメチルシランを使用し、H-NMRチャートにおけるエチレン性不飽和結合に由来するピークの積分強度と基準物質に由来するピークの積分強度の比及び基準物質の量及び上記樹脂の量から、樹脂におけるエチレン性不飽和結合のモル量を算出した。
The ethylenically unsaturated bond value was calculated by the following method.
0.1 g of the resin was dissolved in 0.9 g of deuterated dimethyl sulfoxide, and then the solution was measured by 1 H-NMR to calculate the amount of ethylenically unsaturated bonds. The number of 1 H-NMR measurements was 640.
Tetramethylsilane was used as a standard substance, and the molar amount of ethylenically unsaturated bonds in the resin was calculated from the ratio of the integrated intensity of the peak attributable to the ethylenically unsaturated bond in the 1 H-NMR chart to the integrated intensity of the peak attributable to the standard substance, the amount of the standard substance, and the amount of the resin.

 アルキニル基価は以下の方法により算出した。樹脂0.1gを重ジメチルスルホキシド0.9gまたは、重クロロホルム1.9gに溶解した後、H-NMRで測定し、エチレン性不飽和結合の量を算出した。H-NMRの積算回数は640回とした。
 基準物質としてテトラメチルシランを使用し、H-NMRチャートにおけるエチレン性不飽和結合に由来するピークの積分強度と基準物質に由来するピークの積分強度の比及び基準物質の量及び上記樹脂の量から、樹脂におけるエチレン性不飽和結合のモル量を算出した。
The alkynyl value was calculated by the following method: 0.1 g of resin was dissolved in 0.9 g of deuterated dimethyl sulfoxide or 1.9 g of deuterated chloroform, and then measured by 1 H-NMR to calculate the amount of ethylenically unsaturated bonds. The number of 1 H-NMR measurements was 640.
Tetramethylsilane was used as a reference substance, and the molar amount of ethylenically unsaturated bonds in the resin was calculated from the ratio of the integrated intensity of the peak attributable to the ethylenically unsaturated bond in the 1 H-NMR chart to the integrated intensity of the peak attributable to the reference substance, the amount of the reference substance, and the amount of the resin.

〔合成例SA-1:ポリイミド前駆体(SA-1)の合成〕
 7.42g(34.0ミリモル)のピロメリット酸無水物と、17.7g(34.0ミリモル)の4,4’-(4,4’-イソプロピリデンジフェノキシ)ビス(フタル酸無水物)と、17.8g(137ミリモル)の2-ヒドロキシエチルメタクリレートと、0.05gのハイドロキノンと、22.8g(289ミリモル)のピリジンと、75gのダイグライムとを混合し、60℃の温度で5時間撹拌して、ピロメリット酸無水物及び4,4’-(4,4’’-イソプロピリデンジフェノキシ)ビス(フタル酸無水物)と2-ヒドロキシエチルメタクリレートのジエステルを製造した。続いて、混合物を-10℃まで冷却した後、塩化チオニル 17.70g(141ミリモル)を90分かけて滴下し、2時間撹拌し、ピリジニウムヒドロクロリドの白色沈澱が得られた。続いて、m-トリジン13.0g(61.2ミリモル)、4-[(トリメチルシリル)エチニル]アニリン1.39g(6.8ミリモル)をNMP(N-メチル-2-ピロリドン) 100mL中に溶解させたものを、2時間かけて滴下した。続いて、エタノール 10.0g(217ミリモル)を加え、混合物を2時間撹拌した。次いで、4Lの水の中でポリイミド前駆体を沈殿させ、水-ポリイミド前駆体混合物を500rpmの速度で15分間撹拌した。ポリイミド前駆体を濾過して取得し、4Lの水の中で再度30分間撹拌し再び濾過した。次いで、得られたポリイミド前駆体を減圧下、45℃で2日間乾燥しポリイミド前駆体(SA-1)を得た。得られたポリイミド前駆体(SA-1)の重量平均分子量は30,600、数平均分子量は12,800であった。ポリイミド前駆体(SA-1)は、下記式(SA-1)で表される2つの繰返し単位を有する樹脂である。繰返し単位の構造は、H-NMRスペクトルから決定した。下記構造中、繰返し単位の添え字は各繰返し単位の含有モル比を表す。
Synthesis Example SA-1: Synthesis of Polyimide Precursor (SA-1)
7.42 g (34.0 mmol) of pyromellitic anhydride, 17.7 g (34.0 mmol) of 4,4'-(4,4'-isopropylidenediphenoxy)bis(phthalic anhydride), 17.8 g (137 mmol) of 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate, 0.05 g of hydroquinone, 22.8 g (289 mmol) of pyridine, and 75 g of diglyme were mixed and stirred at 60°C for 5 hours to produce pyromellitic anhydride and the diester of 4,4'-(4,4''-isopropylidenediphenoxy)bis(phthalic anhydride) and 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate. Subsequently, the mixture was cooled to -10°C, and 17.70 g (141 mmol) of thionyl chloride was added dropwise over 90 minutes. The mixture was stirred for 2 hours, resulting in a white precipitate of pyridinium hydrochloride. Next, 13.0 g (61.2 mmol) of m-tolidine and 1.39 g (6.8 mmol) of 4-[(trimethylsilyl)ethynyl]aniline dissolved in 100 mL of NMP (N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone) were added dropwise over 2 hours. Subsequently, 10.0 g (217 mmol) of ethanol was added, and the mixture was stirred for 2 hours. The polyimide precursor was then precipitated in 4 L of water, and the water-polyimide precursor mixture was stirred at 500 rpm for 15 minutes. The polyimide precursor was collected by filtration, stirred again in 4 L of water for 30 minutes, and filtered again. The resulting polyimide precursor was then dried under reduced pressure at 45°C for 2 days to obtain polyimide precursor (SA-1). The resulting polyimide precursor (SA-1) had a weight-average molecular weight of 30,600 and a number-average molecular weight of 12,800. Polyimide precursor (SA-1) is a resin having two repeating units represented by the following formula (SA-1). The structure of the repeating units was determined from 1 H-NMR spectrum. In the following structure, the subscripts of the repeating units represent the molar ratio of each repeating unit.

〔合成例SA-2:ポリイミド前駆体(SA-2)の合成〕
 SA-1と同様の方法で、SA-2を合成した。SA-2の重量平均分子量は25,800であり、数平均分子量は11.000であった。ポリイミド前駆体(SA-2)は、下記式(SA-2)で表される2つの繰返し単位を有する樹脂である。繰返し単位の構造は、H-NMRスペクトルから決定した。下記構造中、繰返し単位の添え字は各繰返し単位の含有モル比を表す。
[Synthesis Example SA-2: Synthesis of Polyimide Precursor (SA-2)]
SA-2 was synthesized in the same manner as SA-1. The weight-average molecular weight of SA-2 was 25,800 and the number-average molecular weight was 11,000. Polyimide precursor (SA-2) is a resin having two repeating units represented by the following formula (SA-2). The structure of the repeating units was determined from 1 H-NMR spectrum. In the following structure, the subscripts of the repeating units represent the molar ratio of each repeating unit.

〔合成例SA-3:ポリイミド前駆体(SA-3)の合成〕
 35.4g(68.0ミリモル)の4,4’-(4,4’-イソプロピリデンジフェノキシ)ビス(フタル酸無水物)と、15.9g(122.4ミリモル)の2-ヒドロキシエチルメタクリレートと、2.57g(20.4ミリモル)の3-オクチンー1-オールと、0.05gのハイドロキノンと、22.8g(289ミリモル)のピリジンと、75gのダイグライムとを混合し、60℃の温度で5時間撹拌して、4,4’-(4,4’’-イソプロピリデンジフェノキシ)ビス(フタル酸無水物)と2-ヒドロキシエチルメタクリレートのジエステルを製造した。続いて、混合物を-10℃まで冷却した後、塩化チオニル 17.70g(141ミリモル)を90分かけて滴下し、2時間撹拌し、ピリジニウムヒドロクロリドの白色沈澱が得られた。続いて、m-トリジン13.0g(61.2ミリモル)、4-アミノフェニルアセチレン 0.797g(6.8ミリモル)をNMP(N-メチル-2-ピロリドン) 100mL中に溶解させたものを、2時間かけて滴下した。続いて、エタノール 10.0g(217ミリモル)を加え、混合物を2時間撹拌した。次いで、4Lの水の中でポリイミド前駆体を沈殿させ、水-ポリイミド前駆体混合物を500rpmの速度で15分間撹拌した。ポリイミド前駆体を濾過して取得し、4Lの水の中で再度30分間撹拌し再び濾過した。次いで、得られたポリイミド前駆体を減圧下、45℃で2日間乾燥しポリイミド前駆体(SA-3)を得た。得られたポリイミド前駆体(SA-3)の重量平均分子量は35,900、数平均分子量は14,900であった。ポリイミド前駆体(SA-3)は、下記式(SA-3)で表される2つの繰返し単位を有する樹脂である。繰返し単位の構造は、H-NMRスペクトルから決定した。下記構造中、繰返し単位の添え字は各繰返し単位の含有モル比を表す。
[Synthesis Example SA-3: Synthesis of Polyimide Precursor (SA-3)]
35.4 g (68.0 mmol) of 4,4'-(4,4'-isopropylidenediphenoxy)bis(phthalic anhydride), 15.9 g (122.4 mmol) of 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate, 2.57 g (20.4 mmol) of 3-octyn-1-ol, 0.05 g of hydroquinone, 22.8 g (289 mmol) of pyridine, and 75 g of diglyme were mixed and stirred at 60°C for 5 hours to produce a diester of 4,4'-(4,4''-isopropylidenediphenoxy)bis(phthalic anhydride) and 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate. Subsequently, the mixture was cooled to -10°C, and 17.70 g (141 mmol) of thionyl chloride was added dropwise over 90 minutes. The mixture was stirred for 2 hours, yielding a white precipitate of pyridinium hydrochloride. Next, 13.0 g (61.2 mmol) of m-tolidine and 0.797 g (6.8 mmol) of 4-aminophenylacetylene dissolved in 100 mL of NMP (N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone) were added dropwise over 2 hours. Subsequently, 10.0 g (217 mmol) of ethanol was added, and the mixture was stirred for 2 hours. The polyimide precursor was then precipitated in 4 L of water, and the water-polyimide precursor mixture was stirred at 500 rpm for 15 minutes. The polyimide precursor was collected by filtration, stirred again in 4 L of water for 30 minutes, and filtered again. The resulting polyimide precursor was then dried under reduced pressure at 45°C for 2 days to obtain polyimide precursor (SA-3). The resulting polyimide precursor (SA-3) had a weight-average molecular weight of 35,900 and a number-average molecular weight of 14,900. Polyimide precursor (SA-3) is a resin having two repeating units represented by the following formula (SA-3). The structure of the repeating units was determined from 1 H-NMR spectrum. In the following structure, the subscripts of the repeating units represent the molar ratio of each repeating unit.

 以下の表に、SA-1~SA-3のエチレン性不飽和結合価(C=C価、樹脂の全質量に対するエチレン性不飽和結合の含有量)、及び、アルキニル基価を記載した。
 エチレン性不飽和結合価、及び、アルキニル基価の測定方法は、SP-1~SP-11におけるこれらの測定方法と同様である。
 各樹脂の構造から、各樹脂におけるエチレン性不飽和結合価は、重合性基価及びラジカル重合性基価と同様の値となると考えられる。
The ethylenically unsaturated bond valence (C=C valence, the content of ethylenically unsaturated bonds relative to the total mass of the resin) and alkynyl group value of SA-1 to SA-3 are shown in the table below.
The ethylenically unsaturated bond valence and alkynyl group value are measured by the same methods as those used in SP-1 to SP-11.
From the structure of each resin, it is considered that the ethylenically unsaturated bond value in each resin is the same as the polymerizable group value and the radically polymerizable group value.

〔比較用化合物A-1の合成〕
 撹拌機、コンデンサー及び温度計を取りつけたフラスコに、水分を除去しながら、2,2-ビス(3-アミノ-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)ヘキサフルオロプロパン41.4g(114mmol)と、ビス(1,3-ジオキソ-1,3-ジヒドロイソベンゾフラン-5-カルボン酸)1,4-フェニレン57.29g(125.0mmol)とを加え、γ-ブチロラクトン492.43gを加え、60℃の温度で1.5時間撹拌した。続いて、トルエンを50mL添加した後、200mL/minの流量の窒素をフローしながら、温度を180℃に昇温し、3時間撹拌し、室温まで冷却した。得られた重合溶液を、アセトンで希釈して希釈液を作製し、次いで、希釈液を水/メタノール=3/1の混合溶液に滴下することで、白色固体を析出させた。得られた白色固体を回収し、温度120℃で真空乾燥することにより、90gのポリマーを得た。
続いて、撹拌機および冷却管を備えた反応容器に、上記で得られたポリマー 73.86g(水酸基換算150.0mmol)と、2-イソシアナトエチルメタクリレート23.27g(150.0mmol)と、γ-ブチルラクトン(GBL)828.3gを入れた。その後、撹拌しつつ温度120℃まで上げ、6時間反応させた。続いて、得られた反応溶液を、アセトンで希釈して希釈液を作製し、次いで、希釈液を水/メタノール=2/1の混合溶液に滴下することで、白色固体を析出させた。得られた白色固体を回収し、温度40℃で真空乾燥することにより、85.8gのA-1を得た。A-1の重量平均分子量(Mw)は32,200であり、数平均分子量(Mn)は12,800であった。A-1の構造は下記式(A-1)により表される構造が主成分である事をH-NMRスペクトルで確認した。H-NMRの測定結果から、架橋基の導入率は50%であった。
[Synthesis of Comparative Compound A-1]
To a flask equipped with a stirrer, condenser, and thermometer, 41.4 g (114 mmol) of 2,2-bis(3-amino-4-hydroxyphenyl)hexafluoropropane and 57.29 g (125.0 mmol) of bis(1,3-dioxo-1,3-dihydroisobenzofuran-5-carboxylic acid)1,4-phenylene were added while removing water, and 492.43 g of γ-butyrolactone was added. The mixture was stirred at 60°C for 1.5 hours. Subsequently, 50 mL of toluene was added, and the mixture was heated to 180°C while flowing nitrogen at a flow rate of 200 mL/min. The mixture was stirred for 3 hours and then cooled to room temperature. The resulting polymerization solution was diluted with acetone to prepare a diluent. The diluent was then added dropwise to a 3/1 water/methanol mixed solution to precipitate a white solid. The resulting white solid was collected and vacuum dried at 120°C to obtain 90 g of polymer.
Next, 73.86 g of the polymer obtained above (150.0 mmol in terms of hydroxyl groups), 23.27 g (150.0 mmol) of 2-isocyanatoethyl methacrylate, and 828.3 g of γ-butyrolactone (GBL) were placed in a reaction vessel equipped with a stirrer and a condenser. The temperature was then raised to 120°C with stirring, and the mixture was allowed to react for 6 hours. The resulting reaction solution was then diluted with acetone to prepare a diluted solution, and the diluted solution was then added dropwise to a 2:1 water/methanol mixed solution to precipitate a white solid. The resulting white solid was collected and vacuum-dried at 40°C to obtain 85.8 g of A-1. The weight-average molecular weight (Mw) of A-1 was 32,200, and the number-average molecular weight (Mn) was 12,800. 1 H-NMR spectroscopy confirmed that the structure represented by the following formula (A-1) was the main component of A-1: The 1 H-NMR measurement results showed that the introduction rate of crosslinking groups was 50%.

<実施例及び比較例>
 各実施例において、それぞれ、下記表に記載の成分を混合し、各樹脂組成物を得た。また、各比較例において、それぞれ、下記表に記載の成分を混合し、各比較用組成物を得た。
 具体的には、表に記載の各成分の含有量は、表の各欄の「添加量」の欄に記載の量(質量部)とした。
 得られた樹脂組成物及び比較用組成物を、細孔の幅が0.5μmのポリテトラフルオロエチレン製フィルターを用いて加圧ろ過した。
 また、表中、「-」の記載は該当する成分を組成物が含有していないことを示している。

Examples and Comparative Examples
In each example, the components shown in the table below were mixed to obtain a resin composition. In each comparative example, the components shown in the table below were mixed to obtain a comparative composition.
Specifically, the content of each component shown in the table is the amount (parts by mass) shown in the "Amount Added" column of each column in the table.
The resulting resin composition and comparative composition were filtered under pressure using a polytetrafluoroethylene filter with a pore width of 0.5 μm.
In the table, "-" indicates that the composition does not contain the corresponding component.


表に記載した各成分の詳細は下記の通りである。 Details of each ingredient listed in the table are as follows:

〔樹脂〕
・SP-1~SP-11:上記で合成したSP-1~SP-11
・SA-1~SA-3:上記で合成したSA-1~SA-3
・A-1:上記で合成したA-1
〔resin〕
SP-1 to SP-11: SP-1 to SP-11 synthesized above
SA-1 to SA-3: SA-1 to SA-3 synthesized above
A-1: A-1 synthesized above

〔重合性化合物〕
・B-1:1,12-ドデカンジオールジメアクリレート(融点:25℃以下)
・B-2:1,9-ノナンジオールジメタクリレート(融点:25℃以下)
・B-3:1,10-デカンジオールジメタクリレート(融点:25℃以下)
・B-4:SR-209:SR-209(サートマー社製、融点:25℃以下)
・B-5:ADPH:ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサアクリレート(新中村化学工業(株)製、融点:25℃以下)
[Polymerizable compound]
B-1: 1,12-dodecanediol dimethacrylate (melting point: 25°C or less)
B-2: 1,9-nonanediol dimethacrylate (melting point: 25°C or less)
B-3: 1,10-decanediol dimethacrylate (melting point: 25°C or less)
B-4: SR-209: SR-209 (manufactured by Sartomer, melting point: 25°C or less)
B-5: ADPH: Dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd., melting point: 25°C or less)

〔溶剤〕
・DMSO:ジメチルスルホキシド
・GBL:γ-ブチロラクトン
・NMP:N-メチルピロリドン
・γ-バレロラクトン:γ-バレロラクトン
 表中、「DMSO/GBL」及び、「DMSO/γ-バレロラクトン」の記載はDMSOとGBLをDMSO:GBL=20:80の混合比(質量比)及び、DMSOとγ-バレロラクトンをDMSO:γ-バレロラクトン=20:80の混合比(質量比)で混合したものを用いたことを示している。
・3-MCH:3-メチルシクロヘキサノン
〔solvent〕
In the table, the descriptions "DMSO/GBL" and "DMSO/γ-valerolactone" indicate that a mixture of DMSO and GBL in a mixing ratio (mass ratio) of DMSO:GBL = 20:80 was used, and a mixture of DMSO and γ-valerolactone in a mixing ratio (mass ratio) of DMSO:γ-valerolactone = 20:80 was used.
3-MCH: 3-methylcyclohexanone

〔重合開始剤(いずれも商品名)〕
・OXE-01:IRGACURE OXE 01(BASF社製)
・OXE-02:IRGACURE OXE 02(BASF社製)
・OXE-03:IRGACURE OXE 03(BASF社製)
・Irgcue784 (BASF社製)
・CPI-310B(サンアプロ社製)
[Polymerization initiators (all trade names)]
OXE-01: IRGACURE OXE 01 (manufactured by BASF)
OXE-02: IRGACURE OXE 02 (manufactured by BASF)
OXE-03: IRGACURE OXE 03 (manufactured by BASF)
Irgcue 784 (manufactured by BASF)
・CPI-310B (manufactured by San-Apro Co., Ltd.)

〔マイグレーション抑制剤〕
・E-1~E-7:下記構造の化合物
[Migration inhibitor]
E-1 to E-7: Compounds having the following structure

〔金属接着性改良剤〕
・F-1~F-3:下記構造の化合物
・F-4:X-12-1293(信越化学工業(株)製)
・F-5:KBM-51073(信越化学工業(株)製)
・F-6:X-12-1214A(信越化学工業(株)製)
[Metal adhesion improver]
F-1 to F-3: Compounds having the following structure
F-4: X-12-1293 (Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.)
F-5: KBM-51073 (Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.)
F-6: X-12-1214A (Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.)

〔重合禁止剤〕
・G-1:1,4-ベンゾキノン
・G-2:4-メトキシフェノール
・G-3:1,4-ジヒドロキシベンゼン
・G-4:下記構造の化合物
[Polymerization inhibitor]
G-1: 1,4-benzoquinone G-2: 4-methoxyphenol G-3: 1,4-dihydroxybenzene G-4: Compound of the following structure

〔金属錯体又は金属塩〕
・I-1:TC-750(マツモトファインケミカル(株)製)
・I-2:TC-401(マツモトファインケミカル(株)製)
・I-3:TC-800(マツモトファインケミカル(株)製)
・I-4:TC-810(マツモトファインケミカル(株)製)
・I-5:下記構造の化合物
・I-6:下記構造の化合物
・I-7:下記構造の化合物
・I-8:下記構造の化合物
・I-9:安息香酸銀(I)(東京化成工業(株)製)
・I-10:ピリジン-2-カルボン酸銀(II) (東京化成工業(株)製)
[Metal complex or metal salt]
I-1: TC-750 (manufactured by Matsumoto Fine Chemical Co., Ltd.)
I-2: TC-401 (manufactured by Matsumoto Fine Chemical Co., Ltd.)
I-3: TC-800 (manufactured by Matsumoto Fine Chemical Co., Ltd.)
I-4: TC-810 (manufactured by Matsumoto Fine Chemical Co., Ltd.)
I-5: Compound having the following structure I-6: Compound having the following structure I-7: Compound having the following structure I-8: Compound having the following structure
I-9: Silver benzoate (I) (Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
I-10: Silver(II) pyridine-2-carboxylate (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)

〔界面活性剤〕
・J-1:ノニオン E-212(日油(株)製)
・J-2:MEGAFACE EFS-801 (大日本インキ(株)製)
・J-3:信越シリコーン KF6028 (信越化学工業(株)製)
[Surfactant]
J-1: Nonion E-212 (manufactured by NOF Corporation)
J-2: MEGAFACE EFS-801 (manufactured by Dainippon Ink Co., Ltd.)
J-3: Shin-Etsu Silicone KF6028 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.)

 各実施例で調製した樹脂組成物について、いずれも、膜厚10μmの膜状の硬化物を形成した場合の、波長365nmの光の透過率は30%以上であった。上記膜上の硬化物は、樹脂組成物をシリコンウエハに塗布した後、100℃で5分間乾燥して、500mJ/cmの露光エネルギーでi線により全面露光した後に、窒素雰囲気下で、10℃/分の昇温速度で昇温し、230℃で180分間加熱することにより得た。
 透過率の測定は、紫外可視分光光度計(Varian社製Cary-5 spectrophotometer)を用いて行った。
For each of the resin compositions prepared in each Example, when a film-like cured product having a film thickness of 10 μm was formed, the transmittance of light having a wavelength of 365 nm was 30% or more. The film-like cured product was obtained by applying the resin composition to a silicon wafer, drying it at 100°C for 5 minutes, exposing the entire surface to i-rays with an exposure energy of 500 mJ/ cm2 , and then heating it at a heating rate of 10°C/min in a nitrogen atmosphere and at 230°C for 180 minutes.
The transmittance was measured using an ultraviolet-visible spectrophotometer (Cary-5 spectrophotometer manufactured by Varian).

<評価>
〔銅密着性の評価条件〕
 上記ろ過後の各樹脂組成物を、銅基板上にスピンコート法により層状に適用して、樹脂組成物層を形成した。得られた硬化性樹脂組成物層を適用したシリコンウェハをホットプレート上で、100℃で5分間乾燥し、銅基板上に20μmの厚さの均一な樹脂組成物層とした。銅基板上の樹脂組成物層を、ステッパー(Nikon NSR 2005 i9C)を用いて、500mJ/cmの露光エネルギーで100μm四方のフォトマスクを使用して露光し、その後表の「現像方法(現像液)」の欄に記載の現像液で60秒間現像し、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート(PGMEA)を用いて15秒間リンスして、100μm四方形の樹脂層を得た。さらに、窒素雰囲気下で、10℃/分の昇温速度で昇温し、表の「硬化条件」の「温度」の欄に記載の温度に達した後、この温度を表の「硬化条件」の「硬化時間」の欄に記載の時間において維持し樹脂膜2を得た。
 銅基板上の100μm四方形の樹脂膜2に対して、25℃、65%相対湿度(RH)の環境下にて、ボンドテスター(XYZTEC社製、CondorSigma)を用いて、せん断力を測定した。せん断力が大きければ大きいほど密着力が大きく好ましい結果となる。
A:せん断力が35gfを超えた
B:せん断力が30gfを超えて35gf以下
C:せん断力が30gf以下
ただし、1gfは0.00980665Nである。
<Evaluation>
[Evaluation conditions for copper adhesion]
Each of the filtered resin compositions was applied to a copper substrate by spin coating to form a layer of resin composition. The silicon wafer with the resulting curable resin composition layer applied was dried on a hot plate at 100°C for 5 minutes to form a uniform resin composition layer of 20 μm thickness on the copper substrate. The resin composition layer on the copper substrate was exposed to light using a stepper (Nikon NSR 2005 i9C) with an exposure energy of 500 mJ/ cm2 using a 100 μm square photomask, and then developed for 60 seconds with the developer listed in the "Development Method (Developer)" column in the table, followed by rinsing with propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA) for 15 seconds to obtain a 100 μm square resin layer. Furthermore, the temperature was increased at a rate of 10°C/min under a nitrogen atmosphere until the temperature described in the "Temperature" column of the "Curing Conditions" in the table was reached. After that, this temperature was maintained for the time described in the "Curing Time" column of the "Curing Conditions" in the table, and resin film 2 was obtained.
The shear strength of a 100 μm square resin film 2 on a copper substrate was measured using a bond tester (CondorSigma, manufactured by XYZTEC Corporation) under an environment of 25° C. and 65% relative humidity (RH). The greater the shear strength, the greater the adhesion, resulting in a more favorable result.
A: Shear force exceeds 35 gf B: Shear force exceeds 30 gf but is 35 gf or less C: Shear force is 30 gf or less However, 1 gf is 0.00980665 N.

〔誘電率の評価〕
 各実施例及び比較例において調製した各樹脂組成物又は比較用組成物を、それぞれ、12インチのシリコンウエハ上にスピンコート法により適用し、樹脂組成物層を形成した。得られた樹脂組成物層を適用したシリコンウエハをホットプレート上で、100℃で5分間乾燥し、シリコンウエハ上に15μmの均一な厚さの樹脂組成物層を形成した。シリコンウェハ上の樹脂組成物層を、ステッパー(Nikon NSR 2005 i9C)を用いて、500mJ/cmの露光エネルギーで全面露光し、露光した樹脂組成物層(樹脂層)を、窒素雰囲気下で、10℃/分の昇温速度で昇温し、表の「硬化条件」の「温度」の欄に記載の温度で表の「硬化条件」の「硬化時間」の欄に記載の時間において加熱して、樹脂組成物層の硬化層(樹脂層)を得た。
硬化後の硬化層(樹脂膜)を4.9質量%フッ化水素酸水溶液に浸漬し、シリコンウエハから硬化膜を剥離した。
フィルムサンプルを共振器摂動法にて28GHzにおける比誘電率(Dk)と誘電正接(Df)を測定した。
 誘電正接について以下の評価基準に従って評価を行い、評価結果を表の「誘電正接(Df)」の欄に記載した。
<測定方法>
スプリットシリンダ共振器(CR-728)
(装置構成)
ネットワークアナライザ:N5230A(KEYSIGHT社製)
-評価基準-
 A:誘電正接(Df)が0.06未満であった。
 B:誘電正接(Df)が0.06~0.08未満であった。
 C:誘電正接(Df)が0.08以上であった。
[Evaluation of dielectric constant]
Each resin composition or comparative composition prepared in each Example and Comparative Example was applied to a 12-inch silicon wafer by spin coating to form a resin composition layer. The silicon wafer to which the resulting resin composition layer was applied was dried on a hot plate at 100°C for 5 minutes, forming a resin composition layer with a uniform thickness of 15 μm on the silicon wafer. The resin composition layer on the silicon wafer was exposed to light using a stepper (Nikon NSR 2005 i9C) at an exposure energy of 500 mJ/ cm2 . The exposed resin composition layer (resin layer) was heated at a heating rate of 10°C/min under a nitrogen atmosphere and heated at the temperature specified in the "Temperature" column under "Curing Conditions" in the table for the time specified in the "Curing Time" column under "Curing Conditions" in the table to obtain a cured layer (resin layer) of the resin composition layer.
The cured layer (resin film) after curing was immersed in a 4.9% by mass aqueous solution of hydrofluoric acid, and the cured film was peeled off from the silicon wafer.
The relative permittivity (Dk) and dielectric loss tangent (Df) of the film sample at 28 GHz were measured by a resonator perturbation method.
The dielectric loss tangent was evaluated according to the following evaluation criteria, and the evaluation results are shown in the "Dielectric loss tangent (Df)" column in the table.
<Measurement method>
Split Cylinder Resonator (CR-728)
(Device configuration)
Network analyzer: N5230A (Keysight)
-Evaluation criteria-
A: The dielectric loss tangent (Df) was less than 0.06.
B: The dielectric loss tangent (Df) was 0.06 to less than 0.08.
C: The dielectric loss tangent (Df) was 0.08 or more.

〔絶縁信頼性の評価〕
 各実施例及び比較例において調製した樹脂組成物又は比較用組成物を、それぞれ、銅基板上にスピンコート法により層状に適用して、樹脂組成物層又は比較用組成物層を形成した。得られた樹脂組成物層又は比較用組成物層を形成した銅基板をホットプレート上で、100℃で5分間乾燥し、銅基板上に5μmの厚さで、かつ、厚さの均一な樹脂組成物層又は比較用組成物層とした。銅基板上の樹脂組成物層又は比較用組成物層を、ステッパー(Nikon NSR 2005 i9C)を用いて、500mJ/cmの露光エネルギーで100μm四方の正方形状の非マスク部が形成されたフォトマスクを使用してi線により露光し、その後表の「現像方法(現像液)」の欄に記載の現像液で60秒間現像して、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート(PGMEA)を用いてリンスすることにより、100μm四方の正方形状の樹脂層を得た。さらに、窒素雰囲気下で表の「硬化条件」の欄に記載の温度及び硬化時間において、加熱式オーブンを用いて加熱して樹脂層(パターン)を形成した。
 上記樹脂層及び銅基板を175℃の恒温槽内で1000時間経過させた後、断面SEM(走査型顕微鏡)測定を実施し、銅基板と樹脂層の間の空隙面積率を評価した。空隙面積率は、下記の式により算出した。
 空隙面積率(%)=(SEM測定により観察された空隙部の面積)/(樹脂層の全面積)×100
 得られた空隙面積率の値から、下記評価基準に従って評価を行った。評価結果は表の「絶縁信頼性」の欄に記載した。空隙面積率が小さければ小さいほど硬化膜のHTS(High Temperature Strage-test)後の信頼性が優れているといえ、長期間の経過後であっても金属層と硬化物との間に空隙が生じにくく、絶縁信頼性が良好であるといえる。
-評価基準-
A:空隙面積率が0.1%以下であった。
B:空隙面積率が0.1%を超えて0.3%以下であった。
C:空隙面積率が0.3%を超えた。
[Evaluation of insulation reliability]
The resin composition or comparative composition prepared in each Example and Comparative Example was applied to a copper substrate by spin coating to form a layer of the resin composition or comparative composition. The copper substrate on which the resulting resin composition layer or comparative composition layer was formed was dried on a hot plate at 100°C for 5 minutes to form a 5 μm thick, uniform resin composition layer or comparative composition layer on the copper substrate. The resin composition layer or comparative composition layer on the copper substrate was exposed to i-rays using a stepper (Nikon NSR 2005 i9C) with an exposure energy of 500 mJ/ cm2 and a photomask with a 100 μm square unmasked area. The resin composition layer or comparative composition layer on the copper substrate was then developed for 60 seconds with the developer listed in the "Development Method (Developer)" column in the table, and rinsed with propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA) to obtain a 100 μm square resin layer. Furthermore, the coating was heated in a heating oven under a nitrogen atmosphere at the temperature and for the curing time described in the "Curing Conditions" column of the table to form a resin layer (pattern).
After the resin layer and copper substrate were left in a thermostatic chamber at 175°C for 1000 hours, cross-sectional SEM (scanning electron microscope) measurement was carried out to evaluate the void area ratio between the copper substrate and the resin layer. The void area ratio was calculated using the following formula.
Void area ratio (%)=(area of voids observed by SEM measurement)/(total area of resin layer)×100
The obtained void area ratio was evaluated according to the following evaluation criteria. The evaluation results are shown in the "Insulation reliability" column in the table. The smaller the void area ratio, the better the reliability of the cured film after HTS (High Temperature Storage Test). It can be said that voids are less likely to occur between the metal layer and the cured product even after a long period of time has passed, and the better the insulation reliability.
-Evaluation criteria-
A: The void area ratio was 0.1% or less.
B: The void area ratio was more than 0.1% and 0.3% or less.
C: The void area ratio exceeded 0.3%.

〔耐湿性の評価〕
 各実施例及び比較例において調製した樹脂組成物又は比較用組成物を、それぞれ、銅基板上にスピンコート法により層状に適用して、樹脂組成物層又は比較用組成物層を形成した。得られた樹脂組成物層又は比較用組成物層を形成した銅基板をホットプレート上で、100℃で5分間乾燥し、銅基板上に5μmの厚さで、かつ、厚さの均一な樹脂組成物層又は比較用組成物層とした。銅基板上の樹脂組成物層又は比較用組成物層を、ステッパー(Nikon NSR 2005 i9C)を用いて、500mJ/cmの露光エネルギーで100μm四方の正方形状の非マスク部が形成されたフォトマスクを使用してi線により露光し、その後表の「現像方法(現像液)」の欄に記載の現像液で60秒間現像して、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート(PGMEA)を用いてリンスすることにより、100μm四方の正方形状の樹脂層を得た。さらに、窒素雰囲気下で表の「硬化条件」の「温度」の欄に記載の温度で、表の「硬化条件」の「硬化時間」の欄に記載の時間において、加熱式オーブンを用いて加熱して樹脂層(パターン)を形成した。
 上記樹脂組成物層及び銅基板を、温度100℃/湿度100%RHの槽内で100時間経過させた。断面SEM(走査型顕微鏡)測定を実施し、銅基板と樹脂層の間の空隙面積率を評価した。空隙面積率は、下記の式により算出した。
 空隙面積率(%)=(SEM測定により観察された空隙部の面積)/(樹脂層の全面積)×100
 得られた空隙面積率の値から、下記評価基準に従って評価を行った。空隙面積率が小さければ小さいほど硬化膜のPCT(湿熱)耐性が優れているといえ、長期間の経過後であっても金属層と硬化物との間に空隙が生じにくいといえる。
A:空隙面積率が0.2%以下であった。
B:空隙面積率が0.2%を超えて0.5%以下であった。
C:空隙面積率が0.5%を超えて1%以下であった。
D:空隙面積率が1%を超えた。
[Evaluation of moisture resistance]
The resin composition or comparative composition prepared in each Example and Comparative Example was applied to a copper substrate by spin coating to form a layer of the resin composition or comparative composition. The copper substrate on which the resulting resin composition layer or comparative composition layer was formed was dried on a hot plate at 100°C for 5 minutes to form a 5 μm thick, uniform resin composition layer or comparative composition layer on the copper substrate. The resin composition layer or comparative composition layer on the copper substrate was exposed to i-rays using a stepper (Nikon NSR 2005 i9C) with an exposure energy of 500 mJ/ cm2 and a photomask with a 100 μm square unmasked area. The resin composition layer or comparative composition layer on the copper substrate was then developed for 60 seconds with the developer listed in the "Development Method (Developer)" column in the table, and rinsed with propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA) to obtain a 100 μm square resin layer. Furthermore, the composition was heated in a nitrogen atmosphere at the temperature described in the "Temperature" column of the "Curing Conditions" in the table for the time described in the "Curing Time" column of the "Curing Conditions" in the table using a heating oven to form a resin layer (pattern).
The resin composition layer and copper substrate were left in a chamber at 100°C and 100% RH for 100 hours. Cross-sectional SEM (scanning electron microscope) measurements were performed to evaluate the void area ratio between the copper substrate and the resin layer. The void area ratio was calculated using the following formula:
Void area ratio (%)=(area of voids observed by SEM measurement)/(total area of resin layer)×100
The obtained void area ratio value was evaluated according to the following evaluation criteria. The smaller the void area ratio, the better the PCT (wet heat) resistance of the cured film, and the less likely voids are to occur between the metal layer and the cured product even after a long period of time has passed.
A: The void area ratio was 0.2% or less.
B: The void area ratio was more than 0.2% and 0.5% or less.
C: The void area ratio was more than 0.5% and 1% or less.
D: The void area ratio exceeded 1%.

 以上の結果から、本発明に係る樹脂組成物からは、金属との密着性に優れた硬化物が得られることが分かる。これと比較して、所定の樹脂を含有しない比較例1に係る組成物により得られた硬化物は、密着性に劣ることが分かる。 These results show that the resin composition according to the present invention produces a cured product with excellent adhesion to metal. In comparison, the cured product produced from the composition according to Comparative Example 1, which does not contain the specified resin, exhibits poor adhesion.

<実施例101>
 実施例1において使用した樹脂組成物を、表面に銅薄層が形成された樹脂基材の銅薄層の表面にスピンコート法により層状に適用して、100℃で4分間乾燥し、膜厚20μmの樹脂組成物層を形成した後、ステッパー((株)ニコン製、NSR1505 i6)を用いて露光した。露光はマスク(パターンが1:1ラインアンドスペースであり、線幅が10μmであるバイナリマスク)を介して、波長365nmで行った。露光後、100℃で4分間加熱した。上記加熱後、シクロヘキサノンで2分間現像し、PGMEAで30秒間リンスし、層のパターンを得た。
 次いで、窒素雰囲気下で、10℃/分の昇温速度で昇温し、230℃に達した後、230℃で3時間維持して、再配線層用層間絶縁膜を形成した。この再配線層用層間絶縁膜は、絶縁性に優れていた。
 また、これらの再配線層用層間絶縁膜を使用して半導体デバイスを製造したところ、問題なく動作することを確認した。
<Example 101>
The resin composition used in Example 1 was applied in the form of a layer by spin coating to the surface of the thin copper layer of a resin substrate having a thin copper layer formed on its surface, and dried at 100°C for 4 minutes to form a resin composition layer with a thickness of 20 μm. This was then exposed using a stepper (Nikon Corporation, NSR1505 i6). The exposure was carried out at a wavelength of 365 nm through a mask (a binary mask with a 1:1 line-and-space pattern and a line width of 10 μm). After exposure, the substrate was heated at 100°C for 4 minutes. After the heating, the substrate was developed with cyclohexanone for 2 minutes and rinsed with PGMEA for 30 seconds to obtain a layer pattern.
Next, the temperature was increased at a rate of 10° C./min in a nitrogen atmosphere, and after reaching 230° C., the temperature was maintained at 230° C. for 3 hours to form an interlayer insulating film for a rewiring layer. This interlayer insulating film for a rewiring layer had excellent insulating properties.
Furthermore, when semiconductor devices were manufactured using these interlayer insulating films for rewiring layers, it was confirmed that they operated without any problems.

<実施例102~実施例118>
実施例101において、樹脂組成物を実施例1で使用したものから、実施例2~実施例18で使用したものにそれぞれ変更した以外は、実施例101と同様に評価した。
いずれの実施例においても、再配線層用層間絶縁膜は、絶縁性に優れていた。半導体デバイスは問題なく動作した。
<Examples 102 to 118>
In Example 101, evaluation was carried out in the same manner as in Example 101, except that the resin composition used in Example 1 was changed to the compositions used in Examples 2 to 18, respectively.
In all the examples, the interlayer insulating film for the redistribution layer had excellent insulating properties, and the semiconductor device operated without any problems.

Claims (29)

 ポリイミド、ポリイミド前駆体、ポリベンゾオキサゾール、及び、ポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体からなる群より選ばれた樹脂であって、水素原子が1価の置換基で置換されていてもよいアルキニル基、及び、重合性基を有する樹脂と、
 重合開始剤と、を含み、
 絶縁膜の形成に用いられる
 樹脂組成物。
a resin selected from the group consisting of polyimide, polyimide precursor, polybenzoxazole, and polybenzoxazole precursor, the resin having an alkynyl group in which a hydrogen atom may be substituted with a monovalent substituent, and a polymerizable group;
a polymerization initiator,
A resin composition used to form an insulating film.
 前記アルキニル基が、内部アルキンから水素原子を1つ除いた基である、請求項1に記載の樹脂組成物。 The resin composition according to claim 1, wherein the alkynyl group is a group in which one hydrogen atom has been removed from an internal alkyne.  前記樹脂が、ポリイミド、及び、ポリベンゾオキサゾールからなる群より選ばれた樹脂である、請求項1又は2に記載の樹脂組成物。 The resin composition according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the resin is selected from the group consisting of polyimide and polybenzoxazole.  前記アルキニル基が、前記樹脂の側鎖又は主鎖末端に存在する、請求項1又は2に記載の樹脂組成物。 The resin composition according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the alkynyl group is present on a side chain or at the end of the main chain of the resin.  前記樹脂が、前記アルキニル基を含む基として、下記式(B-1)で表される基を有する、請求項1又は2に記載の樹脂組成物。
 式(B-1)中、Rは2価の連結基を表し、Zは置換若しくは無置換の炭素数1~30のアルキレン基、又は、ケイ素原子を表し、Zが前記アルキレン基である場合にはnは1であり、且つ、Rは水素原子又は1価の有機基を表し、Zが前記ケイ素原子である場合にはnは3であり、且つ、Rはそれぞれ独立に、1価の有機基を表し、*は他の構造との結合部位を表す。
The resin composition according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the resin has a group represented by the following formula (B-1) as the group containing an alkynyl group:
In formula (B-1), R 1 represents a divalent linking group, Z 1 represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkylene group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms or a silicon atom, when Z 1 is the alkylene group, n is 1, and R 2 represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group, when Z 1 is the silicon atom, n is 3, and each R 2 independently represents a monovalent organic group, and * represents a bonding site to another structure.
 前記樹脂のアルキニル基価が、0.01~1.0mmol/gである、請求項1又は2に記載の樹脂組成物。 The resin composition according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the alkynyl group value of the resin is 0.01 to 1.0 mmol/g.  前記樹脂の重合性基価が0.2~4.0mmol/gである、請求項1又は2に記載の樹脂組成物。 The resin composition according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the polymerizable group value of the resin is 0.2 to 4.0 mmol/g.  前記樹脂組成物を用いて、膜厚10μmの膜状の硬化物を形成した場合、前記硬化物の波長365nmの光の透過率が15%以上である、請求項1又は2に記載の樹脂組成物。 The resin composition according to claim 1 or 2, wherein when the resin composition is used to form a film-like cured product having a film thickness of 10 μm, the cured product has a transmittance of 15% or more for light with a wavelength of 365 nm.  前記樹脂が、下記式(1-1)で表される繰返し単位を含む、請求項1又は2に記載の樹脂組成物。
 式(1-1)中、Xは炭素数4以上の有機基を表し、Yは炭素数4以上の有機基を表し、Rはそれぞれ独立に、下記式(R-1)で表される構造を表し、mは0~4の整数を表し、nは0以上の整数を表し、n+mは1以上の整数である。
 式(R-1)中、Lはa1+1価の連結基を表し、Aは重合性基を表し、a1は1以上の整数を表し、*は式(1-1)中のX又はYとの結合部位を表す。
The resin composition according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the resin contains a repeating unit represented by the following formula (1-1):
In formula (1-1), X1 represents an organic group having 4 or more carbon atoms, Y1 represents an organic group having 4 or more carbon atoms, R1 each independently represents a structure represented by formula (R-1) below, m represents an integer of 0 to 4, n represents an integer of 0 or more, and n+m is an integer of 1 or more.
In formula (R-1), L 1 represents a linking group having a valence of a1+1, A 1 represents a polymerizable group, a1 represents an integer of 1 or more, and * represents a bonding site with X 1 or Y 1 in formula (1-1).
 式(1-1)における式(R-1)におけるAの少なくとも1つが、ビニルフェニル基である、請求項9に記載の樹脂組成物。 The resin composition according to claim 9, wherein at least one of A 1 in formula (R-1) in formula (1-1) is a vinylphenyl group.  式(1-1)におけるX及びYが、それぞれ、下記式(V-1)~式(V-4)のいずれかで表される構造から2以上の水素原子を除いた構造を含む、請求項9に記載の樹脂組成物。
 式(V-2)中、RX1はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基又はハロゲン化アルキル基である。
 式(V-3)中、RX2及びRX3はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又は置換基を表し、RX2とRX3は結合して環構造を形成してもよい。
X 1 and Y 1 in formula (1-1) each include a structure in which two or more hydrogen atoms have been removed from a structure represented by any one of the following formulas (V-1) to (V-4): The resin composition according to claim 9.
In formula (V-2), R 1 and X1 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or a halogenated alkyl group.
In formula (V-3), R 1 X2 and R 1 X3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and R 1 X2 and R 1 X3 may be bonded to form a ring structure.
 前記樹脂のラジカル重合性基価が、0.2~3.0mmol/gである、請求項1又は2に記載の樹脂組成物。 The resin composition according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the radical polymerizable group value of the resin is 0.2 to 3.0 mmol/g.  金属若しくはその塩、又は、金属錯体を含む、請求項1又は2に記載の樹脂組成物。 The resin composition according to claim 1 or 2, which contains a metal or its salt, or a metal complex.  金属錯体を含む、請求項1又は2に記載の樹脂組成物。 The resin composition according to claim 1 or 2, which contains a metal complex.  融点が60℃以下である重合性化合物を更に含む、請求項1又は2に記載の樹脂組成物。 The resin composition according to claim 1 or 2, further comprising a polymerizable compound having a melting point of 60°C or less.  アゾール化合物及びシランカップリング剤を更に含む、請求項1又は2に記載の樹脂組成物。 The resin composition according to claim 1 or 2, further comprising an azole compound and a silane coupling agent.  1気圧における沸点が100~260℃である溶剤を含む、請求項1又は2に記載の樹脂組成物。 The resin composition according to claim 1 or 2, containing a solvent having a boiling point of 100 to 260°C at 1 atmosphere.  前記沸点が100~260℃である溶剤の含有量が、組成物の全質量に対して40質量%以上である、請求項17に記載の樹脂組成物。 The resin composition according to claim 17, wherein the content of the solvent having a boiling point of 100 to 260°C is 40 mass% or more based on the total mass of the composition.  前記沸点が100~260℃である溶剤を2種以上含む、請求項17に記載の樹脂組成物。 The resin composition according to claim 17, comprising two or more solvents having a boiling point of 100 to 260°C.  再配線層用層間絶縁膜の形成に用いられる、請求項1又は2に記載の樹脂組成物。 The resin composition according to claim 1 or 2, which is used to form an interlayer insulating film for a redistribution layer.  請求項1又は2に記載の樹脂組成物を硬化してなる硬化物。 A cured product obtained by curing the resin composition described in claim 1 or 2.  請求項21に記載の硬化物からなる層を2層以上含み、前記硬化物からなる層同士のいずれかの間に金属層を含む積層体。 A laminate comprising two or more layers made of the cured product according to claim 21, and including a metal layer between any of the layers made of the cured product.  請求項1又は2に記載の樹脂組成物を基材上に適用して膜を形成する膜形成工程を含む、硬化物の製造方法。 A method for producing a cured product, comprising a film-forming step of applying the resin composition described in claim 1 or 2 onto a substrate to form a film.  前記膜を選択的に露光する露光工程及び前記膜を現像液を用いて現像してパターンを形成する現像工程を含む、請求項23に記載の硬化物の製造方法。 The method for producing a cured product according to claim 23, comprising an exposure step of selectively exposing the film to light and a development step of developing the film with a developer to form a pattern.  前記膜を50~450℃で加熱する加熱工程を含む、請求項23に記載の硬化物の製造方法。 The method for producing a cured product described in claim 23, which includes a heating step of heating the film at 50 to 450°C.  請求項23に記載の硬化物の製造方法を含む、積層体の製造方法。 A method for producing a laminate, comprising the method for producing a cured product described in claim 23.  請求項23に記載の硬化物の製造方法を含む、半導体デバイスの製造方法。 A method for manufacturing a semiconductor device, comprising the method for manufacturing a cured product according to claim 23.  請求項21に記載の硬化物を含む、半導体デバイス。 A semiconductor device comprising the cured product described in claim 21.  式(1-1)で表される繰返し単位、及び、式(B-1)で表される基を有する、
 樹脂。
 式(1-1)中、Xは炭素数4以上の有機基を表し、Yは炭素数4以上の有機基を表し、Rはそれぞれ独立に、下記式(R-1)で表される構造を表し、mは0~4の整数を表し、nは0以上の整数を表し、n+mは1以上の整数である。
 式(R-1)中、Lはa1+1価の連結基を表し、Aは重合性基を表し、a1は1以上の整数を表し、*は式(1-1)中のX又はYとの結合部位を表す。
 式(B-1)中、Rは2価の連結基を表し、Zは置換若しくは無置換の炭素数1~30のアルキレン基、又は、ケイ素原子を表し、Zが前記アルキレン基である場合にはnは1であり、且つ、Rは水素原子又は1価の有機基を表し、Zが前記ケイ素原子である場合にはnは3であり、且つ、Rはそれぞれ独立に、1価の有機基を表し、*は他の構造との結合部位を表す。
A copolymer having a repeating unit represented by formula (1-1) and a group represented by formula (B-1):
resin.
In formula (1-1), X1 represents an organic group having 4 or more carbon atoms, Y1 represents an organic group having 4 or more carbon atoms, R1 each independently represents a structure represented by formula (R-1) below, m represents an integer of 0 to 4, n represents an integer of 0 or more, and n+m is an integer of 1 or more.
In formula (R-1), L 1 represents a linking group having a valence of a1+1, A 1 represents a polymerizable group, a1 represents an integer of 1 or more, and * represents a bonding site with X 1 or Y 1 in formula (1-1).
In formula (B-1), R 1 represents a divalent linking group, Z 1 represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkylene group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms or a silicon atom, when Z 1 is the alkylene group, n is 1, and R 2 represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group, when Z 1 is the silicon atom, n is 3, and each R 2 independently represents a monovalent organic group, and * represents a bonding site to another structure.
PCT/JP2025/012026 2024-03-29 2025-03-26 Resin composition, cured product, laminate, production method for cured product, production method for laminate, production method for semiconductor device, semiconductor device, and resin Pending WO2025205940A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2024-055875 2024-03-29
JP2024055875 2024-03-29

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2025205940A1 true WO2025205940A1 (en) 2025-10-02

Family

ID=97217024

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2025/012026 Pending WO2025205940A1 (en) 2024-03-29 2025-03-26 Resin composition, cured product, laminate, production method for cured product, production method for laminate, production method for semiconductor device, semiconductor device, and resin

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2025205940A1 (en)

Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2005116770A1 (en) * 2004-05-31 2005-12-08 Toyo Boseki Kabushiki Kaisha Photosensitive polyimide precursor composition
WO2018123836A1 (en) * 2016-12-28 2018-07-05 富士フイルム株式会社 Photosensitive resin composition, cured film, laminate, method for producing cured film, method for producing laminate, and semiconductor device

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2005116770A1 (en) * 2004-05-31 2005-12-08 Toyo Boseki Kabushiki Kaisha Photosensitive polyimide precursor composition
WO2018123836A1 (en) * 2016-12-28 2018-07-05 富士フイルム株式会社 Photosensitive resin composition, cured film, laminate, method for producing cured film, method for producing laminate, and semiconductor device

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2023190064A1 (en) Resin composition, cured product, laminate, method for producing cured product, method for producing laminate, method for producing semiconductor device, and semiconductor device
WO2025070612A1 (en) Photosensitive resin composition, cured product, multilayer body, method for producing cured product, method for producing multilayer body, method for producing semiconductor device, semiconductor device, polyimide, method for producing polyimide, and compound
WO2024063025A1 (en) Resin composition, cured product, laminate, method for producing cured product, method for producing laminate, method for producing semiconductor device, and semiconductor device
WO2025205940A1 (en) Resin composition, cured product, laminate, production method for cured product, production method for laminate, production method for semiconductor device, semiconductor device, and resin
WO2025205941A1 (en) Resin composition, cured product, laminate, production method for cured product, production method for laminate, production method for semiconductor device, semiconductor device, and resin
WO2025057906A1 (en) Resin composition, cured product, laminate, method for producing cured product, method for producing laminate, method for producing semiconductor device, semiconductor device, and compound
WO2025057903A1 (en) Resin composition, cured product, laminate, method for producing cured product, method for producing laminate, method for producing semiconductor device, semiconductor device, and compound
WO2025164673A1 (en) Resin composition, cured product, laminate, method for producing cured product, method for producing laminate, method for producing semiconductor device, and semiconductor device
WO2025057914A1 (en) Resin composition, cured object, laminate, method for producing cured object, method for producing laminate, method for producing semiconductor device, semiconductor device, and compound
WO2025126934A1 (en) Photosensitive resin composition, cured product, laminate, method for producing cured product, method for producing laminate, method for producing semiconductor device, semiconductor device, and resin
WO2024262604A1 (en) Resin composition, cured product, laminated body, method for producing cured product, method for producing laminated body, method for producing semiconductor device, and semiconductor device
WO2025023280A1 (en) Resin composition, cured product, laminate, method for producing cured product, method for producing laminate, method for producing semiconductor device, and semiconductor device
WO2025178105A1 (en) Resin composition, cured product, laminate, method for producing cured product, method for producing laminate, method for producing semiconductor device, and semiconductor device
WO2025070586A1 (en) Photosensitive resin composition, cured product, laminate, method for producing cured product, method for producing laminate, method for producing semiconductor device, semiconductor device, resin, method for producing resin, and carboxylic acid dianhydride
WO2025041754A1 (en) Resin composition, cured product, laminate, method for producing cured product, method for producing laminate, method for producing semiconductor device, and semiconductor device
WO2025126958A1 (en) Resin composition, cured product, laminate, method for producing cured product, method for producing laminate, method for producing semiconductor device, semiconductor device, and resin
WO2025205548A1 (en) Resin composition, cured product, laminate, method for producing cured product, method for producing laminate, method for producing semiconductor device, and semiconductor device
WO2025178106A1 (en) Resin composition, cured product, laminate, method for producing cured product, method for producing laminate, method for producing semiconductor device, and semiconductor device
WO2024262603A1 (en) Resin composition, cured product, laminate, method for producing cured product, method for producing laminate, method for producing semiconductor device, semiconductor device, and resin
WO2025070600A1 (en) Resin composition, cured product, laminate, method for producing cured product, method for producing laminate, method for producing semiconductor device, and semiconductor device
WO2025170014A1 (en) Resin composition, cured product, laminate, method for producing cured product, method for producing laminate, method for producing semiconductor device, and semiconductor device
JP2025150683A (en) Cured product, laminate, and semiconductor device
WO2025205581A1 (en) Resin composition, cured product, laminate, method for producing cured product, method for producing laminate, method for producing semiconductor device, and semiconductor device
WO2025028429A1 (en) Resin composition, cured product, laminate, method for producing cured product, method for producing laminate, method for producing semiconductor device, and semiconductor device
WO2025070592A1 (en) Photosensitive resin composition, cured product, layered product, method for producing cured product, method for producing layered product, method for producing semiconductor device, semiconductor device, and resin

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 25779102

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1